Installation &
Maintenance
Manual
I&M
?
Release 4.5
Revision 1.5
July, 2003

I&M
?

CHAPTER 1
Introduction

I&M
?

I&M
?

Introduction
1

Section

1
1 - Introduction
You should read this document before installing, reinstalling or making changes to the system. You
should become familiar with the Perfect Voice Office Pro features, the system set up and
configuration.
Overview
Perfect Voice Office Pro is a full-featured voice and call processing software product designed to
meet corporate needs with seamless telephone integration and LAN connectivity on a 32-bit
platform.
Every business, regardless of size, needs to communicate information quickly and efficiently to
compete in today's business environment. With Perfect Voice Office Pro, an organization can truly
streamline its inter-office communication by providing superior applications that give the flexibility
to excel in today's competitive climate.
The Perfect Voice Office Pro system uses software, a personal computer and speech processing
boards to automatically process telephone calls. Perfect Voice Office Pro answers telephone calls,
manages spoken messages, notifies Users of messages, transfers calls, and makes calls to deliver or
retrieve information.
The automated attendant feature in Perfect Voice Office Pro may also provide access to company
directories, automatic transfer of callers using rotary phones to a receptionist, after-hours answering
and holiday greetings. The attendant can screen callers for the User, provide music or product
messages while a caller is on hold in queue, and redirect a call either before it is transferred to an
extension or if the extension is busy or not answered.
Perfect Voice Office Pro can eliminate telephone tag, inaccurate messages, and lost messages. Voice
messaging allows a mailbox owner to receive, send, delete, skip, redirect, review, and update
messages. Users may pause, fast-forward, and rewind messages during playback; send copies of
messages to other Users; and confirm message reception.
Perfect Voice Office Pro is a menu-driven system with voice prompts. Through the use of voice
prompts, Perfect Voice Office Pro conveys available options. Users may interrupt the prompts by
I&M
pressing the telephone keypad button for an option before the voice prompt is finished.
The Perfect Voice Office Pro's sophisticated multilingual feature makes it the perfect product for
today's global economy. Business has no borders or official language. Perfect Voice Office Pro may
?
be set up to communicate in up to nine simultaneous languages, providing companies the corporate
services traditionally found in only large corporations.

Voice Messaging
Users may leave, retrieve, save, delete, and forward messages, change personal greetings, and record
new greetings from any touch tone telephone 24 hours a day. Perfect Voice Office Pro provides
added security with complete password protection to access an individual's mailbox.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

2
Introduction
Automated Attendant
The Automated Attendant increases call processing capabilities within a company. Perfect Voice
Office Pro answers incoming calls and transfers them to the appropriate extensions. It performs
promptly, courteously, and professionally 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. Valuable customers
won't have to spend time waiting to be transferred but a live operator is always available for those
who may need special assistance. For sales, order desk, accounts payable, shipping, and many other
departments, the Automated Attendant significantly accelerates caller connection. It can be used full
time or only as required, such as during peak calling periods, overflow situations, after hours, lunch
breaks, holidays, etc. Callers who don't know their party's extension number may access directory
assistance. The attendant can screen callers for the user, provide music or product messages while
the caller is on hold, and redirect a call either before it is transferred to an extension or if the
extension is busy or not answered. Perfect Voice Office Pro can connect callers to users who are
offsite by giving callers direct access to the user's cellular, home telephone, or branch office. It gives
callers single digit access to departments or individuals and direct access into a full-featured
audiotext menu. It can answer in multiple languages, and continue in the caller's language if the call
is transferred to a mailbox.

The Automated Attendant maximizes telephone line efficiency and is far more economical than
direct-inward-dialing services. It improves customer service and employee satisfaction by enabling
callers to get directly to the person with whom they wish to speak.

Voice Menus
Perfect Voice Office Pro voice menus are used to design full-featured custom designed call routing
applications. Global PIN numbers may be used to identify particular callers throughout the system
for routing purposes. Through the use of voice menu audiotext "trees", messages can be pre-
recorded to provide important information. Callers may then leave responses using the Perfect Voice
Office Pro IVR functions. Voice menus ensure that callers get the information they need, at anytime,
without any assistance. The information is available to them 24 hours a day 7 days a week.
Voice menus may be used to create industry-specific solutions such as banking applications,
education, insurance, and hospitality.

I&M
Perfect Voice Office Pro Gives You the Power To:
Depending on how Perfect Voice Office Pro and users are configured, below are some of the
powerful features of the system.
?
System Administrators
Perform administrative functions utilizing the user-friendly Windows interface or the
telephone keypad
Set up multi-tenanting for multiple company, or department applications. This includes
independent greetings, holidays, languages, business hours, operators, etc.
Assign single digit caller options and day / night operators.
Custom-program call routing applications with full-featured audiotext.
Create global schedules that may be applied to voice menus, e-mail, call routing tables, or
PIN routing tables.
Customize mailbox templates for users
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Introduction
3

Assign a personalized operator for each mailbox.
Create customized Classes of Service for mailboxes
Get online help, administration, diagnostics, and reporting.
Users
Record up to 99 personalized greetings to answer incoming calls.
Record personal greetings in more than one language.
Record telephone conversations.
Create up to 99 individual distribution lists per user.
Control message play back with pause, rewind, fast forward, & skip messages functions.
Mark messages as urgent or certified for return receipt verification.
Block calls to user's extension.
Screen calls to user's extension.
Announce calls to user's extension before the caller is transferred.
Login or out of the system. "Logged in" status allows transfers. Logged out status does not
ring the extension and plays the "Gone Home" greeting.
Turn time and date stamp of messages on or off.
Have flexible internal or external message notification.
Have Unified Messaging via E-Mail.
Send text messages to other network users.
Callers
Use directory assistance to search by user's name.
Review and/or re-record messages before sending.
Mark messages as urgent before sending.
Page a user through the telephone system intercom.
Announce calls through the telephone system intercom.
I&M
?
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

4
Introduction

. . . . This page intentionally left blank . . . . .
I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

CHAPTER 2

Installation

I&M
?

I&M
?

I&M
?

Installation
1

Section

1
1 - Installation Checklist

Complete Pre-Installation Worksheets

· Transfer Parameters

· Message Light Parameters
· Intercom Paging Parameters
· Inband Signaling Parameters (if used)
· User Directory
· Business Hours
· Company Greetings Scripts
· Mailbox Class of Service
See Installation, pages 5-11

Unpack and Inspect the System
See Installation, page 12

Placement of the System
See Installation, page 12

Assemble & Set Up the System
· Test the AC Outlet
· Install UPS
I&M
· Install Sentinel Key
· Connect Telephone Lines
?
· Enter Dealer and Site Information
· Log on/off Perfect Voice Office Pro
· Change the passwords
· Set up Network
See Installation, pages 13-38

Verify Integration Parameters
See Installation, page 39-77

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

2

Installation

Configure the Database
At a minimum, the following must be completed. For more detailed information and
setting up specific features, refer to the Database Configuration section.
· Company Configuration
· Set up Class of Service(s)
· Create User Mailboxes

See Database Configuration

Program the Telephone System
See Installation, page 78

Install the Desktop Interface
See Installation, page 81

Testing
See Installation, page 86

Perform Training
· System Administrator
· End User
· Console Operator

See Installation, page 87
I&M

Perform Final Cutover
?
See Installation, page 88
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
3

Section

2
2 - Before You Begin
Manage the Customer's Expectations
The management of the customer's expectations begins with the salesperson's first contact with the
customer and continues through the entire installation and acceptance process. The best tools for managing
the customers' expectations are product knowledge and communication with the customer. A pre-
installation meeting with the customer that includes a detailed discussion of how the system will be
configured should be held to help effect a smooth transition.
Although the customer may be intimately familiar with the communications problems at his site, he may
not know much about how Perfect Voice Office Pro can solve those problems. Armed with a thorough
understanding of Perfect Voice Office Pro's capabilities and the customer's problems, the installer is the
one in a position to engineer the best possible telecommunications solution. If the installer allows the
customer to engineer the solution, it may result in a partial solution and possibly a solution that cannot be
supported.
Use All Available Expertise
If a customer brings up issues that are beyond the scope of your immediate expertise, confirm your
speculations about a solution before making a commitment. Refer to other expertise within your company,
your Regional Sales Manager or Teleco Technical Support for answers to any questions you may have
about the product.
If you are not directly responsible for the telephone system to which the Perfect Voice Office Pro will be
interfacing, try to coordinate directly with the interconnect in charge. The installation of Perfect Voice
Office Pro requires a great deal of coordination between the programming of the telephone system and the
configuration of Perfect Voice Office Pro. The interconnect in charge should have access to the telephone
system manufacturer's technical support resources. No matter who is responsible for the telephone system
programming, make certain the customer's telephone system can be configured properly to match the
features desired by the customer on the Perfect Voice Office Pro. Even the most basic features of any
voice processing system depend on the ability of the telephone system to be configured appropriately.
Get All the Parties Involved
I&M
Although the person who makes the decision to implement Perfect Voice Office Pro into his operation may
take it seriously, the individual responsible for actually implementing the solution may not. This individual
?
may work as an employee or may work as a contractor. It is important for everyone to recognize the
significance of the changes to their organization as a result of the efforts of all parties.
For many sites, especially those sites that have never had voice processing before, Perfect Voice Office Pro
will change the way their business works, often in more ways than expected. A similar situation is evident
when a business purchases a computer system to do their accounting, replacing adding machines and hand-
written ledgers with spreadsheet software. Although many of the old problems will, by definition,
disappear, new problems may arise, especially if the technology is not handled properly or taken seriously.
Much of the success of any installation rests on the training and understanding of the key people in the
organization.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

4

Installation

Verify the Capabilities of the Customer's Telephone System
Even though the Perfect Voice Office Pro system has been shipped configured for the telephone system
identified on the sales order, the telephone system must be configured for proper interfacing with the
Perfect Voice Office Pro. For example, if the telephone system is to be programmed to forward busy calls,
some features of Perfect Voice Office Pro cannot be used such as Call Screening. Make sure your
customer's telephone system can be configured properly to match the features desired by the customer.
Installer Requirements
The installer plays a key role in the successful installation of the voice processing hardware and software.
In addition to performing the actual work of installing the product, the installer acts as a liaison between
the customer, telecommunications companies, and Teleco Technical Support. An installer is required to
have skills and experience in at least the basics of telephony and computer technology, including the
following:
Perfect Voice Office Pro Technical training certification.
Training and experience in at least the general concepts of telecommunications.
Expertise on the customer's telephone system or ready access to such expertise, including
telephone system documentation.
The ability to properly use analog telephone line monitoring equipment (see required equipment
below) and generate test calls to the system.
The ability to properly configure, install and remove circuit boards in a personal computer.
The ability to identify the basic components of a personal computer system, including the
motherboard, audioboard, video controller, etc.
A basic understanding of how to identify or specify a file in a Windows file system, specifically an
understanding of the meaning of a drive, directory, filename and extension.
Required Equipment
The installer must be equipped with the following tools to competently install Perfect Voice Office Pro:
Analog telephone line monitoring device (butt set with digit grabber is preferred)
Analog telephone line splitter
Industry standard single line 2500 set (or butt set)
Basic tools (screwdriver, pliers, cutters, etc.)
I&M
Spare cables (modem, AC power, line cords, etc.)
Punch-down tool
?
Cable toner and amplifier
Formatted floppy disks
Equipment For Remote Access
Much of the ongoing maintenance and changes to the system can be performed remotely. Using industry-
standard remote communications software, a technician may make changes to the system without being on
site. To perform these tasks remotely, the installer needs the following equipment:
A personal computer with a minimum of Windows 3.X and PC Anywhere 2.X and supporting a
serial port or internal modem. NOTE: Windows 95 and PC Anywhere 32 are strongly
recommended.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
5

A modem capable of communicating at a speed of at least 14400 baud. The remote
communications software supplied with the Perfect Voice Office Pro supports modems capable of
transmission rates between 14400 and 33600 baud.
A modem is provided with all systems and sites without modem access are subject to denial of support
services from Teleco Technical Support.
I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

6

Installation

Section

3

3 - Getting Started
Before you assemble the Perfect Voice Office Pro system, you should fill out the pre-installation
worksheets below, verify that you received the necessary materials, and prepare the site.
Complete the Pre-Installation Worksheets
Before beginning the installation of Perfect Voice Office Pro, insure that the pre-installation
worksheets provided on the next few pages are completed. These worksheets help to verify telephone
system parameters, prepare the User Directory, identify company business hours, write scripts for the
company greetings, and specify the features for most Users.

Transfer Parameters Worksheet

Default
Enter
Parameter
Description
Value
Value
162-Default Rings
3
Number of rings before system returns a no answer.

163-Blind Transfer
&,
Sequence to place caller on Hold and perform a blind transfer - This
Protocol
parameter instructs Perfect Voice Office Pro on the sequence it should

follow to place a caller on hold before attempting a transfer to the
operator.
The following Special Characters may be used (& - Flash Hook and, -
Pause).
164-Supervised
&,
Sequence to place caller on Hold and perform a supervised transfer -
Transfer Protocol
This parameter instructs Perfect Voice Office Pro on the sequence it

should follow to place a caller on hold before attempting a transfer.
The following Special Characters may be used (& - Flash Hook and , -
Pause)
165-No Answer
&,
Sequence to return to caller in the event of a no answer.
Release

I&M
166-Busy Release
&,
Sequence to get caller back in the event of a busy - This parameter
instructs Perfect Voice Office Pro on the sequence it should follow to

get a caller back when it encounters a no-answer condition.
?
The following Special Characters may be used (& - Flash Hook and , -
Pause).
167-Transfer
<blank> Sequence to connect a call If your telephone system requires a connect
Connect Protocol
code (a code that must be dialed when connecting a transferred call),

here is where you would define it.
The following Special Characters may be used (& - Flash Hook and , -
Pause).
168-Handsfree
<blank> Sequence to connect a call - If your telephone system requires a connect
Announce Protocol
code (a code that must be dialed when connecting a transferred call),

here is where you would define it.
The following Special Characters may be used (& - Flash Hook and , -
Pause).
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
7

Message Light Parameters Worksheet

Default
Enter
Parameter
Description
Value
Value
350-Message Light
Toshiba
This is the dialing string to activate the message-waiting lamp. Place
ON Code
#63E
an E where the Extension number would be in the string.
354-Message Light
Toshiba
This is the dialing string to deactivate the message lamp. Place an E
OFF Code
#64E
where the Extension number would be in the string.

Auto Attendant Parameters Worksheet

Default
Enter
Parameter
Description
Value
Value
146-Administrator
9999
This is the password to access the system administrator level.
Password

147-Installer
12345
This is the password to access the Installer level. It allows access to
Password
the System Parameters screens.

156-Paging Access
<blank>
This is the sequence to place a caller on hold, and access the intercom
Code
paging system, if applicable.
157-Paging Release
<blank>
This is the sequence to get the caller back after performing intercom
Code
paging, if applicable.
158-Paging Delay
<blank>
This is the time the system waits after paging before the call is
transferred.

Voice Mail Parameters Worksheet

Default
Enter
Parameter
Description
Value
Value
160-Minimum
4
Identifies the minimum message length for messages, in seconds.
Message Length
I&M

?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

8

Installation

Inband Parameters Worksheet

Default
Enter
Parameter
Description
Value
Value
182-Inband
0 Tells
Perfect Voice Office Pro that the system being integrated uses
Signaling
inband signaling. 1=Yes, 0 = No.
183-Inband Delay
1
The time that Perfect Voice Office Pro waits to hear incoming inband
signals. If no signals are heard in this time, Perfect Voice Office Pro
forwards to the Main Greeting. Value is specified in seconds
184-Inband Login
0
When the user accesses their mailbox, a password is required to access
Password
messages and features. This parameter activates the password
protection.
0 = Ask for Password, 1 = Don't Ask.
NOTE: This parameter is also used for SMDI.
185-Inband Login
0
The code sent by the telephone system to automatically Login to a
Code
mailbox to access messages and features. This is also known as "Auto
Station Login.
186-Inband Internal
<blank> The inband signal sent by the telephone system to indicate a no-answer
No Answer
condition on an internal call. This code tells Perfect Voice Office Pro
to send the caller to the Mailbox Greeting.
187-Inband
<blank> The inband signal sent by the telephone system to indicate a no-answer
External No Answer
condition on an external call. This code tells Perfect Voice Office Pro
to send the caller to the Mailbox Greeting.
188-Inband Internal
<blank> The inband signal sent by the telephone system to indicate a busy
Busy
condition on an internal call. This code tells Perfect Voice Office Pro
to send the caller to the Mailbox Greeting.
189-Inband
<blank> The inband signal sent by the telephone system to indicate a busy
External Busy
condition on an external call. This code tells Perfect Voice Office Pro
to send the caller to the Mailbox Greeting.
190-Inband Outside
<blank> Identifies What C.O. line that an inbound call has come in on. This
C.O. Call
code is only used for telephone systems that have C.O. line
identification.
191-Inband Invalid
<blank> The code that forces Perfect Voice Office Pro to go on hook. If your
Code 1
telephone system sends `garbage' codes to Perfect Voice Office Pro to
check line status, you may enter these codes here to indicate a hang-up
condition.
I&M
192-Inband Invalid
<blank> The code that forces Perfect Voice Office Pro to go on hook. If your
Code 2
telephone system sends `garbage' codes to Perfect Voice Office Pro to
check line status, you may enter these codes here to indicate a hang-up
condition.
?
195-Inband
10
Identifies the maximum number of digits that the telephone system
Maximum Digits
sends.
196-Number of
2
The number of digits sent to identify the incoming C.O. line.
Digits in C.O. String
197-Caller ID
10
The number of digits sent in Caller ID for inband calling.
Length

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
9

User Directory Worksheet

Mailbox
Class of
Ext.
Last Name
First Name
Department
Number
Service

I&M

?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

10
Installation

Business Hours Worksheet
I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
11

Company Greetings Script

Description Prompt
Written script (Be sure to get all scripts approved before recording)
#
Morning Greeting

(Plays from
midnight to noon)
Afternoon

Greeting (Plays
from noon to six (6)
PM)
Evening Greeting

(Plays from six (6)
PM to midnight)
Closed Greeting

(Plays whenever
the Business hours
indicate that the
business is closed)
I&M

?

N O T E
If the company is only open until 5:00 PM, the Closed Greeting begins to play at
5:00 PM. The Evening Greeting is never played.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

12
Installation

Mailbox Class of Service Worksheet

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
13

Unpack and Inspect the System
Before unpacking, make certain that none of the shipping containers were damaged during shipment.
Do not open any damaged shipping containers. Contact your shipping agent for appropriate claims.
With Perfect Voice Office Pro, you should receive the following.

Materials Checklist:
Main system unit (PC) with Perfect Voice Office Pro software already installed
Keyboard
Perfect Voice Office Pro CD (pre-loaded)
Rhetorex or Intel audioboard(s) installed in the main system (quantity based on order)
Installation & Maintenance Manual on electronic media
Quick Reference Cards
User Guides
Hardware key (required for operation of system)
Windows NT/2000 Package (pre-loaded)
AC power cable for main system unit

Placement of Perfect Voice Office Pro
The Perfect Voice Office Pro system requires a stable horizontal surface, like any other computer system.
A sturdy table is ideal. Do not "temporarily" place the system somewhere it should not be. For example,
Perfect Voice Office Pro should never be placed on top of an air conditioning unit, filing cabinet, or
cardboard box.
I&M
As with any electronic equipment, the system's environment should be near room temperature, with no
strong fluctuations in temperature or humidity and well ventilated. Dust can also be a problem, especially
?
on sites where there is construction activity in the same area. If this is the case, remove Perfect Voice
Office Pro and clean the area before reinstalling.
Radio frequency interference (RFI) is rarely a problem, but has been known to damage electronic
equipment. Be sure the system is not placed near any strong sources of RFI, especially power transformers
or radio transmitting equipment.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

14
Installation

Section

4

4 - Assembling and Setting Up the
System
Checklist:
Test the AC Outlet
Install the Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS)
Install the Sentinel Key
Connect the Telephone Lines
Set up the Network

Test the AC Outlet

N O T E
Before installing and powering telecom equipment, make certain that the outlet
being used for installation is wired correctly and provides acceptable voltage and
resistance readings. Failure to complete this step can cause system damage, poor
protection or degraded system performance. Tests should only be performed by a
qualified technician using a digital multimeter.

The Outlet Configuration
There are three slots in a standard 120VAC outlet:
Hot: The hot conductor delivers energy to the load (telephone system) through the smaller vertical
slot (See below). It connects to a fuse or breaker at the service panel.
I&M
Neutral: The neutral conductor is grounded and completes the circuit from the load (telecom system)
to the service panel. It is typically referred to as the system ground and is the longer vertical slot.
Ground: The ground conductor is the hole below the two vertical slots (hot and neutral) and provides
?
a path for fault current between the load (telecom system) and earth. It is also known as the equipment
ground.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
15

Is the Outlet Acceptable?
The following steps aid the technician in determining the AC outlet's acceptability. This test does not
determine the quality or condition of the power at the outlet relative to transient noise, sags, surges,
etc.

WARNING: Do not take these readings during lightning or thunderstorm activity.

1. Measure the AC voltage between the Hot and Neutral using the AC voltage scale. This
reading should be approximately 115VAC + 10VAC.
2. Measure the AC voltage between the Hot and the Ground using the AC voltage scale. This
reading should be approximately 115VAC + 10VAC. The readings in step 1 and step 2 should
be very close to the same.
3. Measure the AC voltage between the Neutral and the Ground using the AC voltage scale.
This reading should be less than 2VAC.
4. Measure the resistance between the Neutral and the Ground using the resistance scale. A
reading of 0.5 OHM or less is recommended.

N O T E
If the readings are acceptable as outlined in steps 1-4 above, the telecom system and
the Total Protection can be installed. If these readings are not acceptable, a qualified
electrician should be contacted to correct the condition. Again, failure to follow
these steps may result in system damage, poor protection or degraded system
performance.
Install the Un-interruptable Power Supply
The use of an un-interruptable power source (UPS) is strongly recommended. It significantly increases
the life expectancy of electronic equipment. The UPS should be supplied by a properly grounded,
isolated circuit.
Be sure that no other equipment is using the same circuit, especially vending machines, microwave
ovens, laser printers, fax machines, copiers, or other devices that can cause or generate excessive
current. This applies even if an UPS will be used. An exception applies to the telephone system. If
I&M
possible, make sure the telephone system uses the same properly grounded, isolated power circuit.

?
N O T E
Refer to your UPS manual for more information on UPS use and setup.

Install the Sentinel Key
The sentinel serves as a copy-protection device. This sentinel key MUST be connected to the LPT1
parallel port on your PC at all times to avoid software failure. Be sure the parallel port is properly
installed and configured as LPT1

IMPORTANT: Make sure all connections are secured before you turn on the power.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

16
Installation

WARNING:
Teleco strongly recommends against the connection of a printer to the sentinel, because the amount of
information sent through the sentinel to the printer could cause the sentinel to burn out. All
warranties are voided if a sentinel burns out as a result of the dealer or client connecting a
printer to the sentinel. If the sentinel burns out for this reason, the dealer or client must
purchase a new sentinel to operate the system.

Connect Telephone Lines
The voice board has two RJ-14 jacks. Each carries two telephone lines. The left-most connector
on the first board (Address 300H) is for channels 1 and 2; the connector on the right is for
channels 3 and 4. Channels 1 and 3 are the inside pair of wires and channels 2 and 4 are the
outside pair.

Labels on the CPU identify the following connections:

Device Connection
Point(s)
3-conductor AC power cable
corresponding connection on the back of the
system at the power supply

surge-protected AC power source (UPS
recommended)
male 15-pin male display monitor
female 15-pin video controller card
cable
(card may also have female 25-pin connector)
3-conductor display monitor power
surge-protected AC power source or directly
cable
off back of system power supply
Keyboard cable
round connector at the back of the system off
(if applicable)
the motherboard

Voice Board Connections
I&M
Complete telephone system connections by plugging the line cords into their corresponding RJ-14
jacks on the Rhetorex or Intel voice board. The jacks are arranged in sequence with lowest port
(channel) number starting at the top.
?

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
17

Section

5

5 - Enter Dealer and Site Information
You should enter the dealer and site information using the System Configuration Utility.

To access the System Configuration Utility:
· Select Start, Programs, Perfect Voice Office Pro, then PVO Configuration Wizard.
· Click Run Configuration.
· This screen appears. You may modify sections individually by highlighting the section on the
left side of the screen and clicking Modify, or click the Wizard button to edit every section.

To edit an

individual option,

select it on the left

side of the screen.

The current

settings appear on

the right side of the

screen. To edit,

click the Modify
button.

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

18
Installation

Enter the Dealer Information
The Dealer Information screen displays the current Dealer Information, including Dealer Name,
Contact Name, and the Dealer's Telephone Number. To edit this information, click Modify, enter the
desired values, then click OK.

· Dealer Name: Enter the name of the dealer that installed the Voice Mail System.
· Contact Name: Enter the specific person at the Dealer that end users should call for support.
· Phone: Enter the telephone number that end users should call when they have questions.
I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
19

Enter the Site Information
The Site Information screen displays the current Site Information, including modem number, fax
number, and e-mail address. To edit this information, click Modify, enter the desired values, then click
OK.

Name: Enter the Company Name where the Voice Mail system is being installed.
Remote Maintenance Number: Enter the telephone number of the modem that is installed in
the PC. This can be a direct line or an extension.
Fax Number: Enter the Fax Number of the site.
E-Mail: Enter the e-mail address of the site.
I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

20
Installation

Section

6

6 - Logging on/Off the System
When you first begin the Perfect Voice Office Pro system, you will not have access to any of Perfect
Voice Office Pro's other screens. To access these other screens, you must log on to the system with
either the System Administrator or Installer password. To make any modifications to the Perfect
Voice Office Pro system, you must log on with one of these passwords.
To Log on to Perfect Voice Office Pro:
From the Main Menu, Select "File", select "Log on". (You may also press the F11 key.)
Password Screen
Enter your password.

Below are the default passwords for the System Administrator and Installer level.

Default Password
Typically Accessed By...
Access Examples

9999 System
Administrator
· allows routine maintenance

I&M
· does not allow access to parameter section
· hides all passwords in each mailbox
?

12345 Installer
· allows access to every area of the Perfect
Voice Office Pro system for modifications
and testing

The password may be a maximum of 15 digits. For security, as your password is entered, asterisks (*)
are shown in place of each digit entered to prevent others from seeing the password.

NOTE: If the passwords do not work, contact Teleco Technical Support.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
21

Logging off of Perfect Voice Office Pro
When you log off of the Perfect Voice Office Pro system, the first level of security is restored. This
ensures that no unauthorized changes can be made to the system.
From the Main Menu, Select "File", select "Log off" (You may also press the F12 key)

N O T E
Once the Installer has configured the system, the Installer must change the Installer
password and log off the system so that no one can access the Parameters section. If
you wish to log on to the system again, use the System Administrator's password.

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

22
Installation

Section

7

7 - Changing System Passwords
The Installer should change the System Administrator and Installer passwords.
To change the passwords:
From the Main Menu, Select "File", select "Log on" (You may also press the F11 key)
Enter the Installer's password.
From the Main Menu, click on the Parameters button.
Select the "Auto-Attendant" tab.
Change the Administrator
and Installer passwords.
I&M

Parameter 146 is the System Administrator password and Parameter 147 is the Installer password.
?
Choose the appropriate parameter (#146 and/or #147) and enter the desired password.
NOTE:
The password must be numeric characters only. It cannot contain alpha characters.
Click on "Save", then "Exit".
Test to see that the new password (s) works. Log off and then log on again with the new
password.

N O T E
The Installer and System Administrator passwords must be different. If both levels
have the same password, the Perfect Voice Office Pro system defaults to the System
Administrator level. This means that the Installer will not be able to access the
system parameters.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
23

Section

8

8 - Startup Options
Following is a list of Perfect Voice Office Pro startup options. IMPORTANT: The desired option
must be added to the program line in three places: the Desktop, Startup group, and Program group.
Startup option

dk

Teleco/Toshiba SMDI supports Caller ID

 smdi
Centrex no Caller ID

mci

NEC SMDI supports Caller ID

ns
Northstar with Intel supports Caller ID

sx
Mitel no Caller ID

s1
Northern Telecom SL1 2116 set emulation no Caller ID

nonet
Disable
networking

fax
Enable fax-on-demand and fax mail

To add an argument to the program line:
1. Right-click
the
Perfect Voice Office Pro icon on the Desktop, in the Startup group, and the
Program group*
2. Select
Properties
3. Select
the
Shortcut tab
4. At the end of the Target field information, type a space then the option. Below is an example of
thefax argument.
I&M
?

*To access the Startup group and Programs group, right-click the Start button. Select Open. From the
"Start Menu", double-click Programs. Double-click Startup and right-click the Perfect Voice Office
Pro icon. Repeat steps 2-4 above. Double-click Programs and right-click the Perfect Voice Office
Pro icon. Repeat steps 2-4.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

24
Installation

Section

9
9 - Dialstring Codes
The telephone keypad values for the special characters utilized by the telephone system and the Perfect
Voice Office Pro system are as follows:

Name
Character
Telephone
Code

Flash Hook

&

*1

Pause

,

*2

Extension

E

*3

Sender's Extension

S

*4

C.O.

C

*5

Mailbox

M

*6
Code
for
Inband $ *7

Underscore

_

*8

Blank

-

*9
Pound
# *0

Star

*

**
I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
25

Section

10

10 - Setting up the Network
N O T E
To properly set up the network for Perfect Voice Office Pro, you need the assistance
of the site's Network Administrator. Ensure that the Network Administrator or IS
Consultant is available BEFORE setting up the network and before calling Technical
Support.

Also ensure that you have the Windows NT/2000 CD and the complete set of Perfect
Voice Office Pro installation software.

If you are unfamiliar with networks or network terminology, review "What is a Network" below
before proceeding. Acronyms and Definitions of network terms are included in the Appendix. If you
are familiar with networks, skip to the next page.

What is a Network?
A network is an interconnection of computers and other devices for the purpose of sharing files, data,
programs, and other resources (such as printers). There are many variations of networks. The two
main types are peer-to-peer and client/server. These are described below:

Peer-to-Peer
A peer to peer network is a group of workstations that share data and resources, and have a common
purpose.

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

26
Installation

Client/Server
A client/server set up involves one computer (the server) containing the resources, and one or more
workstations (also referred to as clients) accessing the server (sending requests) to receive data. The
Perfect Voice Office Pro system and the Desktop Interface is a client/server relationship, where the
Voice Mail is the server and the Desktop Interface is the client. Perfect Voice Office Pro and the
Desktop Interface may also operate as peer-to-peer network.

RPC
RPC (Remote Procedure Call) is a protocol that one program can use to request a service from a program
located in another computer in a network without having to understand network details.

When program statements that use RPC are compiled into an executable program, a stub (small program
routine that substitutes for a longer program) is included in the compiled code that acts as the representative
of the remote procedure code. When the program is run and the procedure call is issued, the stub receives
the request and forwards it to a client runtime program in the local computer. The client runtime program
has the knowledge of how to address the remote computer and server application and sends the message
across the network that requests the remote procedure. Similarly, the server includes a runtime program and
stub that interface with the remote procedure itself. Results are returned the same way.

DCOM
DCOM (Distributed Component Object Model) is a set of Microsoft concepts and program interfaces in
which client program objects can request services from server program objects on other computers in a
network. DCOM is based on the Component Object Model (COM), which provides a set of interfaces
allowing clients and servers to communicate within the same computer. DCOM is Microsoft's approach to a
network-wide environment for program and data objects.

I&M

?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
27

Data Access
The Desktop Interface uses the RPC (Remote Procedure Call) access method with DCOM (Distributed
Component Object Model). When the client sends a request to the database on the voice mail server, the
request passes through the DCOM object to the proxy/stub on the client PC (see figure below). This utility,
in turn, contacts the proxy/stub on the server and sends the request. On the server, the request is passed
through the DCOM server to the database; the result is returned using the same method.

The DCOM Object on the client is responsible for passing data to and from the proxy/stub DLLs on both
the client and the server. These proxy/stub DLLs on both the client and server are responsible for
communication between the client and the server (through TCP/IP). The DCOM server runs functions and
methods from the database, and then receives the result and passes it to the client.

CODEBASE Engine
Common Database
Message
Exchange
CODEBASE Engine
Local (Personal) Database
(TCP/IP
(Notes, Contact)
Winsock)
CODEBASEVB.dll
DCOM Object
DCOM Server
(dbcln.dll)
(esnavmam.exe)
Proxy/Stub
Proxy/Stub
(dbsvrps.dll)
(dbsvrps.dll
Desktop Interface
Server
I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

28
Installation

Guidelines for Setting up the Network
You may refer to the following guidelines when setting up the network environment.
· Step 1: Determine the network type.
· Step 2: Set up the TCP/IP protocol for your particular network.
· Step 3: Install the transport management utility.
· Step 4: Perform common tasks for all network types.
· Step 5: Test the network connection.

Step 1: Determine the network type
Perfect Voice Office Pro is designed to run on a Windows 2000 network. This is the most ideal setting
to ensure that it runs and configures smoothly. It will also run on a Windows 95 or 98 network.
Determine the type you are using before continuing.

Step 2: Set up the Protocols for Your Particular Network
After determining the type of network environment, you should set up the TCP/IP for your particular
network. The following pages describe how to configure the PCs that run Perfect Voice Office Pro
and the Desktop Interface.

Configuring TCP/IP Under Windows 95/98
The TCP/IP network protocol is an integral part of Perfect Voice Office Pro. All Perfect Voice Office
Pro systems are shipped with TCP/IP installed, and use it to communicate with Desktop user
workstations. Every time a new message is received, a mailbox opened, a message played, etc., etc., a
packet of information is sent via TCP/IP between the Perfect Voice Office Pro system and the User's
workstation. If TCP/IP is not correctly configured at the system or workstation, Caller ID and message
notification screen pops will not function. Improper configuration can also result in faulty system
operation during the nightly maintenance cycle.

I&M
Configuring TCP/IP for Perfect Voice Office Pro is a straightforward process. Follow the steps below
to ensure a successful installation.

?
For Networks That Already Use TCP/IP...
If the workstations on the network already have TCP/IP loaded, it is only necessary to configure the
Perfect Voice Office Pro system to match the rest of the workstations. The best way to proceed is to
check with the network administrator to determine the following:

If Static IP Addresses Are Used:
Ask the network administrator for an IP address for the Perfect Voice Office Pro system. The
address includes both the IP address and a subnet mask used by all workstations on the network.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
29

If Addresses Are Assigned Automatically By DHCP:
Networks running TCP/IP may assign IP addresses automatically by using a DHCP server. The
DHCP server assigns from a range of valid addresses that it is configured to use. Ask the network
administrator for a static IP address for the Perfect Voice Office Pro system. The
administrator then sets a reservation for that address in the DHCP server so that it is not assigned
to any other workstation.

N O T E
Shut down Perfect Voice Office Pro before proceeding.

Configuring TCP/IP Under Windows 95/98 when TCP/IP is already installed
1. Right-click the Network Neighborhood Icon and select Properties.
2. On the Configuration tab, select the TCP/IP Protocol and
select Properties.

3. On the IP Address tab, select Specify an IP
Address.
4. Enter the IP address and submask provided by the
I&M
network administrator. Ensure that it matches the
subnet mask assigned to all the other PCs in the
workgroup.
?
5. Click OK.

6. Windows asks if you wish to reboot the system.
Click OK to reboot. Be sure that the Perfect Voice
Office Pro application has been shutdown before
rebooting. If Perfect Voice Office Pro is still
running, you must shut it down first and then reboot.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

30
Installation

When TCP/IP Is Not Installed on The Network...
1. Right-click the Network Neighborhood Icon and select Properties.
2. On the Configuration page, click the Add button. You see the dialog box shown below.

3. Select Protocol and click Add.

4. Scroll through the list of vendors and
select Microsoft. Then select TCP/IP
in the listing on the right side.

5. Click OK to complete the selection.
6. Click OK again to close the Network
Properties dialog box.
7. Windows 95 prompts you for the CD-
ROM if it is needed. After it installs
the required files, Windows asks
whether you want to restart the
system. Click OK to complete the
installation process.

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
31

Configuring TCP/IP Under Windows NT/2000
The TCP/IP network protocol is an integral part of Perfect Voice Office Pro. All Perfect Voice Office
Pro systems are shipped with TCP/IP installed, and use it to communicate with Desktop user
workstations. Every time a new message is received, a mailbox opened, a message played, etc., etc., a
packet of information is sent via TCP/IP between the Perfect Voice Office Pro system and the User's
workstation. If TCP/IP is not correctly configured at the system or workstation, Caller ID and message
notification screen pops will not function. Improper configuration can also result in faulty system
operation during the nightly maintenance cycle.

Configuring TCP/IP for Perfect Voice Office Pro is a straightforward process. Follow the steps below
to ensure a successful installation.

For Networks That Already Use TCP/IP...
If the workstations on the network already have TCP/IP loaded, it is only necessary to configure the
Perfect Voice Office Pro system to match the rest of the workstations. The best way to proceed is to
check with the network administrator to determine the following:

If Static IP Addresses Are Used:
Ask the network administrator for an IP address for the Perfect Voice Office Pro system. The
address includes both the IP address and a subnet mask used by all workstations on the network.

If Addresses Are Assigned Automatically By DHCP:
Networks running TCP/IP may assign IP addresses automatically by using a DHCP server. The
DHCP server assigns from a range of valid addresses that it is configured to use. Ask the network
administrator for a static IP address for the Perfect Voice Office Pro system. The
administrator then sets a reservation for that address in the DHCP server so that it is not assigned
to any other workstation.

N O T E
Shut down Perfect Voice Office Pro before proceeding.
I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

32
Installation

Configuring TCP/IP Under Windows NT/2000 when TCP/IP is already installed
1. Right-click the Network Neighborhood
Icon and select properties.
2. On the Configuration tab, select TCP/IP
Protocol and click Properties.

3. On the IP Address tab, select Specify an IP
Address.

4. Enter the IP address, subnet mask, and
default gateway provided by the network
I&M
administrator. Ensure that it matches the
subnet mask assigned to all the other PCs
in the workgroup.
?

5. Click OK.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
33

Configuring TCP/IP Under Windows NT/2000 when TCP/IP is not Installed on the
Network
1. Right-click the Network Neighborhood Icon and select Properties.

2. On the Configuration page, click the Add button. You will see the dialog box shown below.

3. Select TCP/IP in the listing.

4. Click OK to complete the selection.

5. Click OK again to close the Network Properties dialog box.

6. Windows NT/2000 prompts you for the CD-ROM if it is needed. After it installs the required files,
Windows asks whether you want to restart the system. Click OK to complete the installation
process.
I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

34
Installation

Considerations for Windows 95, 98 and 2000
Selecting An IP Address
Once it is installed, configuring TCP/IP support is easy. Just select the TCP/IP entry in the Network
Properties box and click the Properties button. You'll see a dialog box similar to the one shown
below. The pages in this dialog box allow you to set the addresses and other TCP/IP properties for
your machine

IP addresses are actually composed of four numbers separated by periods. Each number must be in a
valid range from 0 to 255. You can use up to the first three numbers to represent your organization,
and the remaining number represents your computer. To simplify things, you can use 100.100.100.1
for the first computer, 100.100.100.2 for the second, and so on. The subnet mask numbers define the
meaning of the IP addresses on your network, and allow only two numerical values. A value of 255
indicates an organization entry; a value of 0 denotes a workstation. All workstations on the network
must have the same subnet and organization numbers before they can communicate. The only number
unique to each workstation is the portion of the IP address reserved for the workstation by the subnet
mask.

I&M

?
The first 3 numbers
Unique number (0-255) for
identify the
each workstation.
organization.
Last number of subnet
The first 3 numbers
indicates position of unique
are 255, reserving
workstation number in IP
the first 3 numbers of
address.
the IP address for the
organization.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
35

Step 3: Install Session Q
The Session Q program is located in the Startup Group on the Perfect Voice Office Pro system. This
program handles communication between the Perfect Voice Office Pro server and desktops. Session Q
is the transport management utility that makes better use of the ninety-seven (97) TCP connections
limitation of Windows 95 by using connections only as needed, so that, in total, more that 97
connections are possible.
Session Q manages sessions and closes user connections periodically as they become idle, in order to
make room for incoming and outgoing initiated connections. Either Session Q or the User can initiate a
connection when some information is available for sending. The information should be queued as the
connection is established and service, account, session identification and connect-back information are
exchanged. Multiple users (with the same or different account) on a single host can connect to a
service through Session Q. As well, multiple users from different hosts may use the same account.

SessionQ provides the following features:
· SessionQ acts as a security field between the system and the network to ensure that if anything
should happen to the network, the voice mail system will not be affected.
· SessionQ validates packets that are received from the network before they are passed to the
voice mail system.
· SessionQ manages LAPTalk functionality, a feature that allows sending of alphanumeric
messages to a pager from a Perfect Voice Office Pro desktop, and LANTalk, the sending of
text messages from one Perfect Voice Office Pro desktop to another.

N O T E
SessionQ is required if the Desktop Interface is to be used.

IMPORTANT: The SessionQ program must run at all times. It needs to remain
in the system startup group.

Using SessionQ
I&M
To access SessionQ, select Start -- Programs -- Perfect Voice Office Pro -- SessionQ from the main
Windows screen.
?

When Session Q is running, an icon similar to this appears in the
bottom right-hand corner beside the clock.

To edit SessionQ settings, right-click the SessionQ icon. The following menu
is available. You may access Connections Info, Session Info, Options,
About, or Exit from this menu. The same options are also available when
you select SessionQ Central.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

36
Installation

Session Q Central
Session Q Central is the Control Panel for the Session Q utility. When you select Session Q Central,
the following screen appears.

Connections Info
When you select Connections Info, the following screen appears.

`Takes Picture' of
Clears Trace

the current screen
screen and
and opens second

restarts it
window with data

Allows you to set
filter con
dition
Opens second
for Tr ace
duplicate window

List of active
sessions
Details of session
based on
Trace screen;
selection from the
shows session
Trace screen
I&M
activity
?
Activates /
deactivates
scrolling on
Trace screen
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
37

Sessions Info
When you select Sessions Info, the following screen appears.

`Takes Picture' of
Clears Trace
the current screen

screen and
and opens second

restarts it
window with data

Allows you t o set
filter condition
for Tr

ace
Opens second

duplicate window

List of active

sessions
Details of session

based on
Trace screen;
selection from the
shows

session
Trace screen
activity

Activates /
deactivates
scrolling on
Trace scree
n

Filters
The Filter Config screen is displayed when you click the
Filter Trace... button on the Connections Info or
Sessions Info screen. The Filter Config screen allows
you to specify a range of mailboxes to limit the Trace
I&M
Data to. Choose the field to search, the condition to
search by (>, <, >=, not =, etc.), and the criteria to search
by. Select No Filter to clear the filter.
?

The Filters option is useful when you are troubleshooting.
It allows you to limit the display to a particular user or
group of users in order to determine what is happening at their particular workstation(s) at any given
time.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

38
Installation

Options
When you select Options, a configuration menu is displayed. A description of the fields follows.

Startup Tab
On the Start Up tab, you specify the screens you want to
be opened when the system starts up. Check the
appropriate box(es).

Connections Tab
The Connections tab shows the settings that are
adjustable for the connections.
· Maximum Connections: This specifies the
maximum number of connections that may be
opened at any time. (Range is 3-90)
· Connections Keep Available: This field specifies
the maximum number of connections to keep
available at any one time. The purpose is to leave
sessions open for new users.
· Reconnect Queue Check Interval: This field
specifies the length of time (in milliseconds) to wait
before attempting to connect to client.
I&M
· Reconnect Retries: This field specifies the number
of times to retry to connect back to each client if
client is busy before terminating the client's position
?
in queue.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
39

VM Service Tab
The VM Service tab controls settings on services
performed by the Voice Mail.
· Share Name: This field indicates share name of
voice mail directory (default = blank). To
provide additional network security, you should
enter VM$ in this field and in the actual
Windows share screen (see "Common Tasks for
All Network Types and Environments"). If you
specify the share name here, it is not necessary
to enter it in the desktop configuration. If you
need to change the share name later, you only
have to change it on the Perfect Voice Office Pro
server; not the desktops.
· New Call Active Duration (secs): This field specifies the length of time (in seconds) to retry
screen notification of a new call on busy network.

Trace Tab
The Trace tab controls Trace screen settings that can
be adjusted.
· Auto Save Trace Log: This field indicates
whether or not to automatically write the Trace
activity to a log file. The file created is
SQDDMMHH.TRC, where DDMMHH
represents Day Month, Hour.
· Maximum Trace Items in Memory: this field
specifies the maximum number of lines to
display in the Connections Info or Sessions Info
screens.

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

40
Installation

Step 4: Common Tasks for all Network Types and Environments
1.
On Perfect Voice Office Pro Server: Set the drive where Perfect Voice Office Pro is installed
(C: drive is the default) on the computer to a full access Share Level.
· Right click on Network Neighborhood.
· Select Properties.
· Select the Access Control tab.
· Specify Share-level Access Control and click OK.

2.
Verify the share name for the installation of the Desktop interface. The default share name is
VM.*
· Go to Windows Explorer.
· Right-click on Drive C (C:)
· Select Sharing...
· Select the Sharing tab.
· Select Shared As: and verify that the
Share Name is VM

*Adding $ to VM ($VM) hides shared directories from
users on the network. Refer to "VM Service Tab" in
the Session Q section. It is recommended that you
enter $VM as the Share Name.

I&M
Step 5: Verify the Network Connection
After the computers have been configured, it is necessary to verify the network connection:
?
Start up the Desktop Interface on the client PC. A red square appears in the top right hand corner
of the Desktop Interface screen. Within a few seconds, that box disappears. If the red box does
not disappear, this is an indication that the network is not configured properly. If this is the case,
verify all of the settings again. Double-check all of the settings (including IP address, if applicable,
and the Perfect Voice Office Pro Server Name).

Finding the Computer Name
A common cause of "No answer from partner" errors is the wrong computer name. To find the
computer name, click on the properties of the Network Neighborhood and select the
identification tab.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
41

Section

11
11 - Verify System Parameters
N O T E
Perfect Voice Office Pro is shipped pre-configured for Teleco/Toshiba telephone
systems. If Perfect Voice Office Pro is integrating with a different telephone system,
the Telephone Integration Utility and Accucall call analysis program must be run.
Refer to the Appendix for more information on Accucall.

What is Integration?
Integration enhances the level of communication between Perfect Voice Office Pro and the telephone
system and results in more efficient use of both systems. Callers and Users of an integrated voice
messaging system find it easier to use and more intuitive than non-integrated systems.
In an integrated configuration, the telephone system is programmed to be "aware" that a voice
messaging system is connected to it. As far as the telephone system is concerned, the Perfect Voice
Office Pro extensions are no longer single-line analog stations but voice processing ports. Calls
directed to Perfect Voice Office Pro are accompanied by information from the telephone system about
the source and status of the call. For example, this information may tell Perfect Voice Office Pro that
the call was forwarded from a ring-no-answer extension as well as from what extension it was
forwarded. This allows Perfect Voice Office Pro to place the caller into the appropriate state and the
caller immediately hears that person's personal greeting.
Another advantage of voice messaging integration with some telephone systems is apparent when a
User calls Perfect Voice Office Pro from his or her desk. The telephone system provides Perfect Voice
Office Pro with information about the calling party's extension number and the fact that it is a direct
call. Typically, Perfect Voice Office Pro is programmed to immediately prompt the User for his or her
password since the caller most likely wants to go into User mode.
There are a variety of methods for integrating telephone systems with Perfect Voice Office Pro. Some
telephone systems offer no integration at all while others offer only minimal information. The two
most common methods of integration include in-band signaling (IBS) and out-of-band signaling
I&M
(OBS).

?
In Band Signaling (IBS)
In a telephone system that supports IBS integration, sequences of DTMF digits (integration strings) are
sent to Perfect Voice Office Pro by the telephone system. For example, a call may be forwarded from
extension 201 to Perfect Voice Office Pro if that extension did not answer. Soon after Perfect Voice
Office Pro answers, the telephone system provides the DTMF tone sequence, *41*201. Please
remember, this is a hypothetical case. This sequence of "*41*" is referred to as pilot, or steering
digits and indicates the call was forwarded under a ring-no-answer situation. The next three digits
indicate the extension number of the called party. Perfect Voice Office Pro would interpret the digits
appropriately and play User 201's personal greeting.
Most IBS integration digit strings are sent soon after Perfect Voice Office Pro answers a call. IBS
digits indicating a hang-up can be sent at any point during the processing of the call. Perfect Voice

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

42
Installation

Office Pro responds to this signal, terminating the call as quickly as possible, thus freeing up the port
for other calls.
The telephone system manufacturer and model determine the level of IBS integration that is available.
For example, some telephone systems are able to distinguish whether a forwarded call is a no answer
or a busy situation and then provide this information to Perfect Voice Office Pro, while other phone
systems do not. Some phone systems offer information about whether the call originated from outside
the telephone system or from the station side, while other phone systems make no distinction. It is
important to understand these differences and what type of IBS information is available to the Perfect
Voice Office Pro system.
"Simple" IBS
Simple IBS is similar to more conventional IBS in that the call information comes in the form of
sequences of DTMF digits. However, unlike conventional IBS, simple IBS only offers the extension
number of the station from which the call was forwarded. No steering or trailing digits accompany the
User's extension number. This can make it difficult to distinguish between an extension number
entered by a person wanting to be transferred to that person's extension and one entered by the
telephone system as part of a normal integrated call. However, if properly configured, Perfect Voice
Office Pro operates correctly.
Out-of-Band Signaling (OBS)
With a configuration using OBS, information about a call is sent as a packet of character data to
Perfect Voice Office Pro over a serial link (RS-232). Using this data packet, Perfect Voice Office Pro
places the call into the appropriate state. Like IBS, the information contained in the data packet
specifies the calling and/or called party's extension number and the reason for the call. Unlike IBS, this
information may be sent just before or just after Perfect Voice Office Pro receives the call.
With OBS, all packets come over the same physical, serial link. The data in the packet also contains
information, which associates it with a particular channel. In addition to answering the call, Perfect
Voice Office Pro checks to see if there is an incoming packet associated with that channel. Once the
packet is identified, other information about the call can be obtained. Because OBS is data passed over
a serial link, the format of the information can vary. The most common format of OBS signaling is
Simple Message Desk Interface (SMDI).

I&M
SMDI Integration
Most central offices and some larger telephone systems offer serial ports that can provide information
in SMDI format to Perfect Voice Office Pro. Although other telephone systems may not offer a direct
?
SMDI link, the information can be generated by a third party device that performs set emulation or
protocol conversion.
Direct Link: A serial link from the telephone system is the most straightforward method of achieving
SMDI integration. For example, the Teleco UST1424DK telephone system has a serial interface that
provides SMDI packet information to Perfect Voice Office Pro. All that is needed is the physical cable
to connect the two. Most central offices are also equipped to provide SMDI information through
Centrex, or Essex, service. Since the actual telephone switching equipment is located far from the
Perfect Voice system, this link is accomplished with a dedicated modem link.
Protocol Converter: Sometimes, the telephone system generates information that is not in SMDI
format. In these situations, an external device called a protocol converter may be used to convert the
proprietary information from the telephone system into SMDI format that the Perfect Voice Office Pro
is able to interpret.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
43

Set Emulation: Some telephone systems do not provide a serial interface at all. In these situations, the
information needed to construct an SMDI packet may be obtained from a digital set interface.
Integrated calls are sent directly to a digital set extension. This station is controlled by a device that is
capable of reading information in the display of the digital set and operating the set. Information about
the call received is obtained by reading the display and the call is transferred to a Perfect Voice Office
Pro extension. An SMDI packet, whose contents are based on the information read from the display, is
generated and sent to Perfect Voice Office Pro over the serial link of the set emulator.

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

44
Installation

Verify the System Parameters
From the Main Menu:
Log in at the Installer level
Click the Parameters button
From your pre-installation worksheet and telephone system documentation, verify that the system
parameters are correct.

N O T E
If you change a parameter, you must click the Save button for each tab screen. For
example, if you change the Installer password on the Auto-Attendant tab, you must
save that change before accessing another tab such as Voice Mail.

System Parameters are preset based on the telephone system specified on the Perfect
Voice Office Pro order. Verify the parameters marked with an asterisk (*). Many of the
following parameters should NOT be changed. They are included for reference only.

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
45

Verify Auto Attendant Parameters - (144 to 158)
144 - Extension Length

DEFAULT = 3
Extension length, in digits. Valid extensions may be 2 to 8 digits.
145
-
Time-Out DEFAULT = 10
Number of seconds before disconnect upon no response.
*146 Administrator Password

DEFAULT = 9999
This parameter specifies the password to access the system administrator level.
*147 - Installer Password

DEFAULT = 12345
This parameter specifies the password to access the Installer level. It allows
access to the System Parameters screen.
148 Reserved
DEFAULT = 0
Reserved. This must be set to zero
*149

Multiple
Messages
DEFAULT = 0
If set to 0, callers are able to try other extensions after leaving a message. If set to
1, callers hear "Thank you, good-bye" after leaving a message.
*150

Notify
User
of
Transfer

DEFAULT = 1
Controls play of "One Moment, You have a call." prompt upon connecting. 0 =
Off, 1 = On.
151

Alternate
Star
DEFAULT = BLANK
Alternative DTMF for *. Used in telephone systems with the asterisk key
reserved for other functions such as speed-dial or re-dial.

152

Alternate
Pound

DEFAULT = BLANK
Alternate DTMF for #. Used in telephone systems with the POUND key

reserved for other functions such as speed-dial or re-dial.
153

Inter-Digit
Delay

DEFAULT = 2
Delay in seconds between entering DTMF.

154

Reorganization
Time

DEFAULT = 0300
Hard disk reorganization time, in military time. If set to 0000, Reorganization
I&M
will be skipped
*155

Fixed
Length DEFAULT = 1
?
If set to 1, all mailboxes are same length. If set to 0, then mailboxes can be
variable lengths. Valid Range is 2 to 4 digit Mailbox Numbers.
*156 Paging Access Code
DEFAULT = &, #30
This parameter specifies the code the system needs to dial to place caller on hold,
and access Intercom paging system.
*157 Paging Release Code
DEFAULT = &,
This parameter specifies the code the system needs to dial to get the caller back
after performing intercom paging.
*158 Paging Delay
DEFAULT = BLANK
This is the time the system waits after paging before transferring the call.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

46
Installation

Verify Voice Mail Parameters - (159 to 161)

159 Days to Save Messages
DEFAULT = 14
Default number of days to save old messages.

*160 Minimum Message Length
DEFAULT = 2
This parameter identifies the minimum message length for messages, in seconds.
161 Distribution Access Key
DEFAULT = *
I&M
Digit to use to send messages to distribution lists.

?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
47

Fax Parameters - (300 to 317)

300 Fax on Demand
DEFAULT = 0
Set to 1 to activate fax on demand; otherwise, set to 0.
301 Local Area Code 1
DEFAULT = BLANK
Your local area code 1.
302 Local Area Code 2
DEFAULT = BLANK
Your local area code 2.
I&M
303 Local Area Code 3
DEFAULT = BLANK
Your local area code 3.
?
304 Local and Toll Area Code 1
DEFAULT = BLANK
The area code in your region that is both local and long distance 1. Note that for
parameters 304 and 305, you must create a DOS text file in the WINVM
directory that includes the local exchanges. The filename should be aaa.fax
where "aaa" is the local and toll area code.
305 Local and Toll Area Code 2
DEFAULT = BLANK
The area code in your region that is both local and long distance 2.
306 Code to Access Outside Line
DEFAULT = 9,
This is the code dialed for the Fax on Demand system to access an outside line.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

48
Installation

Fax Parameters - (300 to 317) continued
307 Code to Access a Toll Line
DEFAULT = 9,1
The code dialed for the Fax on Demand system to access a toll line.
308 Number of Digits in Area Code
DEFAULT = 3
The number of digits in the area code.
309 Number of Digits in Telephone Number
DEFAULT = 7
The number of digits in the telephone number in your area.
310 Fax Directory
DEFAULT=\FAXOUT
The directory where the fax documents are stored.
311 Dialing Suffix
DEFAULT = BLANK
This is any numbers that must be dialed after long distance numbers.
312 Reserved

313 Ask for Extension Number

Set to 0 to enable, 1 to disable. If enabled, the system prompts for an extension
number when the caller is requesting a document through Fax on Demand. The
number that the caller enters is placed in the "To:" filed on the fax header.
314 Fax Pickup Code

This is only valid for certain telephone systems. It specifies the digits the fax
card uses to pick up a parked call.
315 Default Fax Number

This is the default fax number where faxes are printed when another number has
not been specified.
316 Default Fax Mailbox

This is the default mailbox for faxes. Faxes that have not been addressed to
specific mailboxes are sent to this mailbox.
317 Fax Park Code

This field is not yet implemented. This is the code to park a fax.
I&M

?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
49

Verify Transfer Parameters (162-169)

*162 Default Rings
DEFAULT = 3
This parameter specifies the number of rings before system returns no answer.
*163 Blind Transfer Protocol
DEFAULT = &,
Sequence to place a caller on hold and perform a blind transfer. This parameter
specifies the sequence the system should follow to place a caller on hold before
attempting a transfer to the operator. The following special characters may be
used (& - Flash hook and , -Pause).
I&M
*164 Supervised Transfer Protocol
DEFAULT = &,
Sequence to place a caller on hold and perform a supervised transfer. This
?
parameter specifies the sequence the system should follow to place a caller on
hold before attempting a transfer. The following special characters may be used
& - flash hook, and - pause).
*165 No Answer Release
DEFAULT = &,
This parameter specifies the code the system needs to dial to return to caller in
the event of a no answer.
*166 Busy Release
DEFAULT = &,
This parameter specifies the sequence the system should follow to get a caller

back when it encounters a busy condition. The following special characters may
be used & - flash hook, and , - pause).

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

50
Installation

Verify Transfer Parameters (162-169) continued
*167 Transfer Connect Protocol
DEFAULT = BLANK
Digit that must be used to connect a supervised call. If the telephone system
requires a connect code (a code that must be dialed when connecting a
transferred call), enter the code here.
*168 Handsfree Announce Protocol
DEFAULT=E1,
Sequence to dial a caller and announce over a telephone speaker.
169 Call Pickup Protocol

Sequence to dial to pick up a parked call.

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
51

FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Disconnect Parameters - (174 to 181)

174 Silence Detection
DEFAULT = 3
Maximum length of silence considered a disconnect, in seconds.
175 Noise Detection
DEFAULT = 4
Maximum length of noise such as dial tone considered a disconnect.
176 High Cadence for Fast-Busy Detect
DEFAULT = 990
Fast busy detect high, in msec.
177 Low Cadence for Fast-Busy Detect
DEFAULT = 980
I&M
Fast busy detect low, in msec
178 Grunt Detection
DEFAULT = 0
?
Enable Grunt detect: 1 = On, 0 = Off.
179 Grunt Threshold
DEFAULT = 8000
Determines noise threshold for Grunt, if on. The default for Rhetorex is 8000
but it can be set to 6000 if using 6KHz compression. The default for Intel is 500.
180 Hang-up String
DEFAULT = D
String which forces hang-up.
181 Hang-up Delay
DEFAULT = 1
This is the maximum time allowed between hang-up strings for a valid hang-up.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

52
Installation

Verify Inband Parameters - (182 to 197)

182 Inband Signaling
DEFAULT = 1
This specifies whether the telephone system being integrated uses inband

signaling.
0 = No, 1 = Yes
183 Inband Delay
DEFAULT = 1
This parameter specifies the number of seconds that the system will wait
for the first digit of a possible inband (DTMF) integration packet. The
Inband Delay timer begins after the Offhook Delay (Global Parameter #10)
has expired. If the first digit of the inband packet arrives after the Inband
I&M
Delay timer has expired, integration will not function properly.
This timer also acts as the interdigit timer for the inband integration packet.
Once the system has begun to collect the inband signals, this parameter
?
specifies the maximum pause that is allowed between the inband digits.
(The time limit for acceptance of inband digits is 8 seconds.)
If the telephone system has a configurable inband timer, it should be set as
short as possible to improve inband performance.
184 Inband Login Password
DEFAULT = 0
When the User accesses his/her mailbox internally, a password is required

to access messages and features. If this parameter is set to "Yes" (0), the
system does not prompt for the password. If set to "No" (1), the system
prompts for the password. Ask for password: 0 = Yes, 1 = No.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
53

Verify Inband Parameters - (182 to 197) continued

185 Login Code
E = Recipient's mailbox
number
This is the code sent by the telephone system to automatically log in to a
S = Sender's mailbox number
mailbox to access messages and features. This is also known as auto
C = incoming line number
station login.
X = Ignore

I = Caller ID
186 Internal No-Answer Code
E = Recipient's mailbox
number
This specifies the inband signal sent by the telephone system to indicate a
S = Sender's mailbox number
no-answer condition on an internal call. This code tells Perfect Voice
C = incoming line number
Office Pro to send the caller to the mailbox greeting.
X = Ignore
I = Caller ID
187 External No-Answer Code
E = Recipient's mailbox
number
This specifies the inband signal sent by the telephone system to indicate a
S = Sender's mailbox number
no-answer condition on an external call. This code tells Perfect Voice
C = incoming line number
Office Pro to send the caller to the mailbox greeting.
X = Ignore
I = Caller ID
188 Internal Busy Code
E = Recipient's mailbox
number
This specifies the inband signal sent by the telephone system to indicate a
S = Sender's mailbox number
busy condition on an internal call. This code tells Perfect Voice Office Pro C = incoming line number
to send the caller to the mailbox greeting.
X = Ignore
I = Caller ID
189 External Busy Code
E = Recipient's mailbox
number
This specifies the inband signal sent by the telephone system to indicate a
S = Sender's mailbox number
busy condition on an external call. This code tells Perfect Voice Office
C = incoming line number
Pro to send the caller to the mailbox greeting.
X = Ignore
I = Caller ID
190 - C.O. Call Code
E = Recipient's mailbox
number
This parameter identifies what C.O. line an inbound call came in on. This
S = Sender's mailbox number
code is only used for telephone systems that have C.O. line identification.
C = incoming line number
I&M

X = Ignore
I = Caller ID
?
191 Invalid Code 1

Certain telephone systems include codes that may interfere with inband
signals. Enter the code in this field.
192 Invalid Code 2

Certain telephone systems include codes that may interfere with inband
signals. Enter the code in this field.
193 Reserved Code 1

194 Reserved Code 2

195 Max Digits
DEFAULT = 5
Maximum number of digits sent through inband signaling.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

54
Installation

196 - CO Digit Length

Number of Digits sent to identify the incoming CO line.
*197 Caller ID Length
DEFAULT=10
Number of Digits sent in Caller ID for Inband Calling

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
55

Verify Notification Parameters (170 to 173)

170 Outside Line Access
DEFAULT = 9,
Dial string for local outside line.
171 Start Port for Notify
DEFAULT = LAST
This specifies the lowest port enabled for outdial notification. The system
I&M
begins notification from the "End Port for Notify" and works down to this
port as ports become available. Outdial notification includes MWI, pager,
?
and telephone. You may enter FIRST, LAST, or a number.
172 End Port for Notify
DEFAULT = LAST
This specifies the highest port enabled for outdial notification. The system
begins notification from this port and works up to the "Start Port for
Notify" port as ports become available. Outdial notification includes
MWI, pager, and telephone. You may enter FIRST, LAST, or a number.
173 Outcall Retry Interval
DEFAULT = 15
This field specifies the default number of minutes between retries to

attempt to place the outcall notification. This may be overridden within
the mailbox. If the mailbox value is left blank, the system uses this value
as the default.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

56
Installation

Verify Message Light Parameters - (350 to 360)

*350 Message Light ON Code

Dial string to activate message-waiting light. Place an E to represent the
extension number in the dialing string.
351 Number of ON Retries

Number of times to retry the message waiting light on, after the initial try.
352 ON Retry Interval

I&M
Number of minutes between retries for message waiting on.
353 Light ON for All

?
Light message waiting lights for all messages. If set to 0, only the first
message triggers lights. If set to 1, message lights light for all messages.
*354 Message Light OFF Code

Dial string to turn off message waiting light. Place an E to represent the
extension number in the dialing string.
355 Number of OFF Retries

Number of times to retry the message waiting light off, after the initial try.
356 OFF Retry Interval

Number of minutes between retries for message waiting off.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
57

Verify Message Light Parameters - (350 to 360)
357 Light OFF for All

Extinguish message-waiting lights for all messages. If set to 0, lights are
extinguished for the first message. If set to 1, lights extinguish for all
messages.
358 Light OFF on Last

If set to 1, the system waits until there are no new messages before turning
the message waiting light off.
359 Wait for Dial Tone

If set to 1, when the system goes off hook, it checks for dialtone first. If no
dialtone is detected, it returns to the company greeting.
360 Lamp Schedule Interval
With SMDI, this value should
How often the system checks ports set to notify to see if it needs to
be 2. Without SMDI, this
perform an outcalling event (in seconds).
value should be 8.

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

58
Installation

FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Global Parameters - (001 to 023)
NOTE: If changes are made to global parameters, the system must be restarted.

1 Flash Character
DEFAULT = &
Character in a dialing string that causes a flash hook to occur.

2 Flash Duration
DEFAULT = 50 (10 msec
Duration of Flash Hook, in 10 msec increments.
increments)

3 Pause Duration
DEFAULT = 100 (10 msec
Duration of pause time to send a pause in a dialing string, in 10 msec
increments)
increments.

I&M
4 Digitization Rate
DEFAULT = 8000
Digitizing rate in Hz.
5 Scheduler Time
DEFAULT = 20
?
Scheduler time slice, expressed as the maximum number of timer ticks,
expressed in twentieth (1/20) of a sec, before the driver must return control
to the program 50 msec increments.
6 Pulse Break Interval
DEFAULT = 6 (10 msec
Pulse Dialing break interval, in 10 msec increments.
increments)
7 Pulse Make Interval
DEFAULT = 4 (10 msec
Pulse Dialing make interval, in 10 msec increments.
increments)
8 Pulse Interdigit Delay
DEFAULT =10 (10 msec
Pulse Dialing inter-digit delay, in 10 msec increments.
increments)
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
59

FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Global Parameters - (001 to 023) Continued
9 Tone Inter-digit Delay
DEFAULT = 5 (10 msec
Tone Dialing inter-digit delay, in 10 msec increments.
increments)
10 Offhook Delay
DEFAULT = 50 (10 msec
This is the time (in 10 msec increments) that the system waits after going
increments)
off hook before it "looks for" incoming signals.
11 Ring On

Minimum Ring ON interval to detect an incoming ring, in 100 msec
increments.
12 Ring Off

Minimum Ring OFF interval to detect an incoming ring, in 100 msec
increments.
13 Ring Delay
DEFAULT = 80
Delay after which ring count is reset, in 100 msec increments.
14 Silence Debounce
DEFAULT = 4 (10 msec
Silence message de-bounce interval in 10 msec increments.
increments)
15 Reserved Field
DEFAULT = 0
Reserved, MUST BE SET TO ZERO
16 Tone Duration
DEFAULT = 10 (10 msec
Duration of dialed DTMF tone, in 10 msec increments.
increments)
17 Pulse Max Make

Maximum time for PD make, in msec.
18 Pulse Min Make

Minimum make interval for valid loop pulse digit, in msec.
19 Pulse Min Break

Minimum break interval for valid loop pulse digit, in msec.
I&M
20 Pulse Min Interdigit

Minimum inter-digit pulse time, in msec.
?
21 Loop Current Time
DEFAULT = 30 (10 msec
Minimum time loop current must be off before loop current CST can be
increments)
generated, in 10 msec increments.
22 Record Tone Length

Record DTMF filter time, in msec.
23 Record Tone Edge
DEFAULT = 0
Record DTMF event edge selection. 1 = event detection on trailing edge of
tone,
2 = event detection on leading edge of tone.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

60
Installation

Channel Internal Parameters (400 to 426) Rhetorex

400 Max Start Silence

Specifies the duration of the longest valid silence period that PCPM waits for at the
DEFAULT =
beginning of an outbound analysis. If the initial silence duration exceeds this value,
524272 (16-msec units)
PCPM considers that no tone is present on the line.

This value should be greater than the value for Sound Dropout and also greater than
the maximum silence period of any tone in the tone table.
Valid Range is 1 through 524272 in milliseconds

401 Max Start Sound

Specifies the duration of the longest valid sound period that PCPM waits for at the
DEFAULT =
beginning of an outbound analysis. If the initial sound duration exceeds this value,
4992 (16-msec units)
PCPM considers that no tone is present on the line.

This value should be greater than the value for Sound Spike and also greater than the
maximum silence period of any tone in the tone table.
Valid Range is 1 through 524272 in milliseconds

402 Min Speech

Specifies the minimum duration of voice that must be present on the line for PCPM to DEFAULT = 48 (msec)
consider the call answered.
Valid Range is 1 through 1048560 in milliseconds

403 PCPM Delay

Specifies the amount of time that PCPM waits after outbound PCPM starts before it
DEFAULT = 0
begins to analyze tones. This parameter allows the application to specify an amount of
time tat PCPM waits for the audio on the line to stabilize.

For example, some switches send a few spurious signals before the ringback (or busy)
signal starts. In such cases, set the PCPM Delay value to a non-zero value to avoid
detecting false answer conditions that the spurious signals can trigger.
Valid Range is 1 through 1048560 in milliseconds, 0 represents no delay

404 Start Segment

Specifies the deglitched segment that PCPM analysis starts on. A segment is either a
DEFAULT = 0
period of silence or a period of sound on the line. It is considered deglitched once its
I&M
duration exceeds the threshold specified by the value in the Sound Dropout or Sound
Spike field.

?
PCPM analysis normally starts as soon as the function is called. However, older
switches can generate some signals on the line during an outbound call that are not
part of the ringback tone. If this happens, you should increase this segment value to a
value greater than zero.

If a value other than zero is specified for Start Segment, the PCPM algorithm
considers the first segment to be the first sound segment it receives. This eliminates
the uncertainty caused by not knowing whether there will be a silence period
preceding the first tone.
Valid Range is 1 through 255, 0 represents Start PCPM Immediately

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
61

405 Max Rings

Specifies the number of ringback cycles that PCPM waits for before it terminates
DEFAULT = 4 (ring cycles)
analysis and returns this tone's ID. If the number of ringback cycles exceeds this
value, PCPM considers the call unanswered. Ringback tones differ from non-ringback
tones in that PCPM must wait several cycles after detecting a ringback tone before it
terminates to give the called party a chance to answer the call. Non-ringback tones, on
the other hand, must be detected as fast as possible.
Valid Range is 1 through 255

406 Min Cycles

Specifies the minimum number of full cycles of a non-ringback-type tone that PCPM
DEFAULT = 2 (ring cycles)
must detect before it terminates analysis and returns this tone's ID.

Ringback tones differ from non-ringback tones in that PCPM must wait several cycles
after detecting a ringback tone before it terminates to give the called party a chance to
answer the call. Non-ringback tones, on the other hand, must be detected as fast as
possible.
Valid Range is 1 through 255

407 Sound Spike

Specifies the maximum duration of a sound signal that PCPM analysis considers a
DEFAULT = 112 (msec)
glitch (spike) on the line. If the amount of time PCPM detects sound on the line does
not exceed the value for this parameter, this sound signal is considered a spike (noise)
and PCPM ignores it. The duration of the spike is added to the duration of the silence
that PCPM was previously detecting.

The value for Sound Spike should be less than the duration of all sound elements that
are a part of frequency-only tones.
Valid Range is 1 through 4080 in milliseconds

408 Sound Dropout

Specifies the maximum duration of a silence signal that PCPM analysis considers a
DEFAULT = 112 (msec)
glitch (dropout) on the line. If the amount of time PCPM detects the absence of sound
(silence) on the line does not exceed the value for this parameter, this absence of
sound is considered a temporary and unexpected loss of signal (a dropout) and PCPM
ignores it. The duration of the dropout is added to the duration of the sound that
PCPM was previously detecting.

I&M
This value should be less that the duration of all silence elements in the tone table.
Valid Range is 1 through 4080 in milliseconds

409 PVC Spike

?
Specifies the maximum duration of a voice signal that PCPM analysis considers a
DEFAULT = 16 (msec)
glitch (spike) on the line. If the amount of time PCPM detects voice on the line does
not exceed the value for this parameter, this voice signal is considered a spike (noise)
and PCPM ignores it. The duration of the spike is added to the duration of the absence
of voice segment that PCPM was previously detecting.

This value should be less than the value for Min Speech.
Valid Range is 1 through 4080 in milliseconds

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

62
Installation

410 PVC Dropout

Specifies the maximum duration of a voice signal that PCPM analysis considers a
DEFAULT = 16 (msec)
glitch (spike) on the line. If the amount of time PCPM detects the absence of voice on
the line does not exceed the value for this parameter, this absence of sound is
considered a temporary and unexpected loss of signal (a dropout) and PCPM ignores
it. The duration of the dropout is added to the duration of the sound that PCPM was
previously detecting.
Valid Range is 1 through 4080 in milliseconds
411 Term Spike

Specifies the maximum duration of a frequency signal that PCPM considers a glitch
DEFAULT = 32 (msec)
(spike) during background PCPM. This PCPM analysis operates while other voice
processing activities (play, record, or wait for digit) are ongoing to determine whether
the line receives any user-specified tones.

If the amount of time PCPM detects a certain frequency on the line does not exceed
the value for this parameter, the frequency is considered a spike (noise) and PCPM
ignores it. The duration of the spike is added to the duration of the silence that PCPM
was previously detecting.

This value should be less than the duration of all sound elements of terminating tones
in the tone table.
Valid Range is 1 through 4080 in milliseconds

412 Term Dropout

Specifies the maximum duration of a loss of frequency that PCPM analysis considers
DEFAULT = 160
a glitch (dropout) on the line. If the amount of time PCPM detects a loss of frequency
on the line does not exceed the value for this parameter, this loss of frequency is
considered a temporary and unexpected loss of signal (a dropout) and PCPM ignores
it. The duration of the dropout is added to the duration of the frequency that PCPM
was previously detecting.

The value for Term Dropout should be less than the duration of all silence elements of
terminating tones in the table.
Valid Range is 1 through 4080 in milliseconds

413 Frequency Lock

Specifies the length of time for the detection algorithm to detect a frequency and
DEFAULT = 32
determine that it is the tone's main frequency, it uses this frequency to analyze a
I&M
segment's characteristics.

The value for Frequency Lock needs to be less than the duration of all sound elements
in the tone table that contain a frequency (excluding cadence-only and frequency-only
?
tones). This value also needs to be less than the value of Sound Spike.
Valid Range is 1 through 4080 in milliseconds

414 Max Frequency Shifts

Defines the maximum number of times that the receive frequency can change before
DEFAULT = 5 (shifts)
PCPM detects another valid frequency (or silence). If PCPM detects more than this
number of frequency shifts, it considers that voice is present on the line and assumes
the call is answered. The frequency shift count is reset every time a frequency (or
silence) becomes valid (exceeds the spike or dropout threshold).
Valid range is 1 through 255 (Do not use 0)

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
63

415 Max Frequency Drops

Defines the maximum number of times that a frequency can drop before PCPM
DEFAULT = 5 (drops)
detects another valid frequency (or silence). If the number of frequency drops exceeds
this value, PCPM considers the call answered.

The PCPM algorithm defines a frequency drop as the detection of a silence sample
(16 msec) that turns out to be part of a glitch (meaning the silence period does not
exceed the duration specified by Sound Dropout). The frequency drop count is reset
every time a frequency (or silence) becomes valid (exceeds the spike or dropout
threshold).
Valid range is 1 through 255 (Do not use 0)
416 Max Unmatched Seg.

Specifies the maximum number of segments that can be received that do not match
DEFAULT = 3 (unmatched
any part of a tone in the tone table. A segment is a period of sound or a period of
segments)
silence of a certain duration. Unlike the frequency shift and frequency drop counters,
the unmatched segment counter is not reset when a valid frequency or silence period
is detected.
Valid range is 1 through 255 (Do not use 0)

417 Frequency Cover
DEFAULT = 70 (%)
Specifies the percentage of a segment duration that a frequency must cover for PCPM
analysis to consider the segment valid. PCPM analysis compares the duration of the
sound segment with the duration of the detected frequency, if any. When the
frequency covers less than the specified percentage of segment duration, PCPM
analysis considers the call answered.
Valid Range is 1 through 100 (Do not use 0)

418 PCPM Optimize
DEFAULT = 1
Specifies a value that determines whether to optimize PCPM analysis for voice or
tone detection. When this value is set to optimize PCPM analysis for voice detection,
the algorithm becomes much more sensitive to detecting a voice signal and considers
most deviations from a clear signal as a potential voice signal. In particular, PCPM
analysis uses the values for Frequency Cover, Max Frequency Drops, Max Frequency
Shifts, and Max Unmatched Segments to detect voice and does not use these values
when PCPM is optimized to detect tones.

If PCPM analysis is performed on noisy lines, or cadence-only tones are present in
the tone table, se this parameter's value to 0 to avoid detecting false answer
I&M
indications. If there is a cadence-only tone in the tone table, PCPM Optimize must be
set to 0.
Valid Range is 0 (optimize for tone detection) or 1 (optimize for voice detection)

?
419 Ignore Frequency Dev.
DEFAULT = 1
Specifies a value that determines whether PCPM disregards or considers small
frequency deviations. Setting this parameter to True (1) is equivalent to dynamically
adjusting the PCPM filter parameters. This value allows PCPM to still consider
samples good even though they do not satisfy specified criteria. When this parameter
is set to False (0), deviations are counted as frequency shifts. This value makes PCPM
analysis much more sensitive to noise on the line and can lead to false reports of call-
answered conditions for noisy lines.
Valid Range is 0 (False count deviations as frequency shifts) or 1 (True Ignore
small frequency deviations)

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

64
Installation

420 Enable Ringback Tracking

Specifies a value that allows the outbound PCPM function to detect call-answered
DEFAULT = 1
conditions faster based on changes in the characteristics of ringback tones.

When PCPM detects a ringback tone and the parameter's value is set to True (1),
PCPM assumes that any change in this tone signals a call-answered condition. PCPM
constantly monitors the signal on the line to identify any change in the signal (change
of cadence, break in cadence or change of frequency) and reports a call-answered
condition as soon as it detects a change. Setting this value to False (0) causes PCPM
to wait for other events (voice or unmatched segments) before it considers the call
answered.
Valid Range is 0 (False wait for other events to consider the call answered) or 1
(True consider the call answered after detecting any change of signal
characteristics)
421 Enable PVC

Specifies a value that determines use of a proprietary PVC algorithm to detect the
DEFAULT = 1
presence of a human voice on the line. Enabling this feature provides a faster and
more reliable method of detecting call-answered situations.
Valid Range is 0 (False disables use of the PVC algorithm) or 1 (True enables use
of the PVC algorithm)

422 Enable Answer Analysis

Specifies a value that enables analysis of answer characteristics. When enabled, this
DEFAULT = 0
type of analysis returns parameters that allow the application to distinguish different
types of greetings (for example, a greeting spoken by a live person, a business
receptionist, or an answering machine). If enabled, the greeting (answer) is analyzed
until a termination condition is met.

Answer analysis only starts if the PCPM algorithm determines that the call has been
answered due to presence of voice on the line. If answer analysis is disabled (the
parameter is set to False), PCPM returns an indication of answer as soon as it
identifies one.
Valid Range is 0 (False Disables answer analysis) or 1 (True Enables answer
analysis)

423 Max Answer Analysis
DEFAULT = 125 (2
Specifies the maximum amount of time to run answer analysis. If answer analysis
seconds)
runs for this amount if time without detecting the amount of voice or silence specified
I&M
by Max Answer Voice or Max Answer Silence (below), it terminates.
Valid Range is 1 through 65535 in 16 msec increments (Do not use 0).

424 Max Answer Voice
DEFAULT = 496 (msec)
?
Specifies the maximum amount of continuous voice that answer analysis can accept.
If the voice duration exceeds this value, PCPM terminates.
Limitation: The value for Max Answer Voice should be less than the value for Max
Answer Analysis.
Valid Range is 1 through 1048560 (Do not use 0).

425 Max Answer Silence

Specifies the maximum amount of continuous silence that answer can accept. If the
DEFAULT = 496 (msec)
silence duration exceeds this value, PCPM terminates.
Limitation: The value for Max Answer Silence should be less than the value for Max
Answer Analysis.
Valid Range is 1 through 1048560 (Do not use 0).

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
65

426 - WbEnergy
DEFAULT = 32 (-45 dB)
Minimum amount of energy that a signal (wide band) must have for PCPM analysis
to consider it a sound sample. If the signal level does not meet this minimum value,
PCPM analysis considers the sample a silence. This parameter, together with the
values for Sound Spike and Sound Dropout, dictate how PCPM identifies tone
cadences.

For lines with a low noise level, you can adjust this parameter value to avoid
detecting false answer indications. Lines that experience a significant noise level
might require additional adjustments in the tone table to avoid false detection.
Valid Range is 1 (-60 dB) through 32767 (-15dB).
Each time you double this value, you add 3 dB to the energy threshold. Each time you
halve this value, you subtract 3 dB from the energy threshold. The value for 15 dB is
an exception to these rules: the value for 15 dB is 1 less than twice the value for 18
dB.

Channel External Parameters (430 TO 456) Rhetorex

430 Max Start Silence

Specifies the duration of the longest valid silence period that PCPM waits for at the
DEFAULT =
beginning of an outbound analysis. If the initial silence duration exceeds this value,
524272 (16-msec units)
PCPM considers that no tone is present on the line.

This value should be greater than the value for Sound Dropout and also greater than
the maximum silence period of any tone in the tone table.
Valid Range is 1 through 524272 in milliseconds

431 Max Start Sound

Specifies the duration of the longest valid sound period that PCPM waits for at the
DEFAULT =
beginning of an outbound analysis. If the initial sound duration exceeds this value,
4992 (16-msec units)
PCPM considers that no tone is present on the line.

This value should be greater than the value for Sound Spike and also greater than the
maximum silence period of any tone in the tone table.
Valid Range is 1 through 524272 in milliseconds
I&M

432 Min Speech

Specifies the minimum duration of voice that must be present on the line for PCPM to DEFAULT = 48 (msec)
?
consider the call answered.
Valid Range is 1 through 1048560 in milliseconds

433 PCPM Delay

Specifies the amount of time that PCPM waits after outbound PCPM starts before it
DEFAULT = 0
begins to analyze tones. This parameter allows the application to specify an amount of
time tat PCPM waits for the audio on the line to stabilize.

For example, some switches send a few spurious signals before the ringback (or busy)
signal starts. In such cases, set the PCPM Delay value to a non-zero value to avoid
detecting false answer conditions that the spurious signals can trigger.
Valid Range is 1 through 1048560 in milliseconds, 0 represents no delay

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

66
Installation

434 Start Segment

Specifies the deglitched segment that PCPM analysis starts on. A segment is either a
DEFAULT = 0
period of silence or a period of sound on the line. It is considered deglitched once its
duration exceeds the threshold specified by the value in the Sound Dropout or Sound
Spike field.

PCPM analysis normally starts as soon as the function is called. However, older
switches can generate some signals on the line during an outbound call that are not
part of the ringback tone. If this happens, you should increase this segment value to a
value greater than zero.

If a value other than zero is specified for Start Segment, the PCPM algorithm
considers the first segment to be the first sound segment it receives. This eliminates
the uncertainty caused by not knowing whether there will be a silence period
preceding the first tone.
Valid Range is 1 through 255, 0 represents Start PCPM Immediately

435 Max Rings

Specifies the number of ringback cycles that PCPM waits for before it terminates
DEFAULT = 4 (ring cycles)
analysis and returns this tone's ID. If the number of ringback cycles exceeds this
value, PCPM considers the call unanswered. Ringback tones differ from non-ringback
tones in that PCPM must wait several cycles after detecting a ringback tone before it
terminates to give the called party a chance to answer the call. Non-ringback tones, on
the other hand, must be detected as fast as possible.
Valid Range is 1 through 255

436 Min Cycles

Specifies the minimum number of full cycles of a non-ringback-type tone that PCPM
DEFAULT = 2 (ring cycles)
must detect before it terminates analysis and returns this tone's ID.

Ringback tones differ from non-ringback tones in that PCPM must wait several cycles
after detecting a ringback tone before it terminates to give the called party a chance to
answer the call. Non-ringback tones, on the other hand, must be detected as fast as
possible.
Valid Range is 1 through 255

437 Sound Spike

Specifies the maximum duration of a sound signal that PCPM analysis considers a
DEFAULT = 112 (msec)
I&M
glitch (spike) on the line. If the amount of time PCPM detects sound on the line does
not exceed the value for this parameter, this sound signal is considered a spike (noise)
and PCPM ignores it. The duration of the spike is added to the duration of the silence
that PCPM was previously detecting.
?

The value for Sound Spike should be less than the duration of all sound elements that
are a part of frequency-only tones.
Valid Range is 1 through 4080 in milliseconds

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
67

438 Sound Dropout

Specifies the maximum duration of a silence signal that PCPM analysis considers a
DEFAULT = 112 (msec)
glitch (dropout) on the line. If the amount of time PCPM detects the absence of sound
(silence) on the line does not exceed the value for this parameter, this absence of
sound is considered a temporary and unexpected loss of signal (a dropout) and PCPM
ignores it. The duration of the dropout is added to the duration of the sound that
PCPM was previously detecting.

This value should be less that the duration of all silence elements in the tone table.
Valid Range is 1 through 4080 in milliseconds

439 PVC Spike

Specifies the maximum duration of a voice signal that PCPM analysis considers a
DEFAULT = 16 (msec)
glitch (spike) on the line. If the amount of time PCPM detects voice on the line does
not exceed the value for this parameter, this voice signal is considered a spike (noise)
and PCPM ignores it. The duration of the spike is added to the duration of the absence
of voice segment that PCPM was previously detecting.

This value should be less than the value for Min Speech.
Valid Range is 1 through 4080 in milliseconds

440 PVC Dropout

Specifies the maximum duration of a voice signal that PCPM analysis considers a
DEFAULT = 16 (msec)
glitch (spike) on the line. If the amount of time PCPM detects the absence of voice on
the line does not exceed the value for this parameter, this absence of sound is
considered a temporary and unexpected loss of signal (a dropout) and PCPM ignores
it. The duration of the dropout is added to the duration of the sound that PCPM was
previously detecting.
Valid Range is 1 through 4080 in milliseconds
441 Term Spike

Specifies the maximum duration of a frequency signal that PCPM considers a glitch
DEFAULT = 32 (msec)
(spike) during background PCPM. This PCPM analysis operates while other voice
processing activities (play, record, or wait for digit) are ongoing to determine whether
the line receives any user-specified tones.

If the amount of time PCPM detects a certain frequency on the line does not exceed
the value for this parameter, the frequency is considered a spike (noise) and PCPM
ignores it. The duration of the spike is added to the duration of the silence that PCPM
I&M
was previously detecting.

This value should be less than the duration of all sound elements of terminating tones
in the tone table.
?
Valid Range is 1 through 4080 in milliseconds

442 Term Dropout

Specifies the maximum duration of a loss of frequency that PCPM analysis considers
DEFAULT = 160
a glitch (dropout) on the line. If the amount of time PCPM detects a loss of frequency
on the line does not exceed the value for this parameter, this loss of frequency is
considered a temporary and unexpected loss of signal (a dropout) and PCPM ignores
it. The duration of the dropout is added to the duration of the frequency that PCPM
was previously detecting.

The value for Term Dropout should be less than the duration of all silence elements of
terminating tones in the table.
Valid Range is 1 through 4080 in milliseconds

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

68
Installation

443 Frequency Lock

Specifies the length of time for the detection algorithm to detect a frequency and
DEFAULT = 32
determine that it is the tone's main frequency, it uses this frequency to analyze a
segment's characteristics.

The value for Frequency Lock needs to be less than the duration of all sound elements
in the tone table that contain a frequency (excluding cadence-only and frequency-only
tones). This value also needs to be less than the value of Sound Spike.
Valid Range is 1 through 4080 in milliseconds

444 Max Frequency Shifts

Defines the maximum number of times that the receive frequency can change before
DEFAULT = 5 (shifts)
PCPM detects another valid frequency (or silence). If PCPM detects more than this
number of frequency shifts, it considers that voice is present on the line and assumes
the call is answered. The frequency shift count is reset every time a frequency (or
silence) becomes valid (exceeds the spike or dropout threshold).
Valid range is 1 through 255 (Do not use 0)

445 Max Frequency Drops

Defines the maximum number of times that a frequency can drop before PCPM
DEFAULT = 5 (drops)
detects another valid frequency (or silence). If the number of frequency drops exceeds
this value, PCPM considers the call answered.

The PCPM algorithm defines a frequency drop as the detection of a silence sample
(16 msec) that turns out to be part of a glitch (meaning the silence period does not
exceed the duration specified by Sound Dropout). The frequency drop count is reset
every time a frequency (or silence) becomes valid (exceeds the spike or dropout
threshold).
Valid range is 1 through 255 (Do not use 0)

446 Max Unmatched Seg.

Specifies the maximum number of segments that can be received that do not match
DEFAULT = 3 (unmatched
any part of a tone in the tone table. A segment is a period of sound or a period of
segments)
silence of a certain duration. Unlike the frequency shift and frequency drop counters,
the unmatched segment counter is not reset when a valid frequency or silence period
is detected.
Valid range is 1 through 255 (Do not use 0)

I&M
447 Frequency Cover
DEFAULT = 70 (%)
Specifies the percentage of a segment duration that a frequency must cover for PCPM
analysis to consider the segment valid. PCPM analysis compares the duration of the
sound segment with the duration of the detected frequency, if any. When the
?
frequency covers less than the specified percentage of segment duration, PCPM
analysis considers the call answered.
Valid Range is 1 through 100 (Do not use 0)

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
69

448 PCPM Optimize
DEFAULT = 1
Specifies a value that determines whether to optimize PCPM analysis for voice or
tone detection. When this value is set to optimize PCPM analysis for voice detection,
the algorithm becomes much more sensitive to detecting a voice signal and considers
most deviations from a clear signal as a potential voice signal. In particular, PCPM
analysis uses the values for Frequency Cover, Max Frequency Drops, Max Frequency
Shifts, and Max Unmatched Segments to detect voice and does not use these values
when PCPM is optimized to detect tones.

If PCPM analysis is performed on noisy lines, or cadence-only tones are present in
the tone table, se this parameter's value to 0 to avoid detecting false answer
indications. If there is a cadence-only tone in the tone table, PCPM Optimize must be
set to 0.
Valid Range is 0 (optimize for tone detection) or 1 (optimize for voice detection)

449 Ignore Frequency Dev.
DEFAULT = 1
Specifies a value that determines whether PCPM disregards or considers small
frequency deviations. Setting this parameter to True (1) is equivalent to dynamically
adjusting the PCPM filter parameters. This value allows PCPM to still consider
samples good even though they do not satisfy specified criteria. When this parameter
is set to False (0), deviations are counted as frequency shifts. This value makes PCPM
analysis much more sensitive to noise on the line and can lead to false reports of call-
answered conditions for noisy lines.
Valid Range is 0 (False count deviations as frequency shifts) or 1 (True Ignore
small frequency deviations)

450 Enable Ringback Tracking

Specifies a value that allows the outbound PCPM function to detect call-answered
DEFAULT = 1
conditions faster based on changes in the characteristics of ringback tones.

When PCPM detects a ringback tone and the parameter's value is set to True (1),
PCPM assumes that any change in this tone signals a call-answered condition. PCPM
constantly monitors the signal on the line to identify any change in the signal (change
of cadence, break in cadence or change of frequency) and reports a call-answered
condition as soon as it detects a change. Setting this value to False (0) causes PCPM
to wait for other events (voice or unmatched segments) before it considers the call
answered.
Valid Range is 0 (False wait for other events to consider the call answered) or 1
I&M
(True consider the call answered after detecting any change of signal
characteristics)

451 Enable PVC

?
Specifies a value that determines use of a proprietary PVC algorithm to detect the
DEFAULT = 1
presence of a human voice on the line. Enabling this feature provides a faster and
more reliable method of detecting call-answered situations.
Valid Range is 0 (False disables use of the PVC algorithm) or 1 (True enables use
of the PVC algorithm)

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

70
Installation

452 Enable Answer Analysis

Specifies a value that enables analysis of answer characteristics. When enabled, this
DEFAULT = 0
type of analysis returns parameters that allow the application to distinguish different
types of greetings (for example, a greeting spoken by a live person, a business
receptionist, or an answering machine). If enabled, the greeting (answer) is analyzed
until a termination condition is met.

Answer analysis only starts if the PCPM algorithm determines that the call has been
answered due to presence of voice on the line. If answer analysis is disabled (the
parameter is set to False), PCPM returns an indication of answer as soon as it
identifies one.
Valid Range is 0 (False Disables answer analysis) or 1 (True Enables answer
analysis)

453 Max Answer Analysis
DEFAULT = 125 (2
Specifies the maximum amount of time to run answer analysis. If answer analysis
seconds)
runs for this amount if time without detecting the amount of voice or silence specified
by Max Answer Voice or Max Answer Silence (below), it terminates.
Valid Range is 1 through 65535 in 16 msec increments (Do not use 0).

454 Max Answer Voice
DEFAULT = 496 (msec)
Specifies the maximum amount of continuous voice that answer analysis can accept.
If the voice duration exceeds this value, PCPM terminates.
Limitation: The value for Max Answer Voice should be less than the value for Max
Answer Analysis.
Valid Range is 1 through 1048560 (Do not use 0).

455 Max Answer Silence

Specifies the maximum amount of continuous silence that answer can accept. If the
DEFAULT = 496 (msec)
silence duration exceeds this value, PCPM terminates.
Limitation: The value for Max Answer Silence should be less than the value for Max
Answer Analysis.
Valid Range is 1 through 1048560 (Do not use 0).

456 - WbEnergy
DEFAULT = 32 (-45 dB)
Minimum amount of energy that a signal (wide band) must have for PCPM analysis
to consider it a sound sample. If the signal level does not meet this minimum value,
PCPM analysis considers the sample a silence. This parameter, together with the
I&M
values for Sound Spike and Sound Dropout, dictate how PCPM identifies tone
cadences.

For lines with a low noise level, you can adjust this parameter value to avoid
?
detecting false answer indications. Lines that experience a significant noise level
might require additional adjustments in the tone table to avoid false detection.
Valid Range is 1 (-60 dB) through 32767 (-15dB).
Each time you double this value, you add 3 dB to the energy threshold. Each time you
halve this value, you subtract 3 dB from the energy threshold. The value for 15 dB is
an exception to these rules: the value for 15 dB is 1 less than twice the value for 18
dB.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
71

FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Channel Other Parameters (460 TO 486)
Rhetorex

460 Max Start Silence

Specifies the duration of the longest valid silence period that PCPM waits for at the
DEFAULT =
beginning of an outbound analysis. If the initial silence duration exceeds this value,
524272 (16-msec units)
PCPM considers that no tone is present on the line.

This value should be greater than the value for Sound Dropout and also greater than
the maximum silence period of any tone in the tone table.
Valid Range is 1 through 524272 in milliseconds

461 Max Start Sound

Specifies the duration of the longest valid sound period that PCPM waits for at the
DEFAULT =
beginning of an outbound analysis. If the initial sound duration exceeds this value,
4992 (16-msec units)
PCPM considers that no tone is present on the line.

This value should be greater than the value for Sound Spike and also greater than the
maximum silence period of any tone in the tone table.
Valid Range is 1 through 524272 in milliseconds

462 Min Speech

Specifies the minimum duration of voice that must be present on the line for PCPM to DEFAULT = 48 (msec)
consider the call answered.
Valid Range is 1 through 1048560 in milliseconds

463 PCPM Delay

Specifies the amount of time that PCPM waits after outbound PCPM starts before it
DEFAULT = 0
begins to analyze tones. This parameter allows the application to specify an amount of
time tat PCPM waits for the audio on the line to stabilize.

For example, some switches send a few spurious signals before the ringback (or busy)
signal starts. In such cases, set the PCPM Delay value to a non-zero value to avoid
detecting false answer conditions that the spurious signals can trigger.
Valid Range is 1 through 1048560 in milliseconds, 0 represents no delay

464 Start Segment

Specifies the deglitched segment that PCPM analysis starts on. A segment is either a
DEFAULT = 0
I&M
period of silence or a period of sound on the line. It is considered deglitched once its
duration exceeds the threshold specified by the value in the Sound Dropout or Sound
Spike field.
?

PCPM analysis normally starts as soon as the function is called. However, older
switches can generate some signals on the line during an outbound call that are not
part of the ringback tone. If this happens, you should increase this segment value to a
value greater than zero.

If a value other than zero is specified for Start Segment, the PCPM algorithm
considers the first segment to be the first sound segment it receives. This eliminates
the uncertainty caused by not knowing whether there will be a silence period
preceding the first tone.
Valid Range is 1 through 255, 0 represents Start PCPM Immediately

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

72
Installation

465 Max Rings

Specifies the number of ringback cycles that PCPM waits for before it terminates
DEFAULT = 4 (ring cycles)
analysis and returns this tone's ID. If the number of ringback cycles exceeds this
value, PCPM considers the call unanswered. Ringback tones differ from non-ringback
tones in that PCPM must wait several cycles after detecting a ringback tone before it
terminates to give the called party a chance to answer the call. Non-ringback tones, on
the other hand, must be detected as fast as possible.
Valid Range is 1 through 255

466 Min Cycles

Specifies the minimum number of full cycles of a non-ringback-type tone that PCPM
DEFAULT = 2 (ring cycles)
must detect before it terminates analysis and returns this tone's ID.

Ringback tones differ from non-ringback tones in that PCPM must wait several cycles
after detecting a ringback tone before it terminates to give the called party a chance to
answer the call. Non-ringback tones, on the other hand, must be detected as fast as
possible.
Valid Range is 1 through 255

467 Sound Spike

Specifies the maximum duration of a sound signal that PCPM analysis considers a
DEFAULT = 112 (msec)
glitch (spike) on the line. If the amount of time PCPM detects sound on the line does
not exceed the value for this parameter, this sound signal is considered a spike (noise)
and PCPM ignores it. The duration of the spike is added to the duration of the silence
that PCPM was previously detecting.

The value for Sound Spike should be less than the duration of all sound elements that
are a part of frequency-only tones.
Valid Range is 1 through 4080 in milliseconds

468 Sound Dropout

Specifies the maximum duration of a silence signal that PCPM analysis considers a
DEFAULT = 112 (msec)
glitch (dropout) on the line. If the amount of time PCPM detects the absence of sound
(silence) on the line does not exceed the value for this parameter, this absence of
sound is considered a temporary and unexpected loss of signal (a dropout) and PCPM
ignores it. The duration of the dropout is added to the duration of the sound that
PCPM was previously detecting.

I&M
This value should be less that the duration of all silence elements in the tone table.
Valid Range is 1 through 4080 in milliseconds

469 PVC Spike

?
Specifies the maximum duration of a voice signal that PCPM analysis considers a
DEFAULT = 16 (msec)
glitch (spike) on the line. If the amount of time PCPM detects voice on the line does
not exceed the value for this parameter, this voice signal is considered a spike (noise)
and PCPM ignores it. The duration of the spike is added to the duration of the absence
of voice segment that PCPM was previously detecting.

This value should be less than the value for Min Speech.
Valid Range is 1 through 4080 in milliseconds

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
73

470 PVC Dropout

Specifies the maximum duration of a voice signal that PCPM analysis considers a
DEFAULT = 16 (msec)
glitch (spike) on the line. If the amount of time PCPM detects the absence of voice on
the line does not exceed the value for this parameter, this absence of sound is
considered a temporary and unexpected loss of signal (a dropout) and PCPM ignores
it. The duration of the dropout is added to the duration of the sound that PCPM was
previously detecting.
Valid Range is 1 through 4080 in milliseconds

471 Term Spike

Specifies the maximum duration of a frequency signal that PCPM considers a glitch
DEFAULT = 32 (msec)
(spike) during background PCPM. This PCPM analysis operates while other voice
processing activities (play, record, or wait for digit) are ongoing to determine whether
the line receives any user-specified tones.

If the amount of time PCPM detects a certain frequency on the line does not exceed
the value for this parameter, the frequency is considered a spike (noise) and PCPM
ignores it. The duration of the spike is added to the duration of the silence that PCPM
was previously detecting.

This value should be less than the duration of all sound elements of terminating tones
in the tone table.
Valid Range is 1 through 4080 in milliseconds

472 Term Dropout

Specifies the maximum duration of a loss of frequency that PCPM analysis considers
DEFAULT = 160
a glitch (dropout) on the line. If the amount of time PCPM detects a loss of frequency
on the line does not exceed the value for this parameter, this loss of frequency is
considered a temporary and unexpected loss of signal (a dropout) and PCPM ignores
it. The duration of the dropout is added to the duration of the frequency that PCPM
was previously detecting.

The value for Term Dropout should be less than the duration of all silence elements of
terminating tones in the table.
Valid Range is 1 through 4080 in milliseconds

473 Frequency Lock

Specifies the length of time for the detection algorithm to detect a frequency and
DEFAULT = 32
I&M
determine that it is the tone's main frequency, it uses this frequency to analyze a
segment's characteristics.

The value for Frequency Lock needs to be less than the duration of all sound elements
?
in the tone table that contain a frequency (excluding cadence-only and frequency-only
tones). This value also needs to be less than the value of Sound Spike.
Valid Range is 1 through 4080 in milliseconds

474 Max Frequency Shifts

Defines the maximum number of times that the receive frequency can change before
DEFAULT = 5 (shifts)
PCPM detects another valid frequency (or silence). If PCPM detects more than this
number of frequency shifts, it considers that voice is present on the line and assumes
the call is answered. The frequency shift count is reset every time a frequency (or
silence) becomes valid (exceeds the spike or dropout threshold).
Valid range is 1 through 255 (Do not use 0)

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

74
Installation

475 Max Frequency Drops

Defines the maximum number of times that a frequency can drop before PCPM
DEFAULT = 5 (drops)
detects another valid frequency (or silence). If the number of frequency drops exceeds
this value, PCPM considers the call answered.

The PCPM algorithm defines a frequency drop as the detection of a silence sample
(16 msec) that turns out to be part of a glitch (meaning the silence period does not
exceed the duration specified by Sound Dropout). The frequency drop count is reset
every time a frequency (or silence) becomes valid (exceeds the spike or dropout
threshold).
Valid range is 1 through 255 (Do not use 0)

476 Max Unmatched Seg.

Specifies the maximum number of segments that can be received that do not match
DEFAULT = 3 (unmatched
any part of a tone in the tone table. A segment is a period of sound or a period of
segments)
silence of a certain duration. Unlike the frequency shift and frequency drop counters,
the unmatched segment counter is not reset when a valid frequency or silence period
is detected.
Valid range is 1 through 255 (Do not use 0)

477 Frequency Cover
DEFAULT = 70 (%)
Specifies the percentage of a segment duration that a frequency must cover for PCPM
analysis to consider the segment valid. PCPM analysis compares the duration of the
sound segment with the duration of the detected frequency, if any. When the
frequency covers less than the specified percentage of segment duration, PCPM
analysis considers the call answered.
Valid Range is 1 through 100 (Do not use 0)

478 PCPM Optimize
DEFAULT = 1
Specifies a value that determines whether to optimize PCPM analysis for voice or
tone detection. When this value is set to optimize PCPM analysis for voice detection,
the algorithm becomes much more sensitive to detecting a voice signal and considers
most deviations from a clear signal as a potential voice signal. In particular, PCPM
analysis uses the values for Frequency Cover, Max Frequency Drops, Max Frequency
Shifts, and Max Unmatched Segments to detect voice and does not use these values
when PCPM is optimized to detect tones.

If PCPM analysis is performed on noisy lines, or cadence-only tones are present in
I&M
the tone table, se this parameter's value to 0 to avoid detecting false answer
indications. If there is a cadence-only tone in the tone table, PCPM Optimize must be
set to 0.
Valid Range is 0 (optimize for tone detection) or 1 (optimize for voice detection)
?

479 Ignore Frequency Dev.
DEFAULT = 1
Specifies a value that determines whether PCPM disregards or considers small
frequency deviations. Setting this parameter to True (1) is equivalent to dynamically
adjusting the PCPM filter parameters. This value allows PCPM to still consider
samples good even though they do not satisfy specified criteria. When this parameter
is set to False (0), deviations are counted as frequency shifts. This value makes PCPM
analysis much more sensitive to noise on the line and can lead to false reports of call-
answered conditions for noisy lines.
Valid Range is 0 (False count deviations as frequency shifts) or 1 (True Ignore
small frequency deviations)

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
75

480 Enable Ringback Tracking

Specifies a value that allows the outbound PCPM function to detect call-answered
DEFAULT = 1
conditions faster based on changes in the characteristics of ringback tones.

When PCPM detects a ringback tone and the parameter's value is set to True (1),
PCPM assumes that any change in this tone signals a call-answered condition. PCPM
constantly monitors the signal on the line to identify any change in the signal (change
of cadence, break in cadence or change of frequency) and reports a call-answered
condition as soon as it detects a change. Setting this value to False (0) causes PCPM
to wait for other events (voice or unmatched segments) before it considers the call
answered.
Valid Range is 0 (False wait for other events to consider the call answered) or 1
(True consider the call answered after detecting any change of signal
characteristics)

481 Enable PVC

Specifies a value that determines use of a proprietary PVC algorithm to detect the
DEFAULT = 1
presence of a human voice on the line. Enabling this feature provides a faster and
more reliable method of detecting call-answered situations.
Valid Range is 0 (False disables use of the PVC algorithm) or 1 (True enables use
of the PVC algorithm)

482 Enable Answer Analysis

Specifies a value that enables analysis of answer characteristics. When enabled, this
DEFAULT = 0
type of analysis returns parameters that allow the application to distinguish different
types of greetings (for example, a greeting spoken by a live person, a business
receptionist, or an answering machine). If enabled, the greeting (answer) is analyzed
until a termination condition is met.

Answer analysis only starts if the PCPM algorithm determines that the call has been
answered due to presence of voice on the line. If answer analysis is disabled (the
parameter is set to False), PCPM returns an indication of answer as soon as it
identifies one.
Valid Range is 0 (False Disables answer analysis) or 1 (True Enables answer
analysis)

483 Max Answer Analysis
DEFAULT = 125 (2
Specifies the maximum amount of time to run answer analysis. If answer analysis
seconds)
runs for this amount if time without detecting the amount of voice or silence specified
I&M
by Max Answer Voice or Max Answer Silence (below), it terminates.
Valid Range is 1 through 65535 in 16 msec increments (Do not use 0).

?
484 Max Answer Voice
DEFAULT = 496 (msec)
Specifies the maximum amount of continuous voice that answer analysis can accept.
If the voice duration exceeds this value, PCPM terminates.
Limitation: The value for Max Answer Voice should be less than the value for Max
Answer Analysis.
Valid Range is 1 through 1048560 (Do not use 0).

485 Max Answer Silence

Specifies the maximum amount of continuous silence that answer can accept. If the
DEFAULT = 496 (msec)
silence duration exceeds this value, PCPM terminates.
Limitation: The value for Max Answer Silence should be less than the value for Max
Answer Analysis.
Valid Range is 1 through 1048560 (Do not use 0).

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

76
Installation

486 - WbEnergy
DEFAULT = 32 (-45 dB)
Minimum amount of energy that a signal (wide band) must have for PCPM analysis
to consider it a sound sample. If the signal level does not meet this minimum value,
PCPM analysis considers the sample a silence. This parameter, together with the
values for Sound Spike and Sound Dropout, dictate how PCPM identifies tone
cadences.

For lines with a low noise level, you can adjust this parameter value to avoid
detecting false answer indications. Lines that experience a significant noise level
might require additional adjustments in the tone table to avoid false detection.
Valid Range is 1 (-60 dB) through 32767 (-15dB).
Each time you double this value, you add 3 dB to the energy threshold. Each time you
halve this value, you subtract 3 dB from the energy threshold. The value for 15 dB is
an exception to these rules: the value for 15 dB is 1 less than twice the value for 18
dB.

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
77

FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Channel Internal Parameters (400 - 417) 
Intel

400 Start Delay

The delay (in msec) after dialing has been completed and before starting analysis for
DEFAULT = 250 (msec)
Cadence Detection, Frequency Detection, and Positive Voice Detection.

401 Continuous No Signal

The maximum time (in msec) of silence (no signal) allowed immediately after
DEFAULT = 40000 (msec)
Cadence Detection begins. If exceeded, a no ringback is returned.

402 Loop Current Delay

The delay (in msec) after dialing has been completed and before beginning Loop
DEFAULT = 4000 (msec)
Current Detection. A value of 1 indicates to Disable Loop Current Detection.

403 Loop Current Delay 1

The delay (in msec) after Loop Current Delay detects a transient drop in loop current
DEFAULT = 100 (msec)
and before Call Analysis returns a connect to the application.

404 Hello Edge

The point at which a connect will be returned to the application.
DEFAULT = 2
Valid Range 1 (rising edge immediately when a connect is detected) or 2 (falling
edge after the end of the salutation.

405 Continuous Nonsilence

The maximum length (in msec) of the first or second period of nonsilence allowed. If
DEFAULT = 6500 (msec)
exceeded, a no ringback is returned.

406 Nonsilence Busy

The number of nonsilence periods (in addition to the number of rings before no
answer detection) to wait before returning a busy. Negative values a valid.
DEFAULT = 0

407 Intercept Mode Flag

This parameter enables or disables SIT-Frequency Detection, Positive Voice
DEFAULT = 5
Detection (PVD), and/or Positive Answering Machine Detection (PAMD), and selects
the mode of operation for Frequency Detection.

I&M
408 Number Before Beginning

Number of nonsilence periods (rings) before analysis begins.
DEFAULT = 1

409 Maximum Answer

?
The maximum allowable length (in msec) of Answer Size. When Answer Size
DEFAULT = 10000 (msec)
exceeds Maximum Answer, a connect is returned to the application.

410 Answer Deglitcher

The maximum silence period (in msec) allowed between words in a salutation. This
DEFAULT = -1 (msec)
parameter should be enabled only when you are interested in measuring the length of
the salutation. A value of 1 indicates to disable this condition.

411 Dial Tone Present

Length of time (in msec) that a dial tone must be continuously present.
DEFAULT = 1000 (msec)

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

78
Installation

412 Dial Tone Not Present

Maximum length of time (in msec) to wait before declaring dial tone failure.
DEFAULT = 3000 (msec)

413 Dial Tone Debounce

Maximum gap (in msec) allowed in an otherwise continuous dial tone before it is
DEFAULT = 100 (msec)
considered invalid.

414 PAMD Fail Time

Maximum time (in msec) to wait for Positive Answering Machine Detection or
DEFAULT = 4000 (msec)
Positive Voice Detection after a cadence break.

415 Minimum PAMD Ring

Minimum allowable ring duration (in msec) for Positive Answering Machine
DEFAULT = 1900 (msec)
Detection.

416 No Answer

Length of time (in msec) to wait after first ringback before deciding that the call is not DEFAULT = 30000 (msec)
answered.

417 Maximum Inter-ring Delay

Maximum time (in msec) to wait between consecutive ringback signals before
DEFAULT = 8000 (msec)
deciding that the call has been connected.

FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Channel External Parameters (430-447) - Intel

430 Start Delay

The delay (in msec) after dialing has been completed and before starting analysis for
DEFAULT = 250 (msec)
Cadence Detection, Frequency Detection, and Positive Voice Detection.

431 Continuous No Signal

The maximum time (in msec) of silence (no signal) allowed immediately after
DEFAULT = 40000 (msec)
Cadence Detection begins. If exceeded, a no ringback is returned.

432 Loop Current Delay

The delay (in msec) after dialing has been completed and before beginning Loop
DEFAULT = 4000 (msec)
Current Detection. A value of 1 indicates to Disable Loop Current Detection.
I&M

433 Loop Current Delay 1

The delay (in msec) after Loop Current Delay detects a transient drop in loop current
DEFAULT = 100 (msec)
and before Call Analysis returns a connect to the application.
?

434 Hello Edge

The point at which a connect will be returned to the application.
DEFAULT = 2
Valid Range 1 (rising edge immediately when a connect is detected) or 2 (falling
edge after the end of the salutation.

435 Continuous Nonsilence

The maximum length (in msec) of the first or second period of nonsilence allowed. If
DEFAULT = 6500 (msec)
exceeded, a no ringback is returned.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
79

436 Nonsilence Busy

The number of nonsilence periods (in addition to the number of rings before no
answer detection) to wait before returning a busy. Negative values a valid.
DEFAULT = 0

437 Intercept Mode Flag

This parameter enables or disables SIT-Frequency Detection, Positive Voice
DEFAULT = 5
Detection (PVD), and/or Positive Answering Machine Detection (PAMD), and selects
the mode of operation for Frequency Detection.

438 Number Before Beginning

Number of nonsilence periods (rings) before analysis begins.
DEFAULT = 1

439 Maximum Answer

The maximum allowable length (in msec) of Answer Size. When Answer Size
DEFAULT = 10000 (msec)
exceeds Maximum Answer, a connect is returned to the application.

440 Answer Deglitcher

The maximum silence period (in msec) allowed between words in a salutation. This
DEFAULT = -1
parameter should be enabled only when you are interested in measuring the length of
the salutation. A value of 1 indicates to disable this condition.

441 Dial Tone Present

Length of time (in msec) that a dial tone must be continuously present in 10 msec
DEFAULT = 1000 (msec)
units.

442 Dial Tone Not Present

Maximum length of time (in msec) to wait before declaring dial tone failure.
DEFAULT = 3000 (msec)

443 Dial Tone Debounce

Maximum gap (in msec) allowed in an otherwise continuous dial tone before it is
DEFAULT = 100 (msec)
considered invalid.

444 PAMD Fail Time

Maximum time (in msec) to wait for Positive Answering Machine Detection or
DEFAULT = 4000 (msec)
Positive Voice Detection after a cadence break.

445 Minimum PAMD Ring

Minimum allowable ring duration (in msec) for Positive Answering Machine
DEFAULT = 1900 (msec)
I&M
Detection.

446 No Answer

?
Length of time (in msec) to wait after first ringback before deciding that the call is not DEFAULT = 30000 (msec)
answered.

447 Maximum Inter-ring Delay

Maximum time (in msec) to wait between consecutive ringback signals before
DEFAULT = 8000 (msec)
deciding that the call has been connected.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

80
Installation

FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Channel Other Parameters (460-477) - Intel

460 Start Delay

The delay (in msec) after dialing has been completed and before starting analysis for
DEFAULT = 250 (msec)
Cadence Detection, Frequency Detection, and Positive Voice Detection.

461 Continuous No Signal

The maximum time (in msec) of silence (no signal) allowed immediately after
DEFAULT = 40000 (msec)
Cadence Detection begins. If exceeded, a no ringback is returned.

462 Loop Current Delay

The delay (in msec) after dialing has been completed and before beginning Loop
DEFAULT = 4000 (msec)
Current Detection. A value of 1 indicates to Disable Loop Current Detection.

463 Loop Current Delay 1

The delay (in msec) after Loop Current Delay detects a transient drop in loop current
DEFAULT = 100 (msec)
and before Call Analysis returns a connect to the application.

464 Hello Edge

The point at which a connect will be returned to the application.
DEFAULT = 2
Valid Range 1 (rising edge immediately when a connect is detected) or 2 (falling
edge after the end of the salutation.

465 Continuous Nonsilence

The maximum length (in msec) of the first or second period of nonsilence allowed. If
DEFAULT = 6500 (msec)
exceeded, a no ringback is returned.

466 Nonsilence Busy

The number of nonsilence periods (in addition to the number of rings before no
answer detection) to wait before returning a busy. Negative values a valid.
DEFAULT = 0

467 Intercept Mode Flag

This parameter enables or disables SIT-Frequency Detection, Positive Voice
DEFAULT = 5
Detection (PVD), and/or Positive Answering Machine Detection (PAMD), and selects
the mode of operation for Frequency Detection.

468 Number Before Beginning

Number of nonsilence periods (rings) before analysis begins.
DEFAULT = 1
I&M

469 Maximum Answer

The maximum allowable length (in msec) of Answer Size. When Answer Size
DEFAULT = 10000 (msec)
?
exceeds Maximum Answer, a connect is returned to the application.

470 Answer Deglitcher

The maximum silence period (in msec) allowed between words in a salutation. This
DEFAULT = -1
parameter should be enabled only when you are interested in measuring the length of
the salutation. A value of 1 indicates to disable this condition.

471 Dial Tone Present

Length of time (in msec) that a dial tone must be continuously present.
DEFAULT = 1000 (msec)

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
81

472 Dial Tone Not Present

Maximum length of time (in msec) to wait before declaring dial tone failure.
DEFAULT = 3000 (msec)

473 Dial Tone Debounce

Maximum gap (in msec) allowed in an otherwise continuous dial tone before it is
DEFAULT = 100 (msec)
considered invalid.

474 PAMD Fail Time

Maximum time (in msec) to wait for Positive Answering Machine Detection or
DEFAULT = 4000 (msec)
Positive Voice Detection after a cadence break.

475 Minimum PAMD Ring

Minimum allowable ring duration (in msec) for Positive Answering Machine
DEFAULT = 1900 (msec)
Detection.

476 No Answer

Length of time (in msec) to wait after first ringback before deciding that the call is not DEFAULT = 30000 (msec)
answered.

477 Maximum Inter-ring Delay

Maximum time (in msec) to wait between consecutive ringback signals before
DEFAULT = 8000 (msec)
deciding that the call has been connected.

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

82
Installation

Section

12

12 - Program the Telephone System
Perfect Voice Office Pro interfaces and integrates with many telephone systems. Although the information
in this section applies to most installations, it should only be used as a general guideline. For specific
information on any telephone system, consult your Regional Sales Manager or Teleco Technical Support.
Telephone system programming should be performed in two stages.
1. In the first stage, the extensions for the automated attendant are programmed along with any other
changes that have a minimal impact on the operation of your customer's telecommunications (without
automated attendant).
2. The second stage of changes is not performed until Perfect Voice Office Pro has been fully configured
and all training is complete. This stage, often referred to as the cutover, is where you actually route and
forward calls to the automated attendant.
This section covers those tasks that should be performed in the first stage of telephone system
programming. But first, a brief list of telephone system requirements is noted.
Hardware Requirements
Following is a list of the hardware capabilities required by a telephone system to work with Perfect Voice
Office Pro:
· The telephone system must have the capacity of providing an analog port/extension for each port
of the Perfect Voice Office Pro system.
· The telephone system must have sufficient DTMF receiver channels to handle high traffic
simultaneous call transfers.
· RJ-14 telephone jacks must be installed within 2 feet of the Perfect Voice Office Pro system.
Perfect Voice Office Pro interfaces to the telephone system by plugging a 4-conductor modular
line cord into the RJ-14.
· A dedicated station or trunk port must be available for remote maintenance purposes.
I&M
Software/Programming Requirements
Following is a list of the software capabilities required by a telephone system to work with Perfect Voice
?
Office Pro:
The telephone system must have the capability of programming the analog station ports/extensions
for the Perfect Voice Office Pro system into a station hunt group.
Trunks must be able to be routed directly to the hunt group containing the Perfect Voice Office
Pro analog stations, bypassing the console or main answering position.
Calls must be able to be transferred from an analog station by means of a switch hook and/or
DTMF access code and retrieved in a busy or unanswered state by means of a switch hook and/or
DTMF access code.
The telephone system must have the ability to bypass Perfect Voice Office Pro during times when
the Perfect Voice Office Pro system is brought down for maintenance. Typical bypass capabilities
may be a selectable day/night mode that sends incoming traffic to the Perfect Voice Office Pro
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
83

hunt group during the night mode. Traffic is sent directly to the console or other in-house
answering position when the day mode is selected.
Perfect Voice Office Pro communicates through tone digits entered from the telephone keypad. It
is necessary that both analog and digital phones, including the console, on the telephone system
provide or have access to station-to-station signaling (DTMF generation).
Automated Attendant Extensions
The automated attendant/voice messaging extensions are usually programmed into a hunt group or UCD
group. If Perfect Voice Office Pro is configured as the primary attendant, incoming trunk calls are routed
to this hunt group. If possible, either include the console station as the last member of the hunt group or
program calls to overflow to the console station. This ensures the proper handling of calls during peak and
service periods.
Automated attendant extensions should be programmed not to receive any call-waiting or camp-on tones.
Often, a Data Class of Service (for modems) is suitable for this purpose. Notify extensions also require this
if "call at desk" type of notification is used.
Automated attendant extensions require access to many DTMF receivers. A non-blocking situation is
ideal. If receivers are not already available, Perfect Voice Office Pro cannot transfer the call. By default,
the system is programmed to check for dialtone before attempting to perform a call transfer. If no DTMF
receivers are available at that time, Perfect Voice Office Pro informs the caller that all circuits are busy and
to try their call again later.
In some configurations, Perfect Voice Office Pro may perform supervised transfers. Make sure the transfer
recall time and the hold recall time (also referred to as call forward time, call coverage time, etc.) is
programmed to be greater than that configured for Perfect Voice Office Pro to pull the call back.
Outdial Notification Extension
All of the Perfect Voice Office Pro extensions are usually responsible for answering calls, transferring
calls, and recording messages. The last channel of the Perfect Voice Office Pro ports is also configured to
perform outdialing for new message notification.
Ensure that the Notify extension is configured with the appropriate outdial capabilities. Consider whether
or not notifications will be made via a long distance call. The trunk access codes required by the telephone
system for both local and long distance dialing must be entered in the Outcalling Parameters of the Perfect
Voice Office Pro. This port may also perform message lamp Notification and should be considered when
configuring the class of service for this port.
I&M
Integration Parameters
If the telephone system supports integration, configure its parameters appropriately. If you aren't familiar
?
with the telephone system's integration capabilities, consult the manufacturer's documentation. If Perfect
Voice Office Pro was ordered with the proper information on the telephone system, it is pre-configured for
the appropriate type of integration.
Bypass Mode
Every system should have a reliable method of bypassing the automated attendant. A common method for
bypassing Perfect Voice Office Pro is to program (1) a night mode on the telephone system that routes
calls to the Perfect Voice Office Pro hunt group, and (2) a day mode which routes calls to the human
attendant. This method provides your customer with a convenient method of bypassing Perfect Voice
Office Pro during periods of system maintenance. Night mode is preferred for Perfect Voice Office Pro
operation, since many telephone systems automatically come back up in night mode after an extended
power outage.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

84
Installation

Another method of bypassing Perfect Voice Office Pro is to program each Perfect Voice Office Pro
extension to forward all calls to the operator console. This may have to be done by plugging in a 2500 set
into each extension and executing the call forwarding code. Since call forwarding may interfere with the
function of the hunt group, this and any other method of bypassing Perfect Voice Office Pro should be
verified.

Other Modifications
Some telephone system programming tasks should be delayed until other tasks are completed. Anything
considered as part of the "final cutover" should not be performed until the training of the System
Administrator and the End Users and any necessary modifications to the Perfect Voice Office Pro
configuration are completed. This includes at least the following:
Forwarding stations to Perfect Voice Office Pro.
Routing trunk calls to Perfect Voice Office Pro.
Changing call coverage paths to Perfect Voice Office Pro.

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
85

Section

13

13 - Install the Desktop Interface
The Desktop PC interface of Perfect Voice Office Pro simplifies the way Users handle messages. From
the desktop PC (which must be connected to the LAN), Users have access to their voice messages as
well as information about each call and contact. Although the Desktop PC interface may be
implemented with only a telephone, to take full advantage of it, the PC should be equipped with a
multimedia sound device such as a sound card, speakers, and a microphone. These devices allow the
User to listen and record messages faster and easier than with only a telephone. Perfect Voice Office
Pro is pre-configured for 5 desktop Users. More desktop Users may be added.

N O T E
The Perfect Voice Office Pro server must be installed and connected to the network
before installing the desktop software. Refer to "Setting Up the Network" earlier in
this section for more information on the network settings for the desktop client PC.
In addition, the User must be enabled as a desktop User. To enable, on the system,
select the appropriate mailbox, select the "Personal Options" tab and select "Desktop
User".

Install the Desktop Software
1. Insert Disk 1 into the CD-ROM drive. The Welcome dialog appears.
2. Click Next. The License Agreement dialog appears.
3. Select I Agree and click Next. The Choose Software dialog appears.
4. Select Client Software and click Next. The Client Software dialog appears.
5. Select the Desktop, Call Manager Forms, and Copy Client installs to network location and
then click Next.
6. The Welcome dialog appears. Click Next.
7. The License Agreement dialog appears. Select I Agree and click Next.
I&M
8. The Type of Installation dialog appears. Select New Installation and click Next.
9. The Select Destination dialog appears. Select the destination to install to and click Next.
10. The Ready to Install dialog appears. Click Next.
?
11. The installation begins. When the installation is complete, the Config dialog appears. At this point
you can select the Data Access type. There are three options:
RPC
UNC
Drive Mapping
To configure for RPC:
In the Data Access drop-down list, select RPC.
N o t e
If RPC is selected, DCom must be configured. Please see "Configuring DCOM on
the Server" for more information.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

86
Installation

In the Protocol drop-down list, select TCP/IP.
In the Server IP Address, enter the PVO Pro server IP address.
Select the Use SessionQ checkbox and click OK.
To configure for UNC:
In the Data Access drop-down list, select UNC.
In the Voicemail Server Name field, enter the voicemail server name.
In the Data Share Name field, enter the drive where the system files reside that you want to
share.
In the Protocol drop-down list, select TCP/IP.
In the Server IP Address field, enter the PVO Pro server IP address.
Select the Use SessionQ checkbox and click OK.
To configure for Drive Mapping:
In the Data Access drop-down list, select Drive Mapping.
In the Data Drive drop-down list, select the drive to use.
In the Voicemail Server Name field, enter the voicemail server name.
In the Protocol drop-down list, select TCP/IP.
In the Server IP Address field, enter the PVO Pro server IP address.
Select the Use SessionQ checkbox and click OK.

12. When the configuration of the Data Access type is complete, the "Installation Complete" dialog
appears. Click OK to finish.
13. The Installation Wizard begins the Call Manager Forms installation.

Installing Call Manager Forms
1. The Call Manager Forms Welcome dialog appears. Click Next.
2. The License Agreement dialog appears. Select I Agree and click Next.
I&M
3. The Features dialog appears. Select the Call Manager and Outlook Forms checkboxes and click
4. Next.
5. The Destination Directory dialog appears. Select the destination directory to install to and click
?
Next.
6. The Ready to Install dialog appears. Click Next.
7. The installation begins. The Options for Telephony Groupware dialog appears.
In the Data Access drop-down list, select RPC.
In the Voicemail Server IP Address field, enter the voicemail server IP address.
In the Voice Format drop-down list, select the voice format to use.
In the Fax Viewer field, enter your default fax viewer application.
Select the New Call Popup (Popup interface displaying caller) and Use Phone Formatting
(Formats phone number with hyphens) checkboxes.
Select the PIM Integration
o None or Goldmine If you select None or Goldmine, proceed to step 8.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
87

o ACT! Or Maximizer If you select ACT! Or Maximizer, select the Auto Add
Record on Not Found field if you want to add all new contacts not found in your
current contact database. Proceed to step 8.
o Outlook If you select Outlook, select the Auto Add Record on Not Found field if
you want to add all new contacts not found in your current contact database. Select
Search Public Contacts if you want to search your existing public folders for
contacts. Select Eliminate New Call Popup, if found if you want to eliminate pop
ups from Outlook. Proceed to step 8.
o Custom ActiveX--If you select Custom ActiveX, enter the ActiveX Class Name.
This is used for custom applications for caller ID. Proceed to step 8.

8. The Install VoiceFax Messaging Outlook Form dialog appears. Click OK. Press Enter three times
when the Outlook warning dialogs appear. Click OK.
9. The Choose Profile dialog appears. Leave the Profile Name as set by default and click OK.
10. The Digital Signature Not found dialog appears. Click Yes.
11. The Found New Hardware Device dialog appears.
12. The Digital Signature Not Found (unimodem) appears. Click Yes.
13. The Installation Completed dialog appears. Click Finish. The Call Manager, Outlook Forms, and
CTI Dialer installation is complete.
Caution: Following the install of Lan-LinX and Call Manager Forms, the administrator of the
machine must give users the permission to use the applications. To do this:
Setting the Desktop permission:
In the Windows Explorer, navigate to c:\Programs Files.
Right-click the folder and select Properties.
Select the Security tab, and select the Allow checkbox corresponding to the Full Control
permission.
Click Apply and then OK. The permission is now set.

Setting the Groupware Forms permission:
In the Windows Explorer, navigate to c:\Programs Files.
Right-click the InxplyrOL folder and select Properties.
I&M
Select the Security tab, and select the Allow checkbox corresponding to the Full Control
permission.
?
Click Apply and then OK. The permission is now set.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

88
Installation

Configuring DCOM on the Server
DCOM server is a utility that is required in order for the Perfect Voice Office Pro server to connect
with the Desktop clients. If the Desktop Interface is not going to be used, it is not necessary to install
this utility.

After Perfect Voice Office Pro is installed, the installation program registers the DCOM server by
adding the following string to the registry: esnavmam.exe /RegServer

1. First, run the DCOM configuration program C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\DCOMCNFG.EXE (for
Windows NT/2000 systems) or C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM\DCOMCNFG.EXE (for Windows 95
and 98) by selecting Start, Run from the main Windows screen and typing DCOMCNFG.

2. If the DCOM registration was successful, the list of applications that appears will contain the
string: esnavmam.
3. Highlight the esnavmam string and select the
Default Properties tab. Ensure the following
parameters are set:
· Enable Distributed COM on this computer must
be checked;
· Enable COM Internet Services on this computer
must be checked;
· Default Authentication Level is Connect;
· Default Impersonation Level is Identify.
I&M
· The others parameters will remain unchecked.
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
89

4. When these values are set, select the Default Security tab.
A screen similar to this appears.
· Under the Default Access Permissions, add a new
User called Everyone (if not already added) and set
the Access Type as Allow Access.
· Under the Default Launch Permissions, add a new
User called Everyone (if not already added) and set
the Access Type as Allow Launch.

5. Under the Default Configuration Permissions, add a
new User called Everyone (if not already added) and
set the Access Type as Full Control. Then, add another
User called Interactive (if not already added) and set
the Access Type for this User as Full Control.

6. Once the User has been properly configured, select
the Default Protocols tab. In the list of DCOM
protocols, ensure that Connection-oriented
TCP/IP exists and is the first item if multiple
entries exist. If Connection-oriented TCP/IP does
not exist, click the Add button and select it. To
I&M
make the Connection-oriented TCP/IP option the
first in the list, use the "Move Up" button as
needed.
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

90
Installation

7. Once this is finished, return to the Applications
tab and click on the button Properties.
8. On the General tab, set Authentication Level as
Default.

9. Select the Location tab. Ensure that the option Run
application on this computer is checked, and all
other options on this tab are unchecked.

I&M

?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
91

10. Select the Security tab. On this screen, ensure
that the following options are selected:
· Use default access permissions
· Use default launch permissions
· Use custom configuration permissions

11. Select the Identity tab. Ensure that The interactive
user is selected. Click the Apply button, then the OK
button.

The DCOM server configuration is completed. Shut down
your computer and restart it. Perfect Voice Office Pro will
automatically launch upon Startup.

I&M

?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

92
Installation

Section

14
14 - Testing the System
N O T E
You should test all connections and configuration before beginning the training. If
you want to do supervised calls and you encounter problems while testing, you may
need to perform call analysis. Refer to the Appendix for details on performing call
analysis.

Test

Expected Action
Place an Outside Call to:
· No-Answer Station
Hear No-Answer mailbox greeting

· Busy Station*
Hear Busy mailbox greeting

· DND Station
Hear Busy mailbox greeting

· Screening Station answered*
Hear Screening dialog

· Screening Station busy*
Hear Screening dialog

· Screening Station No-Answer*
Hear Screening dialog

· Hang-up during Company greeting
Disconnect

· Hang-up during transfer to Operator
Disconnect

· Hang-up during No-Answer Greeting
Disconnect

Place an Inside Call to:
· No-Answer Station
Hear No-Answer mailbox greeting

· Busy Station*
Hear Busy mailbox greeting

· DND Station
Hear Busy mailbox greeting

Check Screen Pops for:
· Outside Call

· New Message

Check Message Lamps
· New Message
Lamp on

· No New Messages
Lamp off

I&M
*if applicable
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
93

Section

15
15 - Training
System Administrator Training
The System Administrator is the primary on-site contact. It is very important to ensure that this person
feels comfortable with both the administration of the system and its usage. Users will look to the System
Administrator as the person who knows the system's features and capabilities. Lack of a well trained,
confident System Administrator will result in overdependence upon the technical personnel of the
installing dealer to perform system administrative tasks. The best method for training the Administrator is
to involve the person during the configuration of the system. This helps with familiarization of the
interface as well as lending assistance in determining certain system parameters. Every menu and
submenu of the Perfect Voice Office Pro interface should be explained and the Administrator should feel
comfortable with at least the following tasks:
Record system prompts and company greetings
Add a new User to the system
Record audiotext announcements
Adding holidays
Generate reports

User Training
The User is the most important person on every site. An untrained User community results in
dissatisfaction and frustration with the system. This, in turn, can lead to serious problems in getting the
system accepted politically. Since acceptance of the system, especially in the early stages of usage, is
critical to its success. Proper training is, in many ways, just as important as the technical aspects of the
installation.
During User training, the system should be fully functional, but not "on line" to outside callers. User
training sessions should be scheduled to include a step by step instruction on the features of the system
using the Quick Reference Cards as a guideline. Users should be encouraged to make copies of the card
for their home and desk area and to carry the card with them at all times. Ideally, the Users should be
I&M
given a day or two after their training sessions to familiarize themselves with the features before final cut
over. This time may be used to send messages to each other, record personal greetings, etc. Although the
tutorial takes most Users through the process of activating their message box, all Users should be able to
?
perform at least the following tasks in order to benefit from the system:
Select a personal greeting
Record a personal greeting
Listen to messages
Delete messages
Send a message to another User
Forward a message to another User

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

94
Installation

Console Operator Training
The console operator plays a crucial role in many telecommunications environments. The console
operator should be comfortable with at least the following tasks:
Transfer a caller to Perfect Voice Office Pro (main greeting)
Transfer a caller to a User's mailbox
Quickly leave a message for a User if a caller does not want to use the system
Explain the basic operation of the system to a caller (i.e., "....enter the person's extension...")

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Installation
95

Section

16

16 - Final Cutover
After Perfect Voice Office Pro and the telephone system are configured, any necessary modifications to the
configuration have been completed and the System Administrator and Users have been fully trained, the
final cutover can be performed.
Whether the system will be used as a primary, secondary or overflow attendant, CO lines may now be
routed to Perfect Voice Office Pro. Users' extensions may now be forwarded to the Perfect Voice Office
Pro.
Close contact needs to be kept with the site during this crucial period so that anything that was overlooked
during the installation can be quickly taken care of. The console operator and the System Administrator
are especially good sources of information during this period about how the system is functioning and how
well it is being accepted the Users and the caller community.

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

96
Installation

Section
17
17 - Teleco Technical Support
Teleco is committed to providing you with the best support in the industry. Every authorized dealer is
entitled to free technical support. For assistance, call between 8:30 A.M. and 8:30 P.M. Eastern Time,
Monday through Friday (Technical Support is unavailable from 12:30-1:30 PM Eastern Time on these
days.). Extended pager service is available for emergencies only from 8:30 A.M. until 8:30 PM Eastern
Time on Saturday and Sunday. In either case, a Technical Support Engineer is available during these time
periods to assist with any problems.
The assistance provided by Teleco Technical Support is significantly enhanced when you participate in the
troubleshooting process. In some cases, Teleco Technical Support will not be able to provide any help
without on-site assistance. Unless you are specifically told otherwise, do not expect Teleco Technical
Support to take care of the problem without your participation.
Before Calling Technical Support
Before calling Teleco Technical Support, ensure the following:
Make sure the problem that is being reported can be reproduced.
If the problem is intermittent, try to determine if the problem is traffic or port related.
Make sure all cable connections are secure.
To expedite a solution to the problem, gather the following information about the site:
Perfect Voice Office Pro version number
The number of ports.
Telephone system manufacturer, model and software version.
Original installation date of system.
Any recent changes to the telephone system or the Perfect Voice Office Pro system.
Procedure for accessing the modem (i.e. telephone system extension number, mailbox number,
etc.)
Extension numbers of the Perfect Voice Office Pro ports
I&M
If you are an authorized dealer, technical support on Perfect Voice Office Pro and other voice processing
products may be obtained by calling 1-800-755-1552. As a certified technician, you will have been
?
furnished with a dealer code and a personal PIN to access the tech support department queue. Support for
other Teleco products can be obtained by calling 864-297-4401 (fax: 864-297-9983). Please note that
systems with no modem access are subject to a denial of support services.
If you are not an authorized dealer, or if you do not meet the minimum requirements for free technical
support, you may purchase a block of support time. Call 864-297-4401, and select extension 280 for
pricing and terms.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

CHAPTER 3
Database

Configuration

I&M
?

I&M
?

I&M
?

Database Configuration

1

Section

1
1 - Introduction To System
Administration
What is Perfect Voice Office Pro?
Perfect Voice Office Pro is a voice processing system that functions with the telephone system to
enhance the organization's overall telecommunications environment. Perfect Voice Office Pro is a
unified messaging solution. System Administrative functions may also be performed via touchtones
on the telephone keypad or mouse clicks on the Windows interface from the Perfect Voice Office
Pro server.
Before You Begin
The System Administrator plays a key role in the everyday operation of Perfect Voice Office Pro. It
is important that the System Administrator understand at least the basics of how Perfect Voice Office
Pro operates. The System Administrator should be familiar with all features available to Users and
completely understand the User Guide before covering the material in this manual.
Basic System Maintenance
As mentioned above, the System Administrator performs a key role in the operation of Perfect Voice.
Following are some examples of the basic duties as a System Administrator.
Add a new User to the Perfect Voice Office Pro system.
Record an audiotext announcement.
Generate reports showing basic system information such as call counts, port usage, message
counts, available messaging space, etc.
Understand how to record the system greetings.
Questions and Answers
The System Administrator is responsible for answering questions from Users and having a working
I&M
knowledge of how the system operates. The System Administrator also helps new or inexperienced
Users become accustomed to using the system. Answers can be found in a variety of sources,
including at least the following:
?
Perfect Voice Office Pro Installation and Maintenance manual
The End User Guide
Contact with the vendor's technical personnel
Personal experience with the system

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

2

Database Configuration

Problem Reporting
In the event that a User or caller reports a problem with the system, the System Administrator and/or
the vendor's technical personnel work to determine the cause of, and solution to the problem. The
cause of a problem may be one or more of the following:
User error
Insufficient training
Incorrect system configuration
Faulty hardware
Faulty software
The System Administrator plays a central role in separating those issues that can be addressed within
the organization (i.e. training, User error, etc.) and those issues that need to be addressed by the
vendor's technical personnel. A complete description of the situation is vital in determining the
problem and the solution. Information should be gathered as to when the situation occurred, who
was involved (caller and/or User), what occurred and how the system was being used at the time.
I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

3

Section

2
2 - Steps for First-Time System
Configuration
Referring to the worksheets that you completed in the Installation section, follow the steps below to
configure the Perfect Voice Office Pro system.

Define the Company
1. Define the Company or
Create the Company or Companies and assign the appropriate
Companies.
Operator and Greetings. Set up the Business Hours, Single

Digit Options, and Multilingual options, if any.

2. Set up the Classes of Service.
Set Up the Classes of Service

Set up the necessary Classes of Service. Remember to

accommodate phantom mailboxes, multilingual users, the
operator, and special departmental considerations.

3. Add the mailboxes.

Add the Mailboxes.

Enter the first name and last name for every mailbox.
See Section 7 Mailbox

4. Create the Voice Menus.
Create the Voice Menus.

Based upon requirements, define any Voice Menus, schedules,
See Section 10 Voice Menus
special greetings, or Call Routing that is required.
I&M

5. Record Greetings, Verify Call
Routing, and Test the system.
Recording, Verifying, Testing
?
Record Company Greetings and get Users to record their own
mailbox greetings. Verify that calls are being routed to the
appropriate locations, and test that the Voice Mail system
performs as required.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

4

Database Configuration

Section

3
3 - The Main Menu
When the Perfect Voice Office Pro system starts for the first time, the Main Menu appears. This
screen shows basic system information as well as user-friendly buttons allowing access to mailboxes
(Mailbox), Classes of Service (Classes), company (Company), audiotext menus (Voice Menu), and
system parameters (Parameters).

The system date is displayed.

The current time is
Verify that this is the correct date.
displayed.
To change the system date, refer to

Commands option under the

System drop-down menu.

Mailbox Allows viewing, creating, and editing of mailboxes. See Section 7.
Classes Allows viewing, creating, and editing of Classes of Service. See Section 6.
Company Allows viewing, creating, and editing of Companies. See Section 5.
I&M
Voice Menu Allows viewing, creating, and editing of Voice Menus. See Section 10.
Parameters Allows viewing and editing of system parameters. See Installation section of this
manual.
?

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

5

Section

4

4 - Logging On/Off and Shutting Down
Perfect Voice Office Pro
Logging on to Perfect Voice Office Pro:
When you first begin the Perfect Voice Office Pro system,
you will not have access to any of Perfect Voice Office
Pro's other screens. To make any modifications to the
Perfect Voice Office Pro system, you must log on to the
system with the System Administrator's password.
To Log on:
From the Main Menu, Select "File", select "Log
on" (You may also press the F11 key)
Enter your password

The default password for the System Administrator is 9999. The Installer should have changed the
password. The System Administrator level allows routine maintenance to the system. It does not
allow access to the system parameters screen.

Logging off of Perfect Voice Office Pro
When you log off of the Perfect Voice Office Pro system, the first level of security is restored. This
ensures that no unauthorized changes can be made to the system.
To Log off:
From the Main Menu, Select "File", select "Log off" (You may also press the F12 key)

I&M
Shutting Down Perfect Voice Office Pro
?
From the Main Menu, Select "File", select "Shutdown" or select "System - Commands" and
click "Shutdown". The screen below appears. You may shut down immediately (Exit Now)
or wait until no ports are active (Wait for end of Activity). Choosing to wait makes idle
voice mail ports unavailable and prevents the system from cutting off callers.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

6

Database Configuration

Section

5

5 - Company
The Company screen allows single or multiple companies with multiple configurations to be set up
on a single Perfect Voice Office Pro system.

N O T E
At least one company must be entered for the Perfect Voice Office Pro system to
function properly.

To Access Company:
From the Main Menu, select the Company button. The Company screen is displayed.

This option allows the
system to answer using
special holiday
greetings. See
"Holidays" later in this
section for more
This option allows the
system to answer calls
in up to nine different
languages. Refer to
"Multi-Lingual" later in
I&M
this section for more
information.
?
These tabs allow you
to specify how the
system handles
incoming calls, set
company business
hours, designate single
digit options, and set
up company greetings

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

7

Company
For the Perfect Voice Office Pro system to function properly, you must enter at least one company.
The day and night operator fields must also be set up to activate the auto attendant.
Name
Enter the company name. This name is used to associate Users to a particular company when there
are two or more companies sharing the same Perfect Voice Office Pro system. If Perfect Voice Office
Pro is configured for only one company, this field will not affect any function of the system.
However, if the system is configured for more than one company, the company name must be
entered in the mailbox screen exactly as it is entered here. Misspellings result in unreliable
operation. The system uses the first 8 characters of this field.
Phone #
Enter the company telephone number. Hyphens and brackets are acceptable. This field is not used by
the system, so it may be left blank.
Day Operator
Enter the mailbox number of the Day Operator (Receptionist). This allows callers to transfer to this
extension when they press zero (0) to speak to an operator. The number that is entered here MUST
be a valid mailbox number. The Perfect Voice Office Pro system uses the mailbox number to retrieve
the extension number to dial.
Night Operator
Enter the mailbox number of the Night operator, if there is one. If there is no night operator, enter the
mailbox number of the day operator. This transfers callers to the Day Operator's mailbox when the
Day Operator is Logged Out. The number that is entered here MUST be a valid mailbox number.
The Perfect Voice Office Pro system uses the mailbox number to retrieve the extension number to
dial.
Number of Languages
This field specifies the number of languages installed on your particular Perfect Voice Office Pro
system. Perfect Voice Office Pro may operate with up to nine (9) different languages. A value must
be entered here if your system has more than one language. If your system has only one language,
you must leave this field blank.
N O T E
I&M
Perfect Voice Office Pro comes with English as the default language. All other
language modules must be purchased and installed separately. Please contact a
Teleco dealer for information about obtaining additional language modules.
?

Fax Extension
The company fax machine no longer requires its own dedicated line. Enter the fax machine
extension number to which your fax machine is connected. When an automatic or polling fax call
reaches the main company greeting, the Perfect Voice Office Pro system identifies the incoming fax
tone and transfers the call to this fax extension.
N O T E
A mailbox MUST be created with the same mailbox number as the fax extension.
The extension must be entered in both the Extension field on the Mailbox screen
and the Fax Extension field on the Company screen.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

8

Database Configuration

Company: Holidays
The Holidays parameter is a flexible feature that allows you to specify holidays so that an
appropriate greeting can be played on that day. You may enter as many holiday dates as you need.
Click on the Holidays button on the Company screen. The below screen appears.

N O T E
When the Company starts with a Voice Menu, the Holidays will only take effect if
the Prompt field says Company. This tells the Voice Menu to use the Prompt field
defined on the Greetings tab of the Company screen, and to check if the current
day is a holiday.

Adding a Holiday
To add a holiday, click on the Add button on the Holiday Greeting screen. The below Calendar
screen appears.
I&M
?

Specify the date of the holiday and the greeting number associated with it. Choose the appropriate
prompt that corresponds to the holiday in question.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

9

N O T E
You may record a new prompt for each holiday you add to reflect the appropriate
holiday's greeting or record a generic holiday message that may be used for all
holidays. To record these greetings refer to "Recording System Prompts and
Company Greetings".

Company: Multi-Lingual
You may have a single Perfect Voice Office Pro system operating with up to nine (9) different
languages that callers may choose from.
To set up a multilingual environment:
Enter the number of languages in the "Number of Languages" field on the Company screen.
Click the Multi-Lingual button on the Company screen. The below screen appears.

From the drop down list, select the types of languages. There are many language modules to
choose from. Please contact your dealer for more information on the language modules.

Language
I&M
For each additional language module that your Perfect Voice Office Pro uses, select the appropriate
language choice on the multi-lingual screen as shown above. This identifies which languages are
available on the system.
?
Prompt
The prompt number is a three-digit number between 001 and 999. Please note that these prompt
numbers are the same as your Company Greetings. Please be sure not to use the same
numbers. To record these prompts, please refer to "Recording System Prompts and Company
Greetings".
Operator
This field allows you to specify an operator for this language. It overrides the default operator.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

10

Database Configuration

Multi-Lingual Considerations
Perfect Voice Office Pro functions differently when it is configured to operate in the multi-lingual mode.
It is important to understand how the Perfect Voice Office Pro system answers calls in standard mode and
in multi-lingual mode. Initially, all calls are handled the same way. When a call comes into the PBX, it
is routed to a hunt group (or some sort of call routing group that rings one of the free Perfect Voice Office
Pro ports). When the port starts ringing, Perfect Voice Office Pro begins to count the rings. Depending
on whether or not the company is in open or closed mode, the system looks at the appropriate incoming
rings.
When the specified number of rings has been reached, the Perfect Voice Office Pro system goes off hook.
It waits 0.5 seconds and then begins listening for inband signals for one full second (these values are the
default settings that may be modified). The inband signal that the system is reading at this time is the
C.O. Line identification (if available). The C.O. identification can be used to identify calls to different
companies configured on the system. See Line Answering later in this section for more details about
Multi-Company (Tenanting). Approximately 1.5 seconds after going off-hook, the system plays the Main
Company Greeting. At this time, the Perfect Voice Office Pro system begins to act differently depending
on whether it is in the Standard mode or the Multi-Lingual mode.
Standard Mode:
When only one language is being used (Standard) the appropriate Greeting plays (Morning,
Afternoon, Evening, or Closed) during which time callers may dial extension numbers, select
Single digit options, press # to access mailbox options, press * o access the company
directory, or # * to access the System Administrator menu. If the caller does nothing,
the system transfers the caller to the Day or Night Operator two seconds after the main company
greeting ends.

Multi-Lingual Mode:
When Perfect Voice Office Pro is configured to operate in Multi-Lingual mode, it operates the
same as standard mode until it begins to play the main company greeting. At this point, the
Morning, Afternoon, Evening, and Closed Greeting are no longer used to offer options to the
callers. The Perfect Voice Office Pro system requires the caller to select a language in order to
continue. These language greetings should welcome the caller and ask them to select the language
that they would like to be served with. The Perfect Voice Office Pro system then waits for the
caller to make a selection.

No Single digit options are available to the caller at this time. The caller may, however, dial a
I&M
desired extension number but he or she will be served in the default language (English by
default). Once the caller selects a language, the Multi-Lingual greeting is then played.

?
The Multi-Lingual Greeting that plays is the prompt programmed on the Language screen. The
Multi-Lingual greeting offers the caller all of the options that would be given to a caller in
Standard mode.

If a caller selects a language other than the default language, the call progress for this caller is
supervised to ensure that in the event that the caller is transferred back to the main greeting, the
Perfect Voice Office Pro system continues to play options in the language chosen by the caller.
All calls that are transferred using the default language will use the supervision specified in the
Class of Service.
The number specified in the "Number of Languages" field controls the number of fields provided
to you on the Multi-lingual screen. Select only the languages that have already been installed. If
these language modules have not been installed, nothing plays.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

11

Company: Incoming Status Tab
The Incoming Status Tab specifies how the Perfect Voice Office Pro system handles incoming calls.

Rings
Open
This parameter specifies the number of rings before the Automated Attendant answers a call during
the open office hours. A value of one (1) intercepts calls quickly.
Closed
This parameter specifies the number of rings before the Automated Attendant answers a call during
the closed office hours. A value of one (1) intercepts calls quickly.
Line Answering
"Line Answering" parameters define how the telephone system and the voice mail / auto attendant
system ports are utilized. If Perfect Voice Office Pro is set up for only one company, follow the
outline for a single company. For multiple companies, follow the outline for multiple companies.
CO Lines
This field specifies the number of CO lines dedicated to the particular company.
Single Company Configuration: When there is only one company, there is no need to dedicate any
C.O. lines. This field should be left blank.
Multiple Company Configuration: When more than one company is sharing the same telephone
system, it is possible to set up the system with "Floating Ports". This means that both companies
share the same Inbound Ports. However, the C.O. Lines used by each company must be identified so
that the Perfect Voice Office Pro system knows which company greeting to play. For example, if you
I&M
have two companies using a four port system and each company has two incoming C.O. Lines,
dedicate C.O. Lines one (1) and two (2) for Company A, and dedicate C.O. Lines three (3) and four
(4) for Company B. Both companies will use Inbound Ports one (1) to four (4).
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

12

Database Configuration

N O T E
If your telephone system does not have CO Line identification, you may simulate
CO line identification. Set up the CO lines to ring into real extensions that are
programmed to forward all calls to Perfect Voice Office Pro. On the "Inband
Parameters" screen, enter the inband that you would normally receive from a
forwarded extension into the Parameter 190 "CO Call Code". On the Company
screen, enter the extension number of this forwarded extension in the C.O. Lines
field.
For example, Extension 123 is to be used to identify a call for company A. The
code sent by the telephone to Perfect Voice Office Pro is 99E. In parameter 190,
enter 99E. On the Company screen, in the C.O. Lines field, enter From: 123 and
To: 123.
IMPORTANT: Companies must be listed sequentially according to C.O. Line
Number whenever multitenanting based on C.O. Line Number is used.

NOTE: If your telephone system does not have CO line identification,
and you do not simulate it properly, all calls will default to the settings
in the LAST COMPANY in your company list.

Inbound Ports
This field identifies the number of ports the system uses to receive incoming calls.
All Company Configurations: Enter the number of ports that the system uses to receive incoming
calls in this field. For example, if you have a four port system, enter one (1) and four (4) in the From
and To fields respectively.
I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

13

Alternate Method of Multiple Company Configuration
Many telephone systems do not provide C.O Line identification; however, it is still possible to configure
the system with multiple companies by assigning a specific voice port to a particular company. All calls
received by this port will be answered by that particular company's greeting.
NOTE: This method dedicates your voice ports directly to each company. The number of possible
companies is limited to the number of voice cards that fit in the system.

Special Considerations:
When using this method, the system must be able to access at least one voice port to perform several tasks.
The most common of these tasks is Message Waiting Indication. When a message is received or retrieved,
an inband code is sent to the telephone system that activates/deactivates an extension's message waiting
indicator.
It is best to dedicate the last port for all notification functions. Do NOT assign this port to a company.

Port Assignment:
You must assign the port numbers for each company to answer. For example, if you have three companies
sharing a 4 port system, you should dedicate port one to company A, port two to company B, and port three
to company C. Port four should be dedicated to Message Notification.

To assign these values on company A, enter 1 in the `To" and "From" fields. For company B, enter 2 in the
same fields, and enter 3 for the company C.

I&M

?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

14

Database Configuration

Company: Business Hours Tab

This designates your company's office hours. These business hours are used in conjunction with the
Greeting Times to play the appropriate greeting. To select the desired business hours, use the
<TAB> key and move the cursor to the intended box or click on the desired box. The time must be in
military format (i.e. - 5:00 PM is 1700 hours). Input the four (4) digit start and stop time for each
day of the week to indicate your regular business hours. Leave the field blank if the office is closed.
For example, suppose the normal business hours are 8:30 AM to 5:30 PM, Monday through Friday.
You would enter Monday (From): 0830 (To): 1730. To enter the same times for the rest of the
week, press [Tab] down through Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday. The information you
entered for Monday is automatically entered for those days. Leave the From and To fields for
Saturday and Sunday blank. When these fields are left blank, the system remains in closed mode
(which was the last event on Friday) until the next scheduled event (open mode) occurs on Monday
morning.

Company: Single Digit Options Tab

I&M
?

"Single digit options" is used in conjunction with the company greetings to allow callers to transfer
to a desired department or individual by dialing only a single digit (1 through 9). For example, the
company greeting might say, "Good morning, you have reached ABC company...for the sales
department press one (1)...for technical support press two (2)." In the single digit option field, enter
the appropriate mailbox number. If the sales department is Mailbox 101 and technical support is
102, you would enter 101 in single digit number one (1) and enter 102 in single digit number two (2)
and so on. If you do not wish to use this function, leave these fields blank.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Special Single Digit Option Values

Database Configuration

15

Below are the special values that may be entered in the single digit options fields to offer additional
options to callers. NOTE: Some telephone systems may have predefined features programmed to the
# and * keys.

*
The asterisk may be entered in any of the nine single digit options fields to allow
access to Directory Assistance. By default, the directory may be accessed by
pressing the asterisk during the main company greeting. For example, if the
asterisk is entered in single digit options field 9, a caller may then access the
directory by dialing 9 from the main greeting.

#E# "#E#" may be entered in any of the nine single digit options fields to allow
callers to be transferred directly to the personal greeting of any mailbox. By
default, when a caller reaches the main company greeting and presses: # an
extension number #, he or she is transferred directly to the personal greeting of
that User's mailbox. For example, if #E# is entered in single digit options field
7, a User may transfer directly to a mailbox greeting by entering <7> + the
extension number.

FAX "FAX" may be entered in any of the nine single digit options fields to allow
callers to send a fax to a User. The caller will be prompted to enter the extension
of the person to send the fax to. (The system must be configured for fax mail.)

NOTE: Please ensure that the Single digit number that you assign to these special keys is
NOT the same as the first digit of any mailbox. This exception is only for these special key
assignments.

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

16

Database Configuration

Company: Greetings Tab

The Greetings Tab is very important. It is responsible for playing your company greetings. Two
steps are required to set up the greetings.
1. The company greetings must be recorded. Refer to "Performing System Administration with
the Telephone Keypad" for details. You may record the company greetings after you
complete the settings on this screen.
2. Enter the prompt number of each system salutation for each time of day. If you recorded
your morning prompt: "Good morning, you have reached ABC company..." as prompt
number 001, this prompt number must be entered in the Morning field. Enter the correct
prompt number for each time of day (Morning, Afternoon, Evening, and Closed).

N O T E
The Morning Greeting plays from midnight until noon, the Afternoon Greeting
plays from noon until six (6) PM, and the Evening Greeting plays from six (6) PM
until midnight. The Closed Greeting plays whenever the Business Hours indicate
that the company is closed. Also note, if your company is only open until five (5)
PM, the Evening Greeting is never played.
To change the Evening Greeting time, you must edit the PERFECT.INI file.

Start With Voice Menu
This field specifies the voice menu to be played instead of the company greeting. When there are
multiple companies, each company will have its own voice menu, so enter the voice menu dedicated
I&M
to the company chosen. If multiple schedules are required, refer to "Creating Menu Schedules" later
in this section.
?
N O T E
Single digit options do not apply when a voice menu is active. If a voice menu is
specified, it overrides the single digit options.

IMPORTANT: You may only specify a prompt number or a voice menu. Do not enter both
for the same field.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

17

Section

6
6 - Mailbox Classes of Service
A Class of Service defines features and functions for mailboxes assigned to a specific Class of
Service. Features include recording limits, message expiration, notification, transfer supervision,
transfer options, and mailbox options.
To Access:
From the Main Menu, select Classes
You may view, add, delete, or edit Classes of Service. The system may have been shipped
with some Classes of Service already set up. Click the First, Prev, Next, and Last buttons to
view Classes of Service.
Select the options you wish to activate for this Class of Service. Always click the "Save"
button before exiting any screen.

IMPORTANT: When you delete a Class of Service, the mailboxes associated with it are re-
assigned to Class of Service 1.

N O T E
Once the features have been selected in the Class of Service, Users have the option
to enable or disable many of these features. These include Call Screening, Call
Queuing, Call Blocking, Pre-Transfer Paging, Post-Transfer Paging,
Login/Logout, Call Forwarding, Notification, and Message Forwarding. These
settings may be changed by the User when he or she calls into their mailbox and
accesses the "Options" menu. The System Administrator may activate features for
individual Users and not allow them to disable these features. To do this, enable
the feature on the User's status screen but disable the feature in the Class of
Service.

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

18

Database Configuration

Class of Service: Storage Field Descriptions
This section of the Mailbox Class of Service screen assigns storage limitations for each User
associated with this Class of Service. For example, the System Administrator may limit the number
of new and saved messages allowed, the length of a message, and the number of days a message can
be saved for a given mailbox.

Max Messages
This field specifies the maximum number of messages (including new, saved, and messages deleted
that day) that is allowed for the mailboxes associated with this Class of Service. The maximum
messages value should be based on the needs of the User(s). It is a good idea to allow more than
enough message storage space for each User to ensure that no messages get lost because a mailbox is
I&M
too full.
N O T E
?
Every ten megabytes of hard drive space is equal to one hour of voice message
storage.

Max. Msg Length
This field determines the length of time that a caller is allowed to record a voice message. This
number is specified in seconds. This value should be set higher than the anticipated message length
to ensure that callers are not disconnected in the middle of their messages.
Max Greeting Length
This field specifies the maximum number of seconds that a mailbox greeting may be. Typically the
default (180 seconds) is sufficient for most applications but if there is a mailbox that provides
lengthy information to callers, this time may need to be increased.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

19

Days to Save New Messages
This field specifies the number of days to save new messages. Messages that have not been tagged
by the User as "Saved" remain on the system for the period of time specified in this field.
Days to Save Old Messages
This field specifies the number of days to save old messages. Messages that have been tagged by the
User as "Saved" remain on the system for the period of time specified in this field.
Class of Service: Notification Field Descriptions
This section of the Mailbox Class of Service screen dictates what notification features are allowed
for this Class of Service. They include turning on message-waiting lights, allowing beeper
notification, allowing telephone notification, and limiting access to toll lines for long-distance
notification.
Message Lights
This field activates or deactivates message lights or LCD screens after a message has been sent to a
mailbox. Activate this feature for message waiting lights.
N O T E
If you have some telephone sets that provide for message waiting lights and some
that do not, make sure that separate Classes of Service are assigned for each type
of set. Deactivate this field for the Class of Service that does not support message-
waiting lights.
If you have any mailboxes that do not have a corresponding telephone extension
(i.e., phantom mailboxes that are used for voice menus, guest mailboxes, etc.) do
not enable this feature because there are not message lights to activate.

Light On Code
This field contains the code used to activate the message waiting lights on the telephone set. If this
field is left blank (default), the Perfect Voice Office Pro system uses the code contained in the
system parameters to activate message waiting lights.
Light Off Code
This field contains the code used to deactivate the message waiting lights on the telephone set. If
I&M
this field is left blank (default), the Perfect Voice Office Pro system uses the code contained in the
system parameters to activate message waiting lights.
Beeper
?
Activate this feature to allow the Perfect Voice Office Pro system to notify a User via beeper, voice
pager, or alphanumeric pager when a message is recorded in the User's mailbox. For more
information about beeper notification, please refer to "Mailbox: Notification-Set up Outcalling
Options for a User".
Outcall
If this field is activated, the Perfect Voice Office Pro system notifies a User at a specified telephone
number when a message is recorded in the User's mailbox. If the telephone number is long distance,
then the "Long Distance" box must also be checked to allow long distance dialing.
Long Distance
When this box is activated, the Perfect Voice Office Pro system allows long distance telephone
numbers to be dialed for notification.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

20

Database Configuration

Class of Service: Transfer Supervision Field Descriptions
This section of the Mailbox Class of Service screen dictates how calls are transferred. Only one
transfer option may be selected for each Class of Service.

None
When "None" is activated, the system transfers calls to extensions without supervising the call (blind
transfer). In this case, a caller being transferred to an extension is placed on hold while the Perfect
Voice Office Pro system dials the desired extension. The caller is then released to the telephone
system. From this point, the telephone system controls the call. Calls are forwarded to Perfect Voice
Office Pro only if the telephone system has the capability to forward calls on a Busy or a No-Answer
condition. If a user activates a feature that requires supervision, such as screening, the system
automatically switches to a Busy/No-Answer supervision for that user only.
Busy
When "Busy" is activated, the Perfect Voice Office Pro system supervises the call while the caller is
being transferred to the extension. If the extension is busy, the system detects the busy tone and the
caller is instructed to leave a voice message. However, if the extension is not busy and a ring signal
is heard, the caller is released to the telephone system. From this point, the telephone system
controls the call. Calls are forwarded to Perfect Voice Office Pro only if the telephone system has
the capability to forward calls on a No-Answer condition.
Busy/NA
When "Busy/NA" is activated, the Perfect Voice Office Pro system supervises the transfer of calls to
the desired extension. Perfect Voice Office Pro checks for both the busy and the no answer
conditions and informs the caller of the options available to them when either situation arises. Using
this type of transfer supervision makes the Perfect Voice Office Pro system less efficient because the
port being used is not able to receive any additional calls while Perfect Voice Office Pro is
supervising the call.
Language
When the Perfect Voice Office Pro system is configured with more than one language, the system
must remember what language a caller has selected during various types of transfers. In order for
Perfect Voice Office Pro to remember, it must be configured to supervise for language. This type of
transfer supervision is similar to the Busy/No-Answer supervision in that the port being supervised is
not able to receive any additional calls while Perfect Voice Office Pro is supervising the call.
Class of Service: Transfer Options Field Descriptions
I&M
This section of the Mailbox Class of Service screen dictates what transfer options are allowed for
each mailbox Class of Service. To make selections, click in the appropriate box to [X] activate or [ ]
?
deactivate the option.

Call Screening
If this feature is activated, the Perfect Voice Office Pro system instructs callers who wish to transfer
to an extension to state their name at the tone. Before the call is transferred, the User hears the
caller's name followed by the system prompt: "To accept the call press 1 , to send the call to
another extension, press 2 ; to send the caller to your mailbox, press # ." If the User rejects
the call, the caller hears a no-answer message and is given the choice of trying another extension,
leaving a voice mail message, or dialing the operator's extension. If the User redirects the call, he or
she presses 2 and the destination extension number, then hangs up to transfer the call.
Call Forwarding
This feature allows a User to have all calls redirected to another extension. If the call is not
answered by the forwarding extension, it is forwarded back to the original User's mailbox. If this
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

21

feature is activated, the mailbox number of the User to have calls forwarded to should be entered in
the "Forwarding To" field of the Mailbox Status screen.
Class of Service: Transfer Options Field Descriptions

Call Blocking
If this feature is activated, callers are forwarded directly into a mailbox without ringing the
extension. It is only available when calls are transferred from the auto attendant.
Busy Hold
When an extension is busy and the "Busy Hold" option is activated, callers are given the option to
hold for the extension, leave a message for that extension, or to try another extension. While on
hold, callers may leave a voice message by pressing *.
N O T E
This feature is only available on telephone systems that provide a busy tone. Most
telephone sets with multiple extension appearances do not produce a busy tone.

Call Queuing
If this feature is activated, incoming calls are placed in a queue if an extension is busy. Callers are
informed of their position in the hold queue and given opportunities to either continue to hold or
leave a voice message.
N O T E
This feature is only available on telephone systems that provide a busy tone. Most
multiple telephone sets do not produce a busy tone.

Forced Messaging
This feature prompts the caller to press any key to leave a message. The mailbox does not
automatically begin recording after the greeting. When a mailbox is associated with a Class of
Service with this feature activated, the caller hears the User's personal greeting and is then prompted
to press 5 to leave a message. This forces the caller to press a digit in order to leave a message.
When this feature is activated, it should help to eliminate short blank messages.
I&M
Pre-Paging
If "Pre-Paging" is activated, a User is paged before the call is transferred. When a caller requests an
extension, the caller is put on hold and the Perfect Voice Office Pro system pages the User. The
?
system waits for a definable period of time (default is 5 seconds) and transfers the caller to the
desired extension.
Post Paging
If "Post-Paging" is activated, the User is paged after call transfer. When a caller transfers to an
extension that is busy or is not answered the caller is forwarded to the User's mailbox. In the User's
personal greeting, he or she can offer callers the predefined option to page them over the telephone
intercom system (i.e. "To page me press 4"). Callers are only informed of the paging feature in the
User's personal greeting. The system does not have a pre-recorded prompt.
Get Caller ID
When this is activated, the User receives a call control pop-up screen when he or she receives an
incoming call.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

22

Database Configuration

Local Area Paging
If "Local Area Paging" is activated, it allows the User to implement local area paging. If a caller
chooses to activate the User's pager, the User may pick up the incoming call from any telephone.
Paging Code
The paging code is only entered in this field if either "Pre-Paging" or "Post Paging" has been
activated for this Class of Service. You may designate different paging zones for different Classes of
Service.
Rings
When using Transfer Supervision option "Busy/NA", this is the ring count before forwarding the
caller to the mailbox. Note that the telephone system overrides all systems. If the telephone system
is set up to forward calls after 4 rings, the Rings field must be less than the telephone system value
for proper operation.
Class of Service: Mailbox Options Field Descriptions
This section of the Mailbox Class of Service screen lists what options the mailboxes in this Class of
Service receive. To make selections, click in the appropriate box to [X] activate or [ ] deactivate the
option.

Distribution List
This option allows Users to send the same message to multiple mailboxes.
Directory
Directory access allows Users to be listed in directory assistance. The dial by name directory is set
up in alphabetic order with respect to the User's last name. Callers may listen to the company
directory when they reach the auto attendant by pressing the * key. If any particular User does not
wish to be listed in the directory, another Class of Service may be set up with this feature
deactivated.
N O T E
All mailboxes are automatically entered into the complete company directory. To
remove a name from the complete company directory, inform the User that they
must delete the name prompt recorded in their own mailbox. Remember that if the
name prompt is blank or deleted, any other options that use the name recording
I&M
will be affected (paging, distribution lists, forward, etc.)

?
Confirmation
This option allows you to review the date and time a message was received and the date and time the
recipient listened to the message (for internal Users only).
Auto Login/Logout
When either "Auto Login" or "Auto Logout" is activated, a four-digit field appears. Enter the time in
military format in the four-digit field. For example, if a group of Users always leaves the office at a
certain time, activate "Auto Logout" and specify the time. Callers hear the "Gone Home" greeting
of these Users at the specified time each day.
Un-Erase Messages
Erased messages may be recovered any time on the same day that they are erased. All erased
messages are permanently deleted during the nightly cleanup of the message database. To un-erase
messages(during the same day that they were erased), the User must access the Perfect Voice Office
Pro menu and press 6
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

23

Login / Logout
All mailboxes may exist in one of two states: "Logged In" which is when the User is in the office
and "Logged Out" which is when the User has left the office for the day. When this field is activated,
Users have the option to either log in or log out. When this feature is deactivated, the mailbox
remains in either a Logged In or a Logged Out state.
Shared Mailbox
This feature changes the way a caller uses Auto Station Login. When this feature is activated and the
User performs an Auto Station Login (i.e. presses a key for message retrieval), Perfect Voice Office
Pro prompts for the mailbox number. If this field were not activated, the system would accept the
inband extension number as the mailbox number and ask the User to enter their password. This
feature allows Installers to set-up scenarios with more than one mailbox associated to one extension
number. It can also make it easier for the receptionist to transfer callers directly into Users'
mailboxes.
Confirm Delete
When this is activated, Users are prompted to press 9 to confirm deletion of a message. This helps to
prevent accidental deletion of important messages.
N O T E
If "Un-Erase Messages" is activated, any message that is erased may be un-erased
during the same day. You should only have "Confirm Delete" or "Un-Erase
Messages" activated for all Users. Both are not necessary.
Class of Service: Mailbox Options Field Descriptions

Administrator
If the mailbox User is a System Administrator, this field must be checked. A System Administrator
has access to many functions, including the ability to create, edit, and delete mailboxes, and to record
system and personal prompts. When this feature is active, Users associated with this Class of Service
may access the System Administrator menu by logging into their mailbox and pressing *.
Record Conversation
This feature allows Users to record a telephone conversation. The feature is selected from the Caller
ID screen before the User takes the call.
Forced Tutorial
I&M
If selected, a User belonging to this Class of Service will not be able to pick up messages until he or
she completes the tutorial.
?
Net Popup
If selected, Users belonging to this Class of Service and who have the Desktop interface can send
LAN and LAP pop-up text messages to other Users on the network who are also configured for Net
Popup.
Multilingual
This feature allows Users to record personal greetings in more than one language. The User is
prompted to select the language.
Guest Mailbox
If this field is activated, Users belonging to a Class of Service hears a simplified message menu.
New messages play automatically. The simplified menu is as follows: 1 to listen to new messages, 2
to listen to saved messages, 3 to send a new message, 4 to record personal greeting, 5 to record

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

24

Database Configuration

name, 6 to change password, and 0 to back out. This option is typically used with hospitality
packages.
Hide on Send List
If selected, Users belonging to this Class of Service are not displayed in the "send" list on the
Desktop interface.
Mailbox Language
This field specifies the default language Users hear when picking up messages.
Caller Language
This field specifies the default language that the caller is greeted with if he or she does not choose a
language at the automated attendant.

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

25

Section

7

7 - Creating, Deleting, and Editing
Mailboxes
This section describes how to create, delete, and edit mailboxes. It also includes a detailed
description of Mailbox Configuration.
To Access Mailbox features:
From the Main Menu, click the Mailbox button
The below screen appears

Click Reset to delete
greetings and messages
Scroll through mailboxes
for this mailbox.

using these buttons.

Click the Create

button to add new
mailboxes.

Click these

"Navigation"
buttons to access
the User's

notification
schedules,
class of service
details,
or distribution lists.
I&M

?

To immediately "go to" a particular mailbox, press the
Ctrl and G key on the keyboard at the same time. Enter
the mailbox number you wish to open and click OK.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

26

Database Configuration

Creating Mailboxes
To create either a single or multiple mailboxes:
Click on the Create button from the Mailbox menu
(or select Mailbox, then Create from the top line
of the Main Menu).
Enter the appropriate information on the Create
Mailbox screen.
o Mailbox Template: You may wish to create a
"Typical User" template to copy from. If so,
first create a single mailbox with the
specifications you want "typical" Users to
have. When you use this mailbox as your
template, the following major features are
duplicated throughout the range that is created:
Class of Service, LIFO/FIFO, Tutorial, Auto
Forward Mailbox, Operator,
Company Name, Department, Auto Forward Delay,
Password, Auto Forward Delete or Keep, Call Blocking, Screening, Voice Menu, Call
Forwarding, Say Date, Voice Menu Name, Queuing/Pre-Paging/Post-paging/Login.
o Voice Menu Template: The Voice Menu Template may be used to assign an existing
voice menu to a range of mailboxes. Choose a voice menu from the drop-down list.
NOTE: If you do not assign a voice menu template, the default voice menu is used.
o Lowest Mailbox, Highest Mailbox: Enter the range of mailboxes that you wish to
create by entering the lowest mailbox number in the "Lowest Mailbox" field and the
highest number in the "Highest Mailbox" field. To create a single mailbox, simply enter
the same number for both the "Lowest Mailbox" and "Highest Mailbox" fields and click
"OK", or you may leave the "Highest Mailbox" field empty. Mailboxes may be up to 8
digits.
o Class of Service: Select a "Class of Service" to associate these mailboxes to and click
"OK". If you do not specify a Class of Service, the mailbox is assigned to Class of
Service 1. There are 99 available Classes of Service.
Click OK to create mailboxes. The greater the number of mailboxes that you are creating,
the longer it takes.
When mailbox creation has been completed, a warning screen appears. Press [Enter] when
I&M
this message appears.

?

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

27

Deleting or Resetting Mailboxes
There are two ways to "delete" a mailbox deleting and resetting. Both methods have advantages
and disadvantages. Please review these carefully so that you are aware of the differences.

Physically Delete a Mailbox/Keep the Personal greetings
This method physically deletes the mailbox from the database. All greetings (No-Answer, Busy,
Gone Home, and Name) still exist in the GRT directory. This allows you to re-create a corrupted
mailbox and not have to re-record the personal greetings.
N O T E
All greetings (*.GRT) and name recording in the GRT directory will be removed if
the corrupted mailbox is not re-created before the Reorg program is run.

To delete an unwanted mailbox from the database:
Scroll through the mailboxes by using the First, Prev, Next, and Last buttons on the
Mailbox screen or the [Page Up] and [Page Down] keys on your keyboard.
When you have selected the unwanted mailbox, click the Delete button to remove it from the
database. When this procedure is complete, the Mailbox field displays the next available
mailbox number.

Keep the Mailbox/Delete the Greetings and Messages
When you use this method, the mailbox is NOT physically deleted from the database but all
greetings (No-Answer, Busy, Gone Home, and Name recording) are deleted. This allows the old
mailbox to be re-initialized for a new User without having to go to DOS to delete greetings and
messages.

To delete the greetings and messages:
Scroll through the list of mailboxes until the selected mailbox number appears in the
Mailbox field.
I&M
Click the Reset button.

?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

28

Database Configuration

Editing Mailboxes
When you edit a mailbox, you enter information about an individual User such as Extension, Last
Name, First Name, Password, Company, Department, and Class of Service. In addition, you specify
information on the "Personal Options", "Transfer Options", "Message Forwarding", "Alternate
Spelling", "Other Options", and "LAP Options" tabs.

Extension
This field specifies the actual telephone extension number that Perfect Voice Office Pro dials when a
call is dialed through Perfect Voice Office Pro. When a mailbox is created, the extension number is
set to the same value as the mailbox number by default. You may enter values that are different
from the mailbox number. For example, Mailbox 100 may be programmed with Extension number
234. When a caller enters Perfect Voice Office Pro and dials mailbox 100, the Perfect Voice Office
Pro system dials 234 to the telephone system and rings extension 234.
In addition, it is possible to enter numbers (and characters) in the extension field to have Perfect
Voice Office Pro dial out on a Centrex line and have callers transferred via "Central Office" directly
to anywhere in the world. You MUST have Centrex lines in order to be able to transfer a caller
through "Central Office" over the incoming call C.O. Line. For example, in the extension field of
mailbox 100: #4518005551212 is entered. When a caller reaches Perfect Voice Office Pro and dials
100 (Caller on a Centrex line), the Perfect Voice Office Pro system dials #45 (to access a C.O.
transfer via Centrex) followed by the telephone number. Since the number is dialed over the same
Centrex line, BELL makes the transfer at the C.O. Perfect Voice Office Pro is then dropped from the
loop and all ports are free to receive incoming calls. If you do not wish for Perfect Voice Office Pro
to dial an extension (possibly because there is no telephone at a particular extension), you must
enable Do-Not-Disturb on the mailbox status screen.
N O T E
This is the only place that the actual extension number is used. All other fields or
prompts that ask for extensions are referring to the Perfect Voice Office Pro
mailbox number. If the mailbox is not associated with an actual extension, be sure
that the Class of Service for these mailboxes does not have message lights
activated.

Password
I&M
All mailboxes are created with a default password set to 1111. When the system is logged on using
the Installer's password, the actual password appears in this field. However, for security reason,
when the System Administrator logs on using their password, the field appears as ****. If a User
?
forgets their password, the System Administrator may re-enter the default password (1111) and
allow the User to access their mailbox and re-enter a new password.
N O T E
Passwords cannot begin with 0 (zero). Passwords should be at least 3 digits long.
The maximum length is 15 digits. If the telephone system has a Hang Up Code
(e.g. 999), be sure that no one uses 999 in their password.

Class of Service
The Class of Service defines the options that are associated with a particular mailbox. The Class of
Service may be any number between 1 and 99.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

29

Last Name
Enter the User's last name in this field. If the User's last name is larger than the visible field, the
information is rolled-over out of sight but it is all stored in memory. When callers use Directory
Assistance to transfer to an extension, Perfect Voice Office Pro uses the spelling in this field to
identify the User and to transfer the caller to the appropriate extension. See "Mailbox: Alternate
Spelling Tab" in this section.
First Name
Enter the User's first name in this field. Unlike the "Last Name", this information is not used by
Directory Assistance.
Company
If Perfect Voice Office Pro is configured for multiple companies, this field identifies which company
this particular User is associated with. Enter the first eight characters identical to those set up on the
particular Company screen. This allows Perfect Voice Office Pro to play the proper Company
greeting if a caller transfers back to the auto attendant. If Perfect Voice Office Pro is configured for
only a single company, then this field can be left blank.
(The Company field should be exactly the same as the company name in the company screen, a
space is considered a character.)
Department
This field allows you to differentiate between departments within the company. The System
Administrator only uses this information for reference and reports.

Mailbox: Personal Options Tab
Select the "Personal Options" tab to specify the User's personal operator, control whether the time
and date stamp plays after every message, select the message playback order, turn on the new User
tutorial, and authorize the Desktop Interface (to be released) which allows User to use a Windows
PC to manage their mailbox.
I&M
?

Personal Operator
This field is optional but, if selected, a mailbox number is required. This mailbox is recognized as
the operator for this individual. When this feature is activated, a caller gets the individual's personal
greeting. However, when the caller presses zero (0) to transfer to the secretary, he or she is
transferred to the mailbox specified in this field. If this field is left blank, callers pressing zero are
transferred to the Day or Night Operator specified on the Company screen.
Alternate Extension
This information has not yet been added to the manual.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

30

Database Configuration

Say Date
All messages are tagged with time and date stamp. If this field is set to "Yes", the User hears the
time and date stamp after every message. If set to "No", the time and date stamp does not play.
Please note that Users may still hear the time and date stamp by pressing three on the telephone
keypad after listening to a message.
Message Playback
Users may listen to messages in two orders:
FIFO (First In, First Out): FIFO plays the oldest message first and the newest message last.
LIFO (Last In, Last Out): LIFO plays the newest message first.

MSS User
This is an MSS User.
MSS Receive Emails
This User may receive emails using MSS.
MSS Receive Faxes
This User may receive faxes using MSS.
Tutorial On
By default, this option is activated when a new mailbox is created. This option helps all new Users
initialize their mailbox by prompting them to enter a new password, record their name prompt, three
different personal greetings and enter the first three letters of their first name to be added to the
directory. The tutorial plays the first time the User calls into their mailbox. If the User exits the
tutorial before completion, the System Administrator may reset the option by selecting the tutorial
box on the mailbox screen. The next time the User accesses the mailbox, the tutorial plays again.
N O T E
Selecting "Forced Tutorial" in the Class of Service ensures that the User completes
the tutorial before being given access to their mailbox.

Desktop User
This option is only selected if you are planning to install the Desktop interface on the desktop
I&M
computer associated with this extension.
DID Trunk
If the telephone system sends additional digits other than the User's extension number (such as DID
?
or virtual trunk numbers), enter the number in this field. This field accepts up to 3 digits between 001
and 255.
Active Greeting
This field specifies which mailbox greeting is playing. When "Default" is selected, the system plays
the 3 pre-configured greetings (no-answer, busy, and gone home). If an optional greeting is playing
for this mailbox, the greeting number is in this field.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

31

Mailbox: Transfer Options Tab
Select the "Transfer Options" tab to display the User's call screening, call queuing, call blocking,
pre-transfer paging, post-transfer paging, logged in, call forwarding, forwarding to, voice menus, and
local area paging settings.

Call Screening
When this feature is activated, all incoming calls are screened by the system before they are
transferred to the extension. Callers are prompted to state their name after the tone. When the call is
transferred to the extension, the User hears the caller's name and then decides to take the call,
transfer it to another extension, or reject it.

The User has the following choices:
Press 1 to accept call,
Press 2 to redirect call to another extension, or
Press # to send the caller to his or her mailbox.

Call Queuing
If this feature is activated, incoming calls are placed in a queue if an extension is busy. Callers are
informed of their position in the hold queue and given opportunities to either continue to hold or
leave a voice message.

The caller has the following options:
I&M
Press 1 to try another extension,
Press 2 to remain on hold,
?
Press 5 to leave a message, or
Press * to exit.
All callers on hold hear a pre-recorded music file (MESS500.VOX) that is included with Perfect
Voice Office Pro. You may wish to record your own on-hold messages for your callers to listen to
while waiting in the holding queue. You may use as many or as few on-hold messages as you wish
but message 500 MUST exist.
You have ten (10) available voice files you may use. They are System Prompts numbers 500 to 509.
Remember that system prompt 500 (MESS500.VOX) already exists with one (1) minute of music. If
you record over this file, it will be lost.
Three additional pre-recorded music on-hold files are included with the Perfect Voice Office Pro
system. The file names are MUSIC15.VOX (which contains 15 seconds), MUSIC30.VOX (30
seconds), and MUSIC45.VOX (45 seconds). You may replace MESS500.VOX with one of these

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

32

Database Configuration

files. If you do not wish to use this option or if any of the message files (501 to 509) are not
recorded, callers in the holding queue will hear message 500.
If you are using multiple messages, you must use consecutive message files (i.e. message 500, 501,
502, etc.). If you choose to use this option, each successive caller in the holding queue will hear a
different message. The first caller hears message 500, the second caller hears message 501, and so
on.
N O T E
This feature is only available on telephone systems that provide a busy tone. Most
multiple telephone sets do not produce a busy tone. To use this option, you must
record your On-Hold messages. Refer to "Recording System Prompts and
Company Greetings".

Call Blocking
If this feature is activated, all callers are routed directly into the User's voice mailbox. Users may
activate this feature when they do not want to accept any calls at their extension. This option is only
available when the auto attendant makes the transfer.
N O T E
If the mailbox is being used as a Phantom mailbox (the mailbox does not have its
own extension on the telephone system), the Call Blocking feature must be
activated to prevent Perfect Voice Office Pro from trying to dial an invalid
extension number. Dialing invalid extension numbers causes some PBXs to
produce error messages, take ports out of Service, and even disconnect callers.

Pre Transfer Page
If Pre-Transfer Page is activated, a User is paged over the telephone intercom before the caller is
transferred to the extension. The caller is put on hold and the system pages the user. The system then
waits for a definable period (default = 5 seconds) and transfers the caller to the desired extension.
Post Transfer Page
If Post Transfer Page is activated, the system pages the User's name after the caller is transferred to
the User's extension and there is no answer. The User must inform the caller, in the no-answer and
busy greetings, to press 4 to have the call announced over the intercom. This option is a built-in
I&M
feature of every mailbox.
N O T E
?
This feature must be activated in the Class of Service in order for the User to
utilize this option.

Logged In
When the User activates this feature, the system identifies the User as being present in the office and
plays their "No-Answer" greeting if the telephone is not answered. If the feature is not activated, the
system assumes that the User has left the office for the day and plays the User's "Gone Home"
greeting.
Call Forwarding
When this feature is activated, the User's calls are forwarded to another extension. The User may
want to use this feature when away from the office and would like all calls answered by someone
who is handling his/her affairs while absent. This extension number is entered into the "Forwarding
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

33

To" field below. If the forwarding extension is not available to receive the call, the Perfect Voice
Office Pro system sends the caller to the original mailbox.
Forwarding To:
This field appears when Call Forwarding is activated. It should contain the mailbox number that the
User wishes his/her calls to forward to when call forwarding is activated.
Voice Menu
When this feature is activated, the User's calls are answered with a customized voice menu that
offers callers a variety of choices. Select a voice menu from the drop down list. Refer to
"AudioText/Voice Menus" for features and setup instructions.
LAP Message Notify
If selected, the system activates the User's LAP pager for new messages. The LAP pager is
activated for new messages even if "Off" (below) is selected.
Local Area Paging
If this option is activated, a caller may choose to activate the User's beeper.
"Before"
If "Before" is selected, the beeper is activated before all incoming calls only.
The User may then pick up the call from any telephone.
"After"

During the User's personal greeting, the caller may dial a digit to activate the
User's beeper. If "After" is selected, a Voice Menu must be created that
specifies the digit for activating the User's pager. The Voice Menu field must
also be selected and the Voice Menu name must be entered on the Transfer
Options tab.
"Both"

The beeper is activated before the call is transferred and the caller may activate
it after the transfer from the voice menu.

"Off"

Local Area Paging is not activated for this User.

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

34

Database Configuration

Mailbox: Message Options Tab
Select the Message Options tab from the Mailbox menu.

Message Forwarding
Similar to Call Forwarding, Message Forwarding allows the User to forward messages to another
extension. All new messages may be forwarded to another mailbox after a specified period of time
so that calls may be promptly returned. This feature may be used in conjunction with Call
Forwarding.

Forward Messages to:
In this field, enter the mailbox number to have messages forwarded to. If you choose not to use this
feature, simply leave this field blank. Messages may also be forwarded to off-site (AMIS) mailboxes
by entering the mailbox number, star, and the AMIS site number. For example, to forward messages
to mailbox 2404 at site 10, you enter 2404*10.
After (HHMM)
In this field, enter the amount of time to wait before forwarding a message. The Time is specified as
Hours, Minutes and must be 4 digits long. For example, 0005 would forward after 5 minutes and
0100 would forward after 1 hour. A value of 0000 forwards the message immediately.
Delete After Forward
If this field is set to "Yes", after a message has been forwarded, it is deleted. To save the original
I&M
message, set this field to "No".
?
Notification
This field determines whether or not to notify the User via the outcalling schedules. It is very
important if the User is utilizing call notification. In order to access the Notification options from
the mailbox screen, this feature must be set to "All"; otherwise, the "Notification" button will be
deactivated.
Voice/Email
This field determines whether or not to notify the User via the outcalling schedules for new voice
and/or email messages. It is very important if the User is utilizing call notification. In order to access
the Notification options from the mailbox screen, this feature must be set to "All"; otherwise, the
"Notification" button will be deactivated.
"None"

If "None" is selected, call notification is turned off. The system won't try to
notify the User.
"All"

The User is notified of all new messages via the outcalling schedules.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

35

"Urgent Only" The User is notified only for those messages that have been tagged as urgent.
Notify for fax
If checked, the User will be notified of new faxes.
Cascading

If "Cascading" is selected, the system notifies the User via the outcalling schedules for each new
message. If it is not selected, the system notifies the User for the first message. The system will not
notify for subsequent messages until the User checks his or her mailbox for messages.
For example, suppose a User receives a new message at 2:00 PM and has three notification
schedules. Whether or not "Cascading" is selected, the system notifies the User via the schedules.
Suppose that the User does not check his or her messages, and, at 3:00 PM, he or she receives
another message. If "Cascading" is selected, the system notifies the User of the second message. If
"Cascading" is not selected, the system will not notify the User of any new subsequent messages
until the User checks his or her mailbox.

Mailbox: Alternate Spelling Tab
This field allows you to input up to four different alternate spellings for the User's name to be used
in the company directory. Only the first three letters are required for each alternate spelling. The
system does not use the name entered in the "First Name" field for the company directory. You
should enter the first three letters of the User's first name in the alternate spelling field so that callers
can use first names as well as last names when accessing the directory.

I&M

N O T E
?
"Directory" must be an active feature in the Class of Service to register users in the
corporate directory. Any values entered in Alternate Spelling will be removed is
the "Directory" is not activated.

When entering alternate spellings in Users' mailboxes, please note the
following:
Do not enter the same spelling for the last name in the alternate spellings. For example, if the User's
last name is "Smith", do not enter "Smi" as an alternate spelling. If you do, when you save the
mailbox settings and then return to check the settings, you will notice that the "Smi" is deleted.
Also, please note that some alternate spellings are actually dialed the same way by callers. For
example, Mike Nike may be a User who wishes to have alternate spellings of his name for the

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

36

Database Configuration

directory. Because his first and last name are so close, a caller would dial either one the same way:
MIK=645 or NIK=645. Both the "M" and "N" appear on the six key.
Using ASR (Automatic Speech Recognition)
When accessing a company directory using ASR, the default settings for a User are:
o Last name
o First name
o Firstname Lastname

If any of these names are spoken wile accessing the company directory, the system will forward the
caller to the appropriate user extension. To use different name, add alternate spellings by using the
Alternate spelling tab.
I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

37

Mailbox: Other Options Tab
The Other Options tab is used when the system is configured for MAPI integration and unified
messaging. With MAPI integration, the User can be set up to receive an e-mail notification when he
or she receives a new voice or fax message. The actual voice or fax file may be attached to the e-
mail message.

E-Mail Options
Username
In this field, enter the User's e-mail name. For example: Chris Nicholson.
E-Mail Address
Enter the User's e-mail address in this field. For example: cnicholson@abc.com.
Send E-Mail with New Messages
If selected, the User will be notified with an e-mail of new voice mail messages.
Attach Voice File to Message
If selected, the voice mail message is sent (in the ADPCM format) and attached to the e-mail
message. The User will be able to play the message directly from the e-mail notification through the
Message Player (which converts it to a WAV format) if he or she is out of the office.
Fax Mail Options
Default Fax Number
In this field, enter the default fax number for this User. If this field is left blank, the system uses the
I&M
number entered in the fax parameters.
N O T E
?
This option is only available to Desktop Users.

Send E-Mail with New Faxes
If selected, the User will be notified with an e-mail of new fax messages.
Attach Fax File to Message
If selected, the fax message is converted to a .dcx file and attached to the e-mail message. The User
will be able to print the message directly from the e-mail notification if he or she is out of the office.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

38

Database Configuration

Mailbox: Other Options Tab (continued)

Scheduling Options for Fax and E-Mail
Apply Schedule
If selected, a global e-mail schedule may be assigned to this User. (This overrides the Schedule
button. If you wish to set up an individual schedule, click the Schedule button.) The schedule
applies to both e-mail and fax messages. For more information on setting up global e-mail
schedules, refer to "Creating Menu Schedules" later in this section.
Schedule
Use this button to assign a personal schedule to this User. This button
displays this screen, which allows you to specify the days you want to
receive e-mail notification of voice and/or fax mail messages. If the
Voice or Fax File is attached to the message, you may also specify
whether or not to delete the messages from the server.

N O T E
If you choose to delete the message after send from the Schedule screen, the
message is deleted from the Perfect Voice Office Pro system. In order to keep a
copy of the message, you must select Attach Voice File to Message or Attach
Fax File to Message.

Global and personal schedules apply to both fax and e-mail messages. Keep
in mind that if you choose to send an e-mail notification for new voice or fax
messages and the schedule specifies to delete the message after sending the e-
mail notification, you must attach the actual voice or fax file to the message to
be able to access it.

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

39

Mailbox: LAP Options Tab

Local Area Paging Code
In this field, enter the capcode located on the User's pager.
Pager Baud Rate
Specify the correct baud rate of the User's pager.
Pager Type
Indicate the type of pager for the User.

Refer to "Local Area Paging" in the Optional Applications section for more information on
implementing L.A.P.

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

40

Database Configuration

Mailbox: Notification Set up Outcalling Options For a User
When a message is left in a mailbox, Perfect Voice Office Pro uses the information from this screen
to notify the User. There are ten different calling schedules (0 9), all or none of which can be used
for each mailbox. The system starts with schedule number zero (0).
Select Edit-Notification or the Notification button from the Mailbox menu. The "Outcalling
Schedules" screen appears which enables you to set up outcalling options for an individual User's
mailbox.

Schedule
There are ten schedules numbered from 0 to 9. Zero (0) has the highest priority and is called first,
nine has the least priority and is contacted last.
N O T E
I&M
The very first notification schedule MUST be zero. If this schedule is empty, the
Perfect Voice Office Pro system does not look for any other schedule.

?
Beeper/Phone
Select beeper or telephone. This option determines how Perfect Voice Office Pro calls a User when
they have a message. When the notification schedule is configured to call the User on a beeper, the
Perfect Voice Office Pro system dials the entered telephone number, including pauses. When the
time out occurs, the Perfect Voice Office Pro system sends the voice or DTMF message (see "Phone
Number" below for special dialing options). When the notification schedule is scheduled to call you
on a telephone, the Perfect Voice Office Pro system dials the number the same way as for the beeper
notification. When the Perfect Voice Office Pro system receives a connect signal, it asks the User to
enter a password. When the correct password is entered, it plays the mailbox main menu which
informs the User of new and saved messages and gives all of the same mailbox options as the User
would receive if he or she were picking up messages from inside the office.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

41

# (Phone Number)
This field contains the telephone number that the Perfect Voice Office Pro system dials to notify
Users. Simply enter the phone number, including ones and area codes if necessary, with no hyphens
(-) or spaces between the numbers. It is not necessary to add the code to secure an outside line (i.e,.
9).
Standard Beeper: If a Standard Beeper is used, it may be necessary to add a few delays or
pauses (,) after the telephone number to allow time for the paging service to play their greeting
before the Perfect Voice Office Pro system sends the notification message (e.g.
18645551212,,,,). This example allows approximately eight seconds for the paging company's
greeting to play before sending the message.
Alphanumeric Pager: If an alphanumeric pager is used, callers may leave their telephone
number, which will be sent to the pager. In order to have the telephone number sent, enter E
after the pager number and commas. The mailbox number and number of new messages is
displayed on the pager.
Voice Pager: If a voice pager is used, messages may be sent directly to the pager. In order to
have messages sent to the pager, enter the letter M after the telephone number and commas (e.g.
18645551212,,,,M).
N O T E
For this option, timing is extremely important. You may have to adjust the number
of pauses until you find the appropriate setting.

Day - Start/End:
This field identifies when the calling schedule is valid. The values for the "Day" may be entered two
ways:
Enter as calendar dates (i.e. January 1 to December 31 is entered as 0101 to 1231).
Enter as days of the week (i.e. Monday to Friday is entered as *100 to *500). Monday is considered
the first day of the week (*100) and Sunday is the last (*700).
N O T E
The "Start" day must be "lower" than the "End" day. For example, do not enter
I&M
*600 to *200.
Time - Start/End
This field identifies what times the calling schedule is active. This value is entered in military
?
format. For example, if the User wishes to be notified between 5:00 PM and 10:00PM, the values
are entered 1700 and 2200.
Busy, No Answer
These values specify how many minutes the Perfect Voice Office Pro system waits after receiving a
busy or a no answer before retrying the number. If no value is entered for the "Busy" and "No
Answer" fields, the system defaults to fifteen minutes.
Call it
The Call it field specifies the number of times the system retries notification for this schedule before
giving up and trying the next outcalling schedule.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

42

Database Configuration

Mailbox: Distribution Lists
The distribution list screen allows you to view, create, and edit specific distribution lists for the User.
Enter the number of the distribution list you wish to view and press [Enter]. Each User mailbox may
hold up to 99 distribution lists.
Select the Distribution Lists button from the Mailbox menu.
Use the Prev and Next buttons to scroll through the distribution lists or enter the distribution
list number in the List Number field and press [Tab].
To add distribution list members, you may enter a mailbox number in the Mailbox field and
click the Add button. If you wish to select a mailbox from the Mailbox Directory, you may
click the Add button first. To delete members, you may enter the mailbox number in the
Mailbox field and click Delete or highlight the unwanted mailbox from the list and click the
Delete button.

Number
This field contains the distribution list number. Each mailbox may have up to 99 distribution lists
I&M
Mailbox
This is the field where the mailboxes for the distribution lists are added and deleted. To add a new
?
mailbox to the list, enter the mailbox number in this field and click the "Add" button. The mailbox
number appears on the distribution screen. To delete a mailbox from this list, enter the mailbox
number in the "Mailbox" field and click the "Delete" button. Notice that the unwanted number is
now gone from the distribution screen.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

43

Creating a Broadcast Distribution List
You may create a mailbox(es) to be used as broadcast distribution list(s).

To create a broadcast distribution list:
1. Create a phantom mailbox. A phantom mailbox is a mailbox that is in a Class of Service separate
from other mailboxes and has no capabilities except Login and Call Blocking.
2. On the Transfer Options tab, select Call Blocking.
3. Click the Distribution Lists tab and create Distribution list number 1.
4. Add all desired mailboxes. NOTE: Be sure not to add the same mailbox number that includes
this distribution list. For example, if you created mailbox 500 in step #1, make sure that it is not
listed in distribution list number 1.
5. Select the Message Forwarding tab. Enter *1 in the "Forward Messages to:" field, which means
distribution list 1. The "After" field should remain at 0000 if the members of the list exceed 40;
otherwise, delays may be experienced with the delivery of the message as well as message light
delays on the voice mail system due to the number of records that have to be updated. Select No
for "Delete After Forward".
6. Assign this mailbox to the pre-defined Broadcast Distribution List Class of Service. If your
system does not have a pre-defined Broadcast List Class of Service, create a new Class of Service
and set it up to delete messages after one day. Set the Days to Save Old and Days to Save New
field to one (1) so that the message will automatically be deleted from the mailbox the following
day. To keep the message for longer periods, adjust the number of days to save accordingly so
that messages will be automatically deleted.
7. Tell Users that, to send messages to this distribution list, send it to the mailbox you created. The
message is automatically forwarded to everyone entered in the list.

When the Sender is a Member of the Global Distribution List
If a message is sent from a mailbox to a global distribution mailbox, and the sender of the message is
a member of the distribution list, the message will not be delivered to that member. The system
automatically skips over that mailbox.

I&M
Limitation - Urgent Messages
When sending a message internally from a User's mailbox to a global distribution mailbox, the
message cannot be marked as urgent. Since message forwarding is used to deliver the message, the
?
urgent tag is removed when the message is forwarded the second time. That is, the global
distribution mailbox receives the urgent message, however when it forward to the distribution list,
the urgency is removed.

To send an urgent message, the message must be left directly in the global distribution mailbox and
marked as urgent there.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

44

Database Configuration

Section

8
8 - System
The System drop-down menu gives access to many useful accessories. This Section describes these
accessories.

These Accessories include:
The Parameters Screen. System parameters may only be accessed at the Installer level.
(Refer to the Installation section).
The Trace Screen, which is used like a digit grabber to troubleshoot system problems.
The Commands window allows you to enter a limited number of DOS commands without
shutting down the system.
The Status screen used to supply information about the current status of Perfect Voice Office
Pro.
The Debug screen used to set Perfect Voice Office Pro in a debug mode to record all Perfect
Voice Office Pro activities. When selected, more information appears on the Status screen.
The Utilities screen which enables you to run reorg, set up SMTP MAPI mode, and view
Message status.

System: Trace
The trace function provides the ability to monitor all incoming and inband codes to the voice mail
system for debugging purposes. While the Trace screen is displayed, everything that appears on the
trace screen is logged to a file called TRACE.LOG. Trace.log is located in //winvm/logs. If the
process that is being traced scrolls through the screen too quickly to read, the contents of the Trace
may be viewed using any text-editing program such as Notepad or Wordpad. Note that the Trace
screen should be closed before viewing it. The Reset box will clear the Trace Screen, and delete the
file TRACE.LOG, where all trace activities are logged. The Exit box is used to close and exit the
Trace Screen. All of the information that came through the screen is written to a file (TRACE.LOG)
that overwrites itself each time the Trace Screen is opened.
On the right side of the screen, you may specify to trace the activities off all ports or individual ports.
I&M
A Scroll bar is also available to view the activities that have been previously traced.

?

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

45

System: Commands
Turns on
Debug.
Shuts down
the system.

Enter Command
The "Enter Command" field is an interface between the Perfect Voice Office Pro system and the
DOS operating system. It allows you to enter DOS commands without shutting down the Perfect
Voice Office Pro system. After entering your desired commands (see below), click the Execute
Button.
Date:
Sets the system date. The default is the date set by the operating system.
Syntax: DATE mm-dd-yy
For example: DATE 08-14-97. The date is now set for August 14, 1997.

Time:
Sets the system time.
Syntax: TIME hh:mm, where hh:mm are entered in military format.
For example: TIME 13:45. The time is now set to 1:45 PM.

Drop:
Terminates line activity on all ports or a specific port. The caller is instantly disconnected. The
port is ready to answer another call.
Syntax: DROP n, where n is the port number.
For example: DROP 2. All communication on port 2 is immediately terminated.

Refresh:
The Refresh command re-lights or extinguishes message lights for all mailboxes.
Syntax: REFRESH

Start / Stop:
I&M
The Start and Stop command puts a certain port in and out of service.
Syntax: STOP n and START n, where n is the port number.
For example: To put port 1 out of service, enter STOP 1
?

LampOn or LampOffx:
Allows you turn Message indicators on or off. (X = Extension) For LampOn to operate, the
target mailbox must have at least one new message before the command is executed.

Shutdown
When there is a need to exit Perfect Voice Office Pro, select the "Shutdown" option from the
Commands Screen. You may shut down immediately (Exit Now) or wait until no ports are active
(Wait For end of Activity). Choosing to wait prevents the system from cutting off callers or possibly
corrupting data

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

46

Database Configuration

System: Status
The Status Screen shows detailed activity of the startup process.

The "Clear Status" button resets the number of calls to zero and clears the activity window on the
left.
There are two progress indicator bars below the activity box. These bars indicate the progress of re-
indexing Database files. The first indicator shows the percentage of the current Database that has
been re-indexed and the second indicator shows the total progress.

I&M
System: Debug
?
When Debug is selected, the status screen shows more detailed information. The trace information
is written to the TRACE.DAT file in the C:\WINVM directory.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

47

System: Utilities
Three options are available from the System-Utilities menu:
1. Reorg
2. Message
Status
3. SMTP
Properties

System-Utilities-Reorg
The Utilities Reorg option displays the status of the reorganization utility.
Resetting Databases
If it becomes necessary to reset a database (due to data corruption), thereby clearing all of the data in
the database, simply shut down the Voice Mail system (File, Shutdown, Wait for End of Activity),
I&M
then go into Windows Explorer and delete the associated database file, then restart the Voice Mail
system. The databases are listed below.

?
Mailboxes
Includes the screen data in all mailboxes and
MAILBOX.DBF
their associated outcall notification schedules
OFFSITE.DBF

Messages
Includes all messages associated with the
MSGFILE.DBF
mailboxes

Companies
Includes all data on the company screen except
COMPANY.DBF
holiday data

Holidays
Includes the holiday schedules on the company
HOLIDAY.DBF
screen

Notification
Includes the pending schedules to light message
NOTIFY.DBF
lights and outcall to a pager, telephone or e-mail
address

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

48

Database Configuration

Dial by Name
Includes the dial by name directory that allows
DBNAME.DBF
Directory
callers to select the digits associated with the
User's name.

Distribution
Includes the distribution lists associated with the
DISTFILE.DBF
Lists
mailboxes

System-Utilities-Message Status
The Message Status utility allows you to find detailed status reports of messages within a mailbox. In
the Message Status dialog, enter the mailbox number in the Mailbox field. A list of all messages
related to the mailbox will appear, defining when the messages were deleted, sent, the sender, date
and time. To determine the order in which the messages are listed, click FIFO (first in first out) or
LIFO (last in first out).

System-Utilities-SMTP Properties
The SMTP utility is used to setup integrated messaging with Perfect Voice Office Pro. In the SMTP
Properties dialog:
o SMTP Server Address: Enter the Perfect Voice Office Pro server IP address.
o SMTP TCP/IP Port: Enter the TCP/IP port number.
o SMTP Store Path: Enter the path to where the SMTP store is.
o SMTP Polling Interval: Enter the interval in which SMTP is to poll (in milliseconds).
o SMTP Account: Enter the SMTP account name.
o SMTP Password: Enter the SMTP password.
o SMTP Log Level: Enter the SMTP log level.
o SMTP Keep Sent Items drop-down list: Select Yes to instruct the system to keep sent
items.
I&M
o Convert to GSM Wave checkbox: Select to send messages in GSM Wave format,
enabling the listening of voice messages from any Windows Media Player compatible
?
software.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

49

Section

9

9 - View
Selecting "View" from the main menu provides three or four options:
The Port Activity screen that shows the activity on each port.
The Mailbox Status screen which indicates whether a User is logged in or out of the office.
The Fax Status screen (if fax is installed).
Call Routing Tables which allow you to map incoming telephone numbers through Caller
ID or PIN numbers to specific extensions.

View: Port Activity
From the main menu select View, then choose Port Activity. The Port Activity Screen displays each
port numerically and the activity associated with it. It also provides general information on the total
calls received, total transfers, and total messages left on a daily basis. All of this information may be
set to zero by clicking the "Reset Counts" button.
You may highlight each port individually by clicking on the desired port, then click the right mouse
button. A pop-up window appears and you may choose from the following options:
Trace: This option displays the Trace Screen showing the activity of the selected port.
Disable: This option disables a port for usage, and is normally utilized for testing purposes.
Enable: This option enables the port for usage. It works in conjunction with "Disable"
command. It is normally utilized for testing purposes.
Drop: This command drops all activity on the specified port. It is normally utilized for
testing purposes.

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

50

Database Configuration

View: Mailbox Status
The Mailbox Status Screen provides an easy way to check whether a User is logged into his or her
mailbox. To search fields, select the desired field from the drop-down list in the "Search by:" box
and enter the text you wish to search for in the "Containing text:" field.

I&M

You may select a mailbox by clicking on the desired mailbox number to highlight it and right-mouse
click in this area. A pop-up menu provides the following options:
?
Edit: The Mailbox Screen is displayed which allows you to edit this particular mailbox.
Delete: This option removes this particular mailbox from the system.
Information: This option provides information on the mailbox. This information includes the
name of the User associated with this mailbox, their extension, as well as the Class of
Service and the Company the mailbox is associated with.

To close this screen, select "View" from the top menu bar and click "Mailbox Status". The check
mark beside it disappears.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

51

View: Fax Status
This screen displays the status of
faxes (if fax is installed.)
I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

52

Database Configuration

View: Call Routing Tables
Perfect Voice Office Pro allows you to create call routing tables that map callers based on Caller ID
or PIN numbers. Call Routing tables may be associated to a schedule which allows you to route
numbers to different extensions (Caller ID) or submenus (PIN) at different times, on different days.
Perfect Voice Office Pro checks the schedule and if the current day and time fall within the valid
time frame, the call is routed accordingly. Refer to "Creating Menu Schedules" later in this section
for more information on Menu Schedules.

If you create a Call Routing Table for a Caller ID, when that incoming telephone number is picked
up by Caller ID, Perfect Voice Office Pro routes that call directly to the extension you specify in the
table. Caller ID mapping may be done at many different levels:
By specific 10-digit telephone numbers
By area code
By area code and city exchange

Call Routing tables based on a PIN number allow you to route a caller to a sub menu number in any
V-Menu.

To access Call Routing Tables:
From the Main Menu, select View, then
choose Call Routing Tables.
Type: Caller ID tables are designated as
"ID"and PIN number tables are designated
as "Pin".
Destination: The destination for Caller ID is
an extension and the destination for a PIN
number is a Sub Menu Number.
Number: The Number for Caller ID is a telephone number and for PIN the number is the
PIN number.
Schedule: If a schedule is applied to the table, the schedule number is displayed. "No"
I&M
means that the table does not have a schedule.

?

To add a Call Routing Table:
1. Click the Add button from the Call Routing Table screen.
2. The Add screen appears. For the Applies To: field, specify Caller ID or PIN number. Enter
the appropriate information and click OK.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

53

Adding a Caller ID Routing Table:
For Caller ID, enter the Mailbox Number and the Phone Number
you wish to route to that mailbox. Caller IDs may be mapped by a
specific 10-digit telephone number, area code or city exchange (see
below). You may enter a name in the Associated Name field or
apply a schedule to this Caller ID routing table.

Mapping by Area Code or City Exchange
You may map telephone numbers to a specific extension by area code or city exchange by entering
a wildcard (*) in the Phone Number field of the "Add" screen.

To map by area code, enter:
864*******

To map by city exchange, enter: 864555****

You may also route all area codes that begin with 8 to a specific extension by entering 8********
or 86 by entering 86********. Note that you may not enter a wildcard between two real numbers
(8*4******). Once a wildcard is used, all remaining digits must be wildcards.

Adding a PIN Number Routing Table:
For a PIN routing table, you must first create the appropriate call routing table and then create the V-
Menu(s) that will include the "Get PIN Number" action as one of the options.

I&M
Create the Call Routing Table:
Enter the Pin Number and the sub menu number (Menu Number)
that you wish to route that Pin to. You may enter a name in the
?
Associated Name field. Select Apply Schedule and enter the
schedule number if you wish to have the PIN number routed
differently at certain times. (Refer to "Creating Menu Schedules"
later in this section for more information.)

IMPORTANT: You must also create the V-Menu(s) that
contain the sub menu number specified in the call routing table.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

54

Database Configuration

Create the V-Menu(s):
In the appropriate V-Menu, specify Get PIN Number as the action for the desired option.
Perform the following:
Specify and record the Action Prompt. In the adjacent box, enter the number of retries the
caller will have to enter a correct PIN number. The action prompt re-plays this number of
times.
In the box labeled "Invalid", enter a sub menu number level that the caller will go to if he or
she does not enter a valid PIN number in the number of attempts allowed.
Create the appropriate Sub Menu Number level specified in the call routing table.

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

55

Section

10
10 - Voice Menus
Voice Menus give you the ability to customize company greetings and individual mailboxes to meet
special needs. Menus may be created inside a mailbox from which callers may access options to
leave or obtain information. Company greetings can offer callers the option to transfer themselves to
specific departments, leave messages, or obtain company information such as address, telephone
number, fax number, or office hours. By using Voice Menus, you are able to customize how Perfect
Voice Office Pro answers and directs callers through the system.

Since voice menus offer so much flexibility, it is impossible to describe all of the possible
applications. It is extremely important that you keep in mind the following:
Plan the voice menu. Use the Voice Menu Worksheets at the end of this section to design the
Voice Menu.
When recording the prompts, mention all options available to callers.
Always allow callers to exit at any time or return to a previous menu.
Test the voice menu thoroughly. Try all options to ensure that everything works as you
intended.
To Access:
From the Main Menu, select V-Menus
The Voice Menu Entry Form screen appears.

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

56

Database Configuration

1 - Naming a Voice Menu and Assigning Options
Move to the top box on the Voice Menu screen. You may enter the name of a voice menu using
standard DOS form (any name consisting of up to eight (8) characters or numbers). You may name a
particular voice menu using a number (such as 100) or using a name (such as JOHN).

Listing of
voice menus

This is the name of

the voice menu.
Select Allow
Extension Dialing

to allow the caller
Each voice menu
to transfer to an
may have up to 99
extension while in
sub menus. These
this voice menu.
fields specify the
Timeout specifies
sub menu number,
the maximum time,
prompt, and the
in seconds, that
number of attempts
may elapse
the caller will have
between dialed
to select a valid
digits for the
option (Retries).
system to
recognize the digits
Actions may be assigned to 0-9,
* or #.
as an extension.
D specifies the default action.
This will occur if the caller does

not select another option.

Voice Menu Name
The name of the Voice Menu file that you are working with appears in this text box at the top of this
I&M
screen. Every Voice Menu may have up to ninety-nine sub-menus. This Tree Name appears on every
level of this voice menu.
?
Use Schedule
If the Voice Menu is being activated according to specific schedule, this box should be checked and
the schedule number should be entered in the box that appears beside it. Use Schedule box only
appears on Sub Menu Number 1 of the V-Menu. For more information on menu schedules, refer to
"Creating Menu Schedules" later in this section.
Allow Extension Dialing
If selected, the caller is able to transfer to an extension while in this voice menu. This is related to
the Timeout field.
Timeout
This value specifies the number of seconds without a response that may elapse before the default
action occurs. The default value is 3. A value of 0 is not allowed; however, if you wish for the
default action to happen immediately, you may enter -1.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

57

Sub Menu Number
Each Voice Menu file may have up to ninety-nine (99) sub-menus. When in the Sub Menu Number
box, you may either enter a number using the keyboard or use the arrow keys on the keyboard to
select from the list of ninety-nine (99) menus.

NOTE: You MUST begin with Sub Menu Number one (1). Perfect Voice Office starts all Voice
Menus with Sub Menu Number one.

Sub Menu Prompt
This field specifies the prompt that plays when a caller accesses this
voice menu. Select the appropriate Sub Menu Prompt from the drop-
down list.
· Salutation: Salutation prompts are located in the SALUTE
directory. This directory includes the Company Greetings and
additional prompt numbers you may record. Enter the prompt number, which may be any 3-digit
number between one and nine hundred and ninety-nine (001-999). Be sure not to select a number
that is already assigned to a Company Greeting.
You must record this prompt the same way that you record your company greetings. See
"Recording System Prompts and Company Greetings" in this manual.
N O T E
Salutation prompts (Company Greetings, Voice Menu prompts, and Voice Menu
questions) are exclusive from other System Prompts. Voice Menu prompts and
company greetings are stored in the same directory (SALUTE) so the prompt
numbers that you choose for the voice menus cannot be the same as the company
greetings. Refer to the company menu to see company greeting prompt numbers.
System prompts are stored in a separate directory (WINVM) so you do not have to
be concerned with the prompt numbers assigned to regular system prompts.
Company: This plays the current company greeting.
Mailbox: This plays the active greeting of the mailbox that the voice menu is associated
with.
Optional: This plays an optional greeting of the mailbox that the voice menu is associated
with. Enter the number of the optional mailbox greeting. This is only applicable if the
I&M
Voice Menu is attached to a Mailbox.
None: No prompt plays.
Sub Menu Retries
?
This specifies the number of attempts that the caller has to select a valid option. If the caller does not
select anything, the system repeats the sub menu prompt the number of retries specified in this field
before it performs the default action.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

58

Database Configuration

2 - Building Your Voice Menu
Now that you have selected a Voice Menu Name, a Sub Menu Number and a Sub Menu Prompt
Number, you may build your voice menu by assigning actions to the menu. When you are satisfied
with the voice menu, click OK.
N O T E
You may setup a voice menu to default to a particular action by placing the action
on line D in the voice menu window.

Action
Actions may be assigned to 0-9, #, or *. An action should also be assigned to D, the default. The
default action occurs if the caller does not select another options. Select the desired action from the
drop-down list. The Action list contains all of the options for the voice menus. These options may
be used in a variety of ways to customize how calls are answered. Some of the actions require
additional information to be entered. See the appropriate action for a list of the additional
information required. The actions listed below are explained fully on the next several pages.
None
Send to Mailbox
Send to Menu
Ask Question
Send to Directory
Send to Login
Send to Main Greeting
Ask for Password
Disconnect
Get Transfer Mailbox
Send Requested Fax
Send Predefined Fax
Send Voice Mail Record Tone
Send to Voice Mail
LAP Current Mailbox
I&M
Page Current Mailbox
Beep Caller Phone Number
Get Transfer Phone Number
?
Record Conversation
Go to Express Voice Mail
Get PIN Number
Get Caller ID Info
Get Destination from DB
Send to Requested Voice Mailbox
Send to Operator

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

59

Action: Send to Mailbox

Use this option to allow callers to transfer to the extension associated with this option.
Additional information: Enter a mailbox number in the box labeled "Mailbox".

Action: Send to Menu

Use this option to transfer callers to another sub menu level in this voice menu. This option
facilitates multi-level voice menus. Every voice menu can have up to ninety-nine (99) sub-menus.
Additional information: Enter a menu number (1-99) in the box labeled "Next Menu".

Action: Ask Question

Use this option to obtain information from callers. When this option is selected, callers hear a pre-
recorded question. Perfect Voice Office Pro stores the response to the question in the specified
mailbox and then transfers the caller to the next voice menu. To ask several questions, use this action
in the next menu. All answers are joined together and stored as one message in the specified
mailbox.

Additional information: Enter a mailbox number in the box labeled "Mailbox". Enter a menu number
in the box labeled "Next Menu". Enter the question prompt number in the box labeled "Action
I&M
Question".

?
N O T E
The Questions, Voice Menu prompts and the Company Greetings are all stored in
the same directory (SALUTE). Be sure that you do not select a number already
assigned to a Voice Menu prompt or Company Greeting. Refer to the Company
Menu to see company greeting prompt numbers.

Action: Send to Directory
This option allows callers to transfer themselves to directory assistance.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

60

Database Configuration

Action: Send to Login
This action allows callers to access mailboxes to retrieve and send messages. The caller is asked to
enter the mailbox number to be transferred to and then asked to enter the mailbox password to
retrieve messages.

Action: Send to Main Greeting
This action transfers callers to the Company Main Greeting. This option transfers callers back to the
point where they first called the Perfect Voice Office Pro system.

Action: Ask for Password

This action restricts access to sensitive areas of the voice menu. Callers selecting this option must
enter correct password to get to the next menu level.
Additional information:
Enter a password in the box labeled "Password".

Enter a menu number in the box labeled "Next Menu".
N O T E
The caller is given three opportunities to enter a correct password before the
system terminates the connection.

Action: Disconnect
This action allows callers to disconnect from the Perfect Voice Office Pro system.

Action: Get Transfer Mailbox
Use this action to allow callers to transfer directly from within the voice menu to a desired extension.
When a caller selects this option from a voice menu, a second prompt, which must be recorded,
should tell callers to "Enter the extension number of the person that you wish to speak with." The
I&M
system then tries to transfer to the desired extension.
Additional information: Enter the Prompt number in the box labeled "Action Prompt".

?
Action: Send Requested Fax (available with fax module)
This action prompts the User to enter the document number of the fax document. The system also
prompts the caller to enter their fax machine number including area code.
Additional information: Enter a menu number in the box labeled "Next Menu".

Action: Send Predefined Fax (available with fax module)
When you use this action, the system does NOT prompt the User to enter a document number. The
system sends the document number entered on this screen. The system prompts the caller to enter
their fax machine number including area code.
Additional information: Enter a FAX document number.

Enter a mailbox number in the box labeled "Mailbox".

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

61

Action: Send to Voice Mail Record Tone
This action sends the caller directly to the Beep to begin recording a message in the mailbox that the
voice menu is configured on. This option does not play another greeting before the caller hears the
beep to begin recording.

Action: Send to Voice Mail
Use this option to play the no-answer greeting or gone home greeting of the mailbox that the voice
menu is configured on. This option plays the greeting and then a trailer message (MESS080.VOX)
that informs the caller to record the message after the tone and to press # when finished for more
options.

Action: Lap Current Mailbox
When a caller selects this option, Perfect Voice Office Pro activates the User's pager. The User may
then pick up the call from any telephone.

Action: Page Current Mailbox
This option acts just like Post-Transfer Paging. When a caller selects this option, they are placed on
hold while Perfect Voice Office Pro makes an intercom page announcement. After paging, the caller
is transferred to the User's extension. If the User does not take the call, the caller is transferred back
to voice menu.

Action: Beep Caller Phone Number
This option acts just like Send Beeper Message, an option that is available in all mailboxes. A caller
selecting this option is prompted to enter his/her phone number using the telephone keypad. The
DTMF digits that are entered are then sent to the User's Alphanumeric pager.
N O T E
The User must have an Alphanumeric pager that is configured in the Notification
of the User's mailbox.

Action: Get Transfer Phone Number
I&M
This action prompts the caller to enter a telephone number to transfer to.
?
Additional information: Enter the required prefix for accessing an outside line in the box labeled
"Prefix".

Action: Record Conversation
This option is available on PBXs only, and acts like a barge in conference. If the telephone system
does not offer a "record conversation" option, the option puts the caller on hold, simulates a
conference call with the specified mailbox, and records the conversation.
Additional information: Enter a mailbox number in the box labeled "Mailbox".

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

62

Database Configuration

Action: Goto Express Voice Mail
This action allows callers to transfer directly to a mailbox, hear the name recording (not the greeting)
followed by a beep, and leave a message.
Additional information: Enter a mailbox number in the box labeled "Mailbox". Enter a language
number in the box labeled "Language".

Action: Get PIN Number

This action allows callers to enter a PIN number. A PIN number call routing table must be set up
and the appropriate sub menu or nothing will happen when the caller enters the PIN number. The
call routing table directs the caller to the sub menu in this voice menu.
Additional information: Enter the prompt number in the box labeled "Action Prompt". In the
adjacent box, enter the number of retries the caller will have to enter a correct PIN number. The
action prompt will re-play this number of times. In the box labeled "Invalid", you must enter a sub
menu number level that the caller will go to if he or she does not enter a valid PIN number in the
number of attempts allowed.

Action: Get Caller ID
This option prompts the caller to enter their telephone number. The number entered is then
displayed as Caller ID on the User's desktop.

Action: Get Destination from DB
This is used with the Active X module and it will pass information to the pop-ups.

Action: Send to Operator
I&M
This will send the caller to either the personal o perator oaf a mailbox or the default company
operator.
?

Action: Send to Requested Voice Mailbox
This caller will be prompted for the mailbox that they wish to go to and the call will be transferred
directory to the greeting of that mailbox without ringing the telephone.

3 - Assigning a Schedule to the Voice Menu
If the voice menu will be activated based upon a schedule, select "Use Schedule" and enter the
schedule number in the field that appears. To view the schedule, select Mailbox -- Menu Schedule
from the Main Menu. Refer to "Creating Menu Schedules -- Voice Menu Schedules" for more
information.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

63

4 - Activating Your Voice Menu
The Voice Menu may be activated at either the Mailbox level or the Company level.
Mailbox Level
To activate the voice menu, On the "Transfer
Option Tab" in the Mailbox screen of the
individual mailbox, select the "Voice Menu"
option. Select the desired voice menu from
the drop-down list.

Company Level
On the Greetings Tab in the Company screen of the individual company, select the "Start with Voice
Menu" option. Click on the drop-down menu and select the name of the voice menu file to use.

N O T E
When the Company starts with a voice menu, the Holidays will only take effect if
the Prompt field says Company. This tells the Voice Menu to use the Prompt
defined on the Greetings tab of the Company screen and to check if the current day
is a holiday.

5 - Recording Voice Menu Prompts
Once a voice menu is created and all options desired are added, the prompts and questions must be
recorded.
Choosing a Prompt Number:
Salutation prompts (Company Greetings, Voice Menu prompts, and Voice Menu questions) are
exclusive from regular System Prompts. Salutation prompts are stored in the SALUTE directory. The
prompt number may be any 3-digit number between one and nine hundred ninety-nine (001-999).
However, the SALUTE directory includes the Company Greetings and additional prompt numbers
you may record. Be sure not to select a number that is already assigned to a Company Greeting or
I&M
another recording. Refer to the company menu to see company greeting prompt numbers.
System prompts are stored in a separate directory (WINVM) so you do not have to be concerned
with the prompt numbers assigned to regular system prompts.
?

Recording the Prompt:
It is recommended that you write a script to ensure that you offer all of the options for every menu.
You must record this prompt the same way that you record your company greetings. See "Recording
System Prompts and Company Greetings" in this manual.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

64

Database Configuration

Demonstration Voice Menu
Since voice menus offer so much flexibility, it is impossible to describe all of the possible
applications. For the purpose of simplicity and clarity, the following demonstration shows several
useful applications:
N O T E
Plan your voice menu
When recording the prompts, mention all options available to callers.
Always allow callers to exit at any time or return to a previous menu.
Test the voice menu thoroughly. Try all options to ensure that each
prompt and action works as you intended.

Example A: Enhancing Direct Department Access
Direct department access may be obtained without the use of Voice Menus by entering the extension
of the particular department in the Single digit field of the Company Screen. However, you may wish
to enhance this function with voice menus for each department, allowing callers to select particular
extensions, place orders, obtain company information, etc.
Steps:
1. Design the Voice Menu
2. Create the Voice Menu
3. Attach the Voice Menu to a Mailbox
4. Permit callers to access the Voice Menu

Step 1: Design the Voice Menu
Decide EXACTLY what callers will hear at each level, and what will happen with each option
chosen. Decide what each greeting will say (one greeting will be required at each level), and assign it
a greeting number. Some standards should be kept in mind when designing the Menu:
Keep the options in sequential order. For example:
I&M
DON'T: "Press two for Technical Support, or one for Sales."
DO: "Press one for Sales, or two for Technical Support."
?
Always allow an option to exit the Voice Menu. Whether the default is Send to Main
Greeting or Disconnect, ensure that callers will not get caught in "Voice Mail Jail".

Our design is as follows:
At the Main Greeting, callers will hear GREETING NUMBER: 100: "Thank you for calling the
ABC Company. If you know your party's extension, please enter it now. Press one (1) for the Sales
Department, or two (2) for Technical Support. For a complete directory press *, or remain on hold to
speak with an operator."

Press 1 for Sales Department:
If Callers press 1 for Sales, they will be offered the following options: GREETING NUMBER: 101
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

65

"Press one (1) to place an order automatically. Press two (2) for Canadian Sales. Press three (3) for
US Sales. To repeat these options, press 9."
Press 1 to place an order:
If Callers press one (1) to place an order, they will be asked the following questions:
"Please state your name now."GREETING NUMBER: 103
"Please state your address now."GREETING NUMBER: 104
"Please state your Purchase Order Number now."GREETING NUMBER: 105
"Please state the item reference number now."GREETING NUMBER: 106
"Please state your telephone number now."GREETING NUMBER: 107
Press 2 for Canadian Sales:
If Callers press two (2) for Canadian Sales, they will be transferred directly to Extension 110.
Press 3 for US Sales:
If Callers press three (3) for US Sales, they will be transferred directly to Extension 112.

Press 2 for Technical Support:
If Callers press 2 for Support, they will be offered the following options: GREETING NUMBER
102 : "Press one (1) to leave a message for the technician on call. He will be paged and will return
your call within the hour. If your call is of a more urgent nature, press two (2) to page the technician
directly. Otherwise, press # to return to the previous menu."

Step 2. Create the Voice Menu
There will actually be two (2) Voice Menus. The first will be called SALES, and the second will be
called SUPPORT.
Sales
Option one (1) is place an order, so we will ask a series of questions (listed above), record them all in
one mailbox (each answer is appended to the previous one and stored as one message in Mailbox
200) and send callers to the next sub-menu until all of the questions have been asked. Options two
(2) and three (3) in the Sales Menu indicate to send callers to the various Sales departments. For this
example, we are sending callers directly to extensions to speak with a live person, so we choose the
I&M
Send to Mailbox option and enter the mailbox number of the person associated with the desired
extension. Option one (1) sends the caller to the Voice Mail of Mailbox 205, which is the Technical
Support Mailbox for this example. The caller then hears a greeting and leaves a message. A
?
notification schedule will be attached to this mailbox that notifies the on-call technician. Option two
(2) prompts the caller to enter his/her phone number, and the technician is paged on his beeper with
the entered number. The caller can exit the menu by pressing pound (#) to return to the Main
Greeting. Set the default (D) option to Send to Main Greeting. This is to ensure that callers do not get
trapped in "Voice Mail Jail".

Step 3: Attach Each Voice Menu to a Mailbox
Now that the Voice Menus are created, they must be attached to a mailbox. We will assign Voice
Menu SALES to Mailbox 800, and SUPPORT to Mailbox 801. These two mailboxes are phantom
mailboxes. A phantom mailbox is a mailbox with no physical extension. These mailboxes must be in
their own Class of Service, with the following options:

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

66

Database Configuration

Message Lights DISABLED
Call Blocking Enabled (and activated)
Login/Logout Enabled (and Logged In activated)
The Transfer options tab for each of these Mailboxes will be as follows:
Notification on the Transfer Options tab associated with Mailbox 801 (SUPPORT) will be set set to
All. This is because the option Beep Caller Phone Number is provided. Verify in the Class of Service
associated with this mailbox that, although message lights are DISABLED, Beeper and Outcall are
ENABLED. A notification schedule must also be set up in this mailbox (801) to outcall to a beeper.
The Voice Menu will refer to this schedule to perform the Beep Caller Phone Number option.

Step 4: Permit Callers to Access the Voice Menu
The final step is to allow users to access the Voice Menu. Refer to the Company Greeting prompt in
the design (Step 1).
Option one (1) is transfer to the Sales department, so we are actually transferring to Mailbox 800,
which defaults to the Voice Menu, and likewise for the Support Menu. This setup is declared on the
Company Screen in the Single Digit Option.
For Single Digit 1, enter 800.
For Single Digit 2, enter 801.
TIP: To allow Callers to dial an extension directly while they are in the Voice Menu, activate the
check box that says Allow Extension Dialing.

Example B: Personal Voice Menu
Voice Menus can be created for individual Users, or a general voice menu can be created that will be
attached to a group of mailboxes.
Steps:
1. Design the Voice Menu
2. Create the Voice Menu
3. Attach the Voice Menu to a Mailbox
I&M

?
Step 1: Design the Voice Menu
Our design is as follows:
When callers reach your mailbox, they will hear your personal greeting: MAILBOX PERSONAL
GREETING: "I can't come to the phone right now. I am either away from my desk or on another
line. To try me on my cellular phone, press 1. To speak with another representative, press 2. To page
me over the intercom, press 3. To transfer to the receptionist, pres 0; to access the company directory
press (*); otherwise, stay on the line to leave me a message."
If Callers press (1) for your cellular phone, they are transferred to phantom mailbox 802 that is set up
to perform a Centrex transfer to your cellular phone.
If Callers press two (2) to speak with another representative, they are sent back to the main company
greeting to enter another extension.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

67

If Callers press three (3) to send you a fax, the fax card receives the fax through the Fax Mail utility
(Fax Mail must be installed for this option to work).
If Callers press (0) to speak with the receptionist, they are transferred to mailbox 100.
If Callers press (*), they are sent to the dial-by-name directory.
Step 2. Create the Voice Menu
To identify this voice menu, it will be named MBX500, since it will be attached to mailbox 500 for
this scenario.
Step 3: Attach Each Voice Menu to a Mailbox
The next step is to attach the voice menu to mailbox 500 so that callers are greeted with it when they
reach the mailbox. The Transfer options tab mailbox 500 will be as follows:
Activate Post Transfer Paging (Remember that if you offer the option for callers to page you,
post-transfer paging must be activated in your mailbox):
Activate Logged in
Activate Voice Menu and select MBX500

Example C: Starting with a Voice Menu and Using a Schedule
This example assumes that the company is open Monday through Sunday, but requires a different
menu on Thursdays, and yet another on Fridays, due to the shifts that are assigned to the employees.
Therefore, a schedule will be used to accommodate this. Saturday through Wednesday, menu 1 of
voice menu ABCCO will greet callers. Thursday, menu 2 of voice menu ABCCO will greet callers,
and Friday, menu 3 of voice menu ABCCO will greet callers.

Steps:
1. Design the Voice Menu.
2. Create the Voice Menu.
3. Create the Schedule.
4. Permit Access to the Voice Menu.
I&M
Step 1: Design the Voice Menu
Our design is as follows:
?
When callers reach the main company greeting, regardless of the day of the week, or whether or not
the company is open or closed, they will hear GREETING NUMBER 120:
"Thank you for calling the ABC Company. If you know your party's extension, please enter it now.
If this is an emergency, press one (1) to page the technician on call. For a company directory press
(*); otherwise, please remain on the line to speak with the receptionist."
Press 1 to page the technician
If they press (1) to page the technician on call on any day between Saturday and Wednesday, they
are transferred to mailbox 400, the on-call technician's mailbox.
If they press (1) to page the technician on call on Thursday, they are transferred to mailbox 410, the
on-call technician's mailbox for that day.
If they press (1) to page the technician on call on Friday, they are transferred to mailbox 425, the on-
call technician's mailbox for that day.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

68

Database Configuration

Step 2. Create the Voice Menu
To identify this voice menu, it will be named ABCCO, since it is used for the entire ABC Company.
Create SubMenu 1:
Option 1-Action Send to Mailbox 400
Option *-Send to Directory
Option D-Send to Mailbox 100

Create Sub Menu 2:
Option 1-Action Send to Mailbox 410
Option *-Send to Directory
Option D-Send to Mailbox 100

Create SubMenu 3:
Option 1-Action Send to Mailbox 425
Option *-Send to Directory
Option D-Send to Mailbox 100

Step 3: Create the Schedule
To access the schedule, select Menu Schedules from the Mailbox menu on the main screen. Since
Menu 1 is the default menu, it is not necessary to define the time frame when Menu 1 will be active.
Simply select the days and define the hours for both Thursday (Menu Number 2) and Friday (Menu
Number 3).

Step 4: Permit Access to the Voice Menu
Finally, to let callers access the menu, ensure that it is activated on the company screen by selecting
it from the drop down list on the Greetings tab in the Start With Voice Menu column.
I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

69

Voice Menu Worksheets
Voice Menu:

Sub Menu Number:

Sub
Option# -- Action
Password
Next
Mailbox Action Sub Menu Prompt
Menu
Menu
Question
 Prompt
1 -
2 -
3 -
4 -
5 -
6 -
7 -
8 -
9 -
0 -
# -
* -
D -
Prompt/Question #____: ___________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________

Voice Menu:

Sub Menu Number:

Sub
Option# -- Action
Password
Next
Mailbox Action Sub Menu Prompt
Menu
Menu
Question
 Prompt
1 -
2 -
3 -
4 -
I&M
5 -
6 -
?
7 -
8 -
9 -
0 -
# -
* -
D -
Prompt/Question#____:____________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

70

Database Configuration

Section

11

11 - Creating Global Menu Schedules
Menu schedules allow you to create exception tables that can be associated to Company templates,
mailbox templates and regular voice menus. The system allows a company to create up to 99 global
schedules. Each schedule allows you to create up to 10 different exceptions. Each exception can be
used for:
Voice menu Schedules
E-Mail Schedules
Caller Routing Table (Caller ID and PIN Number)

Menu schedules may be accessed from the Main Menu. Select Mailbox from the top-line menu and
select Menu Schedules.

The Schedule screen appears. As mentioned above, schedules may be applied to Voice Menus, E-
Mail, or Call Routing Tables. The last column changes depending on what the schedule applies to.
For Voice Menus, the last column is "Menu Number", E-Mail - "Delete (Y/N)", and Call Routing
Table - "Destination".

N O T E
Each schedule number can have only one function. For example, Schedule 1 can
be for a voice menu or E-mail or Call Routing.

Voice Menu Schedules
Applying Menu Schedules to Voice Menus allows you to allocate exceptions based on day of the
week and time of day. This is illustrated in the following example.
I&M

?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

71

Menu Schedule for Voice menus-Example:
1. First create a Voice Menu. In this voice
menu from Monday to Friday, callers have
the option to leave a message for the User,
try the User on their mobile, or send a fax.
NOTE: Click Use Schedule to map this
Voice Menu to a global Menu Schedule you
will create. This Voice Menu is mapped to
Menu Schedule 1.

2. Create Menu #2 (the exception menu
for this Voice Menu). Menu Number 2
for the CHRIS Voice Menu specifies the
default action to be to transfer to a
mailbox. This mailbox includes the
outdial code and number of the User's
home.

I&M

?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

72

Database Configuration

3. Create the Menu Schedule. On Saturday to Sunday, we want calls to be directly routed to the
User's home between 8 AM and 5 PM. The global Menu Schedule includes an exception
schedule for Saturday and Sunday.

In this example the Menu schedule would be set up to have:

From
To
From
To
Menu
Saturday
Sunday
0800 1700 2

From the top-line menu bar of the Main
Menu, select Mailbox, select Menu
Schedules.
For "Schedule Applies To:", select Voice
Menu.
Enter the appropriate information in the
columns. This Menu Schedule tells the
voice menu associated to it to use menu
number 2 in the voice menu CHRIS on
Saturday and Sunday from 8 AM to 5 PM.
I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

73

E-Mail Schedules
E-mail schedules may only be used if Perfect Voice Office Pro is configured for MAPI integration.
You may create E-Mail schedules to schedule when the system will send voice and fax mail
messages to the Users e-mail. Rather than setting up individual delivery schedules for every User,
you may set up global templates and associate it to individual Users using the "Apply Schedule"
option on the Mailbox: Other Options tab.

Menu Schedule for E-Mail -Example:
1. First, create a global e-mail deliver schedule
within the Menu schedule form. We will set
up Perfect Voice Office Pro to deliver all voice
and fax messages to the User's e-mail from
Monday to Friday, 24 hours a day and to delete
the original message off the Perfect Voice Office
Pro system after the e-mail delivery.
From the top-line menu bar of the Main
Menu, select Mailbox, select Menu
Schedules.
For "Schedule Applies To:", select E-Mail
Schedule. Note that the last column
changes from "Menu Number" for Voice
Menus to "Delete (Y/N)" for E-Mail
Schedules.
Enter the following information in the appropriate columns:

From
To
From
To
Delete
(Y/N)
Monday Friday
0000 2359 Y

2. Apply the Schedule to the User's mailbox.
To assign the E-Mail schedule to a User's
mailbox:
From the Main Menu, select the Mailbox
button, select the Other Options tab.
I&M
Under "E-Mail Options", enter the
Username and E-Mail Address of the
?
User. Select "Send E-Mail with New
Messages". Since we chose to delete the
original message from voice mail in the E-
Mail Schedule, select "Attach Voice File to
Message" to attach it to the e-mail
message. Select "Apply Schedule" to
apply the E-Mail Schedule just created.
Since we created Schedule 1, enter 1 in the
box that appears. NOTE: Schedules apply
to both voice mail and fax mail messages. If you choose to "Send E-Mail with New Faxes",
you must also attach the fax file to the message in order to access it, since the schedule
specifies to delete after sending.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

74

Database Configuration

Call Routing Table Schedules
Menu schedules may also be used to create exemptions for the Call Routing tables in Perfect Voice
Office Pro. Call Routing Tables may be accessed by selecting "View Call Routing Tables" from
the top-line menu bar of the Main Menu. For more information on how to create a Call Routing
Table, refer to "View-Call Routing Tables" earlier in this section. If Call Routing Tables are used to
associate telephone numbers to specific mailboxes or PIN numbers to specific sub menu numbers,
Menu Schedules may be created to allocate exception times when these numbers will be routed to
other specific extensions or sub menu numbers automatically.

Menu Schedule for Call Routing Table-Example:
In this example, we have created a call routing table to route all telephone numbers in the 864 area
code to mailbox 101. We want to route these calls to mailbox 102 Monday through Saturday from
12:00 PM to 1:00 PM.

1. First create a Menu Schedule to apply to the Call
Routing Table.
From the top-line menu bar of the Main Menu,
select Mailbox, select Menu Schedules.
For "Schedule Applies To:", select Call Routing
Table. Note that the last column changes from
"Menu Number" for Voice Menus, or "Delete
(Y/N)" for E-Mail Schedules, to "Destination" for
Call Routing Tables.
Enter the following information in the appropriate
columns:

From
To
From
To
Destination

Monday Saturday 1200 1300 102

2. Apply the Menu Schedule to the Call Routing Table for Mailbox 101.
From the top-line menu bar of the Main Menu, select
View, select Call Routing Tables.
I&M
Select Add to create the Caller ID Routing Table for
Mailbox 101. Enter the Mailbox Number and the Phone
Number you wish to route to mailbox 101. Select "Apply
?
Schedule" and enter 1 since we created Schedule 1 for
this Call Routing Table.
Click OK.

NOTE: The Menu Schedule would be similar for a PIN Number Routing
Table. However, the "Destination" would be a different Sub Menu
Number rather than a mailbox number.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

75

Section

12
12 - Performing System Administration
over the Telephone
The following section outlines System Administrator functions performed using a telephone keypad.
Although Perfect Voice Office Pro is designed with a comprehensive set of system screens, it is also
possible to perform many of the system's administrative functions via a telephone. Prompts guide
you through these functions.
N O T E
Make sure you read through this section to familiarize yourself with the remote
functions that Perfect Voice Office Pro offers before you use these features.
Accessing the System Administrator Menu
To access the System Administrator menu, perform the following steps:
Pick up your telephone handset and dial the extension that Perfect Voice Office Pro is
connected to.
When you hear the Main Company Greeting, press the # key.
Press the * key.
Enter the System Administrator Password (Default - 9999) when prompted.

N O T E
You may have multiple System Administrators; however, only one System
Administrator may access the system administrative functions at one time.
The System Administrator Menu
In the System Administrator menu, the following options are available:

Press 1 to Configure Mailboxes
I&M

Press 2 to Configure Classes of Service

Press 3 for System Parameters*
?

Press 4 for System Prompts

Press 5 for Company Maintenance

Press 9 to Check Faxes

Press 0 to Return to the Auto-Attendant
Press
#
to
Disconnect

*The system parameters option is only available when you log in with the Installer password.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

76

Database Configuration

Create or Delete Mailboxes
Press 1 at the System Administrator's Main Menu to create or delete mailboxes. Once in this menu
you are prompted for the following.

"Enter the first mailbox." Enter the lowest mailbox number in the list.
"Enter the last mailbox." Enter the highest mailbox number. To work with a single
mailbox, enter the same mailbox number as the first mailbox. If you make a mistake, press
star (*) to return to the previous menu.
HINT: Creating a range of mailboxes automatically creates sequentially numbered
mailboxes. You may always delete any unwanted mailboxes later.
"To create the range of mailboxes, press 1; Delete range, press 3."
Press 1 to Create Mailboxes:
If you press 1 to create mailboxes, you are prompted to:
o "Enter the two digit Class of Service for these mailboxes." Enter the mailbox Class of
Service number to describe the features assigned to the mailbox(es) you created. There is
a short pause after you enter this value while the system creates the mailbox(es).
o You receive mailbox creation confirmation and are transferred to the System
Administrator Main Menu.
Press 3 to Delete Mailboxes:
If you press 3 to delete mailboxes, the system prompts you to:
o "To confirm deletion of these mailboxes, press 1, or press star to return to the previous
menu." When you press 1, there is a short pause.
o You receive mailbox deletion confirmation and are transferred to the System
Administrator Main Menu.

N O T E
When deleting mailboxes, all prompts, messages, and settings are removed. When
Reorg is run (default time is 3:00 AM), all prompts and messages are permanently
removed and cannot be recovered.

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

77

Configure Class of Service
Press 2 at the System Administrator's Main Menu to review or modify Class of Service settings.
Once in this menu, you receive the following prompts:

"Enter the two Digit Class of Service number to change; to return to the main menu, press
star." Enter the number of the desired Class of Service.
"Press 1 to review this Class of Service, press 2 to change." To review the settings for the
selected Class of Service, press 1. To change the settings, press 2.
Press 2 to change:
If you press 2 to modify the Class of Service settings, you are prompted to "Press 1 for yes,
press 2 for no" for each of the following Class of Service settings:
"Allow Message lights"
"Allow Beeper Message Delivery"
"Allow Phone Message Delivery"
"Allow Long Distance Message Delivery"
"Allow Call Screening"
"Allow Call Forwarding"
"Allow Call Blocking"
"Allow Busy Hold"
"Allow Call Queuing"
"Allow Pre-Transfer Paging"
"Allow Post-Transfer Paging"
"Allow Distribution Lists "
"Allow Directory Registration"
"Allow Message Confirmation"
"Allow Message Recovery"
"Allow Login/ Logout"
"Allow Access to Administrator Functions"
I&M
"Enter Maximum number of messages allowed"
"Enter Maximum message length"
?
"Enter Maximum days to save message"
"Enter Maximum rings for Call Progress"
"For No Transfer Supervision, press 1; For Busy Only Supervision, press 2; For
Busy No Answer Supervision, press 3; For Multilingual Supervision, press 4"
"Enter mailbox language number"

Press * to exit the System Administrator's Main Menu.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

78

Database Configuration

System Parameters
Press 3 at the System Administrator's Main Menu to modify the System Parameters. (The System
Parameters option is only available when you log in with the Installer password.) Once in this menu
the following prompts are available:
"Enter the parameter number, followed by the new value for that parameter. Press
pound when complete." For example, if you wish to change the Extension Length of the
mailboxes (Parameter 144) in the system to two (2), after the prompt press [144] followed by
[2] followed by [#].
When you have finished entering the new parameters, press # to return to the System
Administrator Main Menu. Press # to exit the System Administrator Main Menu.

N O T E
The system does not confirm the entered value. The same prompt is played back
after each entry. All parameters MUST be entered as three (3) digits. Parameter
twelve (12) MUST be entered - 012.

The telephone keypad values for the special characters utilized by the telephone system and the
Perfect Voice Office Pro system are as follows:

Name
Character
Phone
Code

Flash Hook

&

*1

Pause

,

*2

Extension

E

*3

Sender's Extension

S

*4

C.O.

C

*5

Mailbox

M

*6
Code
for
Inband $ *7

Underscore

_

*8

Blank

-

*9
I&M
Pound
# *0

Star

*

**
?

When you have finished entering the new parameters, press # to return to the System
Administrator Main Menu. Press * to exit the System Administrator Main Menu.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Database Configuration

79

Recording System Prompts and Company Greetings
Pressing 4 at the Main Menu gives you the following options.
"For System Prompts, press 1; For Company Greetings, press 2." The System Prompts
are the prerecorded messages listed in the Appendix. The actual prompt files are located in
the WINVM directory. The Company Greetings are the personal salutations that callers hear
when they call your company (i.e. - Good morning...you have reached the ABC company...)
as well as voice menu prompts. These prompts are located in the SALUTE directory.
Press 1 to Record System Prompts:
When you press 1 to Record System Prompts, you are prompted to:
"Please enter the three digit system prompt to review." Refer to the Appendix for System
Prompts and their prompt number.
You now hear the System Prompt you have chosen. When the playback ends, the following
options are available: "To accept, press 1; review press 2; re-record prompt, press 3;exit,
press star (*)."
NOTE: "Record" deletes and replaces the original prompt.
Press 3 to record. After the tone, begin speaking in a clear, slow voice. When you finish,
press #.
The new prompt automatically plays for your review. When the prompt ends, you are asked
to choose one of the following options:
"To accept press 1; review press 2; re-record press 3; exit, press star (*)".
If you are satisfied, press 1. If you are not, re-record the prompt by pressing 3.
If you are satisfied and accept the recording, you are transferred to the System
Administrator's Main Menu.

Press 2 to Record Company Greetings:
When you press 2 to Record Company Greetings, you are prompted to:
"Please enter the three digit Company Greeting to create or review."

N O T E
The Company greetings are prompts set up on the Company Menu. The numbers
I&M
you use MUST be entered on the Company Menu in the Greeting Times/Prompts
section of the screen. In addition, voice menu prompts are created by pressing 2.

?
You now hear the Company Greeting/Voice Menu prompt you chose, if it was previously
recorded.
When the recording ends (if a greeting was previously recorded), you are asked to choose
one of the following: "To accept press 1; review press 2; re-record press 3; exit, press
star (*)".
NOTE: "Record" deletes and replaces the old greeting/prompt (if one was recorded).
Press 3 to record. After the tone, begin speaking in a clear, slow voice. When you finish,
press <#>. HINT:
Try to eliminate all background noise. If possible, use a telephone
within your office. Accessing Perfect Voice Office Pro through outside lines may result in
additional background noise.
The new greeting/prompt automatically plays for your review. When it ends, you are
prompted to select one of the following options: "To accept press 1; review press 2; re-
record press 3; exit, press star (*)".

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

80

Database Configuration

If you are satisfied, press 1. If you are not, re-record the prompt by pressing 3.
If you are satisfied, and accept the recording, you are transferred to the System
Administrator's Main Menu.

Change the Holiday Greeting
Press 5 at the System Administrator's Main Menu to change the Holiday Greeting menu. Once in
this menu you are prompted for the following:
"Please enter the two digit Company number." Enter the number of the company that
you wish to modify.
"To listen to existing holidays press 1; add a holiday, press 2; delete a holiday press 3;
return to the previous menu press star (*)." Press 1 to review the dates and greeting
numbers of existing holidays on this particular company, press 2 to input a new holiday date
and prompt number, and press 3 to remove an existing holiday date and prompt number.

Press 1 to listen to existing holidays:
If any holidays exist, Perfect Voice Office Pro plays the date and greeting number of each
holiday assigned to this particular company.

Press 2 to add a holiday:
When you press 2 to add a holiday, you are prompted for the following:
o "Enter the 4 digit Holiday date, Month then Day." For example, Christmas Day
(December 25) would be entered 1225.
o "Enter the 3 digit Holiday Salutation." For example, if you wish to use Prompt 10, it
would be entered 010.
N O T E
When adding holidays, please remember that you MUST record the Holiday
Salutation. To record these salutations, please refer to "Recording System Prompts
and Company Greetings".

I&M
Press 3 to delete a holiday:
When you press 3 to delete a holiday, you are be prompted for the following:
?
"Enter the 4 digit Holiday date to delete, Month than Day." For example, to remove
Christmas Day (December 25) from the holiday list, enter 1225.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

CHAPTER 4

Optional
A

pplications

I&M
?

I&M
?

I&M
?

Optional Applications

1

Section

1
1 - Enabling AMIS Networking
Audio Messaging Interchange Specification, or AMIS, is a series of standards that enables voice
messaging systems produced by different vendors to network or inter-network. Before AMIS,
systems from different vendors could not exchange voice messages. AMIS has two specifications:
AMIS-Digital and AMIS-Analog. The Perfect Voice Office Pro system is AMIS-Analog compatible.
The AMIS-Analog specification calls for the use of DTMF tones to convey control information and
transmission of the message itself in analog form. This means that the Perfect Voice Office Pro
system may be networked to other Perfect Voice Office Pro systems and/or other vendors' voice
messaging systems that are also AMIS-Analog compatible. With AMIS networking, Users from
different locations can communicate as if they are all on the same voice mail system.
To set up an AMIS system, follow these simple steps:
Step 1: Design the Network
Step 2: Enable AMIS Networking With the System Configuration Wizard
Step 3: Add and define AMIS network sites

Step 1: Design the Network
Before you build your network site database, you need to decide which type of network you want to
create and gather information about each site. There are two basic approaches for building your
network site database. It is recommended that you create a controlled network.
Controlled Network: A controlled network is one in which an administrator knows where
every site is located and manually registers all network sites. Under this scenario, each location
has a unique site number and all sites have an identical network site database with regard to the
numbering plan. The advantage to this method is that a single list of site numbers may be
distributed to every secondary site just as you would a phone list.
Open Network: An open network is one in which the network site database is built
automatically. When any AMIS-compatible system calls a site for the first time, during the
"handshake", the new site is added to the local site's network site list. The newly registered sites
I&M
are added to the list counting backwards from 999. This means that the system administrator has
no control over which site number is assigned to a newly registered site.
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

2

Optional Applications

Below are steps for creating a controlled network:
1. Make a list of your network sites using the AMIS Network Sites worksheet located at the
end of this section. Include site number, name, location, and System ID #.
2. Identify access codes from each site to the other sites. Example: It is a long distance call
when Oakland calls London; it is a local call when San Francisco calls Oakland, etc. See
below.
Site 1: Oakland
* 1. Oakland
2. London
3. San Francisco
Site 1
Oakland
Long Distance
Local
Site 3
Site 2
S. Francisco
London
Long Distance
Site 3: San Francisco
Site 2: London
1. Oakland
1. Oakland
2. London
*2. London
* 3. San Francisco
3. San Francisco
*Indicates Local Site

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

3

Step 2 - Enable AMIS Networking With the System Configuration
Wizard
To implement AMIS Networking, the PERFECT.INI file must be modified. The System
Configuration Wizard modifies the PERFECT.INI file for AMIS.
NOTE: The sentinel key must also be enabled for AMIS Networking.
From the Desktop of Perfect Voice Office Pro, Select Start
Select Programs -- Perfect Voice Office Pro PVOConfiguration Wizard
Highlight AMIS Settings
Click the Modify button
Set the AMIS Installed setting to Yes
Set the AMIS Initial Delay setting to 3
Save the changes and exit

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

4

Optional Applications

Step 3: Adding and Defining AMIS Network Sites
Log on to Perfect Voice Office Pro
Click the Company drop-down menu and select A.M.I.S.
Referring to the completed worksheets included at the end of this section, fill in the
necessary information

General Information
Fields listed under General Information refer to the remote AMIS site.

Site Number
This field designates a unique number of this AMIS site. Every network site is assigned a unique
I&M
number from 1-999. This is used to reference site records.
Description
This field is a description of the site. Typically, it is the company name of the site.
?
Location
This field designates where the site is located. Typically, it is the City and State for U.S. locations
and City and Country for international locations.
Site ID Number
This field identifies the system ID number of the remote site. AMIS has strict guidelines on the
format of a system ID. It is composed of three numeric fields using the characters 0-9 and each field
is terminated with a # (pound sign). The maximum length of the System ID Number is 18 characters
and the minimum is 3 characters. There are two types of System ID Numbers, public and private.
Public System ID Numbers are for all sites that can be direct dialed using the public telephone
network. These ID numbers are always in the format of ccc#nnn#sssssss#, where the value "ccc" is
the international country code (1-4 digits), the value of "nnn" is the national significant number (area
or city code of 0-14 digits) and the value of "sssssss" is a local subscriber number of 0-14 digits. All
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

5

locations in North America must use the format of 1#aaa#sssssss# where "aaa" is the area code and
"sssssss" is the local telephone number.
Private System ID Numbers are for all sites that are accessible through a private network or behind a
PBX. These always have the format 0##nnnnnnn# where "nnnnnnn" is a site defined number. The
site-defined number is typically the extension number of the site. The value "nnnnnnn" can be from
0-14 digits.
Callback Number
This field defines the dialstring, or number, to be dialed to call this site. This number should include
any necessary access numbers (1 or 011); however, do not include the trunk access code (usually 9,).
Access Codes
This field identifies whether the call is to a private, local, long distance, or international number. The
choices for Access Codes are: Private Number

Local Number

Long
Distance
Number

International Number

AMIS Parameters
Fields listed under AMIS Parameters refer to the local AMIS site.
LoopBack Request ID
This field designates the AMIS loopback test number for this site. For LOCAL sites, this defines the
loopback test for incoming calls from other sites. For example, 987654 may be the loopback request
ID.
Admin Message User ID
This field defines the User ID to receive messages that can not be delivered or messages that can not
be returned. The default value for this field is blank. If the field is left blank, then these types of
messages are deleted. This field is only used for LOCAL sites, not for REMOTE sites.
System ID Number
This field identifies a unique string that identifies this site to all other sites that it may ever contact
and also identifies the callback telephone number. AMIS has strict guidelines on the format of a
system ID. It is composed of three numeric fields using the characters 0-9 and each field is
I&M
terminated with a # (pound sign). The maximum length of the System ID Number is 18 characters
and the minimum is 3 characters. There are two types of System ID Numbers, public and private.
Public System ID Numbers are for all sites that can be direct dialed using the public telephone
?
network. These ID numbers are always in the format of ccc#nnn#sssssss#, where the value "ccc" is
the international country code (1-4 digits), the value of "nnn" is the national significant number (area
or city code of 0-14 digits) and the value of "sssssss" is a local subscriber number of 0-14 digits. All
locations in North America must use the format of 1#aaa#sssssss# where "aaa" is the area code and
"sssssss" is the local telephone number.
Private System ID Numbers are for all sites that are accessible through a private network or behind a
PBX. These always have the format 0##nnnnnnn# where "nnnnnnn" is a site defined number. The
site-defined number is typically the extension number of the site. The value "nnnnnnn" can be from
0-14 digits.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

6

Optional Applications

AutoAdd NEW Sites
If this field is set to Y (YES), sites that are not registered are automatically added to the network
database. The Description of auto-added sites shows the date the site was auto-added. The newly-
added site takes the highest available site number.
Digit Timeout: For Send/For Receive
These fields specify the total length of time to wait for all digits before timeout occurs.
Packet Delay: For Send/For Receive

These fields specify the length of time to wait between packets before timeout occurs.

AMIS Options
Journal Sessions?
If this field is checked, then information about this session will is logged to a disk file. Incoming
calls are kept in the file "C:\WINVM\AMIS000.LOG". Outbound calls are kept in the file
"C:\WINVM\AMISnnn.LOG", where "nnn" is the site number. If this is a local site, then this
applies to all incoming and outbound calls to or from this site. If this is a remote site, then this
applies to all outbound calls to this site. If not checked, then journaling is disabled for this site.
Accept Incoming
If this field is selected, then incoming network calls from any REMOTE site are accepted. If it is not
selected, then calls from any REMOTE site are rejected causing the REMOTE site to return the
messages to the senders.
Accept Broadcast ID
If this field is selected, then incoming network calls may access public broadcast lists. If it is not
selected, then incoming messages for public broadcast will be rejected.
End Record Any
If this field is selected, then recording of incoming messages will terminate on any DTMF tone. This
is an AMIS compatible value. However, this causes any messages that contain partial DTMF tones
to be rejected. The default is for this field to remain unselected. This causes any DTMF tones other
than a valid "*" tone to be ignored. This field should remain unselected.
Place Outbound
If this field is selected, calls may be placed to this remote site. If it is not selected, calls will not be
I&M
placed to this remote site. If not selected, the Send and Forward options in the User Mode menus
will not allow the selection of this remote site as a destination for a message.
?
Ask for Special
THIS FIELD IS NOT YET IMPLEMENTED. If this field is selected, upon calls placed to this
remote site, Perfect Voice Office Pro will verify the version of networking being used on the remote
site. If the version is the same as that of Perfect Voice Office Pro, then enhanced AMIS protocol will
be used to communicate between the systems. If it is a different version of networking, then Perfect
Voice Office Pro will use the standard version of AMIS to communicate. If calls to this remote site
fail, and the site is using a different version, then unselecting this field will cause Perfect Voice
Office Pro to only use standard AMIS networking when communicating with this site.
New Messages to Send
THIS FIELD IS NOT YET IMPLEMENTED. If this field is selected, then network management
automatically checks to see if this site has messages waiting for delivery. Selecting this field forces
a re-check for outbound messages. If this field is not selected, outbound delivery attempts are
cancelled until more messages are queued.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

7

Send Site Name
THIS FIELD IS NOT YET IMPLEMENTED. If this field is selected, then the site name is
transmitted as part of the AMIS message. If not selected, then no name is transmitted.
Unlisted Site
THIS FIELD IS NOT YET IMPLEMENTED. This field defines whether this site is listed in the
Network Assistance Menu. Network Assistance is used to assist in selecting a site number and is
available in User Mode when sending or forwarding a message. It is invoked by selecting 0 as the
site number. Selecting this field defines this remote site as unlisted. If the field is unselected, the
site is listed.
Consec Fails Stop
THIS FIELD IS NOT YET IMPLEMENTED. This field is used to shutdown outbound calling to
this site if there are too many consecutive failures. When the number of consecutive failures reached
this value, then the field New MSGS to Send? will be set to "N". The consecutive failures count is
only reset to zero when the called site acknowledges a network call, or when the operator clears the
count.
Minimum Recall
THIS FIELD IS NOT YET IMPLEMENTED. This field specifies the number of minutes, which
must elapse before attempting a second, and ensuing, outbound calls to this site. The time between
ensuing recalls is increased by this value with each retry until the number of recalls the value in the
Maximum Recall field. For example, if this field is set to 2, then Perfect Voice attempts a second
call 2 minutes after the first, four minutes after the second, etc. until the number of minutes in the
Maximum Recall field is reached. Retries continue within the value of the Maximum Recall field
until the Consecutive Fails Stop value is reached.
I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

8

Optional Applications

Maximum Recall
This field specifies the maximum number of minutes between retries of outbound calls until the
value of Consecutive Fails Stop is reached.
Msg Send Exp Hours
THIS FIELD IS NOT YET IMPLEMENTED. This field defines the expiration time period of
messages waiting to be sent via the network. Any undelivered message that has reached expiration is
marked as expired and non-deliverable and be returned to the sender (or to the LOCAL site
operator). Setting this value too low causes messages to be returned unnecessarily. Setting this
value to 0 disables the expiration option. The default value for this field is 24 hours.
I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

9

AMIS Network Sites Worksheet
Site Name Location
System
ID
#
CallBack
#
Number

I&M

?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

10

Optional Applications

Section

2
2 - Local Area Paging (L.A.P)
This feature allows Users to be paged on a beeper when they receive a call or a new message. L. A.
P. can be especially useful for Users that are often away from their desk or out of range of the
operator overhead/PBX page. Users can pick up the call from any telephone. This section presents
the steps needed to install the paging transmitter system, modify the PERFECT.INI file on the
Perfect Voice Office Pro system, enable L. A. P. on a per User basis, and assign the phantom DN to
the User's extension. Perform the following steps to set up L.A.P.:
Step 1: Complete the Licensing Agreement
First, complete the licensing agreement included in the paging transmitting package. The WaveLinks
paging system, when used in the United States, is subject to the rules and regulations of the FCC.
Step 2: Install the Paging Transmitter
Your WaveLinks Computer Controlled Paging System includes a Transmitter Unit, A "Rubber
Duck" Antenna, a Right Angle Antenna Adapter, a PC Adapter, a Power/COM Adapter Cable, and a
Power Brick. To install the paging system, perform the following steps:
1. Attach the "Rubber Duck" antenna to the Transmitter Unit. The Right Angle Antenna
Adapter is available for proper antenna positioning. In normal paging operations, the
paging transmitter antenna should be oriented in a vertical position to maximize the
paging range.
NOTE: Do not attempt to operate the paging system without the antenna connected to the
paging transmitter because damage to the paging transmitter may occur.
2. Plug the PC adapter into an available DB9 serial port on the back of the Perfect Voice
Office Pro system PC. If the DB9 serial port is not available, you need a DB25 to DB9
adapter, which is available from most computer supply companies.
3. Plug the Power/COM Adapter Cable into the DB9 female connector on the Transmitter
Unit.
4. Connect the PC Adapter and the Power/COM Adapter Cable.
I&M
5. Connect the Power Brick and the Power/COM Adapter Cable. Plug the Power Brick into
a 110 VAC power outlet. The red colored PWR/BAT LED indicator on the Transmitter
Unit should be illuminated when power is properly applied.
?
For more details on the paging system, refer to the "On-Site Controlled Paging System Handbook"
enclosed with your transmitter.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

11

Step 3 - Enable L.A.P. With the System Configuration Wizard
To implement Local Area Paging (L.A.P.), the PERFECT.INI file must be modified. The System
Configuration Wizard modifies the PERFECT.INI file for L.A.P.
NOTE: The sentinel key must also be enabled for L.A.P.
From the Desktop of Perfect Voice Office Pro, Select Start
Select Programs -- Perfect Voice Office Pro PVO Configuration Wizard
Highlight Local Area Paging
Click the Modify button

When you click the Modify button, a screen similar to this appears.
Set Integration with LAP to Yes
Click Configure to edit the Port Settings
· Set Com Port to 2
· Set Baud Rate to 9600
I&M
· Set Data Bits to 8
· Set Parity to None
· Set Stop Bit(s) to 1
?
· Click OK
· Click OK on the "Local Area Paging" screen

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

12

Optional Applications

Step 4 - Configure L.A.P for Each Mailbox
There are a number of possible configurations that can be used for L.A.P. These are listed and
described below.
Page User for all incoming calls.
Page User at the caller's request. If the caller requests that the User be paged, the call may
be transferred back to the User's extension or a phantom DN for pick up.

NOTE: When a mailbox is set up for L.A.P., the beeper is activated for all messages as well as
incoming calls.

IMPORTANT: To allow L.A.P., make sure that the Local Area Paging option is checked in the
Mailbox Class of Service.
Set up User to be Paged for All Incoming Calls
If a User is to be paged for all incoming calls, the capcode, baud rate, and pager type must be
completed on the mailbox LAP Options tab and "Before" must be selected on the Transfer Options
tab.
For example, to set up mailbox 270 for L.A.P where the User is paged for all incoming calls:

Log on to Perfect Voice Office Pro.
Select Mailbox.
Go to the mailbox 270.
Select the LAP Options tab and fill
in the necessary information: Local
Area Paging Code (This is the
capcode that is printed on the back
of the pager), Pager Baud Rate,
and Pager Type. NOTE: If the
capcode contains leading zeroes, it
I&M
may not be necessary to enter them
as part of the number.
?
Select the Transfer Options tab.
Select "Before" to activate L.A.P.
When "Before" is selected, the
beeper is activated before all
incoming calls. The User may then
pick up the call from any telephone.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

13

Set up User to be Paged at the Caller's Request--Transfer Call Back to the
User's Extension
If the User is to be paged at the caller's request, a Voice Menu must first be created that specifies the
digit for activating the User's pager. The call is then transferred back to the User's extension for
pick up. The capcode, baud rate, and pager type must be completed on the mailbox LAP Options tab.
On the Transfer Options tab, "After" must be selected, the Voice Menu field must be selected and
the Voice Menu name entered.

For example, to set up Mailbox 270 to be paged at the Caller's request and the call transferred back
to the User's extension:

Create Voice Menu for Mailbox 270:
Log on to Perfect Voice Office
Pro.
Select V-Menus.
Enter a menu name and click Edit.
The Audiotext Entry screen is
displayed.

Select Mailbox for the Sub Menu Prompt field. This plays the active mailbox greeting.
Highlight the digit you wish to use to
activate the LAP pager. (In this
example, when the caller presses 1, the
User's pager is activated.) For Action,
select "LAP Current Mailbox" and
enter the mailbox number in the
Mailbox field.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to assign a
default ("D") action.
I&M

NOTE: Using Voice Menus overrides
the built-in options (1 to try another
?
extension, 2 to try the extension again,
3 to send a beeper message, 4 to page
over the intercom, * to disconnect, and
# to skip to the beep.) To make these
options available, they must be
specified in the Voice Menu.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

14

Optional Applications

Set up Mailbox 270 for LAP:
For example, to set up mailbox 270 for L.A.P, perform the following steps:
Log on to Perfect Voice Office Pro.
Select Mailbox.
Go to the mailbox 270.
Select the LAP Options tab and fill
in the necessary information: Local
Area Paging Code (This is the
capcode that is printed on the back
of the pager), Pager Baud Rate,
and Pager Type. NOTE: If the
capcode contains leading zeroes, it
may not be necessary to enter them
as part of the number.

Select the Transfer Options tab.
Select "After" or "Both" to activate
L.A.P.
Activate "Voice Menu" and enter
the Voice Menu Name.

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

15

Set up User to be Paged at the Caller's Request--Transfer Call to the User's
Phantom DN
If the User is to be paged at the caller's request, a Voice Menu must first be created that specifies the
digit for activating the User's pager. The call is then transferred back to the phantom DN for pick up
(The Phantom mailbox must exist on Perfect Voice Office Pro). The capcode, baud rate, and pager
type must be completed on the phantom mailbox LAP Options tab. On the phantom mailbox
Transfer Options tab, "Before" must be selected. On the User's main mailbox Transfer Options tab,
the Voice Menu field must be selected and the Voice Menu name entered.

For example, to set up Mailbox 270 to be paged at the Caller's request and the call transferred to the
User's phantom DN (570):

In this example, 570 is the phantom DN for 270.
Create Voice Menu for Mailbox 270:
Log on to Perfect Voice Office Pro.
Select V-Menus.
Enter a menu name and click Edit.
The Audiotext Entry screen is
displayed.

Select Mailbox for the Sub Menu
Prompt field. This plays the active
mailbox greeting.
Highlight the digit you wish to use
to activate the LAP pager. (In this
example, when the caller presses 1,
phantom DN 570 rings and the
User is paged.) For Action, select
"Send to Mailbox" and enter the
I&M
phantom DN in the Mailbox field.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to assign
a default ("D") action.
?

NOTE: Using Voice Menus
overrides the built-in options (1 to
try another extension, 2 to try the
extension again, 3 to send a beeper
message, 4 to page over the
intercom, * to disconnect, and # to
skip to the beep.) To make these options available, they must be specified in the Voice
Menu.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

16

Optional Applications

Set up Mailbox 570 for LAP:
For example, to set up mailbox 570 for L.A.P, perform the following steps:

Log on to Perfect Voice Office Pro.
Select Mailbox.
Go to the mailbox 570.
Select the LAP Options tab and fill in the
necessary information: Local Area Paging
Code (This is the capcode that is printed on
the back of the pager), Pager Baud Rate, and
Pager Type.

Other
Select the Transfer Options tab. Select
Options
"Before" to activate L.A.P.

Set up Mailbox 270 for LAP with Phantom 570:
Select the Transfer Options tab. Select
Other
"Off". Activate "Voice Menus" and enter the
Options
Voice Menu name.
I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

17

Section

3
3 MAPI Integration for POP3/SMTP
Email Servers
MAPI (Messaging Application Programming Interface) is an architectural specification that defines a
messaging subsystem. It is not a library. This specification includes various external components,
what they do, and the interfaces they expose. Any vendor can implement these components, not only
by Microsoft. The interfaces are COM (Components Object Model) interfaces. We use MAPI to
send messages, to program the protocol to let it know that there is a message. When MAPI is being
configured for Perfect Voice Office Pro, there are basically three ways to pick up e-mail messages:
Using a Post Office
Through Internet Mail (using a POP3/SMTP Server that connects to an ISP)
Using a local e-mail server (such as Exchange Server or Lotus Notes Server)

Layout

I&M
N o t e
*** The POP3 Server can be offsite and connected via a router if Internet Mail is
?
used, or this PC can represent the local email server.

MAPI Requirements
SMTP/POP3 services
Internet Connection or Network Connection
Account for receiving e-mails

Version 3.52.00 and above is able to use the SMTP Mapi Mode. In order to use this mode the email
server at the site must be able to support SMTP. You must have the SMTP address of the email
server and the port number that has been setup for SMTP.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

18

Optional Applications

1. Edit PERFECT.INI File
To set up SMTP Mapi Mode, the following lines must be in the perfect.ini file:
[MAPI Information]
Integration with MAPI=Yes
Mapi Mode=SMTP
Mapi Service=No
Server IP Address=
2. Restart the Voicemail application.
3. Configure the SMTP service.
From the Main Menu, select System--Utilities--SMTP Properties.
· SMTP Server Address: Enter the Perfect Voice Office Pro server IP address.
· SMTP TCP/IP Port: Enter the port number.
· SMTP Store Path: Enter the path where the SMTP store is. A new folder will
be created in the winvm folder called, SMTP. Inside SMTP there will a folder
called STORE (C:\\Winvm\SMTP\STORE). This is where new messages are
stored before being sent out. Once a message is emailed, there will be a record
of that message in the SENT folder.
· SMTP Polling Interval: Enter the interval in which SMTP is to poll (in
milliseconds).
· SMTP Account: If the email account requires authentification, enter the SMTP
account name.
· SMTP Password: If the email account requires authentification, Enter the
SMTP password.
· SMTP Log Level: The default log level of zero disables logging, for debug
Teleco suggests a log level of 3. Remember to set the log level to 0 when done
debugging.
· SMTP Keep Sent Items drop-down list: Select Yes to instruct the system to
keep sent items.
· Convert to GSM Wave checkbox: Select to send messages in GSM Wave
I&M
format, enabling the listening of voice messages from any Windows Media
Player compatible software.
?

4. Edit Mailboxes
Specify which Mailboxes are to be notified through MAPI. Edit the E-mail Options tab for the
appropriate mailbox(es). Enter the information regarding that User's E-Mail. Email Notification will
be sent out 24 hours a day unless otherwise specified by a schedule. To use a schedule select Apply
Schedule and specify the schedule number to use.

Helpful Hint
If the MAPI does not seem to be working, attempt to send an e-mail while Microsoft Exchange is
running and Perfect Voice Office Pro is not running. This will verify that Microsoft Exchange is
working, and that the e-mail name specified is correct.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

19

Section

4
4 MAPI Integration for non-POP3/SMTP
Email Servers
This section includes the following information:
What is Unified Messaging via E-Mail?
How may Users pick up Messages?
Why does Perfect Voice Office Pro require an E-mail client?
How to Keep it Simple: Utilize Windows Messaging
MAPI Modes: OLE or Standard
Steps for Configuring Perfect Voice Office Pro for MAPI integration
Example Configuration

What is Unified Messaging via E-Mail?
Unified Messaging Via E-Mail allows Users to access voice, fax, and e-mail messages from one
mailbox. When Perfect Voice Office Pro is used with Microsoft Outlook/Exchange or any MAPI
compliant server, Users may access e-mail, voice mail, and fax mail concurrently they no longer
have to access different programs for different forms of messaging. Users may then forward these
messages to anyone over the Internet. Messaging Application Programming Interface (MAPI) is a
standard created by Microsoft that allows MAPI-compliant applications to communicate with each
other. When configured for MAPI, Perfect Voice Office Pro may communicate with any MAPI-
compliant messaging system.

How May Users Pick Up Messages?
When MAPI is being configured for Perfect Voice Office Pro, there are basically three ways to pick
up e-mail messages:
I&M
Using a Post Office
Through Internet Mail (using a POP3/SMTP Server that connects to an ISP)
?
Using a local e-mail server (such as Exchange Server or Lotus Notes Server)

NOTE: The User's PC must have a soundboard and speakers so that he or she may listen to voice
messages from the inbox. The E-mail player must also be installed on the User's desktop.

Why does the PVO require an Email client?
The Perfect Voice Office Pro system is not aware of what email server is running (e.g. Microsoft
Exchange, Novell GroupWise, or Lotus Notes). Some sites might not even have an email server, but
instead utilize the Workgroup Messaging (Microsoft Mail) native to all later versions of Windows.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

20

Optional Applications

The Perfect Voice Office Pro uses MAPI (Microsoft Windows' Messaging Application Program
Interface) to forward a voice message to a user. MAPI is a function of the Windows 95 Operating
System that allows programs to send email without user intervention. MAPI alone does not have
direct access to the email system, it is just a standard way of allowing programs to send messages.
MAPI gets a request to send a message and hands it off to the messaging client (email program).
On Perfect Voice Office Pro systems shipped from Teleco, Windows Messaging (built into
Windows95) is the default client used by MAPI.

Perfect Voice Office Pro, using a MAPI call, indirectly tells the messaging client to send the
message to a specified user. The email client, not the Perfect Voice Office Pro software, is
ultimately responsible for getting the voice message attachment to the user. It is important to
configure and test the messaging client before configuring the Perfect Voice Office Pro system
for MAPI. If you can successfully use the messaging client installed on the Perfect Voice Office
Pro to send an email message to any of the prospected Unified Messaging users, then you have
completed the most difficult part of the installation!

How to Keep it Simple: Utilize Windows Messaging!
Perfect Voice Office Pro systems are shipped with Microsoft Windows Messaging (WM) installed.
WM is a simple client that has the ability to work with many email systems. In order for WM to
access an email system, you need to install and configure an information service. As installed on
the Perfect Voice Office Pro, WM comes pre-configured with Microsoft Mail information service
installed. This is fine for sites with Workgroup Messaging (i.e. no dedicated email server) but not
for systems that have a proprietary email server (Microsoft Exchange, Novell GroupWise).

For most installations you will need to use specific service to access their email system. Most email
systems come with software that will install their client (information service) into WM. It is the
responsibility of the site's administrator to provide you with this software. If they cannot provide
you this software, then they need to configure their email server to allow POP3/SMTP access. WM
will then use the Internet Mail information service to send messages to the server's SMTP interface.

You may be encouraged to install an actual, full-blown client (e.g. Microsoft Outlook, Novell
GroupWise Client, etc.) onto the Perfect Voice Office Pro. While this will work, there are several
I&M
potential problems:
Full clients tend to be bloated with unnecessary features, decreasing the overall system
performance.
?
The site will have to waste a client license on the Perfect Voice Office Pro machine.
Full clients tend to be more complicated to install and configure.
Some clients use proprietary MAPI support files (DLL's, etc.) that may not be compatible
with the Perfect Voice Office Pro use of MAPI.

If you are installing software that replaces Windows Messaging as the default messaging client and
experience problems with it, you might have to obtain technical support from the vendor of that
software. Teleco Technical Support might not be able to support problems with messaging clients
other than Windows Messaging.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

21

MAPI Modes: Standard or OLE
Standard Mode
This option requires the MAPI Integration license. It provides "one-way" MAPI integration. In other
words, it sends a voice or fax message from the User's voice mailbox to the specified e-mail address.
Replying to a voice or fax mail message from e-mail works differently than replying to a message
from the Desktop Interface Messages screen or over the telephone. From Outlook, you can't reply
directly to the sender of the message. To send a response from Outlook, it is necessary to create a
new e-mail message. Deleting a message from the e-mail box doesn't automatically delete it from
the voice mail system.
Requirements:
An existing email system, either a messaging server or Workgroup Messaging (which you
are able to setup, using the Perfect Voice Office Pro as the message store).
Messaging client configured to send messages to users of the email system, installed on the
Perfect Voice Office Pro (refer to Why does the PVO require an Email client?)
Any messaging client that allows message attachments installed on the user's PC.
MAPI Email Player installed on the user's PC (installation program provided on the Perfect
Voice Office Pro CD.

Drawbacks:
Messages delivered to user's PC still have to be deleted from voice mailbox via phone or
Perfect Voice Office Pro Desktop. They can have the message automatically deleted after a
MAPI send, but this will prevent access of the message via phone or Perfect Voice Office
Pro Desktop.

OLE (Object Linking and Embedding) Mode
This option requires Microsoft Outlook and Exchange server. It also requires the MAPI Integration
license as well as a Desktop Interface license for each User. It allows Users to respond to messages
from Outlook. The User may reply to messages from Outlook as well as record new messages and
forward messages. In addition, when the User deletes a message from Outlook, it is deleted from the
voice mail system as well. (If the User deletes a message from the voice mailbox, it is not deleted
I&M
from Outlook.)

?
Requirements:
Site must be using Microsoft Exchange Server as the messaging system.
Windows Messaging with the Microsoft Exchange information service (client) on the Perfect
Voice Office Pro system.
Either the Perfect Voice Office Pro Outlook Player or Perfect Voice Office Pro Standard
Email Player installed on the user's PC (installation program provided on the PVO in the
INSTALL folder.)
Each person using the Enhanced Perfect Voice Office Pro Outlook Player requires:
o Microsoft Outlook installed on the user's PC.
o A Perfect Voice Office Pro Desktop License (i.e. Desktop User is enabled in mailbox).

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

22

Optional Applications

PVO Outlook Player Features:
Player embedded on a Microsoft Outlook form in the message.
Message can be deleted out of the user's voice mailbox from a button on the Microsoft
Outlook form.
Message can be played over the phone (like with Perfect Voice Office Pro Desktop) if the
user does not have a sound card.

Note: Users without Microsoft Outlook or a desktop license may still play their messages using the
MAPI Email Player

Drawbacks:
Must follow all the above requirements. Will not work with Novell GroupWise, Lotus Notes,
or other systems.
Perfect Voice Office Pro Outlook Player does not work for remote users accessing system
via POP3/SMTP interface.
Perfect Voice Office Pro Outlook Player requires additional licensing (i.e. must be a Perfect
Voice Office Pro Desktop User)

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

23

Steps for Configuring Perfect Voice Office Pro for MAPI Integration
In order to configure Perfect Voice Office Pro for MAPI integration and Unified Messaging Via E-
Mail, you should perform the following steps.
1. Ensure that the appropriate e-mail client is installed. The system is shipped pre-configured with
Microsoft Messaging. If this is not what you are using, you need to install the correct e-mail
client.
2. Create an e-mail account for Perfect Voice Office Pro on the e-mail server.
3. Configure
Perfect Voice Office Pro to operate in MAPI mode.
4. Setup the client to not save a copy of sent messages.
5. On
the
Perfect Voice Office Pro server, edit the Other Options tab for the appropriate mailboxes.
6. Install the E-Mail player on each User's desktop.
IMPORTANT: To configure Perfect Voice Office Pro for MAPI
integration, you need the assistance of the site's Network Administrator
or IS Consultant. Ensure that the Network Administrator or consultant
is available BEFORE setting up MAPI and before calling Technical
Support.

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

24

Optional Applications

Example Configuration
NOTE: Below is an example of how to configure Perfect Voice Office
Pro for MAPI integration using Microsoft Exchange/Outlook.
1. Ensure that Microsoft Messaging is Installed on the Perfect Voice Office
Pro Server
Go to the system Control Panel and select Add/Remove
Programs.
Select the Windows Setup tab. Verify that the
Microsoft Outlook/Exchange item has been selected.

After this has been verified, the next step is to make sure that the proper settings are entered for
Outlook/Exchange to work.
2. Create an E-Mail Account for Perfect Voice Office Pro
From the Control Panel, select
Mail.
Select Microsoft Mail

NOTE: You may have to load the
protocol that the mail server is using
and configure Perfect Voice Office
I&M
Pro to log into the mail server for
certain MAPI applications.

?

Click on Properties.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

25

Enter the necessary information
about the system Mail Post Office.
If there is no Post Office in place,
you need to create a Post Office
(there is a selection for this in the
Control Panel) and enter everyone's
name in it.
NOTE: If there is going to be a Network
Manager for the Post Office, the Post Office
should be created from the Network Manager's
computer, since all changes to the Post Office
must be done by the person who created it.

Once the Post Office has been identified,
enter the mailbox name for the Perfect
Voice Office Pro server, and also enter the
password, if any. Passwords are not
required for the Mail server to function.
Make sure that you select to have the
password automatically entered. Failure to
do so will result in a Window asking for a
Password when Perfect Voice Office Pro is
started. This prevents Perfect Voice Office
Pro from restarting automatically when
unattended.

I&M

?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

26

Optional Applications

3. Configure Perfect Voice Office Pro to Operate in MAPI Mode Using the
System Configuration Utility
The System Configuration Utility modifies the PERFECT.INI file for MAPI.
NOTE: The sentinel key must also be enabled for MAPI.
From the Desktop of Perfect Voice Office Pro, Select Start
Select Programs -- Perfect Voice Office Pro System Configuration Utility
Highlight MAPI Information
Click the Modify button

NOTE: This step is the same for all e-mail clients.

I&M

A screen similar to this appears. Select the desired
settings, then click OK.
?
· Name: Indicates the User Name. The Username
must match what was created on the e-mail server
during the previous step.
· Password: Indicates the password for MAPI. The
password must match what was created on the e-
mail server during the previous step.
· Profile: Indicates the User profile (usually the
same as User Name).
· Mode: Indicates MAPI mode.
· MAPI Integration: Indicates whether or not MAPI (Unified Messaging) is installed.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

27

4. Configure Client So That It Does Not Save a Copy of Sent Messages
5. Edit Appropriate Mailboxes for Unified Messaging via E-Mail
Set up the appropriate mailboxes for
Unified Messaging via E-Mail. Once
Perfect Voice Office Pro has been started,
edit the Other Options tab for the
appropriate mailbox. Refer to "Mailbox:
Other Options Tab" in the Database
Configuration section for more
information on these fields.
NOTE: If you choose to delete the
message after send from the Schedule
screen, the message is deleted from the
Perfect Voice Office Pro system. In
order to keep a copy of the message, you
must select Attach Voice File to
Message or Attach Fax File to Message.

6. Install the E-Mail Player on Each User's Desktop
The E-Mail player allows Users to play an attached voice mail message from their e-mail mailbox.
Two players are available: MAPI E-Mail Player (see Standard Mode) and Outlook E-Mail Player
(see OLE Mode). To install:
I&M
1. Turn on the computer and start Windows.
2. Insert the Perfect Voice Office Pro CD into the CD-ROM drive and allow the Autorun utility to
?
load. From the menu, select " Install MAPI E-Mail Player" or "Install Outlook E-Mail Player".
(NOTE: If the Autorun utility does not load, select Start -- Run from the main Windows screen
and browse the CD drive. Run the Autorun file.)
Follow the instructions displayed on the screen to complete the installation.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

28

Optional Applications

Section
5

5 - MSMQ Overview and Installation
This section provides an overview of MSMQ and details the steps required to complete a successful
installation.
MSMQ Overview
MSMQ software uses a centralized queue server (Primary Enterprise Controller or PEC) and a set of
MSMQ clients. There are two types of clients-- dependent and independent--but only independent
clients might be used with MSS.
MSS software runs under both Windows NT 4.0 and Windows 2000 platforms. Due to using
MSMQ, you must install and configure TCP/IP services on each machine that runs MSS software.
All machines should be configured to use DNS name resolution.
Many distributed applications need the ability to handle delays between a request and a response.
This is because all the steps of a distributed application process may not need to or cannot be
completed at one time. Microsoft Message Queuing (MMQ) allows applications to use components
that communicate with one another using queued messages. Like e-mail messages that sit in an
inbox, messages can exist on dissimilar systems that may not be directly communicating with each
another.
Installing MSMQ
For NT 4.0 networks, refer to "Section 5a - Installing MSMQ 1.0 Server (for Windows NT
4.0) on Network Domain Controller", page 29.
For Windows 2000 networks, refer to "Section 5b - Installing Message Queuing 2.0 (for
Windows 2000) Network Domain Controller", page 37.

N O T E :
Typically, the MSS server and MSMQ primary enterprise controller executed
I&M
(PEC) should be on the same computer that belongs to a Windows NT domain or
acts as a PDC or BDC for domain.

?
Messaging servers and MSS connectors can be executed on computers that belong
to same domain as computer that runs MSS server. Each machine that has MSS
connector installed should run MSMQ independent client connected to MSMQ
primary enterprise controller.

Make sure that computers that are supposed to run MSS server or MSS connectors
have Windows NT Server 4.0 / Windows 2000 Server or NT 4.0 workstation/ 2000
professional installed and configured. Each computer should belong to the same
Windows domain.

Warning: You will need Administrator rights for the domain in order to install MSMQ and the

MSS software. The IP of the UC Server must be static.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

29

Section
5a

5a - Installing MSMQ 1.0 Server (for
Windows NT 4.0) on Network Domain
Controller
Windows NT 4.0 Network Requirements for MSMQ
There are four components required to run MSMQ on a Windows NT 4.0 Network:
1. SQL 7.0
2. MSMQ Server
3. MSMQ 1.0 Client on Windows NT 4.0
4. MSMQ 2.0 Client on Windows 2000
MSMQ 1.0 Server Requirements
The following servers are used by MSMQ:
PEC
PSCs
BSCs
MSMQ routing servers

Connectivity Requirements
The following requirements must be met for correct connectivity:
Each MSMQ controller server must meet the connectivity requirements of the enterprise.
PSCs (and the PEC) must share a CN with every other PSC.
I&M
BSCs must share a CN with the PSCs or the PEC they back up.
Every MSMQ independent client and MSMQ routing server must share a CN with at least
?
one PSC/PEC or BSC within its own site.

N O T E
MSMQ controller servers PEC, PSCs, and BSCs) use a SQL Server version 7.0
database to store the MQIS.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

30

Optional Applications

N O T E : E n s u r i n g O p t i m a l P e r f o r m a n c e
To ensure optimal performance, do not install MSMQ servers on a primary domain
controller (PDC) or a backup domain controller (BDC) . PDCs and BDCs maintain
and replicate the network accounts database and perform network login
authentications, which are resource-intensive tasks. If you have a very small
network in which account information rarely changes, and in which users do not
log on and off frequently, you can use the same server as both a domain controller
and an MSMQ server.

Specifying MSMQ Controller Server Computer Names
To ensure that SQL installs correctly, the MSMQ controller server's computer name must be a valid
SQL identifier, with the first character of the computer name being a letter or an underscore.
Characters following the first character can include letters, numbers, or the symbols -, #, $, or _.
However, no embedded spaces are allowed.
If your computer name contains a hyphen, the SQL Server Setup will display a warning message
stating that the computer name is not valid. If characters that SQL does not recognize are used in the
computer name, you must rename the computer before installing MSMQ or SQL Server. For
instructions on renaming computers, refer to the Windows NT online Help.
If the renamed computer is a member of a Windows NT Server domain, contact your network
administrator to have the new computer name added to the domain.

Installation Procedure for MSMQ Server 1.0 (for Windows NT 4.0)
Perform the following steps to install MSMQ Server 1.0 on a network domain controller:
Step 1: Install NT 4.0 server use standard install.
Step 2: Apply service pack 3.0.
I&M
Step 3: Install service pack 4.0 or higher.
Step 4: Install Microsoft IE4.01 or higher.
?
Step 5: Installing SQL 7.0 for MSMQ 1.0 server
You must have both Service Pack 5 and IE 4 to install SQL 7.0. You will install SQL on the same
machine that you plan to install the MSMQ1.0 server software on. MSMQ users the SQL database to
store event queues in the network.
Make sure the following registry key exists before proceeding:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\MSSQLServer\Setup-
"SQLPath"="C:\MSSQL"

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

31

To install SQL 7.0:
1. Insert the Windows NT 4.0 Option Pack CD into the CD-ROM drive. The Welcome screen
appears.
2. Double-click Select SQL Server 7.0 Components. The Install SQL Server 7.0 Components
dialog appears.
3. Double-click Database Server - Desktop Edition. The Select Install Method dialog appears.
4. Select Local install Install to the Local Machine, then click Next. The Welcome dialog
appears.
5. Click Next. The Software License Agreement dialog appears.
6. Click Yes. The User Information dialog appears.
7. In the Name field, enter the user's name.
8. In the Company field, enter the company name and click Next. The Setup Type screen appears.
9. Click Typical Installation, leaving the destination folders as their default settings and click
Next. The Services Accounts dialog appears.
10. Select Use the same account for each service. Auto start SQL Server Service.
11. In the Service Settings, select Use the Local System account as the service setting and click
Next. The Start Copying Files dialog appears.
12. Click Next. The Setup process begins. After the Setup process completes, the Setup Complete
I&M
dialog appears. Click Finish and restart the computer.
13. When the SQL server installation is complete, proceed to "Installing MSMQ Server 1.0".
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

32

Optional Applications

Step 6: From the NT4.0 option pack disk, install MSMQ as a PEC.
The Primary Enterprise Controller (PEC) is another term for the MSMQ server. A complete MSMQ
install is called an Enterprise, and the assigned server is the main controller or PEC.

N O T E
Before you start, make sure that Windows NT Server 4.0 is installed and
configured.
To install MSMQ Server:
1. Insert the Windows NT 4.0 Option Pack CD into the CD-ROM drive. In a few seconds, the
Welcome dialog appears.
2. Click Next. The End User License Agreement dialog appears.
3. Click Accept, then Next. The following dialog appears.
4. Click Custom. The Select Components dialog appears.
5. Click Next. The Server Type dialog appears.

I&M

6. Select Primary Enterprise Controller (PEC) and click Continue. The Information Server
?
Database on SQL Server dialog appears.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

33

7. Use the default options for MSMQ database and click Continue. The New Enterprise dialog
appears.
8. In the Enterprise Name field, enter the Enterprise name for MSMQ Enterprise and click
Continue. The New Connected Network dialog appears.
9. In the Connected Network Name field, enter the name of the Domain. Select IP as the Protocol
and click OK. The Connected Networks dialog appears.
10. Click Add. The New Site dialog appears.
11. In the Site Name field, enter the name of the site and click Continue. The MSMQ Server setup
is now complete.
12. Install MSMQ clients on all computers those supposed to run MSS software and configure
MSMQ software as described below.
13. Use MSMQ Explorer to make sure that new MSMQ Enterprise was created.

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

34

Optional Applications

Step 7: Installing MSMQ Clients on Windows NT 4.0
Before you start, identify the operating system that the client is running. MSMQ 1.0 Client can be
installed on Windows NT 4.0.
To install MSMQ 1.0 Client on Windows NT 4.0
1. Insert the Windows NT 4.0 Option Pack CD into the CD-ROM drive. The Option Pack CD
autoruns and the Welcome dialog appears.
2. Click Next. The End User License Agreement dialog appears.
3. Click Accept, then Next. The following Option Pack dialog appears.
4. Click Custom. The Select Components dialog appears.

5. Check Microsoft Message Queue, then click Next. The Information Server Setup dialog
appears.
6. In the MTS Install Folder field, enter the installation folder for Microsoft Transaction Server,
then click Next.
7. Select Local as the administration mode for Microsoft Transaction Server, then click Next. The
following dialog appears.
I&M
?

8. Select Independent Client as the type of MSMQ software that you want to install, then click
Next.
9. Click Next. The Microsoft Message Queue Setup dialog appears.
10. Specify the name of the computer running MSMQ Server. If MSMQ 1.0 server is used, specify
the name of primary site controller.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

35

11. Click Next. The Microsoft Message Queue Setup dialog appears.
12. Specify installation folder for MSMQ software, then click Next.
13. Click Finish. The confirmation message appears.
14. Click Yes. After the system has restarted, use MSMQ Explorer to make sure that the new
MSMQ client was created.

Installing MSMQ 2.0 Client on PVO Pro and Exchange (if running Windows 2000) for
MSMQ server 1.0
Before you install MSMQ 2.0 Client on PVO Pro and/or Exchange (if running Windows 2000)
integrated with a MSMQ1.0 server, make sure that you have:
Installed and configured Windows 2000.
Installed MSMQ 1.0 Server software on the primary site
controller.
Ensured that the computer is part of the Windows NT 4.0 Domain where the MSMQ 1.0
Server is installed.

To install MSMQ 2.0 Client:
1. Click Start > Settings > Control Panel. The Control Panel window appears.
2. Double-click Add/Remove Programs. The Add/Remove Programs window appears.
3. Click Add/Remove Windows Components. The Windows Components dialog appears.
I&M
?

4. Select Message Queuing Services, then click Next. The Message Queuing Type dialog
appears.
5. Select Independent Client, then click Next. The Configuring Components dialog appears
and begins installing MSMQ. The software will search for the PEC connected to the
network.
6. Click Finish. Do not proceed with the terminal server installation when installation is
complete. Restart the computer. After the system has restarted, use MSMQ Explorer to make
sure that the new MSMQ client was created.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

36

Optional Applications

Step 8: Use Explore to ping MSMQ to verify it is working.
Before you install MSS, check that your network environment can accommodate the software
requirements. Install MSMQ client on the mail server. From MSMQ Explorer (NT 4.0) or active
directory (Windows 2000), you must able to view client MSMQ computers. If you can ping the e-
mail server from the Domain controller with MSMQ server, then the site is ready for unified
messaging deployment.
This test is a mandatory requirement before starting MSS installation. You must be able to find
other machines that have MSMQ installed. If you cannot find a MSMQ client to the MSMQ server
(or vice versa), do not install the MSS middleware service for Unified messaging.

Step 9: Install MSS Services
Refer to Section 5 "Installing MSS Services".
I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

37

Section

5b

5b - Installing Message Queuing 2.0 (for
Windows 2000) Network Domain
Controller
Installing MSMQ 2.0 Server on a Windows 2000 Network
If you are installing the UC server in a Windows 2000 network utilizing an active directory, you
must add the MSMQ 2.0 server to your network.

Software required for a Windows 2000 network:
MSMQ server 2.0 installed on a Windows 2000 server with windows 2000 server OS SP2
MSMQ Client 2.0 installed on the existing e-mail server
MSMQ client 2.0 installed on the UC Server

Steps for Installing MSMQ 2.0 Server for Windows 2000
Step 1: Installing MSMQ 2.0 Server for Windows 2000 (See page 37.)
Step 2: Verifying the Installation of MSMQ on Windows 2000 (See page 38.)
Step 3: Installing MSMQ 2.0 Client on PVO Pro and Exchange (if running Windows 2000) (See
page 39.)
Step 4: Verifying MSMQ Client on Windows 2000 (See page 39.)
Step 5: Add Perfect Voice Office Pro to the Domain (See page 40.)
Step 6: Installing Microsoft IIS5 on Perfect Voice Office Pro (See page 40.)
I&M
Step 7: Testing for MSMQ Connectivity (See page 41.)
Step 1: Installing MSMQ 2.0 Server for Windows 2000
?
Before you install MSMQ 2.0, make sure that:
You have installed and configured the active directory services.
You have reinstalled the latest Windows service pack following the MSMQ and IIS
installation and setup.
To install the MSMQ 2.0 Server:
1. Click Start > Settings > Control Panel on the machine that you plan to install the MSMQ
server on. The Control Panel window appears.
2. Double-click Add/Remove Programs. The Add/Remove Programs window appears.
3. Click Add/Remove Windows Components, select Message Queuing Services and click Next.
The Terminal Services Setup dialog appears.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

38

Optional Applications

4. Select Remote Admin for remote administration or Application Admin for application
administration. The Windows Component dialog appears.
5. Click Next. The Message Queuing Type dialog appears.
6. Select Message Queuing server, then click Next. The Windows 2000 Message Queuing Clients
dialog appears.
7. Click Next. The Setup program begins to configure the components. After the installation is
complete verify MSMQ is installed properly through active directory.

Step 2: Verifying the Installation of MSMQ on Windows 2000
Follow this procedure to view the MSMQ server in the network.
To verify the server software
1. Open Active Directory Sites and Services. To open, you may either select Start - Programs -
Active Directory Sites and Services or Start - Settings - Control Panel - Administrative
Tools - Active directory sites and services.
2. Go to the name of the server where you installed MSMQ Server. Right-click NTDS Settings
I&M
and select Properties.
3. On the "General" tab, verify that Global Catalog is checked.
4. Open Active directory Users and Computers snap-in.
?
5. Select View > Advanced features.
6. Select View > Users, Groups and Computers as containers.
7. Go to the Domain Controller and find the server name where you installed MSMQ server. Make
sure that MSMQ object appears under computer where you have installed MSMQ server.
8. Restart your PC.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

39

Step 3: Installing MSMQ 2.0 Client on PVO Pro and Exchange (if running
Windows 2000)
MSMQ 2.0 Client will be installed on the PVO Pro Voice Processing server as well as the Exchange
server (if running on Windows 2000). If Exchange is installed on the same computer you are using
as the domain controller, it is not necessary to install MSMQ Client.
Before you start, make sure that you have:
Installed and configured Windows 2000, and that the active directory services are installed
and configured
Installed the latest Windows service packs and updates following installation
Made sure that the client computer is part of either the Windows NT 4.0 Domain (where the
MSMQ 1.0 Server is installed), or the Windows 2000 Domain running ADS, Active
Directory Service, (where the MSMQ 2.0 Server is installed)
To install MSMQ 2.0 Client on Voice Processing Server and/or Exchange:
Remember to perform these steps for the PVO Pro server as well as the Exchange server.
1. Click Start>Settings>Control Panel. The Control Panel window appears.
2. Double-click Add/Remove Programs. The Add/Remove Programs window appears.
3. Click Add/Remove Windows Components. The Windows Components dialog appears.
4. Select Message Queuing Services, then click Next. The Message Queuing Type dialog appears.
5. When installing on PVO Pro, select Independent Client, then click Next. The Configuring
Components dialog appears and begins installing MSMQ. (When installing on Exchange, select
Message Queuing, then click Next.) You may be prompted for the Windows 2000 CD. If so,
browse to the i386 folder and select the file. NOTE: The software will search for the PEC
connected to the network. If the PEC is installed with NT4 OS, you have to manually identify
the MSMQ Server.
6. Click Finish when the installation process is finished.

Step 4: Verifying MSMQ Client on Windows 2000
After you install MSMQ, you must make sure that you can view the MSMQ server on Windows
I&M
2000.
To verify MSMQ Client on Windows 2000:
?
1. Go to the computer where MSMQ Server has been installed.
2. Open Control Panel Administrative Tools.
3. Open Active directory sites and services snap-in.
4. Go to the Sites--Services folder. Find the name of the computer where you installed MSMQ
Client. Right-click "NTDS Settings" and select Properties.
5. On the "General" tab, verify that Global Catalog is checked.
6. Open Active Directory Users and Computer.
7. Select View>Advanced.
8. Select View>Users, Groups and Computers as containers.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

40

Optional Applications

9. Make sure that the MSMQ object appears under each computer (For example, PVO Pro and
Exchange) where you have installed MSMQ services.
10. Restart the PC.

Step 5: Add Perfect Voice Office Pro to the Domain

Step 6: Installing Microsoft IIS5 on Perfect Voice Office Pro
Perform the following steps to install Microsoft IIS5 on the Perfect Voice Office Pro Server.
1. Insert the Windows 2000 installation CD into the CD-ROM drive. The Install Add-On
Components dialog appears.
2. Select Install Add-On Components. The Windows Components Wizard dialog appears.
3. Select Internet Information Services (IIS), then click Details to make sure that all components
have been selected. The Internet Information Services (IIS) dialog appears.

N O T E
You do not have to select the RAD option

4. Click OK. The Configuring Components dialog appears.
5. Click Next to begin the installation. The system begins installing IIS.
6. Click Finish when installation is complete.
7. Restart the PC.
8. After you have installed all of the software, run the Windows Update program for the latest
Service Pack installation. Make sure that you re-install Service Pack 2 for Windows 2000.

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

41

Step 7: Testing for MSMQ Connectivity
Before you install MSS, check that your network environment can accommodate the software
requirements. Install MSMQ client on the mail server. From MSMQ Explorer (NT 4.0) or active
directory (Windows 2000), you must able to view client MSMQ computers. If you can ping the e-
mail server from the Domain controller with MSMQ server, then the site is ready for unified
messaging deployment.
To test for MSS Compliance in a Windows 2000 Environment:
1. Ensure the view is set accurately in active directory. (Open Control Panel Administrative
Tools. Verify that Users, Groups, and Computers as containers is checked under View.)
2. Make sure that MSMQ is added to the computer object for e-mail & voice server as above.
3. Right click on MSMQ object under each computer and select properties.
4. Click on the MQPing button to ensure you can receive a reply from the MSMQ server. Repeat
the process for each computer with MSMQ.

Step 8: Install MSS Services
Refer to Section 5 "Installing MSS Services".
I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

42

Optional Applications

Section
6

6 - Installing MSS Services
Understanding MSS
The Message Synchronization Service (MSS) allows you to synchronize all of your messaging
servers with Perfect Voice Office Pro, including Lotus Notes, Exchange 5.5 and Exchange 2000.
Using MSS, you can maintain several messaging servers in a synchronized state. The software uses
centralized MSS server (MSS Agent) and a set of MSS connectors to connect particular messaging
servers to MSS server. In addition, MSS uses MSMQ queues as a transport for information
interchange between MSS server and MSS connectors. MSS can be used with MSMQ version 1.0
(NT 4.0) and MSMQ 2.0 (Wimndows 2000 only).
Using a Centralized Queue Server
MSMQ software itself also uses centralized queue server (primary enterprise controller) and set of
MSMQ clients (actually there are two types of clients -- dependent and independent -- but only
independent clients can be used with MSS). From the other hand there are several MSMQ servers
types (for example, primary site controller or routing server), but these server types are used rarely in
cases of complex enterprise infrastructure, so using these server types with MSS is also out of the
scope.
MSS software runs under Windows NT 4.0 and Windows 2000 platform. Due to using MSMQ, it is
necessary to install and configure TCP/IP services on each machine that runs MSS software. All
machines should be configured to use DNS name resolution.
Typically MSS server and MSMQ primary enterprise controller are executed on the same computer
that belongs to some Windows NT domain or acts as a PDC or BDC for the domain. Messaging
servers and MSS connectors can be executed on those computers that belong to same domain as the
computer that runs MSS server or to any other domain. Each machine that has MSS connector
installed should run MSMQ independent client connected to MSMQ primary enterprise controller.
I&M

Steps for Installing MSS Services
?
Step 1: Install MSS Server on PVO Pro
Step 2: Install MSS Connectors
Step 3: Specify MSS Service Rights
Step 4: Specify MSS Connector Rights
Step 5: Enabling the MSS Voice Mail Connector on PVO Pro

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

43

Step 1: Installing the MSS Server on PVO Pro
Since the MSS Server is used as the central messaging area for all MSS devices, it must be installed
before any of the other connectors.
To install the MSS Server
1. Insert MSS Installation CD into the CD-ROM drive. The Welcome dialog appears.
2. Click the Install Unified Messaging Services options. The MSS Setup dialog appears.
3. Click Next. The License Agreement dialog appears.
4. Select I accept the License Agreement, then click Next. The User Information dialog appears.

5. In the Full Name field, enter the name of the licensee of the product.
6. In the Organization field, enter the name of the organization that the Licensee works for.
7. In the Product ID field, enter the product identification number that came with the software.
8. Select Anyone who uses this computer, then click Next. The Select Feature dialog appears.
9. Select MSS Server, then click Next. The Database Engine dialog appears.
10. Select Microsoft Access, then click Next. The Licensing Component Location dialog appears.
I&M
11. Select Local machine. Click Next. The Start Installation dialog appears.
12. Click Install. The Installation Wizard begins to install the MSS Server software.
?
13. Click Finish when the installation is complete.
14. Right-click My Computer. Select Manage - Services and Applications - Services. Right-click
on MSS Server and select Start.

After completing the MSS Server installation, you need to install the appropriate MSS Connectors to
enable full integration.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

44

Optional Applications

Step 2: Install MSS Connectors
To install the MSS Connector for Exchange 5.5, proceed to "Installing the MSS Connector for
Exchange 5.5" on page 44.
To install the MSS Connector for Exchange 2000, proceed to "Installing the MSS Connector for
Exchange 2000" on page 45.
To install the MSS Connector for Lotus Notes, proceed to "Installing the MSS Connector for Lotus
Notes" on page 47.
To install the the RIM MSS Connector, proceed to "Installing the RIM MSS Connector", on page 48.

Installing MSS Connector for Exchange 5.5
The MSS E-mail connector serves as the local server interface to the MSS server.
To install the Exchange 5.5 connector on the Exchange Server
1. Insert the MSS Installation CD into the CD-ROM drive. The Welcome screen appears.
2. Double-click Browse the CD. Click on MSS>Clients>EX55MSS directory. Select setup.exe
in the EX55MSS directory.
3. Double-click setup.exe. The Welcome screen appears.
4. Click Next. The License Agreement dialog appears.
5. Select I accept the License Agreement, then click Next. The User Information dialog appears.
6. In the Full Name field, enter the name of the Licensee.
7. In the Organization field, enter the name of the organization that the Licensee works for.
8. Select Anyone who uses this computer, then click Next. The Destination Folder dialog appears.
9. In the Destination Folder dialog, select the destination where you want to install the MSS
Connector 5.5 or click Next to accept the default folder (Recommended). The MSS connector
settings dialog appears.

I&M
?

10. In the Service account field, select the same user that is used to start the Microsoft Exchange 5.5
services on this computer. This is typically the domain administrator's account.
11. In the Service password field, enter the password for the service account selected above.
12. In the MSS server field, enter the name of the MSS server computer (PVO Pro server), then
click Next. The Start Installation dialog appears.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

45

13. Click Next. The Installation Wizard begins to install MSS. When the installation has finished,
the Installation Completed dialog appears.
14. Click Finish.

You may select to install another Connector, or proceed to "Specifying the MSS Service Rights" on
page 47.

Installing MSS Connector for Exchange 2000
The Exchange 2000 connector serves as the local server interface to the MSS server.
To install the Exchange 2000 Connector
1. Insert the MSS Installation CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Double-click Browse the CD. Click on MSS>Clients>EX2KMSS directory. Select setup.exe
in the EX2KMSS directory.
3. Double-click setup.exe. The Welcome dialog appears.
4. Click Next. The License dialog appears.
5. Select I accept the License Agreement, then click Next. The User Information dialog appears.

I&M

?
6. In the Full Name field, enter the name of the Licensee.
7. In the Organization field, enter the name of the organization that the Licensee works for.
8. Select Anyone who uses this computer, then click Next. The Destination Folder dialog appears.
9. Click Next. The MSS connector settings dialog appears.
10. In the MSS server field, enter the machine name of the MSS server (PVO Pro server), then click
Next. The Service Account dialog appears.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

46

Optional Applications

11. The Service Account Name is pre-determined and cannot be changed.
12. In the Service Account Password field, you can designate a service account password, or use
the default password that is generated.
N O T E
The Service Account Password assigned in this field will be used for both the User
account and the Service account.

13. Click Next twice. The Installation will start copying files.
14. Click Finish when the installation is complete.
15. Go to Computer Management - MSS Connector for Exchange 2000 Monitor and select
Start.

You may select to install another Connector, or proceed to "Specifying the MSS Service Rights" on
page 47.
I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

47

Installing MSS Connector for Lotus Notes
The Lotus Domino R.5 connector serves as the local server interface to the MSS server. To install
the Lotus Notes Connector
1. Insert MSS Installation CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Double-click Browse the CD. Double-click Browse the CD. Click on MSS>Clients>
LN50MSS directory. Select setup.exe in the LN50MSS directory.
3. Double-click setup.exe. The Welcome dialog appears.
4. Click Next. The License dialog appears.
5. Select I accept the License Agreement, then click Next. The User Information dialog appears.
6. In the Full Name field, enter the name of the current user.
7. In the Organization field, enter the name of the organization that the current user works for.
8. Select Anyone who uses this computer, then click Next. The Destination Folder dialog appears.
9. Click Next. The Destination Folder dialog appears.
10. Click Browse to select an installation folder, or click Next to accept the default destination. The
MSS connector settings dialog appears.

I&M

11. In the MSS Server field, enter machine name of the MSS server.
?
12. In the Domino Administrator's password field, enter the administrator's password for the
connector to access the Notes accounts, then click Next. The Start Installation dialog appears.
13. Click Start. The Installation Wizard begins installing the MSS connector software. When the
installation has finished, the following dialog appears:
14. Click Finish. The Installation Wizard may prompt you to reboot the system (due to rare cases
where the setup cannot replace modules because they are locked by other applications). Click
Yes to reboot the computer.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

48

Optional Applications

N O T E
If you plan to run administration from the same machine that you have installed the
MSS Connector, please ensure you have installed the Lotus Dominos
administration client on the same machine. If the MSS Connector detects a Lotus
client installation it will also give you the option to install MSS administrative
tools for the Lotus client.

You may select to install another Connector, or proceed to "Specifying the MSS Service Rights" on
page 47.

Installing the RIM MSS Connector
The RIMMSS Connector allows the user to connect their RIM PDA to the synchronization schema.
Before beginning the installation, ensure that your PC has MSMQ installed, and that you can ping
the MSMQ server on your network.
To install the RIMMSS Connector
1. Insert MSS Installation CD into the CD-ROM drive. In a few seconds the Welcome screen
appears.
2. Double-click Browse the CD. Click on MSS>CLIENTS>BB20MSS>Folder then select
setup.exe.
3. Double-click setup.exe. The Welcome screen appears.
4. Click Next. The License Agreement dialog appears.
5. Read the License Agreement, then click Next. The User Information dialog appears.

I&M
?

6. In the Full Name field, enter the user's name.
7. In the Organization field, enter the user's organization
8. In the Product ID fields, enter the Sentinel license number, under the product ID information
and select next and install under the default mss folder.
9. Select all components to be installed on your computer, then click Next.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

49

10. Define what PC in your Domain that the MSS Server is installed as well identify the Network
PC name for:
POP3 server (usually the network mail server)
SMTP Server (usually the network mail server)
11. Make sure you have already created an e-mail account in your mail server for the RIM connector
so you can define the configured profile in the RIM devices setup screen such as:
RIM e-mail
RIM POP3 Account name
RIM POP3 Password
RIM SMTP Account name
RIM SMTP Password

12. Click Next. The MSS connector settings dialog appears. The installation commences and
configures your server. Hint: Make sure you have a copy of your Windows 2000 CD available.
13. Click Finish when the configuration is complete. The message appears, prompting you to restart
your computer.
14. Click Yes to restart your system.

I&M

?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

50

Optional Applications

Step 3: Specifying the MSS Service Rights
The MSS server handles all interactions with MSMQ. It therefore requires the appropriate service
rights to create queues for the synchronization process. The default setting logon is local system.

Hint: If there are problems creating queues, you can specity that the service runs in conjuction with
the rights of a domain administrator.

To change the MSS Service Rights
1. Navigate to the Services icon from Start>Program files>Administrative tools>Services.
Hint: If you are using Windows 2000 Professional, the Administrative Tools feature is hidden
by default. To show the Adminsitrative Tools, you must right-click the Desktop task bar, click
Properties and then the Advanced tab. In the Start Menu Settings box, select the Display
Administgrative Tools checkbox, click Apply and then OK. You can now follow step 1 above
and the Adminsitrative Tools options will be available to you.
2. Double-click MSS server service. The General dialog appears.

I&M
?

3. Click the Log On tab. The Log On dialog appears.
4. Select This account, then enter the name of the domain administrator PC account. Hint: Click
Browse to search for the directory.
5. In the Password field, enter the administrator password for the server. The password must be
identical to the user's password in the Active directory.
6. In the Confirm password field, enter the password again, and click OK.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

51

Step 4: Specifying MSS Connector Rights
Specifying the MSS Connector Rights (Exchange 5.5)
The MSS Connector handles all interactions with MSMQ. You must specify the appropriate service
rights so that the MSS Connector can create and write queues for the synchronization process.
To specify the MSS Connector Rights (Exchange 5.5)
1. In the Control Panel, navigate to the Services icon.
2. Double-click the MSS Connector for Exchange 5.5 (Agent). The General dialog for the
Exchange 5.5 Connector appears.
3. Click the Log On tab. The Log On dialog appears.
4. Select This account, then enter the domain administrators account. Hint: Click Browse to
search for the directory.
5. In the Password field, enter the password for the domain administrator.
6. In the Confirm Password field, enter the password again, then click OK.

Specifying the MSS Connector Rights (Exchange 2000)
The MSS Connectors handle all interactions with MSMQ. If you are running into issues with the
synchronization of Exchange 2000 with the PVO Pro server, follow the trouble shooting exercise
below. You may requires the appropriate service rights to create and write queues for the
synchronization process.

N O T E
The default setting logon is: EX2kmss. This user account and its password are
automatically created by the MSS exchange 2000 connector during installation. It
is used to monitor all the activity on the exchange server and provide events to the
MSS server and its synchronization schema.

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

52

Optional Applications

Troubleshooting MSS Service Rights
1. Navigate to the Services icon in the Control Panel.
2. Double-click the MSS Connector for Exchange 2000 (agent). The General dialog for the
Exchange 2000 connector appears.
3. Click the Log On tab. The Log On dialog appears.

4. Select This account, then enter the full domain name of the user EX2KMSS. For example, if
your domain is called ACME specify "ACME\EX2KMSS" or EX2KMSS@ACME.com.
5. In the Password field, enter the password for this user that was created during installation. To
reset the password for this user, go to active directory user and computers setup to reset the
"EX2KMSS" user password.
6. In the Confirm password field, enter the password again, then click OK.
I&M

?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

53

Step 5: Enabling the MSS Voice Mail Connector on PVO Pro
You must enable the MSS voice mail connector in order to include the Perfect Voice Office Pro
server in the synchronization schema for MSS.
To enable the connector
1. Log into the Perfect Voice Office Pro Administrative interface.
2. Click Parameters.
3. Click Edit INI. The .ini file opens in Notepad.
4. Scroll down to the end of the file.
5. Enter the following:
MSS Server=your server name (where MSS Server software is installed, for example,
PVOPRO)
MSS Client Name=your client name (name of the voice processing server, for example,
PVOPROVM)
MSS Log Filename=path/filename for the log text file (example,
d:\winvm\logs\mssclient.txt)
MSS DLL Log Level=5 (verify this is set to 5)
Use MSA=Yes
Log MSA=Yes
Log MSA Ocs=Yes
MSA Log Level=5 (verify this is set to 5)

6. Save the ini file and close Notepad.
7. Select Files-Exit.
8. The "Shutting Down Services" dialog appears.
9. Click Wait for Activity to End. The system will wait for all ongoing activity to end and then
stop the service.
10. Start and stop the Perfect Voice Office Pro Service.
I&M
11. Start MSS Services on both the Client and the Server.
12. Log into the MSS server administration tool to make sure that you can see the Perfect Voice
Office Pro Connector. To access the administration tool click on Start> Program files>MSS>
?
MSS Administrator.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

54

Optional Applications

Managing the Synchronization Schema
You can modify and adjust the following MSS Agent and MSS Administrator properties:
MSS Agent service
specify another MSS server
specify logging level
view or clear log file
start and stop MSS Agent service
view and change MSS Agent service minimum resources requirements
refresh page in case of need
adjust automatic refresh interval

To view connectors in schema
1. Click Start>Programs>MSS>MSS Admin. The MSS administrator dialog appears.
2. Click OK.

Selecting the MSS Server
In order to perform administration functions, you must first select an MSS server.
To select an MSS Server:
1. Select Start--Programs--MSS--MSS Administrator. The MSS Administrator dialog appears.

I&M
?

2. Select MS Agent tab, then click Browse or press CTRL+B. The Browse for Computer dialog
appears.
3. Select the computer where MSS Server is installed from the corresponding list.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

55

Changing the Log Level
The Log Level determines how detailed the activity log will be. 3 (three) is the most comprehensive
while 0 (zero) is the least detailed.
Specifying the Log Level:
1. From the Log Level spin box, select a log level
2. Click OK.

Specifying the Log Files
The Log Files contain information on the activity between the MSS server and its connectors. To
specify the Log Files
1. In the Log File field, enter the path to the log file.
2. Click View or press Ctrl + W to view the log file.
3. Click Clear or press Ctrl + C to clear the log file.
4. Click OK.

Stopping the MSS Service
You can stop MSS service on a specified server if you need to upgrade the software or perform
system maintenance. To start and stop the MSS Service
1. Click Start or press Ctrl+S to start MSS Service.
2. Click Stop or press Ctrl+T to stop MSS Service.
3. Click OK.

Changing Memory and Disk Space
Perfect Voice Office Pro allows you to optimize system performance by changing memory and disk
space requirements. To change the minimum requirements
I&M
1. Click Change... or press Ctrl +H. The Minimum Requirements dialog appears.
2. From the Min Free Memory spin box, change the free memory limits.
3. From the Min Free Disk Space spin box, change the minimum free disk space, then click OK.
?

Specifying the Refresh Rate
The Refresh rate controls the rate at which the Administrator utility refreshes its display. To specify
the refresh rate:
1. Click Refresh or press Ctrl + R.
2. Click Automatically refresh every 5 sec if you want the page to refresh automatically.
3. From the Automatically refresh every 5 sec spin box, change the number of seconds that the
screen will be refreshed.
4. Click OK.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

56

Optional Applications

Maintaining the Client's Property Page
Clients refer to other mail servers logged into the MSS Service. For example Exchange is a client to
the MSS server. A user can perform the following tasks:
Manage registered MSS clients
Register new MSS client
Unregister existing MSS client
Disconnect MSS client
Display information about users of the client selected
Bind and unbind users on the corresponding MSS client
Push client message queue in case of need
Registering a New MSS Client
All connectors (for example, Exchange, Lotus, RIMM, and voice mail) are self registering. The
following steps are for only advanced users. To register a new MSS Client
1. Click the Clients tab. The Clients dialog appears.

2. Click Register. The Register Client dialog appears.
I&M
3. In the Client Name field, enter the user name for the client application in the MSS Schema.
4. In the Computer Name field, enter the computer name, then click OK.
?

Disconnecting an Existing MSS Client
There are times when you will have to disconnect a client due to stopped service or maintenance.
Disconnecting a client will stop the current synchronization without removing the client from the
schema. Activity will be queued until the client is again connected. To view the status of a client,
look for the yellow light bulb. The status must display as `active'.
To disconnect MSS Client:
1. Click the Clients tab. The Clients dialog appears.
2. Click Disconnect The Disconnection confirmation dialog appears.
3. Click Yes.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

57

Unregistering a MSS Client
Unregistering a client will permanently remove it from the synchronization schema. To unregister a
MSS Client
1. Select a client you want to unregister under the clients tab.

2. Click Unregister. The warning dialog will appear.
3. Click Yes to unregister MSS client selected. The MSS client has to be disconnected before
unregistering the software.
Managing the Client User's Operations
The Clients dialog allows you to view and monitor the status of the MSS connectors. To manage the
client user's operations
1. Click the Clients tab. The Clients dialog appears.
2. Click Show Users. The User's statistics screen appears.

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

58

Optional Applications

You have five options that you can perform.

Action
Operations Required
View users statistics
Select Options, Show Statistics command.
View registered users
Select Options, Show Registered Users command.
View unregistered users
Select Options, Show Unregistered Users command.
Bind selected unregistered user
1. Select Tools > Bind User. The Bind User dialog appears.
2. Select MSS client from Client Name list, then click Show
Users.
3. Select user from the users list, then click OK.
Unbind selected registered user 1. Select Tools > Unbind User. The warning dialog will appear.
2. Click Yes to unbind selected user.

Pushing MSS Client Message Queue
You may push a message through a queue manually when an event halts. To force an event through
MSMQ.
1. Select the MSS client you want to push through message queues.

I&M

2. Click Push Queue. It is likely that the event will be lost, and the action or message that it was
pertaining to will then be out of synch.
?

Refreshing the Page
The Refresh rate controls the rate at which the administration interface queries the MSMQ for
messages or activity. The quicker the refresh, the higher the load is on networking activity. A default
of 5 sec is recommended. To specify the refresh rate:
1. Click Refresh or press Ctrl + R.
2. Click Automatically refresh every 5 sec if you want the page to refresh automatically.
3. From the Automatically refresh every 5 sec spin box, change the number of seconds that the
screen will be refreshed.
4. Click OK.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

59

Maintaining the Databases Property Page
You can manage the MSS system databases by viewing the status and size of the MSS system
databases, recreate MSS system databases, compact system databases, and create a system databases
compacting schedule.

Creating new MSS administration System Database
The MSS system database is used to store all transactions in the MSS Schema. To create a new MSS
system database
1. Click the Databases tab. The Databases dialog appears.

2. Click Create or press Ctrl+E. A dialog appears.
3. Click Yes to recreate the MSS system databases.

Viewing Database Statistics and Status
You may display usage statistics on each database used by the system. To view system statistics and
status
I&M
1. Click Statistics or press Ctrl+S. The statistic information appears. The Statistics button changes
its caption to Status.
2. Click Status or press Ctrl+S. The statistic information appears. The Status button changes its
?
caption to Statistics.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

60

Optional Applications

Compacting the MSS System Database
Perfect Voice Office Pro allows you to manually compact data in order to improve performance.
This is useful if the database size is large and occupies a lot of storage space.
To compact the database, click Compact or press Ctrl+P.
You can create a schedule that will compact the database automatically. There are three schedule
types available: daily, weekly and monthly.
Creating a Daily Compacting Schedule
You can create a schedule that will compact the database daily. To create a daily compacting
schedule
1. Click Schedule... or press Ctrl+H. The DB Compact Schedule dialog appears.

I&M
?

2. From the Schedule drop down list, select Daily.
3. From the Start Time spin box, select the time that you want the system to start compacting the
database.
4. Click Advanced... to specify the job start date and end date. The Schedule Daily spin box
appears.
5. From the Every spin box, select when you want the system to compact the database, then click
OK.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

61

Creating a Weekly Schedule
You can create a schedule that will compact the database weekly. To create a weekly compacting
schedule
1. From the Schedule drop down list, select Weekly.
2. From the Start time spin box, select the time that you want the system to start compacting the
database.
3. From the Every spin box, select the compacting interval (for example, every 2 weeks).
4. Select the days when you want the system to compact the database, then click OK.

Creating a Monthly Schedule
You can create a monthly schedule that will compact the database monthly. To create a monthly
compacting schedule
1. From the Schedule drop down list, select Monthly.
2. From the Start time spin box, select the time that you want the system to start compacting the
database.
3. Select the variant to specify compacting interval using weeks and days of the week.
4. Click Select Months to specify compacting months. The Select Months dialog appears.
5. Select the months to compact the database, then click OK.

Refreshing the Page
To refresh the page, click Refresh or press Ctrl+F.
Specifying the Import Users Property Page
The Users Property dialog allows you to import users to the MSS using specially formatted imported
files. You would use this utility if you wanted to propagate all databases centrally through MSS. The
import utility supports comma delimited format. This utility would be used in an installation that has
a large number of users. It simplifies the propagation by importing the user list and having MSS bind
users on all registered clients. The import tool acts as a migration utility as well. For example:
I&M
Binding existing users on all servers
ClientA,userlocalIDA,ClientB,userlocalIDB
Creating new users on all servers
?
ClientA,userlocalIDA,ClientB

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

62

Optional Applications

To specify the import users property page:
1. Click the Import Users tab. The Import Users dialog appears.

2. Click Browse... or press Ctrl+R. The Open dialog appears.
3. Select import file, then click OK.
4. Click Import or press CTRL+I. Information about import process will be displaying on the
page. If any errors occurred during users import, a warning dialog will appear.
5. Click Yes on the warning dialog to see information about errors occurred.

Editing Users Through Exchange Administration
To create, edit, or modify a user on the exchange server, select Start>Programs>Microsoft
Exchange>System Manager. For Microsoft Exchange 2000 users, edit the users MSS properties
from the Active directory. Highlight recipeients on the left, and the exchange mailboxes will appear
in the right field.

Attribute
Description
Registered
Sets user for MSS.
I&M
Request Pending
Current status of queued information.
VM Company
Assinged company in Perfect Voice Office Pro (multi-tenant
systems)
?
VM Alias
This value will be assigned as the mailbox number.
VM Extension
This value will be assigned as the internal telephone address.
VM Password
Initial password assigned to the mailbox.

1. Select New, Edit, or Delete.
2. Fill in the valid fields, then click Save. These values will be used to set up a new mailbox in
Perfect Voice Office Pro.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

63

Installing MSS Connector Client-Side Extension
Due to the limitations imposed by the Domino Server R5, the Installation of the MSS Connector
Client-Side Extension on all systems that run Lotus Notes allows the extension to communicate with
the MSS Connector. This communication enables the indicating of read and unread messages,
allowing the MSS server to mark read messages.
To install the client-side extension
1. Insert CD into the CD-ROM drive
2. In the Windows Taskbar, click Start>Run. The Run dialog appears.
3. In the Open: field, enter the drive that your CD-ROM is located in and click OK. (For example,
enter D:). The CD-ROM drive directory appears.
4. Double-click the MSS folder. The MSS dialog appears.
5. Double-click the Clients folder. The Clients dialog appears.
6. Double-click the LN50MSS folder. The LN50MSS dialog appears.
7. Copy the file LN50MSSExt.exe to a folder on the computer's hard drive. It is recommended
that you copy the file to the \Lotus\Notes folder.

N O T E
You must repeat steps 1-7 on ALL computers that are running Lotus Notes.

Configuring the MSS Connector for Lotus Client Extension
MSS Connector for Lotus Client Extension settings can be configured to suit each user's needs. All
computers that will be running Lotus Notes must have the client extension application installed.
After the client exteion application has been installed, it needs to be configured on each computer.
1. From the folder where LN50MSSExt.exe is copied to, double-click LN50MSSExt.exe. The
MSS Connector for Lotus client extension dialog appears.

I&M
N O T E
The recommended folder to copy LN50MSSExt.exe into is \Lotus\Notes.
?

2. In the Password on Domino Server field, enter the password for your Domino server.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

64

Optional Applications

3. Click the Check button. The Client Extension verifies the password entered. A dialog will
appear if the password is incorrect or if the Domino server is unavailable. Check to see if you are
using the correct password and verify that your Domino server is available and retry step 2.
4. If the password is correct, a dialog appears, verifying the password check as successful. Click
OK.
5. Select the Automatically refresh read/unread mark states every checkbox if you want the
MSS connector to update read/unread marks.
6. In the Minutes drop-down list, select the interval (in minutes) that the system should wait
between automatic updates.
7. In the Seconds drop-down list, select the interval (in seconds) that the system should wait
between automatic updates.
8. Click the Refresh button if you want to manually update read/unread marks. This button is only
enabled if the Automatically refresh read mark states every checkbox is not selected.
9. Select the Automatically start on Windows startup checkbox if you want the MSS Connector
for Lotus client extension application to start automatically each time Windows starts up.
10. When all configurations are complete, click the minimize button to hide the MSS Connector for
Lotus client extension dialog. This dialog can be opened at any time by double-clicking the icon
in the system tray.

Warning: Do not close the MSS Connector for Lotus client extension dialog. Closing it will disable
the application and re/unread marks update will not be performed.
Lotus Domino Settings Configuration
The Lotus Domino R5 Administrator allows you to configure, manage and maintain the MSS
connector for Domino R.5. Features include Server Control, Log monitoring, Connector Parameters
configuration and Lotus Domino Users settings. To start the MSS connector for Domino R5
Administrator:
1. In the Windows toolbar, click Start>Programs>MSS>MSS Connector for Lotus Domino R5
Administrator. The MSS Connector Admin for Lotus Notes/Domino dialog appears.

Hint: You can also access the Administrator when in the Lotus Notes or Lotus Administrator
applications by selecting Actions>MSS Connector Admin in the toolbar.
I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

65

To configure Server Control settings
1. In the Lotus Domino R5 Administrator, click the Server Control tab. The Server Control tab
appears.

I&M
?

2. In the Domino server field, enter the Domino server name or click Browse to select the server
name. This identifies where the MSS connector is installed, so that the MSS connector Admin
can connect to it. (For system configurations where the MSS connector is located on a different
machine than the MSS connector Admin).

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

66

Optional Applications

3. In the Connector Service box, click Start to start the Domino Server.
4. In the Minimum Requirements box, click Change. The Minimum Requirements dialog
appears.

5. In the Min Free Memory spinbox, select the minimum free memory that is required for the
Domino Server to run.
6. In the Min Free Disk Space spinbox, select the minimum free disk space needed for the
Domino Server to run.
7. Click OK. You are returned to the Server Control tab.
8. Click the Automatically refresh every checkbox to enable automatic refresh, and select the
time the system should wait before refreshing in the sec spinbox (in seconds).

N O T E
To manually refresh the service status, you can click the Refresh button.

9. Click Apply and OK when all configurations are completed.

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

67

To configure /monitor log files
1. In the Lotus Domino R5 Administrator, click the Logs tab. The Logs tab appears:

2. The Current Activity box lists all events written to the event log.
3. Select the Track Changes checkbox if you want the system to update activity online.
4. Select the Last Lines Only checkbox if you want optimum performance while tracking the latest
activity. (This function will only list the last 30 events committed).
5. Click Find Errors to list system errors that are logged in the Current Activity box.
6. The Log File field displays the current log file being used. To select a different log file to be
used by the system, click Browse and either select an exisitng log file or specify a new log file
name. After this log file is specified, the connector must be restarted in order for it to be used.
7. Use the Min Level/Max Level slider to indicate the log level to be used.

I&M
None
Only startup/shutdown and critical error messages are
committed.
Minimum Actions
from
None, as well as the basic information about
?
performed operations are committed.
Medium Actions
from
Minimum, as well as extended information about
operations and warnings messages are committed.
Maximum
Full trace log of all activities.

8. Click Clear Log to clear the log file displayed in the Current Activity box.
9. Click View to open the current log file in an external text editor such as Notepad.
10. Click Apply and then OK when all changes have been applied.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

68

Optional Applications

To configure MSS connector for Domino R5 settings
1. In the Lotus Domino R5 Administrator, click the Connector Parameters tab. The Connector
Parameters tab appears.
2. In the Server field, enter the name of the server that you want the MSS connector to synchronize
with or click ... to browse and select a server.
3. The Connector field indicates the MSS Connector you are using.
4. The Domino Server field indicates the Domino Server name.
5. The Administrator field indicates the Domino Server administrator name.
6. In the Password field, you can enter a new password for the adminstrator.
7. In the Polling Interval spinbox, you can select the polling interval to use (in seconds). Polling
interval is the value that indicates when the system should re-scan the Domino user databases in
order to track change activity.

N O T E
The lower the value, the faster the interval, resulting in possible slow-down of the
Domino R5 Server's performance.

8. The Local Storage field indicates the directory folder in which the local storage is located. Click
Move to select a new destination folder or Clear to remove the displayed folder.
9. Click Apply and OK when all changes have been made.

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

69

To manage Domino R5 user settings
1. In the Lotus Domino R5 Administrator, click the Lotus Domino Users tab. The Lotus Domino
Users tab appears.
2. The Lotus Domino Users tab displays the names and e-mail addresses of users within the MSS
synchronization space. It also allows you to create, modify, delete, register and bind users.
Unregistered users are displayed with a "spy" icon.

To create new users
3. In the Lotus Domino Users tab, click Create to create a new unregistered user. The User
Properties dialog appears.

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

70

Optional Applications

4. In the First Name field, enter the user's first name.
5. In the Initials field, enter the user's initials.
6. In the Last Name field, enter the user's last name.
7. In the E-mail field, enter the user's e-mail address.
8. Click Add to add an attribute to the created user. The Add Attribute dialog appears.

9. In the Attribute Name drop-down list, select the attribute you want to assign to the user and
click OK.
10. Double-click the added attribute to assign a value to it. The Edit Attribute dialog appears.
11. In the Edit Attribute field, enter the attribute and click OK. The Attribute List will be updated
with the new value.
12. You can click Modify at any time to modify the user attributes and values.
13. Click OK to save the changes.

To register users
1. In the Lotus Domino Users tab, select a user to register and click Register. The "spy" icon
beside the user becomes a "user" icon, indicating that the user is now registered.

I&M
?

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

71

During the next polling cycle, the MSS connector for Lotus Domino R5 will log the new user
registration event and forward this notification to all other MSS connectors.
To bind users
1. In the Lotus Domino Users tab, select the unregistered user and click Bind. The Bind User
dialog appears.

2. In the Client Name drop-down list, select the MSS connnector that holds the registered user you
want to bind the selected user to.
3. Click Show Users. The Bind User list displays all users registered to the selected MSS
connector.
4. Select the user you want to bind the unregistered user to and click OK. The users are now bound.

N O T E
To Unbind users, select the user in the Lotus Domino Users tab and click Unbind.
I&M

?
To delete users
1. In the Lotus Domino Users tab, select a user and click Delete. The User is deleted.

N O T E
Unregistered users will be deleted only from the Domino R5 server. Registered
users will be deleted from all servers that they are part of in the MSS environment.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

72

Optional Applications

Understanding the RIMMSS Connector
The RIMMSS connector for Blackberry devices is not a real MSS connector. It converts SMTP sync
messages from the RIM handheld device to the real MSS synchronization messages and vice versa.

N O T E
The current version of the RIMMSS connector does not support custom folders,
folder moving, copying or deleting.

There are three different scenarios for setting up the RIMMSS connector:
MSS Server An MSS Server with logged in clients (for example, e-mail, voice mail and
RIMSS).
RIM Server A particular computer with RIMMSS connector installed, Usually Voice
Server.
Server B A messaging server with MSS connector installed (for example, Microsoft
Exchange or Lotus Notes server).

Configuring the RIMMSS Connector
The MSS Connector performs actions to determine the addresses of the unread messages counter.
Depending on the version of the RIM operating system you are using, these addresses are assigned
different values. 12 libraries have been created to address each of the known sets of RIM operating
systems and their corresponding message .dlls.
To ensure that the RIMMSS Connector determines the correct addresses of the unread message
counter, you must use the MSSConnector*.dll that matches with the RIM OS and message .dll
versions installed on your Blackberry Wireless Device. The table below indicates the correct
MSSConnector*.dll to use with each known set of RIM OS and Message .DLL.

Library
RIM OS/Message .DLL Version
MSSConnector14570_15000.dll RIM
OS 1.4.57.0/Message .dll 1.5.000
MSSConnector14890_16030.dll RIM
OS 1.4.89.0/Message .dll 1.6.030
I&M
MSSConnector2013_17000REL.dll
RIM OS 2.0.13/Message .dll 1.7.000 (Release)
MSSConnector2013_17000SDK.dll RIM
OS
2.0.13/Message .dll 1.7.000 (SDK)
?
MSSConnector2013_20001.dll RIM
OS 2.0.13/Message .dll 2.0.001
MSSConnector2013_20002.dll RIM
OS 2.0.13/Message .dll 2.0.002
MSSConnector2013_20004.dll RIM
OS 2.0.13/Message .dll 2.0.004
MSSConnector2017_20004.dll RIM
OS 2.0.17/Message .dll 2.0.004
MSSConnector2020_20005.dll RIM
OS 2.0.20/Message .dll 2.0.005
MSSConnector2022_20004.dll RIM
OS 2.0.22/Message .dll 2.0.004
MSSConnector2123_21058.dll
RIM OS 2.1.23/Message .dll 2.1.0.58
MSSConnector2123_21219.dll
RIM OS 2.1.23/Message .dll 2.1.2.19

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

73

To convert SMTP sync messages from the RIM handheld device to the real MSS synchronization
messages, you must configure the RIMMSS connector. To configure the RIMMSS Connector
1. Open the RIMMSS administration application and click the RIM Service tab.
2. Use Browse to specify the name of the RIM server.
3. From the Logging options group:
Click Select to specify the log-file.
Click View to view the contents of the log-file.
Click Clear to clear the contents of the log file.
Specify logging level using four-state slider control.
Place slider to the first (left) position to turn off logging.
Place slider to the second position to select minimum logging level.
Place slider to the third position to select average logging level.
Place slider to the fourth (right) position to select maximum logging level.

4. Click the RIM Service tab, then select the Synchronize items in Sent folder check box to
include Sent folder into synchronization scheme if you want to include sent events in the schema
from the wireless device.
5. Click the RIM Service Parameters tab to:
Specify the name of the MSS Server machine using corresponding ellipses button.
Specify the RIM connector mailbox on the e-mail server in the Admin mailbox field.
Specify the name of the POP3 server, POP3 account, and POP3 password for the RIM
connector in the corresponding fields.
Specify the name of the SMTP server, SMTP account and SMTP password for the RIM
connector in the corresponding fields.
From the Database polling group, select the RIM connector database's polling interval using
Polling Interval edit.
From the SMTP Port Number group, select Automatic to use default SMTP port number.
From the SMTP Port Number group, select Manual only if you need to specify SMTP port
number using the corresponding field.
From the Local storage group, click Move to move local storage to another location.

6. Click the RIM Service tab.
I&M
7. In the Connector service group, click Start. The RIMMSS connector begins wireless
synchronization with configured accounts.
?
8. In Exchange, open up the specific user accounts that have the Blackberry devices, then click on
the MSS tab.
9. Select RIM, then enter the RIM e-mail address for that specific user.

Configuring the RIMMSS Software
Once you have configured the RIMMSS Connector, you can configure the RIMMSS software. The
following user's properties are included in the MSS synchronization scheme:
First name
Last name
Initials
Alias

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

74

Optional Applications

RIM e-mail
All MSS specific properties are also included into the synchronization scheme. To configure
RIMMSS
1. Run the RIM Administration utility, then click the RIM Users tab.
2. Click Create. The User Properties window appears.
3. Specify the new user attributes, then click OK. The new unregistered user will be created in the
RIMMSS local storage. A new record with unregistered user icon is created in the user's list.
4. Select new user, then click Register to register user on MSS server.

The following operations occur in the background:
The RIMMSS connector receives notification about user registration, sets the Registered
attribute to 1, and forwards it to its outbound queue.
MSS Server receives notification about user creation and adds information about user to
`USERS' table of MSS system database. Count of records MSS Server adds to `USERS'
table is equal to number of registered MSS connectors.
One of those records (corresponding to user created on RIMMSS) contains actual
information about user's local ID. Information about local IDs of user in other records filled
later.
MSS Server forwards notification about user creation to all other MSS connectors.
Other MSS connectors receive notification about user creation and creates new user with
specified attributes.
MSS connectors for other messaging servers determine local ID of newly created user and
forward it to MSS Server.
If the specific MSS connector could not create the new user with specified attributes, then
the zero local ID forwards to the MSS Server.
MSS Server receives notification about local ID of user created on server B and stores
information about its local ID in `USERS' table of MSS system database.
All MSS connector's queues are empty.
`USERS' table contains actual local IDs for user on all messaging servers.
IF the local ID for specific user in the `USERS' table is equal to zero, then the specific MSS
connector was not able to create the new user with specified attributes.
Values for all attributes (that supposed to be synchronized) of newly created user are equal
I&M
on every messaging server.

?
Binding a Wireless User with UC and Messaging Server
In order to synchronize information between the Exchange and the messaging servers, you must
identify the user to both servers. To bind a wireless user:
1. Run the RIM Admin utility, then click the RIM Users tab.
2. Select the user, then click Bind. The User binding window appears.
3. Select the connector where the registered user to be bounded with resides (Messaging Server),
then click Show Users. A list of users available for binding appears in the Bind user dialog.
4. Select the user on other MSS connector (Messaging server) for binding.
5. Click OK in the User binding dialog to finish binding users. MSS Server receives notification
about the user's binding.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

75

Unbinding a User
If you do not want to synchronize information between the Exchange and the messaging servers, you
must unregister the user on the MSS server. To unbind a user
1. Run the RIM Admin utility, then click the RIM Users tab.
2. Select the user, then click Unbind. The RIMMSS connector performs the following operations:
Sets the Registered attribute to zero.
Changes the user's icon to.
Sends notification about the user's unbinding to the MSS Server.
MSS Server receives notification about the unbinding of the user. In the `USERS' table of
the MSS system database, the local ID of the unbound RIMMSS user is set to zero.
Empties all of the MSS connector queues.
Excludes the unbounded user from sync.

Installing MSS Connector on the Blackberry Device
Installing the handheld-based component of the RIMMSS system does not differ from the
installation of the regular RIM application. There are two files included into installation package:
MSSCONNECTOR.DLL MSSConnector binaries
MSSCONNECTOR.ALI installation info

These files are installed in the RIMMSS folder on the server that the RIMMSS server was installed
on (for example, C:\MSS\BIN\) . For more information, refer to the client installation guide. You
must use RIM desktop software to install MSSConnector.ALI file. You should specify the e-mail of
the RIMMSS server only.

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

76

Optional Applications

Uninstalling the MSS Server and Connector
You can uninstall the MSS Server and/or the various Connectors by using the Add/Remove feature
in the Windows Explorer.

Uninstalling the MSS Server
1. In Windows, click Start-Settings-Control Panel. The Control Panel window appears.
2. Click Add/Remove Programs. The Add/Remove Programs window appears.
3. Select Message Synchronization System and click Remove. The system prompts you to
confirm the deletion.
4. Click Yes. The MSS Server is now removed.
Warning: As a precaution, the uninstallation process will not remove all the data from the
MSS directory. (Default c:\MSS). To fully un-install the MSS Server, you must use the
Windows Explorer to manually remove the C:\MSS directory.
For system configurations where the MSS Server resides on the same computer as the MSS
Connector, be aware that by default, the Connector files are located in C:\MSS\Ex**Store, and
manually removing the C:\MSS folder will also remove the Connector data.

N O T E
It is recommended that the system is rebooted after you un-install the MSS Server.

Un-installing MSS Exchange 5.5 Connector
1. In Windows, click Start-Settings-Control Panel. The Control Panel window appears.
2. Click Add/Remove Programs. The Add/Remove Programs window appears.
3. Select MSS Connector for Exchange 5.5 Server and click Remove. The system prompts you
to confirm the deletion.
4. Click Yes. The MSS Exchange 5.5 Connector is now removed.
I&M

Warning: As a precaution, the uninstallation process will not remove all the data from the
?
MSS Connector directory. (Default c:\MSS\Ex55Store). To fully un-install the MSS
Connector, you must use the Windows Explorer to manually remove the C:\MSS directory.
For system configurations where the MSS Server resides on the same computer as the MSS
Connector, do not delete the entire C:\MSS\ directory. You should only delete the C:\
MSS\Ex55Store directory.

N O T E
It is recommended that the system is rebooted after you un-install the MSS
Exchange 5.5 Connector.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

77

Un-installing MSS Exchange 2000 Connector
1. In Windows, click Start-Settings-Control Panel. The Control Panel window appears.
2. Click Add/Remove Programs. The Add/Remove Programs window appears.
3. Select MSS Connector for Exchange 2000 Server and click Remove. The system prompts
you to confirm the deletion.
4. Click Yes. The MSS Exchange 2000 Connector is now removed and you are now required to
remove the EX2KMSS gateway.
5. In the Windows Task Bar, click Start-Administrative Tools-Active Directory Sites and
Services. The AD Sites and Services dialgo appears.
6. In the Tree tab, click Services. EX2KMSS appears in the right window.
7. Right-click EX2KMSS and select Delete. A dialog appears, prompting you to confirm the
deletion.
8. Click Yes. EX2KMSS is now deleted.

Warning: As a precaution, the uninstallation process will not remove all the data from the
MSS Connector directory. (Default c:\MSS\Ex2kStore). To fully un-install the MSS
Connector, you must use the Windows Explorer to manually remove the C:\MSS directory.
For system configurations where the MSS Server resides on the same computer as the MSS
Connector, do not delete the entire C:\MSS\ directory. You should only delete the C:\
MSS\Ex2kStore directory.

N O T E
It is recommended that the system is rebooted after you un-install the MSS
Exchange 2000 Connector.

Un-installing Lotus Notes Connector
1. In Windows, click Start-Settings-Control Panel. The Control Panel window appears.
2. Click Add/Remove Programs. The Add/Remove Programs window appears.
I&M
3. Select MSS Connector for Domino R.5 and click Remove. The system prompts you to
confirm the deletion.
?
4. Click Yes. The Lotus Notes Connector is now removed.

Warning: As a precaution, the uninstallation process will not remove all the data from the
Lotus Notes Connector directory. (Default c:\MSS\LNStore). To fully un-install the Lotus
Notes Connector, you must use the Windows Explorer to manually remove the
C:\MSS\LNStore directory.

N O T E
It is recommended that the system is rebooted after you un-install the Lotus Notes
Connector.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

78

Optional Applications

Un-installing RIM MSS Connector for Blackberry Wireless Devices
1. In Windows, click Start-Settings-Control Panel. The Control Panel window appears.
2. Click Add/Remove Programs. The Add/Remove Programs window appears.
3. Select RIMMSS for RIM Devices and click Remove. The system prompts you to confirm the
deletion.
4. Click Yes. The RIMMSS Connector is now removed.
Warning: As a precaution, the uninstallation process will not remove all the data from the
RIMMSS Connector directory. (Default c:\MSS\RIMStore). To fully un-install the RIMMSS
Connector, you must use the Windows Explorer to manually remove the C:\MSS\RIMStore
directory.

N O T E
It is recommended that the system is rebooted after you un-install the RIMMSS
Connector.

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

79

Enabling the MSS Voice Mail Connector
You must enable the MSS voice mail connector in order to include the UC server in the
synchronization schema for MSS.
To enable the connector
1. Log into the Perfect Voice Office Pro Administration console.
2. Expand Configuration, then highlight MSS. All of the MSS's associated components appear in
the right pane.

3. Double-click MSS Client Name. The Edit String dialog appears.
4. In the Value Data field, enter the PC name of the UC server, then click OK.
5. Double-click the MSS Server Name. The Edit String dialog appears.
6. In the Value Data field, enter the server name that has the MSS server installed, then click OK.
7. Double-click Use MSS. The Edit String dialog appears.
8. From the Value Data drop-down list, select True and click OK.
9. Click Start > Programs>Administrative Tools>Services. The Services screen appears.

N O T E
I&M
This step only applies to Advanced Server and Windows 2000 Professional.

?
10. Start and stop the Perfect Voice Office Pro Service.
11. Start MSS Services on both the Client and the Server.
12. Log into the MSS server administration tool to make sure that you can see the Perfect Voice
Office Pro Connector.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

80

Optional Applications

13. To access the administration tool click on Start> Program files>MSS> MSS Administrator.
Click OK

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

81

Section
7

7 - Setting up Fax Services (Fax Mail,
Fax On Demand & FaxLinX)
The fax processing capabilities of Perfect Voice Office Pro are referred to as Fax Services and are
comprised of fax detection and routing, Fax on Demand, Fax Mail, and FaxLinX server. Both Fax on
Demand and Fax Messaging use a Gammalink Board that supports 2 or 4 ports. The FaxLinX server
adds outbound fax to the other Perfect Voice Office Pro fax services.
Fax Mail
Fax Mail allows Users to handle fax messages just like voice messages. Customers, suppliers, and
contacts can send private and confidential faxes directly to the User's mailbox rather than a generic
fax machine. Users can access these fax messages via the telephone interface, Desktop Interface,
unified e-mail mailbox, or from anywhere on the Internet. Fax messages may be printed, saved,
deleted, or redirected to another fax machine. Users can receive faxes by various means:
Callers may press a digit within the mailbox to identify that they want to send a fax.
Perfect Voice Office Pro will automatically detect an incoming fax at the automated
attendant and route the incoming fax to a system mailbox. The system can even identify a
fax tone at the mailbox level. This eliminates the need for 2 DID numbers, one for voice and
one for fax. When a call is forwarded to a mailbox, the system can determine whether or not
it is a fax during the personal greeting.
Faxes can be sent directly to the system's fax boards. These faxes may be left in a system
mailbox, which can be accessed over the network or over the telephone.
Faxes can be sent to the FaxLinX server.
Fax on Demand
With Fax-on-Demand, callers requesting written information on a company, products or services can
I&M
get the information faxed to them quickly and easily by selecting fax documents options from the
Main Company Greeting. Fax files are set up in the voice mail one time for information that may be
delivered many times. Perfect Voice Office Pro receives the call and delivers the requested fax data
?
using the installed fax board. Requirements include installing one of the leading supported fax-
boards to the Perfect Voice Office Pro server, Fax-on-Demand software and having an additional
ISA slot available within the server configuration. Installation is supported in the Perfect Voice
Office Pro Installation Wizard. Fax-on-Demand offers the potential of superior customer service
levels while saving significant time and money for an organization that takes full advantage of its
functionality.

Callers can request a specific document, or have a pre-defined document sent to them, at any fax
number they choose. Documents can be inputted into the voice mail system as a file in DCX, TIF, or
ASCII format, or scanned in through a fax machine.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

82

Optional Applications

FaxLinX
FaxLinX is a powerful, high-volume document sending/receiving solution that reduces costs and
improves overall efficiency, thus eliminating the need to send faxes manually. FaxLinX provides
real-time document delivery from the desktop to fax machines, other Fax Clients, and the Internet by
managing the sending and receiving of faxes to desktops for multiple users at once. FaxLinX is
comprised of two major components: the Fax Server and the Fax Client. The Fax Server has a Fax
Administrator application that is run at the System Administrator's desktop. It allows centralized
management of faxes from one convenient screen. The Fax Client is an application that is installed
on each user's computer. The Fax Client application receives incoming faxes and assists Users when
composing outgoing faxes to one or more destinations.
Complete Fax Integration
FaxLinX provides complete fax integration. The FaxLinX suite of applications includes Fax Mail,
Fax Server, and IP Fax processing, which gives complete control over incoming and outgoing faxes.
Fax Mail stores incoming faxes electronically. FaxLinX acts as an active printer driver on the
existing network, allowing Users to work in any program and send their document to the FaxLinX
Server for distribution. Just select "Print" from the application (such as Microsoft Word), select
FaxLinX as your printer, and the system prompts for the remaining information.
It isn't necessary to install a fax modem and telephone line on every workstation
Faxes can be sent from any computer on the LAN/WAN, as well as from any web page
Minimum Requirements for Stand-Alone FaxLinX Server

Minimum Requirements
Platform FaxLinX version 2.7
CPU Intel Pentium 3, 1GHz
RAM 256MB RD RAM
Hard Drive 30GB IDE
CD ROM Required
VGA 32MB 4x AGP TNT 2 Pro
NIC 1x100
BaseT
I&M
Modem 56k v.90 min (remote maintenance)
OS Windows® 2000 ProfessionalTM/ Advance Server/ NT 4.0 SP2
Fax Cards GammaLink PCI series cards
?
Minimum Requirements for FaxLinX Client
PC: Pentium II 400MHz or greater
Platform: Windows 95, 98, NT, 2000
RAM: 128 MB or greater
HD: 10GB or higher
Network Card: Yes
Modem: Not necessary
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

83

Install the Fax Board
There are five steps in the installation procedure of a fax board:
1. Read the section below entitled "Precautions About Electrostatic Devices (ESD)."
2. Change the settings on the fax board or boards if necessary.
3. Install the fax board into the PC. (PCI or ISA)
4. Verify the telephone line connection (optional).
5. Install the appropriate fax board software.

Caution: If you plan to install the fax boards and the Fax Server on the same machine, you can only
use ISA fax boards.
Precautions About Electrostatic Devices (ESD)
Fax boards are composed of electronic components that can be damaged through mishandling. These
components can also be sensitive to static discharge. Although being a trained electrical technician is
not a requirement for the installation of a fax board, it is still necessary to observe the following
precautions:
Handle the board with care. Hold it only by its edges.
Do not put excess pressure on the board or bend or flex it.
Do not drop the board or stack anything on top of it.
Do not touch the board components.
Use non-magnetic tools to install the board.
Do not operate the board at temperatures exceeding 120 degrees or below 32 degrees
Farenheit (45 degrees or 0 degrees Celsius, respectively).
Before removing the board from its antistatic bag, touch the surface of the bag and any bare
sheet metal surface on the computer.
While handling the board, maintain contact with the bare metal surfaces on the computer
frame.
Store the board in a anti-static bag when not in use.

I&M
Installing the Gammalink Fax Card
Perform the following steps to install the Gammalink Fax Card.
?
To install the board:
1. Turn off the power to the host computer and remove the cover. Warning: Do not touch any
parts inside the computer when it is turned on.
2. Keeping the board level, guide it into any slot inside the computer that is designated for add-in
boards. The metal bracket on the board fits into the area formerly occupied by the plate. There
may potentially be anywhere from 2 to 20 slots, depending upon the computer. The board will
work in an 8-bit or a 16-bit slot in most computers (AT-class). Note: In some international
configurations, the telephone cord is permanently attached to the board. If this is the case,
push the telephone cord through the slot at the back of the computer before guiding the
board into the chassis.
3. After inserting the board, apply gentle pressure to firmly seat it into the slot.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

84

Optional Applications

4. When both ends are secure in their guides, replace and tighten the mounting-bracket screw to
secure the board.
Note: If the telephone cord is permanently attached to the board, ignore steps 5 and 6.
5. Check that the phone connector on the board is clear. If it is, find the jack marked "Wall" on the
board, and insert the modular connector on the telephone cord supplied with the board.
Although the board connector can accept the standard 4-pin RJ-11C connector, be sure to use the
telephone cord included with the board, as, on occasion, there can be problems in mating
connectors made by different manufacturers. Caution: Make sure that you have the RJ-11
plug placed into the wall jack, and not the headset jack. Refer to the appropriate add-on
documentation for your particular fax board.
6. If the phone cord goes in easily, replace the cover on the computer. If not, loosen the screw and
reposition the board, and then reinsert the telephone cord.

Installing the Fax Driver
1. Insert the TOL Fax Service Installation disk into the CD-ROM drive. The Main Menu appears.
Select Fax Drivers, and then click Next. The Fax Drivers dialog appears.
2. Select GammaLink, and then click Next. A Warning dialog appears.
3. If your Exchange Server is running, ensure that you stop it before proceeding with the fax driver
installation. If the server is stopped, click OK to continue. The Welcome dialog appears.
4. Click Next. The Software License Agreement dialog appears.
5. Click Yes. The system installs the drivers, and then the Question dialog appears.
6. Click No to continue. The Setup Complete dialog appears.
7. Click Finish. The GammaLink fax driver installation is now complete. Proceed to "Starting the
GammaLink Service".

Starting the GammaLink Service
After installing the Gammalink fax board driver, you must start the GammaLink System Service and
configure it to start everytime the system is rebooted.
To start GammaLink:
I&M
1. In the Windows Desktop Taskbar, select Start>Programs>Gammalink>Start Gammalink
System Service. The GFStartUtility dialog appears.
2. Highlight GammaLink System Service, select Service>Startup Mode and select "Automatic".
?
GammaLink is now set to automatically start.
3. Select Service>Start to start GammaLink. To verify that it is started, its status should read
"Running".
4. Close the GFStartUtility.
Note: It is recommended that the system is rebooted to allow for registry changes. Upon rebooting,
GammaLink will automatically start.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

85

What To Do Next?
After installing the fax boards and starting the driver, ensure that your fax boards are working
correctly. When you are sure that your fax boards are performing correctly, you can proceed.
Install Fax Server Component
Following the installation of your fax boards and driver, you are ready to install the Fax Server
component. Before installing the Fax Server, be aware of the following details:
The Fax Server must be installed on a Windows NT or Windows 2000 operating system.
Both the Fax Server and the Fax Client require Microsoft Data Access Component DCOM
or MDAC.
Additional Installation
Note: Additional Installation need only be performed if you do not have MS Office 97 or 2000
installed on your computer.
If Data Access Components have been installed previously or the installation of
mdac_typ_20SP2.exe was not successful, perform the following steps to correct the problem:
1. Navigate to C:\Program Files\Common Files\System and delete the following folders:
Ado
Msadc
Oledb
2. Run mdac_typ_20SP2.exe from the CD located in the MDAC folder.

Installing TOL Fax Server Software
The Fax Server InstallShield Wizard will autorun when you insert the software CD into your PC's
CD-ROM drive.
To install Fax Server:
1. Insert the Installation CD into the CD-ROM drive. The Main Menu dialog appears.
2. Select the Outbound Fax Services checkbox and then click Next. The Fax Server InstallShield
I&M
Wizard dialog appears.
3. Click Next. The License Agreement dialog appears.
?
4. Select I accept the terms in the license agreement, and then click Next. The Customer
Information dialog appears.
5. In the User Name field, enter your user name.
6. In the Organization field, enter the name of your company.
7. Select Anyone who uses this computer, and then click Next. The Setup Type dialog appears.
Note: If you are installing the Fax Server, you should install all possible features so that you can
test the Fax Client on the same machine after installation. Selecting the first option will allow
you to run all components from one location. This enables you to check the operations of all
components from one location.
8. Select Fax-LinX Server with Print Server included, and then click Next. The About Auto Logon
dialog appears.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

86

Optional Applications

9. Click Yes. The About User Account dialog appears. Make sure that a user is assigned
administrator rights, and then click Next.
10. The Logon Name dialog appears.
In the Logon Name field, enter the name of the user.
In the Password field, enter the password for the user.
In the Retype Password field, re-enter the password for confirmation.
11. Click Next. The Destination Folder dialog appears.
12. Click Next. The Select Fax Driver dialog appears.
13. Identify the Fax Driver that you have installed on your system, and then click Next. The Server
Parameters dialog appears.
In the IP Address field, enter the IP address of your SMTP server.
In the Port field, enter the port number of your SMTP server.
In the Administrator's E-mail field, enter the e-mail address of the administrator.
14. Click Next. The Fax Server dialog appears.
In the IP Address field, enter the IP address of your fax server.
In the Port for administration field, enter the port number of your fax server.
15. Click Next. The system begins the installation.
16. When completed, the InstallShield Wizard Completed dialog appears. Click Finish. The Fax
Server installation is now complete. You must now specify the server to establish a connection.
Proceed to "Specifying the Server" for more information.

Specifying the Server
Following the installation of the Fax software, you must establish a connection with the Fax Server.
To connect to the fax server:
1. In the Windows Task Bar, click Start>Programs>Fax Server>Fax Administrator. The Connect
Server dialog appears.
In the IP Address field, enter the IP address at which the Fax Server application resides.
In the Port field, enter the address assigned to the port on the fax board.
I&M
Note: The last field in for the IP Address is set aside from the main part of the address.
While the IP address refers to the location of the Fax Server, the Port refers to a specific
application (in this case the print server) when the multiple applications exist with the same
?
IP address.
In the User Name field, enter the user name assigned to the user. Note: This user must exist
on the Fax Server and be assigned Administrative rights.
In the Password field, enter the password that is assigned to the user for login purposes.
Click the Save Password checkbox if you want the Fax Server to remember the password
for future logins.
Note: You can disable the Save Password option at any time by clicking File>Unsave
Password from the Administrator menu.
2. Click OK. The Fax Administrator window appears. From this window, the administrator will be
able to perform functions such as adding new companies and users. For more information, See
"Fax Server Administration".
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

87

Note: When logged in as an administrator, you can monitor the status of your connection at the
bottom of the Fax Administrator window. If at any time the connection to the server is lost or the IP
address changes, you must reconnect to the server in order for the Fax Server to operate. To do this,
you must repeat steps1-2 outlined above.
Edit INI file.
1. Select Start -- Run -- Perfect.ini to open the perfect.ini file.
2. Scroll to the [Fax Settings] section.
"System CSID" - Enter the Company Name
"Fax Mail Installed" - Enter Yes
"File and Path for Fax Viewer" - leave blank to use Windows default
"Allow Printing of Faxes" - enter No
"Log Fax Activity" - enter No
3. Scroll to the [Fax Board Extensions] section and enter the appropriate extension numbers.
4. Save the perfect.ini file.
Verify that the Fax Argument Has Been Added to the Shortcuts
Add the fax argument to the program line on the Desktop, Startup group, and Programs group:
1. Right-click Start.
2. Select Explore All Users.
3. Open Programs - Startup.
4. Right-click PVOPRO - select Properties.
5. Verify thatfax has been added to the Target as shown below. If not, add a space, then fax.
6. Click OK.
7. Back up to Programs - PVO Pro and verify that fax has been added to the Target as shown
below. If not, add a space, then fax.
8. Right-click the PVO Pro icon on the desktop.
9. Select Properties.
10. Select the Shortcut tab.
11. Verify thatfax has been added to the Target as shown below. If not, add a space, then fax.
I&M
12. Click OK.
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

88

Optional Applications

Modify Fax Parameters
The Fax on Demand feature is an add-on feature to Perfect Voice Office Pro and must be configured
before it will function on the system. Once the hardware and software installation is complete, start
Perfect Voice Office Pro. Go to the Parameter Screen and select Fax Parameters. Several values
must be updated here:

300 Fax on Demand
Set Parameter 300 to one (1) to activate Fax on Demand.

301 Local Area Code 1
Many large urban centers encompass several local area codes.
302 Local Area Code 2
In parameters 301 to 303, enter the local area codes for your
particular area. You may have up to three (3) local area codes.
303 Local Area Code 3
If you do not require all three choices, leave the unused
parameters blank.

304 Local and Toll Area Code 1
Again, many metropolitan cities have certain area codes that
305 Local and Toll Area Code 2
are both local and long distance. In parameters 304 to 305,
enter the local / long distance area codes for your particular
area. You may have two (2) local / long distance area codes.
Note that if you do require these fields, a DOS text file
containing a list of local exchanges must be created in the
\WINVM directory. (See below.) If you do not require one or
both choices, leave the unused parameter(s) blank.

306 Code to Access Outside Line
These parameters identify the outside line access codes for the
307 Code to Access Toll Line
PBX system. The default value for 306 is "nine pause" (9,);
for 307, "nine pause one" (9,.1).

308 Number of Digits in Area Code
These parameters identify the number of digits in the area
309 Number of Digits in Telephone
code and in the telephone number. The default settings are
Number
three (3) digit area codes and seven (7) digit telephone
numbers.

310 Fax Directory
This parameter lists the name of the directory to be used to
store FAX documents. This directory must be created at the
root directory. The default directory name is FAXOUT. If
you wish to use a different name, the directory name must be
changed in this parameter field as well as created as a
directory on the hard drive. For example, if you want to use a
I&M
directory named TEST as you FAX directory, change
parameter 310 to read "\TEST", and also create a directory
C:\TEST. Valid fax file types are ASCII, .dcx, or .pcx files.
?

311 Dialing Suffix
Enter the code, if any, that must be dialed after a long
distance number.

313 Ask for Extension Number
If enabled, the system prompts the caller for his or her
extension number so that the caller may be identified on the
fax. A value of 0 enables; 1, disables this function.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

89

314 Fax Pickup Code
This is the code that the fax card dials to pick up a
parked call.

315 Default Fax Number
This is the default fax number where faxes are printed
when another number has not been specified.

316 Default Fax Mailbox
This is the default mailbox for faxes.

NOTE: If an area code is both Local and Long Distance, it should ONLY be entered in the Local/Toll
parameters (304 and 305). The area code cannot appear in both parameter sections.

If you entered values for Parameter 304 or 305, you must create a data file called <Areacode>.FAX.
For example, if your Local/Toll Area Code is `905', the data file will be called 905.FAX. If you do
not have an area code in your area that is both local and long distance, you may skip the following
steps:
· From the Perfect Voice Office Pro directory C:\WINVM>, type EDIT <Areacode>.FAX and
press <Enter>. This file, <Areacode>.FAX, will be blank because you are creating it now.
· In this file, <Areacode>.FAX, enter all of the exchanges that are local exchanges for your
area. You can find this information in the local telephone book in the section entitled "Local
Calls and Calling Instructions". In this file, <Areacode>.FAX, enter each local exchange on
a new line as shown below.

I&M
?
DOS Editor Screen with <Areacode>.FAX file

Once all local exchanges have been entered, save this file and exit the DOS editor.

Reboot the System
After you modify the fax parameters, you should reboot the system.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

90

Optional Applications

Uninstalling the Fax Server
The Fax Server can be uninstalled and re-installed at any time.
Caution: If you are uninstalling a Fax server that is installed on the same machine as the Voice Mail
server, and both servers share a GammaLink board, you must stop the services of both servers before
uninstalling the Fax server. This will prevent the corruption and / or losing of files that are being
shared by the two servers.
To uninstall the Fax Server:
1. In the Windows Desktop, click Start>Settings>Control Panel>Add/ Remove Programs. The
Add/Remove dialog appears.
2. Select Fax-LinX and click Change/Remove.
3. Follow the uninstall procedure.
Caution: If the Fax Server is uninstalled and it was previously used in conjunction with the Voice
Mail server sharing a GammaLink board, the uninstall process will remove the Sentinel licensing
drivers. You must re-execute the Sentinel drivers in order for the Voice Mail server to operate
properly.
To re-execute Sentinal licensing drivers:
1. Reboot the system.
2. Stop UC Services.
3. Open folder C:\UC\Sentinel\ and run setup.exe.
4. Start UC Services.
Note: After rebooting the system and restarting UC services, you must restart the Fax service.

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

91

Section

7a
7a - Fax Server Administration
Overview
The Fax Server Administrator enables you to perform administrative functions such as:
View faxes and their properties
Use Filters
Manage Companies
Manage Users
Manage Faxes
Configure Port Properties
Manage the Database

There are five main windows in the Fax Administrator interface.

You can use the Fax Server Administrator to view all current system activity including:
The Fax Server icon identifies the fax server.
The number of companies on the fax server, the companies that are considered active or
inactive and the users associated with each company.
The users currently connected to the fax server.
The number of faxes that are in each of the user's folders (Inbox, Outbox, Deleted, Sent
Items, and additional created folders) and the details of every fax.
The active print servers.
The fax ports that are being used, and their activity and status.
The number of faxes that are being processed, completed, pending and placed on hold
(scheduled delivery time also displayed).
I&M

?
Using the Toolbar Buttons
The Fax Server Administrator toolbar allows you to conveniently perform tasks within the
application. If any of the buttons appear grayed-out while using the Administrator, the system is
indicating that the particular function is not available at the time.

Changing the Refresh Rate
You can change the speed that the system automatically refreshes the screen.
To change the refresh rate:
In the Fax Administrator main menu, click View>Update Speed. The Refresh Screen dialog
appears.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

92

Optional Applications

Select a refresh speed and click OK.
Viewing a User's Faxes
If a particular user's folder is expanded under the Company section of the main Administration
screen, a list of the user's existing folders is displayed in the Company window, and all of the faxes
associated with that user are displayed in the Fax window.
To view a user's faxes:
In the Fax Administrator window, select and expand a user. The fax folders associated with
the user appears.
Click the folder that contains the fax you want to view. The selected fax folder expands and
all faxes within that folder appear.
Click the fax you want to view. The fax becomes highlighted and its properties appear in the
right window.
Right-click the highlighted fax and select View Fax Image. The selected fax will open in
your default image viewer.

Viewing Fax Properties
The Fax Server Administrator allows you to display the properties of a fax, including the originator
of the fax, the subject and the number of pages sent.
To view fax properties:
In the Company or Fax window, double-click the fax you want to view. The fax properties
of the selected fax appears in the right window.
To better understand the fax properties displayed in this window, the following table defines these
properties and their associated values.
Property

Definition
JobGUID

The unique Fax ID that is generated by the system.
UserID
The sequence ID of the user entered into the system.
JobID

Sequence ID of the fax job, from the TOL Fax Client.
FolderID
Refers to the ID of the four default folders generated for each
I&M
Company.
OriginalComputerName The computer name of the Fax Client the fax is being submitted
from.
?
Title

The title can only be viewed for outgoing faxes. Incoming faxes
will have the Date and OriginalComputerName appear only.
From

The incoming fax will have the CSID of the Sender, for
example FaxServer. Outgoing faxes will have the sender's user
name in the "From" field.
Subject
For faxes that have been received, the "Subject" area of the Fax
Properties window will appear blank. However, the Fax Cover
Page that was received will have the subject appearing on it. For
outgoing faxes that have been submitted from the Fax Client,
the subject will appear in the "Subject" area of the Fax
Properties window.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

93

Property

Definition
SendTime
Immediately appears by default. From the Fax Client, the sender
can choose to send as soon as possible, or specify a time for the
fax to be sent.
WhenSubmitted The time and date the fax is being submitted by the Fax Client.
ExpirationTime Never is selected by default. A user can also specify a time for
an outgoing fax to expire.
Importance Urgent is selected by default. A user can also select Normal and
Send Off Peak Hours.
RetryMode

No Retries is selected by default. A user can also specify
Standard or Extra Retries (maximum 7 retries).
CoverTemplate There are 5 main templates the user can choose from and they
are numbered in sequence from 1 to 5.
CoverPage
The cover page filename.
BannerType

The header that appears along the top of the fax page that is
received. The default selection is None. Other options are
Standard and International.
BaudRate

The speed at which the system sends/receives faxes. By default,
the speed is set to Maximum.
PagesSent
The number of pages that were submitted through to the Fax
Client.
Status

Indicates the status of all Faxes within the system, received, sent
or failed.
Hold

Allows the user to pause the submission of a fax to the system.
The user wil be required to release the fax in order for it to
continue sending.
NotificationLevel
Destination is selected by default. the system will generate the
status of the Destination, Group or Fax.
NotificationReason
Never is selected by default. A user can also choose to have
Failed Only or Always as a notification reason.
NotificationDetail
Short is selected by default. This will generate the status of the
I&M
Notification Detail. From the Fax Client, the user can select
Quick, Standard or High.
Files

Indicates the number of files attached to the fax.
?
FilesInProgress
Indicates the status of the files being sent.
FilesOK

Indicates the total number of files that were sent successfully.
FilesFailed
Indicates the total number of files that were sent unsuccessfully.
Dests

Indicates the total number of destinations the fax is being sent
to.
DestsInProgress

Indicates the total number of destinations in progress.
DestsOK

Indicates the total number of destinations the fax was sent to
successfully.
DestsFailed Indicates the total number of destinations the fax was sent to
unsuccessfully.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

94

Optional Applications

Using Filters
The Fax Server allows you to display faxes according to various search criteria. For example, you
can specify search parameters to display all faxes with a Fax ID number greater than 100, and then
instruct the system to display only those faxes tagges as "Ready to Send". You can apply up to 3
different seach criteria to the Fax filter at once. As each filter is applied, the number of selected
records decreases.
Note: Filters can only be applied to outgoing faxes.
For each filter function, the following fields must be specified:
The parameter field to filter by.
An operation that is specific to the parameter being used.
An argument that is specific to the operation and the parameter.
To access filter options:
In the Fax Administrator, click View>Filter.
Click on the drop-down arrow. A list appears allowing you to select Filter by Fax or Filter
by Destination. The default is Filter by Fax.
Filtering by fax:
1. In the Fax Administrator main menu, click Filter>By Fax. The Fax Filter Conditions dialog
appears.
2. From the Parameter drop-down list, select a filter field.
3. From the Operation drop-down list, select an operation to be applied to the filter criteria.
4. From the Arguments drop-down list, select the correct argument for the given condition.
5. Note: Arguments include numeric values, date values, or pre-defined status values.
6. Click Apply. The Fax Server displays all of the faxes that match the search parameters.

Filtering by destination:
1. In the Fax Administrator main menu, click Filter>By Destination. The Destination Filter
Conditions dialog appears.
I&M
2. From the Parameter drop-down list, select a filter field.
3. From the Operation drop-down list, select an operation to be applied to the filter criteria.
?
4. From the Arguments drop-down list, select the correct argument for the given condition.
5. Note: Arguments include numeric values, date values, or pre-defined status values.
6. Click Apply. The Fax Server displays all of the faxes that match the search parameters.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

95

Managing a Company
The Company section of the Fax Administrator lists the companies that have been set up on the fax
server, allowing you to add, edit and delete Company settings.
Adding a Company
The Fax Server allows you to add multiple companies under the Fax Server identification icon.
To add a company:
In the Company window, right-click on the Fax Server identification icon and select Add
New Company. The New Company dialog appears.
In the Company Name field, enter the name of the new company.
In the Description field, enter a brief description of the company.
Click the Service Suspended checkbox if the company is not currently being considered for
sending and receiving faxes.
Hint: To suspend or unsuspend a company, right-click on the company and select Suspend
Company<Company Name> or Unsuspend Company <Company Name>.
In the Available Ports field, select ports for the company and click Add to move them to the
Company Ports field. To remove a port from the selected list, highlight it and click Remove.
In the Company Ports field, highlight a port and select the priority to assign to the port in the
Change Priority To drop-down list.
Note: If multiple ports are receiving or sending faxes, the port assigned with High Priority
will be utilized first. Subsequently, a port given Normal Priority will be given consideration
over a port tagged with Low Priority.
In the Recipient for Unresolved Incoming drop-down list, select a username that faxes will
be delivered to within the system in case the received faxes do not have a recipient name
tagged to them.
Click OK.

Deleting a Company
I&M
The Fax Administrator allows you to delete unwanted companies from the system at any time.
Caution: Once a company is deleted, the information for that company cannot be recovered.
To delete a company:
?
In the Company window, right-click the company and select Delete Company. A message
appears, prompting you to confirm the deletion.
Click Yes to delete the company.

Editing a Company
The Fax Administrator allows you to edit a company's existing properties at any time.
To edit a company:
In the Company window, right-click the company and select Properties. The Company
Properties dialog appears.
Make the required changes in the field, and click OK.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

96

Optional Applications

Managing Users
The Users window in the Fax Administrator displays the following information:
The user names and real names of each user.
The company that each user is associated with.
A description of the user (usually the user's associated department).
The logged in status of each user (User or Administrator).

Displaying a User's Folders
Expanding a user's folder under the Company window displays a list of the user's folders. All of the
faxes associated to that user are displayed in the Fax window. Selecting a specific folder displays all
of the faxes contained in that folder.
To display a user's folders:
In the Tree window, click the company that contains the users that you want to view. All
users associated to the selected company appears in the expanded tree.
Select the user you want to view. The folders associated to the user are displayed in the
expanded tree.

Adding a User
The Fax Administrator allows you to add one or more users to an existing company.
To add a user:
In the Tree window, right-click the company that you want the user to be associated with and
select Add New User. The New User dialog appears.
In the User Name field, enter the user's name. Hint: The username can be a portion of the
user's actual name, a nickname, or something completely different. It will be the name that
appears on the main screen whenever the user is referenced.
In the Full Name field, enter the user's full name. This indicates to the Administrator to
whom the user name is actually assigned to.
In the Password field, enter a password for the user. The password will be required when the
I&M
user launches the Fax Client.
In the Confirm Password field, re-enter the password for confirmation.
?
In the Description field, enter a description of the user (for example, which department they
belong to).
From the Company drop-down list, select the company that the user is associated with.
From the Language drop-down list, select the language that the user will be using to
correspond.
In the Account box, click the Disable checkbox to disable the user's account or click the
Expires checkbox and in the drop-down list select a date range in which the user account
will expire.
In the Receiving Options box, click E-mail, Fax or both checkboxes to indicate what type of
messages can be received.
In the User Rights box, click one of the following user rights to assign to the new user.
Administration: allows the user to perform administrative tasks.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

97

Fax Sending: allows the user to send faxes from the desktop client.
Fax Receiving: allows the user to receive faxes at the desktop client.
Click OK.

Deleting a User
In the Tree window, right-click a user and select Delete User. A message appears prompting
you to confirm deletion.
Click Yes.

Editing a User
In the Tree window, right-click a user and select Properties. The User dialog appears.
Perform the required changes and click OK.

Specifying User Notification
The Notification dialog allows you to configure the notifying of the user of new faxes and the
confirming of the sending of outgoing faxes.
To specify user notification:
In the Tree window, right-click a user and select Properties. The User dialog appears.
Click the Notification tab. The Notification tab appears.
Click the E-mail checkbox and enter the user's e-mail address in the corresponding field.
Hint: You can select a recipient address from Microsoft Outlook by clicking Browse.
Click the System checkbox and enter the computer name of the user who will receive fax
notifications for all fax messages via system transport in the corresponding field. Hint: You
can select a computer from the Network Neighborhood, by clicking Browse.
Click the Enable checkbox to enable the selected notification options. Note: The Call To,
Voice Mail, Pager and Fax To checkboxes are disabled and will be available in future
versions of the Fax Administrator.
I&M
Click OK.
Specifying User Telephony Options
?
The Telephony tab allows you to configure the telephony options for long distance dialing and
dialing through a DID line.
To configure the fax server:
In the Tree window, right-click a user and select Properties. The User dialog appears.
Click the Telephony tab. The Telephony tab appears.
In the DID field, enter the DID extension for faxes that are received through a DID line.
In the LDAC field, enter the long distance access code (if required). Note: If a Brooktrout
(Rhetorex) card is used, the format for the LDAC is six commas (representing 12 seconds of
pause time), followed by a W to indicate to Wait for Intermediate Dial Tone, and the code.
(For example, ,,,,,,W<code>).
Click the Enable Long Distance Calls checkbox if long distance dialing will be used.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

98

Optional Applications

Click OK.

Managing Faxes
Faxes are documents sent through the print server to another location. Each fax usually consists of a
cover page and one or more attached files. The main screen lists both the faxes that are waiting to be
sent and those that have already been sent.

Managing Fax Ports
The Fax Port window in the Fax Server Administrator lists information about each fax port.

The following table illustrates each property and function found in the Fax Ports window.

Property

Definition
Port
Indicates
which
ports
are
active/inactive.
Status

Indicates the status of the port. This field will indicate whether a
fax is incoming, outgoing or waiting for activity.
Owner

Indicates the sender of the fax. Applies to outgoing faxes only.
Fax Indicates
the
title
of
the
fax.
Attention

Indicates the name of the user who the fax is intended for.
Fax Number

Indicates the fax number that is being dialed to send the fax.
Applied to outgoing calls only.
Session Time

Indicates the length of time that the port has been actively
sending or receiving a fax.
Port Result

Indicates the status of the port when a test call is made to it.

Hint: If the fax driver and board are functioning, a message will appear under the Status property. If
there is no message under the Status property, check to see if your fax driver or board is functioning.
I&M

Displaying Port Properties
?
You can display and change the properties of ports.
To display port properties:
In the Fax Administrator, click View>Port Manager. The Port window appears, displaying
all existing ports.
Highlight a port, right-click and select Properties. The Port Properties window appears.
From the Country drop-down list, select a country.
In the Fax # field, enter the area code and phone number.
In the To Reach Outside Line Dial field, enter the number required to reach an outside line.
Click the Always Dial Area Code checkbox if the Fax Server is to always dial the area code.
In the Area Code field, enter the area code.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

99

In the Prefix field, enter the 3-digits following the area code and click Add to List. The area
code and prefix appear in the LAP List field. Note: Local Area Prefix specification is used
to identify fax numbers with the same area code as being long distance or local.
Click the Port Suspended checkbox if you want to prevent the port from being used.
Click OK.
Suspending and Resuming Port Activity
You can make a port active or inactive at any time.
To suspend and resume a port:
In the Port window, highlight a port.
To Suspend a port, right-click and select Suspend Port #.
To Resume a port, right-click and select Resume Port #.

Cleaning the Database
To reduce the amount of information stored in the database, the Fax Administrator allows you to
remove all faxes stored in the Deleted Items, Inbox, Outbox and Sent Items folders.
To clean the database:
In the Administrator window, click Tool >Database>Clean Database. The Clean Database
window appears.
In the Remove All Faxes Before drop-down list, select a date that you want all faxes to be
removed by and click OK. A message appears, prompting you to confirm deletion. Caution:
All faxes that are cleaned from the database are removed permanently and cannot be
restored.
Click OK. A message appears, confirming that the faxes are deleted.

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

100

Optional Applications

Section

7b
7b - Installing Fax Client
Fax Client allows a user to send a fax to one or more destinations and to receive incoming faxes.

Installing the Software
The fax client software enables users to print documents from any windows-based application to the
Fax Server. The Fax Server must be installed on the network and licensed in order to have the client
software operating properly. Ask the system administrator for the IP address of the server to
simplify the installation.

To install the fax client software:
1. Insert the Installation CD into the CD-ROM drive. The Main Menu dialog appears.
2. Select the Outbound Fax Services checkbox, and then click Next.
3. The Fax Install Shield Wizard dialog appears.
4. Click Next. The License Agreement dialog appears.
5. Select I accept the terms in the license agreement, and then click Next. The Customer
Information dialog appears.
6. In the User Name field, enter your user name. Note: The user name is the name assigned to the
user logging in. This user must already exist on the Fax server.
7. In the Organization field, enter your company name.
8. Select Anyone who uses the computer, and then click Next.
9. The Setup Type dialog appears.
10. Select Fax-LinX Client, and then click Next. The Destination Folder dialog appears.
11. Select a folder to install the software to and click Next. The Fax Server dialog appears.
12. In the IP Address field, enter the IP Address of the fax server. Note: Ask your Network
I&M
Administrator if you do not know the IP Address.
13. In the Port of Clients field, enter the IP port that is assigned to access the fax server on the
network. The default is port 7000 or ask your network administrator if you are unsure of the port
?
number. Click Next. The Ready to Install the Program dialog appears.
14. Click Install to start the installation. After the InstallShield Wizard finishes installing the
software, a dialog appears confirming the installation.
15. Click Finish. A message appears, prompting you to restart your system so that the configurations
made can take effect.
16. Click Yes to reboot your PC. Note: Once you reboot, you can print documents from any
Windows application to the fax server through the print utility.
17. Click Start>Programs>TOL Fax>Fax Client to start Fax Client.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

101

Specifying the Server
After you have installed the software, you must establish a connection with the Fax Server. You can
also use this procedure to specify new server settings. Note: You will only need to make this
connection once.
To specify the server:
1. Click Start>Programs>TOL Fax>Fax Client. The Fax Client window appears.
2. Click File>Set Server from the main menu. The Set Server dialog box appears.
3. In the IP Address field, enter the IP address of the Fax server.
4. In the Port Field, enter the port number of the fax server. This value refers to a specific IP port
number that the client software will use to access the fax server over the network.
5. In the User Name field, enter the user name assigned to the user that is logging in. This user
must exist already on the fax server.
6. In the Password field, enter the password that has been assigned to the user.
7. Select the Save Password checkbox if you want the system to remember the password for future
logins.
8. Click OK. You can now use Fax Client.

Specifying the Database
If the Data Link Properties dialog appears while you install FaxClient, perform the following steps.
1. Select Microsoft Jet 4.0 OLE DB Provider and click Next or Connection. The Connection tab
appears.
2. In the Select of enter a database name field, enter the path to the database or click Browse to
navigate to the database.
3. In the User Name field, enter the user name.
4. In the Password field, enter the password.
5. Select the Blank password checkbox to prevent entry of the password in the Password field.
6. Select the Allow saving password checkbox if you want Fax Client to remember the user's
password for future logins.
7. Click Test Connection to test the connection to the specified database. If the test is successful, a
I&M
message appears that confirms connection.
8. Click Advanced. The Advanced tab appears.
?
9. In the Access Permissions field, select the ReadWrite checkbox. This allows the user to read
from and write to the database.
10. Click OK.
Enabling FaxGuard
If you are running Windows NT, FaxGuard allows you to print your faxes. If an error message
appears, either restart your PC or run FaxGuard from BIN in the installation directory.
Printing Documents
Once your PC reboots, the fax printer driver is ready to be used. You can print documents from
any Windows application (for example, Microsoft Word) to the UC Fax printer through the
print utility.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

102

Optional Applications

Section

7c
7c - Using Fax Client
Fax Client is a printer driver installed on your PC that allows you to send fax jobs to the FaxLinX
server over the IP. The application sits in the user tray, and allows you to print from any windows-
based application (for example, Microsoft Word) to the Telephony FaxLinX Server. Each fax is
stored in its own folder, depending upon whether it is an incoming (Inbox) or outgoing, Outbox/Sent
Items) fax, or has been deleted (Deleted Items). Each fax can contain one or more attachments.

Opening the Fax Client
Click Start > Programs > Fax-LinX > Fax Client. The Fax Client Administration Console appears.

Administration Console
The Administration Console allows you to manage your entire mailbox, including creating a new
fax, adding a cover page template, create, delete, rename or edit folders. You can also view faxes
that have been sent or received, along with those faxes that are waiting to be sent. The
Administration Console is made up of three windows: Folder Management, Fax Destination, and
Document File. There are eight buttons that allow you to perform various tasks within the
Administration console.

Using the Folders
Fax Client comes installed with four folders:
Inbox--stores incoming faxes
Outbox--stores all outgoing faxes
Sent--stores all sent faxes
Deleted--stores all deleted faxes
I&M
Creating a New Folder
In addition to the four folders that come with the software, you can create an unlimited number of
?
new folders.
To create a new folder:
Highlight the root folder from which the new folder will be created. Note: You can create a
new folder at the same level as the four original folders by highlighting Personal Folders.
Right mouse click on the folder, then select New Folder In (Folder Name).
Enter the name of the new folder and click OK.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

103

Deleting a Folder
You can delete any existing folders, with the exception of the Inbox, Outbox, Sent Items, or Deleted
Items folders.
To delete a folder:
Highlight the folder.
Right-click and select Delete Folder. FaxClient moves the folder to the Deleted Items folder.

Deleting a Folder Permanently
Once you have deleted a folder, you can remove it permanently from the Deleted Items folder.
To permanently delete the folder:
Highlight the folder that you want to delete.
Press the right mouse button, then select Delete Folder. A message appears, prompting you
to confirm deletion.
Click OK.
Renaming a Folder
You can rename any existing folders, with the exception of the Inbox, Outbox, Sent Items, or
Deleted Items folders.
To rename an existing folder:
Highlight the folder.
Right-click and select Properties.
Enter a new name and click OK.

Creating a Fax
There are two ways to create a fax: 1) from inside the windows-based application you are using to
create the document, for example, Microsoft Word, and 2) from Fax Client. Either method allows
I&M
you to create a fax with multiple destinations and attachments.
Creating a Fax from the Print Dialog
?
If you are working on a document to fax using a windows-based application (for example, Microsoft
Word), you can create the fax directly from the application.
To create a fax:
Click File>Print from the application. The Print dialog appears.
From the Name drop down list, select UC Fax Printer, then click OK. A message appears,
confirming that the print job is in session.
After the file has been printed, the Fax Wizard dialog appears. For information on creating a
fax, proceed to the next step, "Creating a Fax from the Administration Console".

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

104

Optional Applications

Creating a Fax from the Administration Console
You can create a fax from the Administration console.
To create a fax:
1. Click New fax. The Select Fax dialog appears. Note: If you are creating a fax from the Print
dialog, the Fax Wizard dialog appears.
2. In the Title field, enter the title for your fax document that will appear on the header document.
3. In the From field, enter the sender's name.
4. In the Subject field, enter the subject of the fax.
5. From the Baud rate drop down list, select the speed at which that you want to send the fax. Note:
The Fax ID field displays a unique identifier for the fax. This information is used by software
developers.
6. Click Next. The Select Destinations dialog appears.
7. In the To field, enter the recipient's name that will appear in the banner of the fax. Note: Click
Address Book to display your Microsoft Exchange Contacts. Select a list of clients with fax
numbers to send the document to, or enter a name manually. You can click on the address book
and it will launch any MAPI based address book you have on your PC9 (for example, an
Outlook contact list). To remove a client from the list or edit a client's information, highlight the
client, then click Remove. The client information reappears in the fields at the top, and you can
either edit the information or change it.
8. From the Country drop down list, select the Country Code to use for International dialing
purposes. Select the destination country from the list. The default is None.
9. In the Fax # field, enter the fax number dialing string required to reach the destination.
10. Select Internal call if the destination is a fax client located on the same fax server.
11. Click Add to List, then Next. The Select Files dialog appears.
12. Select Attach additional files to the fax if you want to attach additional files. Click Add to List to
navigate to the directory containing the files. The Add Fax Documents window appears. Note:
You can choose files from any format, as FaxClient will convert them to TIFF format when they
are sent.
13. Highlight a file and click OK. Select Print document on the client side if you want the document
to be printed to a TIFF file on the client side.
14. Click Scan & Add if your computer is connected to a scanner. FaxClient allows you to add the
I&M
scanned image to the list of attachments.
15. Click Next. The Cover Page dialog appears.
?
16. Select Yes if you want a cover page. Select the cover page from the list of templates.
17. From the Banner type drop down list, select one of the following banner types: US Standard,
None, International Standard.
18. Click Finish to process the fax or Next to specify more sending options. The Schedule dialog
appears.
19. Select a time to send to send the fax. The options are: As soon as possible--send the fax as soon
as possible; Specific time--specify a specific time to send the fax (If you select Specific time,
enter the time that you want Fax Client to send the fax.)
20. Select an Expiration time. The options are: Never expired--keep trying until successful;
Specific time--specify the time that the system is to stop trying to send the fax.
21. Select an Importance to define the priority on the server of when to send the fax. The options
are: Normal, Off peak hours (Defined on the server side), Urgent (Top priority),
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

105

22. Specify a retry mode. The options are: No retries--one attempt only; Standard--the system
will try to send the fax up to four retries; Extra retries--the system will try to send the fax up to
seven retries.
23. Click Finish to process the fax or Next to access more sending options. The Notification dialog
appears.
24. Specify the reason to notify you of the status of the fax. The options are: Never--never notify
you of the status or completion; Failed Only (Default)--on failed attempts only; Always--
always notify me of no matter successful or failure.
25. Specify the level of notification. The options are: Destination--for every fax; Group--for
every group completed; Fax--for every destination or number sent to.
26. Specify the detail of the notification message. The options are: Quick--short message with the
number and result; Standard--offers time; High--offers complete detail on the task
27. Click Finish to process the fax or Next to access more sending options. The Finish dialog
appears.
28. Select Defer job if you are offline and have no IP or Internet connection. You can defer the job
and process it later when you are back online.
29. Select Transmit job to server if you are online and can transmit the job to the server. It is
configured with your server's default settings and your user name and password for verification.
Note: If you have multiple servers in different locations, you can enter the IP address of the
server you want the job sent to. However, you must make sure that you have a valid account on
that particular server to ensure receipt.
30. Click Finish.

Displaying and Modifying Fax Properties
After you create a fax, you can make changes to the Cover Page, Schedule, Notification, and Server
Journal before sending it to the Fax Server. Note: You can only change a fax that is still in the
Outbox.
To modify fax properties:
Highlight the fax and click Compose > Properties. The fax properties dialog appears.
To make changes to a particular setup screen, click the appropriate tab.
I&M
When you have completed all of the changes, click OK.

?
Adding a Destination
If you have created a fax but have not sent it to the Fax Server, you can add one or more additional
destination locations using one of several methods:
Highlight the fax, then click Compose > Add New Destination(s).
Right mouse click on the fax, then select Add New Destination(s).
Highlight the fax, then click Add destinations.
Highlight the fax, then press Ctrl+D.
Note: The fax must still be in the Outbox to add any additional destinations.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

106

Optional Applications

Deleting an Existing Destination
Before you send the fax to the Fax Server, you can delete one or more of the destination locations
using one of several methods:
Highlight the destination, press the right mouse button, then select Delete Destination.
Highlight the destination, then press Del.
Highlight the destination, then click Delete from the tool bar.
Highlight the destination, then click Compose > Delete.

Adding New Files
After you have created the fax, you can add additional files to it using one of several methods:
Highlight the fax, then click Compose > Add New File(s) from the main menu.
Highlight the fax. Right mouse click anywhere in the Document window, then select Add
New File(s).
Highlight the fax. Highlight an existing attached file, then right mouse click and select Add
New File(s).
Highlight the fax, then click Add files from the tool bar.
Highlight the fax, then press Ctrl+F.
Note: The fax must still be in the Outbox to add any additional files.

Deleting an Attached File
Before you send a fax to the Fax Server, you can delete one or more of the attached files using one of
several methods:
Highlight the applicable file, right mouse click and select Delete File(s).
Highlight the applicable file, then click Delete on the tool bar.
Highlight the applicable file, then click Compose > Delete.

I&M
Viewing Attached Files
You can view a file that you have attached to a fax using one of several methods:
?
Highlight the attachment, press the right mouse button and select View Original File.
Highlight the attachment, then select View file from the tool bar.
Highlight the attachment, then click View, then View File from the main menu.
Once the document has been converted to TIFF format, you can view the document by right
mouse clicking on it, then selecting View Fax Image.

Deleting a Fax
You can delete a fax before sending it to the Fax Server using one of several methods:
Highlight the fax, then click Compose > Delete from the main menu.
Highlight the fax, right mouse click and select Delete Fax from the menu.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

107

Highlight the fax, then press Del.
Highlight the fax, then click Delete on the tool bar.
Submitting a Fax to the Fax Server
After you have created the fax, you can either send the fax immediately or hold it until you have
finished creating other faxes.
To submit a fax to the Fax Server:
Highlight the fax.
Click Deliver > Submit Fax (Fax Name) from the main menu.
Once the fax has been submitted, FaxClient moves it to the Sent Items folder, and changes the status
of the attached file(s) to Converted (if the document was converted from a non-supported format).
Holding or Releasing a Fax
Faxes are held at the Fax Server if you applied a schedule when creating the fax. For more
information, refer to "Creating a Fax from the Administration Console"

Specifying Delivery Options
You can customize the sending and receiving options for a fax, including sending and receiving
faxes when you start Fax Client, and checking for new messages.
To change the delivery options:
Click Deliver > Options from the main menu. The Options dialog appears.
Select Send and receive messages at startup if you want FaxClient to send faxes stored in the
Fax Destination window. Selecting this option will also instruct FaxClient to receive all
faxes addressed to you.
Select Check for new messages every 15 minutes if you want FaxClient to check for new
faxes. The default is 15 minutes.
Select Show system message box on new fax message if you want FaxClient to notify you
each time you receive a new fax.
Click OK.
I&M

Changing a Cover Sheet
?
Fax Client comes with five pre-designed fax cover sheets (or templates). You can either use one of
these existing cover sheets or add your company logo and contact information to an existing cover
sheet.
To change a cover sheet:
Click File > Register Cover Page from the main menu. The Register Cover Page dialog
appears.
Select a file name, then click Edit. The Edit Cover Page dialog appears.
In the Full Path For Logo Picture field, enter the path to the directory containing the logo.
Note: Click Browse to search for the directory.
In the Picture Size field, enter the width and height of the logo.
In the Company Name field, enter the name of your company.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

108

Optional Applications

In the Return Address field, enter the return address that you want to appear on the fax.
In the Phone field, enter your company's phone number.
In the Fax field, enter your company's fax number.
Click Preview to view the cover page.
Click File>Close to return to the Edit Cover Page screen.
Click OK to return to the main menu.

Printing Offline
If you sent fax jobs to the server while you were offline, you can send them once you are
reconnected to the server.
To print offline:
Click Start > Programs > Fax-LinX > Fax Client. The Fax Client screen appears.
Click Send/Receive. FaxLinX Client connects to the default server and processes all jobs
that were completed while offline.
Checking the Status of a Fax Job
You can check the status of your fax in real time. Note: You must be online to check the status of a
fax job.
To check the status of a fax job:
Click Start>Programs>Fax-LinX>FaxClient. The Fax Client Administration console
appears.
Click on the file to view the fax.
Highlight the fax, then press the right mouse button to view advanced options.
Click Fax Properties for a live status of the fax job. The Fax Properties dialog appears. The
properties dialog box summarizes all the options you selected while creating the fax job.
Click Server Journal for active status.
FaxLinX Client will notify you automatically if you select Notification.
I&M
Click OK to close the Fax Properties dialog.

?
Receiving and Viewing Faxes
To receive faxes that may be waiting for you, click Deliver>Send and Receive. FaxClient transfers
the faxes from the spooler to the Inbox folder. To view the contents of a fax, double-click on it.
FaxClient opens the fax as a .tiff image. Once FaxClient displays the fax, you can open the image or
print it.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

109

Forwarding a Fax
Once you have received a fax, you can forward it to another destination.
To forward a fax:
Highlight a fax in the Inbox folder. Press the right mouse button and select Forward Fax.
The Forward dialog appears.
From the Local Users list, select a user to send the fax to, then click the right arrow.
FaxClient pastes the user fame into the Recipient List field. Note: You can also click
Address Book to display your Contact Manager.
Click Send.

Displaying Fax Properties
Each time that you highlight a fax in the Folder Management window, FaxClient displays
information about that fax in the Fax Destination window.

Broadcasting a Fax
FaxClient allows you to send a fax to multiple locations at once using one of the following methods:
Select the clients from the Address Book. Enter each client's information on the Select
Destinations dialog, then click Add to List.
Select the clients from the Address Book, then add additional clients using the Select
Destinations dialog.
Create a Distribution list in your Contact Manager, then select that list from the Fax Client.
Note: At the present time, only Microsoft Outlook is supported.
Adding a Fax Cover Page
Fax supports pure HTML format, such as documents created using Microsoft FrontPage or Microsoft
Publisher. Caution: Teleco recommends that you do not use Microsoft Word to convert your
document to HTML, as Microsoft Word saves an HTML file in XML format that is not supported.
I&M
To add a cover page:
If you use one of the Fax cover page templates to make your cover page, click File>Register
Cover Page from the main menu.
?
Select the template that you wish to use, then click Edit.
After you finish editing, save it in the same file name. If you save it as a new name, you
must register the new template. For more information, refer to Changing a Cover Sheet.
If you prefer to not to use one of the templates, use Microsoft FrontPage to edit your new
cover page. Save it in HTML format, then register the cover page with a new template name.
To remove a cover page from the list, highlight the template, then click Remove.
To view an existing cover page, highlight the template, then click View.
Note: The document cannot be edited.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

110

Optional Applications

Section

8
8 - Fax On Demand
Fax-On-Demand enables Perfect Voice Office Pro to fax information to callers at their request. Fax
files are set up in Perfect Voice one time for information that may be delivered many times. Callers
may request a fax by pressing the appropriate digit(s) on a touch tone telephone. To set up Perfect
Voice Office Pro for Fax On Demand, the system must first be set up for fax services (see previous
section). Then the Fax On Demand Voice Menu must be created and fax documents may be added
to the system.
Create the Fax On Demand Voice Menu
In order for callers to be able to use Fax on Demand, they must be offered the option. The Fax on
Demand option may be offered to the callers in the Main Company Greeting. Please note that the
Fax on Demand option is a function of the Voice Menus and may be offered as an option on any
Voice Menu. For the purpose of this example, we will offer the Fax on Demand option in the Main
Company Greeting.

1. First we will create a "Phantom" mailbox (MBX 80) for Fax on Demand so that we can create a
Voice Menu. In this mailbox (MBX 80), activate the following features on the Transfer Option
Tab in the Mailbox screen:
· Call Blocking
· Logged In
· Voice Menu
· Also, enter a NAME for the Voice Menu. For our example, we will call this voice menu
"FAX".

I&M
?

Mailbox Transfer Option tab Mailbox Screen for Mailbox 80

2. Record the name prompt for mailbox 80 as "Fax Options". This informs callers that they are
transferring to the Fax options menu. It is not necessary to record any personal greetings for this
phantom mailbox because each voice menu has its own prompt.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

111

3. Since the Fax on Demand option is to be offered in the Main Company Greeting, the mailbox
number must be entered in the Company Single digit field on the Company Screen.
Company Single digit Field

4. This option must be offered to your callers in the Main Company Greeting (Refer to "Recording
System Prompts and Company Greetings"). This Greeting can be as follows:

Prompt
XXX:
"Thank you for calling the ABC company. If you know the extension number
of the party you wish to speak with, you may dial it now or you may press the
star key for a company directory. To request a FAX document, press one; or to
speak to an operator, press zero."

5. The Voice Menu "FAX" must now be created. To do this, select V-Menus from the Main
Screen. The Voice Menu Screen appears similar to the Screen shown below. Enter the name of
the voice menu to create. For our example, we will enter "FAX" and click OK.

I&M
?

Voice Menu Screen
6. When the AudioText Entry Form appears, select sub menu number one.
NOTE: All Voice Menus MUST begin with menu number one (1). From menu number one, callers
may be routed to any of the other 98 sub-menus available for this Voice Menu.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

112

Optional Applications

7. There are only two actions associated with the Fax on Demand feature. These actions are explained
below.
Send Predefined FAX
This option sends a FAX document that has been predefined in the voice menu setup. This option is
useful to provide a list of all FAX documents available on the Perfect Voice Office Pro system for
Users to select from.
Additional
Information: Enter a Fax document number (four digits).

Enter a menu number in the box labeled "Next Menu".
Send Requested Fax (Available with Fax On Demand Module):
When you use this option, the Perfect Voice Office Pro system prompts the caller for the document
number of the FAX document they wish to receive. The Perfect Voice Office Pro system also
prompts the caller for their FAX machine number including area code.
Additional information: Enter a menu number in the box labeled "Next Menu".

8. For the purpose of our demonstration, we will offer our callers the option to receive a list of available
documents and the option to select a specific FAX document to be sent.

Menu # Option
DOC #
Next
Mailbo
Questio
Prompt
1
100
1
Send Predefined
1234
2
2
Send Requested Fax
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Disconnect
0
I&M
#
*
?
D Send to Main
Fax on Demand Menu

Question 100: "To receive a list of available FAX documents, press 1. To request a specific Fax
document, press 2. To disconnect at any time, press 9; otherwise, remain on the
line and you will return to the Main Greeting."
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

113

9. Both Fax options require the caller to enter some information in order for the Fax to be sent. The
"Send Requested Fax" requires a document number to be entered, while the "Send Predefined Fax"
does not. Both of these options, however, require that the caller enter the following information:
· Enter the telephone number where the fax is to be sent.
· Enter the Extension number to be printed on the top line of the fax document so the caller
can identify it when it arrives at his/her fax machine.

Menu # Option
DOC #
Next
Mailbo
Questio
Promp
2
101
1
Send to Menu
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Disconnect
0
#
*
D Send to Main
Fax on Demand Menu

Question 101: "Your fax document will be sent. If you need to request more documents, press 1 to
return to the previous menu. To disconnect, press 9; or stay on the line to return to
the Main Company Greeting"

This example shows a very simple use of the Fax on Demand feature. This idea may be used with all
I&M
other voice menu configurations and options. For more on Voice Menu options, refer to
AudioText/Voice Menu in the Database Configuration section of this manual.
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

114

Optional Applications

Add Fax on Demand Documents to the System
There are two ways to input Fax on Demand documents into the Perfect Voice Office Pro system:
1. The system may receive fax documents sent by another fax machine without shutting down the
Perfect Voice Office Pro system (see "Faxing Documents to Perfect Voice Office Pro").
2. Fax or files can be copied from diskette to the hard drive (see "Copying Documents to Perfect
Voice Office Pro"). Copying documents requires that the Perfect Voice Office Pro system be
shut down.
Each choice is outlined below with advantages and disadvantages to each method.

Faxing documents to Perfect Voice Office Pro
A document may be entered into the Perfect Voice Office Pro system via the fax machine while the
Perfect Voice Office Pro system is on-line and handling other voice processing functions. To do so:
· Place a document into the fax machine.
· Dial the number to access the Perfect Voice Office Pro system.
· Transfer to the extension that is connected to the installed fax coprocessor board and send the
document.

The documents that are faxed into the system are stored in a holding queue until they are saved with
a document number. To save a document with a document number:
· Access the System Administrator Menu {refer to "Accessing the System Administrator Menu").
· When you are in the System Administrator's menu, press nine (9) to "Check faxes". You are
informed of the number of the new fax document that needs to be saved. You are prompted to
enter a document number for each document to save. All documents must be named a four digit
number. They are stored as nnnn.fax in the /FAXOUT directory.

NOTE: When you input more than one document, these documents are stored in the holding queue
in the order that they were sent. When you access the System Administrator's menu to save these
documents, you must save them in the order that you sent them to the Perfect Voice Office Pro.
I&M

Advantages:
A document can be stored on the hard drive without shutting the Perfect Voice Office Pro system
?
down.

Disadvantages:
Each time a document is faxed, the quality diminishes. When a document is faxed into Perfect Voice
Office Pro, the image of the document, not the original, is stored on the hard drive. When the
document is sent again, the caller receives an image of the image of the original. The quality of the
end document may be degraded.

This method is most useful for busy systems that cannot afford to be shut down but need to have
updated documents available any time. If you do choose to use this method, consider using the other
method when you have time to shut down the system and copy the original files to the hard drive.
This ensures that your document quality is as high as possible.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

115

Copying documents to Perfect Voice Office Pro
In order to copy a document file to the Perfect Voice Office Pro system, the document must be saved
in the proper format. Fax documents MUST be in one of the three (3) forms: ASCII, *.PCX, and
*.DCX. Fax documents copied to the Perfect Voice Office Pro system must be saved as nnnn.FAX
files. The "nnnn" may be any four digit number from 1000 to 9999.
To copy a fax document to the Perfect Voice Office Pro system:
· Shut Down the Perfect Voice Office Pro System (refer to "Shutting Down the System" in the
Database Configuration section of this manual).
· Copy the ****.FAX documents to the directory C:\FAXOUT.
· When all files are copied to the hard drive, restart Perfect Voice Office Pro.

Advantages:
By using original files of documents, the quality of the fax documents received by callers is better.

Disadvantages:
The Perfect Voice Office Pro system MUST be shut down to copy files to the hard drive. While
Perfect Voice Office Pro is turned off, callers cannot access Perfect Voice Office Pro.
For companies whose Perfect Voice Office Pro system is too busy to be turned off, refer to faxing
documents to Perfect Voice Office Pro on the previous page.
I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

116

Optional Applications

Section

9
9 - Fax Mail
Fax Mail gives Users the ability to receive and store fax messages in a voice mailbox, with the
message-handling capabilities of a voice message. Fax messages may be replied to, forwarded to
other Users of the system (with or without voice comments), saved or deleted. If the Desktop
interface is used, fax messages may be archived.
Fax Mail offers several benefits for Users:
Speedy, accurate delivery. Faxes are sent directly to the voice mailbox, not a fax machine
tray. There is no chance for missed pages, etc.
Privacy. Fax messages cannot be accessed by anyone but the recipient; they are just as
private as voice mail messages.
Flexibility. Fax mail may be forwarded to other Users of the voice mail system. Users may
even attach a voice prefix to explain the content of the fax before it is reviewed. If a "hard
copy" of a fax is desired, it may be printed, if necessary, on a network printer. If the User is
away from the office, he or she may redirect the fax message to a local fax machine.
Users may receive the faxes from the telephone or with the Desktop interface. If using the telephone,
incoming faxes are handled much like voice messages, the message waiting lamp lights for a new fax
message, etc. When the User plays a fax message, the system announces "This message is a fax"
and plays a special set of instructions. The User may choose to send a fax to the default fax machine
or specify another fax machine. Faxes may also be forwarded to the User's e-mail address.

To set up Perfect Voice Office Pro for Fax Mail:
1. Designate a Single-Digit Option for Fax, and/or
2. Create a V-Menu for each mailbox that will use fax mail.

NOTE: It is a good idea to use these two methods in conjunction with one another.

I&M
Designate a Single-Digit Option for Fax
First a single digit option must be specified for fax. This allows a caller to send a fax to a mailbox
?
from a fax machine by dialing the single digit option + the mailbox number. To designate a single
digit option:
· From the Main Menu, select Company
· Select the Single Digit Options tab
· Type FAX in the desired option

Example:
In this example, single digit option
number 7 is set up for fax. To send a
fax, the caller would call the system
from a fax machine and press u .
The caller would then enter the
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

117

mailbox number of the person he or she wished to send the fax to. At the sound of the fax tone, he or
she would press the start button on the fax machine.
Create a V-Menu for Each Mailbox That Will Use Fax Mail
To enable Fax Mail on a per-mailbox basis, a V-menu must be created for each mailbox.
· Select V-Menus from the Main Menu.
· Create a V-Menu for the appropriate mailbox. HINT: You may want to name the V-Menu the
extension number + "FAX". For example, for mailbox 270, name the V-Menu 270FAX.
· Specify Send to Menu as the action for one of the options and enter the number of the sub menu
in the Next Number field. HINT: If you have designated a single-digit option from the main
greeting for fax, it is a good idea to use the same option number.
· Create the submenu specified in the action above. For the Sub Menu Prompt, select Salutation
and enter the appropriate prompt number that plays "At the sound of the fax tone, press start on
your fax machine."
IMPORTANT: The "At the sound of the fax tone, press start on your fax machine" prompt is a
standard system prompt (MESS640.VOX) located in the WINVM directory. However, you
need to copy this prompt to the SALUTE directory to use it in the V-Menu.
· If you wish to override the default fax number, enter the fax number in the Default Fax Number
on the "Other Options" tab of the User's mailbox.
· If this User is set up for Unified Messaging via E-Mail, you may also want to do further editing
on the "Other Options" tab.

Example:
In this example, the 270FAX V-Menu is being
created for fax mail. Send to Menu is the
action specified for option number 7. The Next
Menu field is set to 2. This means that when
the caller presses 7 from the User's mailbox
greeting, he or she will be sent to sub menu 2 of
this voice menu.

I&M

?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

118

Optional Applications

Create Sub Menu Number 2 for the 270FAX
voice menu. (The MESS640.VOX file has
been copied to the SALUTE directory as
prompt 700.) To play this prompt for callers,
"Salutation" is selected from the drop-down
list for the Sub Menu Prompt and 700 is
entered for the prompt number. The caller hears
"At the sound of the fax tone, press start on your
fax machine".

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

119

Section

10
10 - Generating Reports Using Perfect
Reporter
Click the Reports button from the Main Menu to access Perfect Reporter. The following reports may
be generated using the Perfect Reporter program:
· Call Details Summary
· Calls Per Hour
· Mailbox Usage
· Mailbox Information
· System Parameters
· Classes of Service

When you start Perfect Reporter, the login screen appears.

Enter the User Mailbox and Password and click OK. NOTE: To access reports, you must use the
System Administrator mailbox and password. The screen below appears.

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

120

Optional Applications

You may preview (display on the screen), print, or export any report.

Calls Details Summary
When you select the Call Details Summary report, you may specify date range of the report by
clicking Today, This Week, This Month or entering a From Date and To Date. You may preview,
print, or export this report. The below screen is the "Preview" report. Note that you still have the
option to print or export the report.
I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

121

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

122

Optional Applications

Calls Per Hour
The Calls Per Hour report graphically displays the number of calls received per hour. You may
specify the date range of the report. You may preview, print, or export this report. The below screen
is the "Preview" report. Selecting Text displays a listing of times and number of calls per hour
located at the left of the screen.
Mailbox Usage
This report lists mailbox activity including number of blind transfers, hang-ups during mailbox
greeting, messages deleted in mailbox, and times the mailbox was entered and exited. You may
specify the date range and mailbox range.
I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

123

Mailbox Information
The Mailbox Information report displays general mailbox information such as extension, first and
last name, company name, department, feature group (Class of Service), etc. You may specify the
date range and mailbox range.

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

124

Optional Applications

System Parameters
This report lists values assigned to system parameters.

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

125

Classes of Service
This report lists the settings for each Class of Service.

I&M

?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

126

Optional Applications

Section

11

11 - Property Management Systems
(PMS)
Integrated with the hotel's property management system, Perfect Voice Office Pro's Hospitality
module delivers superior and unique voice mail services to hotel guests, automating the hotel
messaging system with the front desk. Perfect Voice Office Pro hospitality brings personalized
messaging into every room. When a check-in function is performed on an extension, the mailbox is
automatically logged in and the tutorial is activated. The first time the guest calls into their mailbox
they will be greeted with a welcoming tutorial When a check-out function is performed, the mailbox
logs out and automatically re-routes messages that have not been deleted to another mailbox when
they can still be retrieved. Callers can leave detailed, private messages to the hotel guests they call.
When the guest listens to their messages, the messages automatically play, and the guest can save or
delete the messages. This option may be changed so that a default action, either save or delete can
be applied after the message has been listened to. When guests access their mailboxes, they have
options to save, delete or review their messages and listen to the time and date the message was
received. Guests can be checked in based on their language preference and listen to the voice mail
commands and options in their language of choice. Housekeepers can call in a room and leave the
room status. Also LAP (Local Area Paging) can page house keeping through the hotel over a
wireless transmitter. This eliminates any overhead paging, and staff can be found and delivered a
message at any time. Perfect Voice Office with PMS offers automated wake-up calls with snooze
capabilities. Perfect Voice Office Pro can maintain mail for checked-out guest or priority customers
or provide personalized fax messaging for preferred hotel guests.

Speech recognition for routing calls is also valuable in the hospitality setting. Callers only have to
speak the guest's first or last name at the auto attendant to be transferred to the room. This reduces
the number of calls that previously had to go through the front desk personnel.

The hospitality software packages currently supported are: Fidelio, Landmark, Capa, MSI, MCORP,
Alcatel, Unitel, Northwind Maestro, Fidelio SSM, and Centrigram.
I&M

Features
?
The additional features that PMS offers to the End User are:
· When a check-in function is performed on an extension, the mailbox is automatically logged in
and the tutorial is activated. The first time the user calls into his/her mailbox he/she will be
greeted with a welcoming tutorial.
· When a check-out function is performed the mailbox logs itself out and automatically reroutes
messages that have not been deleted to another mailbox where they can still be retrieved.
· When users pick up messages, the messages automatically play, and users can only save or
delete the messages. This option can be changed so that a default action, either Save or Delete,
can be automatically performed once a message is listened to.
When users access their mailboxes, they only have options to save, delete or review messages,
and listen to the time and date the message was received.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

127

To set up PMS Integration, follow these steps:
Step 1: Connect the Voice Mail and the PMS software.
Step 2: Program the Voice Mail system.
Step 3: Create mailboxes and assign feature groups.
Step 4: Record prompts, if applicable.

Step 1: Verify the Connections
The Hospitality Server connects to the Voice Mail system through the PBX via a serial link through
the serial port. The type of integration between the Voice Mail and the PBX depends upon the PBX.
In this example the telephone system sends inband digits.

Voice Mail System
I&M

?
Step 2: Program the Voice Mail
In order to set up PMS on the Perfect Voice Office Pro system, ensure that the Voice Mail system is
shut down, then:
1. Run the Configuration Wizard by selecting Start --Programs--Perfect Voice Office Pro--
Configuration Wizard from the main Windows screen.
2. Then, bypass the Wizard by selecting Manual Configuration at the first screen. A screen
similar to the one below appears.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

128

Optional Applications

6. In the left-hand column, select Property Management System. The current settings will be
listed on the right hand side of the screen.
7. To edit these settings, click the Modify button. A screen similar to the one below will
appear. Refer to the section below, Settings for Your PMS Package, for the correct values
to enter. After making the desired changes, click OK to return to the Main Screen.

I&M

PMS Installed
?
Indicates whether or not a Property Management System is installed.

PMS Type
Indicates the type of serial port protocol to use.

Port Settings
Indicates the Com port, baud rate, parity, data bits and stop bits settings to configure PMS for.

PMS Mode
Indicates the Mode to use for PMS. The choices are File or Serial (default).

PMS Shared Directory
Works with File Mode to indicate the Shared Directory to use.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

129

PMS Checkout Messages Destination
Works in hotel situations. Upon checkout, messages that are still present in the mailbox are moved to a
phantom mailbox that starts with the above value and ends with the mailbox number. For example, if
this value was set to 7, a customer who checks out of room 215 can still retrieve messages from 7215
until the next checkout action is performed.

Settings for Your PMS Package
The settings for the Hospitality packages currently supported are almost identical. The settings that
will remain the same for all packages include:

[PMS Settings]
PMS Installed=Yes
PMS Mode=Serial

Settings that depend upon the connection type and may differ between systems are:

Com Port Used with PMS=1 (may be any available Com Port Number)
PMS Com Port Settings=9600,N,8,1 (may be 1200,E,7,1)
PMS Checkout Messages Destination=7 (this value will change depending upon
customer preference)

For Landmark, Capa, and Fidelio, the PMS Type is set to Alcatel, but for MSI the Type is AVT. See
below.

MSI:
PMS Type=AVT

All others:
PMS Type=Alcatel

Additional settings that have been added recently that are not in the Wizard but can be added directly
to the Perfect.INI for troubleshooting purposes are:

Auto Action on Message=Save
I&M
This statement tells the voice mail to automatically perform a specified action after each message is
listened to. The choices are Save, Delete, None.
?

Log PMS Activity =Yes
This statement indicates whether or not to activate a log file that shows all of the packet information
is written to for every PMS function that is performed.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

130

Optional Applications

Step 3: Create Mailboxes and Assign Classes of Service
Finally, the last step is to set up the mailboxes and associate them to Classes of Service. Set up three
Classes of Service as follows:
1. The first Class of Service will be associated with the mailboxes that apply to each hotel room.
Ensure that these mailboxes have Message Light capability Enabled and Guest Mailbox checked.
All other options are at the discretion of the Installer and Manager.
2. The second Class of Service will be associated with the mailboxes that store the messages that
are not deleted when the User checks out of the hotel. These mailboxes will start with the digit
specified in the Configuration Wizard as PMS Checkout Messages Destination, and end with the
mailbox number. For example, if the PMS Checkout Messages Destination value is a 7, then
messages from mailbox 100 will be moved to mailbox 7100 automatically. Therefore, if you
have three digit mailboxes assigned to each room, you will also have four-digit phantom
mailboxes assigned to each room. Create the mailboxes accordingly and put them in this Class
of Service.
This Class of Service should only have Guest Mailbox and Do Not Disturb and Login activated
(both of which must be set in the individual mailboxes). Ensure that there is NO Message Light
capability activated in the Class of Service.

3. The last Class of Service will be associated with mailboxes that the administration staff uses.
These will be in a different group, as they probably will not require Guest Mailboxes. Set up this
Class of Service as desired.

Other Classes of Service may be created as desired for further reorganization, but it is strongly
recommended that at least three Classes of Service be used to avoid confusion.

Step 4: Record Prompts
The prompts that are available specifically for the PMS Integration are C:\WINVM\MESS820.VOX
and C:\WINVM\MESS105.VOX. If it is necessary to manually record either of these system
prompts, refer to "Performing Handset Functions with the Telephone Keypad" in the Database
Configuration section to record these prompts through the telephone.

I&M
Prompt 820 is a welcome greeting that says, as a default:
"Welcome to your voice mail. Your mailbox is where your messages will be stored. It is simple
?
to use. If you have any questions about using your mailbox, please contact the front desk."

Prompt 105 is the functional greeting that users hear after each message plays. It says, as a default:
"To save your message press 1; delete, press 2; review, press 3. For time and date, press 6."

NOTE: PMS must be enabled on the sentinel key.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

131

Section

12
12 - Speech Recognition
The speech platform for Perfect Voice Office Pro consists of two elements, Automatic Speech
Recognition (ASR) and Text to Speech (TTS). ASR uses advanced speech recognition technology
provided by Nuance®. An industry leader in speech recognition, Nuance deploys the largest number
of speech-enabled systems around the world. Nuance 8.0 is the market's leading speech recognition
software designed to enable highly accurate, scalable and easy-to-deploy voice solutions ranging
from automated directory assistance, product ordering, and customer care to industry-specific
applications including airline reservations, brokerage and many more. With Perfect Voice Office
Pro's built-in intelligent call router combined with speech recognition, callers are routed quickly and
efficiently to the appropriate destination, improving time efficiency and increasing overall customer
satisfaction. TTS utilizes the RealSpeak (Scansoft) speech engine to convert text to high-quality
speech. When coupled with MSS, you can listen to your emails over the telephone.

Speech-Enabled Automated Attendant and Directory for External Callers
Callers may speak a User's name and automatically be transferred without dialing an extension. If
the caller speaks only a first or last name (for example, "Joe") or a name that has more than one
match, Perfect Voice Office Pro lists all possible matches. With Perfect Voice Office Pro's built-in
intelligent call router combined with speech recognition, callers are routed quickly and efficiently to
the appropriate destination, improving time efficiency and increasing overall customer satisfaction.

Speech-Enabled Company Directory for Internal Users
Perfect Voice Office Pro provides internal call routing to Users calling inside your organization.
You simply press a button on your telephone, speak the name and you are routed directly to the
correct extension. This is beneficial in large organizations where trying to remember a user's
extension is next to impossible! No more published directories, no need to change and update lists
with new and deleted users, staff can simply say the name and Perfect Voice Office Pro finds the
I&M
person using the speech engine.

?
Multilingual Support
Perfect Voice Office Pro supports up to nine different languages concurrently, providing each
customer a tailored experience. When RealSpeak is used for text-to-speech, the following languages
are supported: English (American and British), French, German, Italian, Chinese (Mandarin),
Cantonese, Korean, Japanese, Portuguese (Portugal and Brazil), Dutch (Netherlands and Belgium),
Norwegian, Spanish (Castilian and Mexican), and Swedish.

RealSpeak Automatically Creates Mailbox Name Recordings
The RealSpeak (Scansoft) speech engine uses text-to-speech to convert names (entered in the first
and last name fields of the mailbox) to speech files. It will create speech files for voice menus and

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

132

Optional Applications

department mailboxes, as well. These files may be used to create the company directory. RealSpeak,
coupled with MSS, also enables you to hear the text of your email messages over the telephone.
Listen to Email Messages Over the Telephone
Perfect Voice Office Pro, with RealSpeak and MSS, also provides text-to-speech capability. Two
speech ports come standard with MSS. When you access your mailbox over the telephone and listen
to messages, you hear not only your voice messages, but also the text of your email messages in high
quality, crisp, clear audio. Perfect Voice Office Pro plays "Email Message" and reads the text of
your email message and tells you if the email includes an attachment.
Transfer to Extension while in Mailbox Voice Menu
With TTS, if you have a Voice Menu set up in a mailbox that allows extension dialing, you may
transfer to another User on the system by speaking his or her name (or the mailbox name, such as
"Sales") while in that voice menu.

Installing ASR Services
The Nuance Speech Services allows the system to use ASR services. These services allow the
automated attendant on the server to recongize names spoken by the caller.

To install the Nuance Speech Services:
Insert the ASR CD into the CD-ROM drive.
The "Nuance Speech Services License Agreement" appears. Click Yes to accept the License
Agreement.
The "Customer Information" dialog appears.
o In the User Name field, enter the name of the user.
o In the Company field, enter the name fo the company.
o Click Next.
The "Choose Destination Location" dialog appears. Click Next to accpet the default
directory, or click Browse to change the installation directory.
The "Setup Type" dialog appears. Select Typical, then click Next.
I&M
The "Select Program Folder" dialog appears. Click Next.
The installation process begins. When the installation process has finished, the "Setup
?
Complete" dialog appears. Select the Install Watcher as Windows 2000 Service checkbox
and click Finish.
The "Reboot" dialog appears. Click Finish to reboot the PC.
The system prompts you to reboot the computer. Click Yes to reboot the system.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

133

Configuring ASR (Automatic Speech Recognition)
ASR contacts are created from the first and last name fields on the Mailbox screen. After all the
mailboxes have been created, the ASR Directory must be built and the ASR Context must be created.
Each time a new mailbox is added, these steps should be performed to update the ASR directory.
Creating Contacts in ASR
Click Start--Programs--PVO Pro--PVO Pro
Click Start PVO Pro. The Main Menu appears.
Click the Mailbox button.
In the Last Name field, enter the last name for the mailbox user.
In the First Name field, enter the first name for the mailbox user.
Click Save.

Building the ASR Directory
From the Main Menu, select System--Utilities--Build ASR Directory

Creating ASR Context
From the Main Menu, select System--Utilities--Create ASR Context. A message appears
stating "Content will be created shortly."
Click OK.

I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

134

Optional Applications

Section

13
13 - Caller ID Setup
When Caller ID is sent through the telephone system, the Perfect Voice Office Pro server picks it up
and uses TCP/IP to send the call to the appropriate workstation. If the telephone number is identified
in the Call Routing Table, the caller bypasses the Auto Attendant and is transferred directly to the
appropriate extension.
There are three ways to receive Caller ID:
· Rochelle box
· SMDI
· Inband
Each of these options is described below.

Caller ID Through a Rochelle Box
Features:
· Up to six lines
· Good application for small companies
· Box must be attached to a serial port
· Perfect Voice Office Pro requires one COM port to support Caller ID, so only one Rochelle box
is permitted at this time. The default COM Port is COM 2.

Setup:

1. From the main Windows screen, select Start--Programs--Perfect Voice Office Pro--
Configuration Wizard, then select Manual Configuration.
I&M
2. Select Caller ID Settings and ensure that the following values are set:
Caller ID Installed=Yes
Number of lines used for Caller ID=6
?
Type of Caller ID=Rochelle
Com Port used for Caller ID=2
Pad Short Caller ID Numbers with=905 (This will change depending on your location)
Length of Caller ID=10
Caller ID Mode=Line

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

135

Caller ID Through SMDI (Simplified Message Desk Interface)
Features:
· Ideal for larger companies
· Used on telephone systems that support Caller ID and SMDI
· Examples: Toshiba, Northern Telecom, Fujitsu, Siemens

Setup:
From the main Windows screen, select Start--Programs-- Perfect Voice Office Pro-- Configuration
Wizard, then select Manual Configuration.
Select Caller ID Settings and ensure that the following values are set:
Caller ID Installed=Yes
Number of lines used for Caller ID=6
Type of Caller ID=SMDI
Com Port used for Caller ID=2
Pad Short Caller ID Numbers with=905 (This will change depending on your location)
Length of Caller ID=10
Caller ID Mode=Line

Then select SMDI Settings and ensure the following values are set:
Com Port=2
Com Port Settings=1200,E,7,1
Number of Digits in SMDI=7

Caller ID Through Inband
I&M
Features:
· Must be supported by the telephone switch
?
· Calls must be routed through the Auto Attendant to receive pop-ups
Setup:
From the main Windows screen, select Start--Programs-- Perfect Voice Office Pro--Configuration
Wizard, then select Manual Configuration.
Select Caller ID Settings and ensure that the following values are set:
Caller ID Installed=Yes
Type of Caller ID=Inband
Com Port used for Caller ID=No
Pad Short Caller ID Numbers with=905 (This will change depending on your location)
Length of Caller ID=10

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

136

Optional Applications

Section

14
14 - CTI Link
CTI Link consists of specially designed hardware and software that configures the telephone switch
(currently only the Iwatsu ADIX supports it) and the voice mail server to allow calls processing from
a network PC. Some of the supported features include Automatic Number Identification (ANI),
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) and Caller Identification Delivery (CID).

Minimum Requirements
Minimum requirements for the ADIX system components are: IX-CPU/HW Card, Version 6.10 or
above Software version and HCIF card with CTI firmware package. In order for Perfect Voice Office
Pro to operate the CTI Link, the desktop interface must be installed on each client computer and
working properly.
IX-CTI Link
IX-CTILINK was developed in accordance with the Computer Supported Telecommunications
Application (CSTA) interface.

The figure below illustrates how IX-CTILINK works with the Voice Mail server.

I&M
All client PCs have the Desktop Interface installed and a PIM and/or database application loaded. Th
Interface software receives information from the voice mail server. Based on programming, the selec
?
initiate a screen pop and execute the Run command for the PIM/database.
VOICE MAIL SERVER

SW3 Data Speed Setting For The CTI Port

Position
9600
4800
4
Off

3
Off

2
Off

1*
Off

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

137

SW4 Communication Parameters For Connection To CTI Port

Position
Off
On
8
Buffer Memory
Buffer Memory Initialize
Protected
7
Not Used (Always Off)
Not Used (Always Off)
6
Normal Mode
Test Mode
5
Not Used (Always Off)
Not Used (Always Off)
4
DTR Ignored
DTR Monitored
3
Not Used (Always Off)
Not Used (Always Off)
2
Not Used (Always Off)
Not Used (Always Off)
1
8 Data Bits
7 Data Bits

Connections:
1. Connect
Perfect Voice Office Pro to Connector CN6 PC.
2. Connect the RPC Computer to CN8 as illustrated below.

Enabling CTI Link on the Voice Mail Server
I&M
To enable CTI link on the voice mail server, set up or verify the following:
1. The HCIF card is properly installed and programmed on the phone switch. The red light
indicator must be enabled on the HCIF card.
?
2. Attach RS232 cables from HCIF card to the back of Voice Mail Server (COM1)
3. Check Current Status screen of Voice Mail server. Make sure CTI initialize and no Errors
4. Edit PERFECT.INI file in the C:\Windows directory and verify the following settings:
[CTI Settings]
CTI Installed=Yes
Com Port Used with CTI=1
CTI Debug Mode=Yes
CTI Debug File=Yes
CTI Mode=Iwatsu
Paging Zone From=80
Paging Zone To=89

5. After editing PERFECT.INI, save the changes and reboot the voice mail server.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

138

Optional Applications

6. Upon startup of Perfect Voice Office Pro, a PBX screen appears. This screen will have
information that is being sent by the telephone system.
7. Since the CTI Link will only work with Desktop Interface, all testing of features will be
performed on a client computer with the Desktop Interface installed and working properly.
8. After performing all testing and verifying that CTI Link is functioning, edit PERFECT.INI file
and reset CTI Debug Mode=No and CTI Debug File=No, save changes and exit, then reboot the
system.

NOTE: CTI Debug Mode and CTI Debug File are tools that are used to accumulate information. If
they remain activated at all times, the size of the file would get extremely large and could cause
problems elsewhere in the system. Therefore, it is recommended that these options be deactivated
immediately after use.

NOTE: The Paging Zone must be specified. If it is not specified, the telephone system will page all
telephone handsets through the Desktop Interface.

I&M

?

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Optional Applications

139

Section

15
15 - Pulse Detection
Pulse Detection is a feature that tells the Voice Mail system to listen for pulse signals in addition to
touch tones in order to accommodate Pulse telephone systems.

To set up Perfect Voice Office Pro with Pulse Detection, follow these steps:
STEP 1: Ensure that the requirements are met.
STEP 2: Obtain an activation code for the voice board.
STEP 3: Run the Configuration Wizard.
STEP 4: Activate Grunt Detection.

Step 1: Ensure that Requirements are Met
The requirements that are necessary to use Pulse Detection are:
· Perfect Voice Office Pro software version 3.01.09 or higher.
· Intel D41H card(s).

Step 2: Obtain an Activation Code for the Voice Board
In order to use Pulse Detection, it is necessary to enable to voice card for it. To do this, Intel
Corporation must generate an activation code. The activation of the board can be handled a couple
of different ways, depending upon how the card was purchased.

If the D41H card and the Pulse Detection option are both purchased from Teleco at the same time,
then the activation can be completed before the customer receives the board.

1. If the D41H card is already purchased from Teleco and the customer later decides to activate
I&M
Pulse Detection, then the order is placed through Teleco (voice card serial number must also be
provided). Teleco then, in turn, request the activation code from Intel Corporation. Expect a 24-
hour turn-around under these conditions.
?
2. If the D41H card was not purchased from Teleco, then it is the responsibility of the dealer to
contact Intel Corporation and request an activation code for the voice card. Please note that the
feature must still be purchased from Teleco.
3. The utility that is used to activate the voice card is called ISA-DPD Enablement Utility. It is
provided separate from the standard software that is shipped. When it is run (DPDE.EXE), it
simply prompt the User for the activation code and automatically makes the required changes.

NOTE: The sentinel must be programmed for Pulse Detection before it can be made active.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

140

Optional Applications

Step 3: Run the Configuration Wizard
In order to tell the Voice Mail to activate Pulse Detection, follow these steps:
1. Choose Start--Programs--Perfect Voice Office Pro--Configuration Wizard, then select Manual
Configuration.
2. Select Voice Board Settings and click Modify.
3. Select Voice Board and verify that Pulse Detection is set to Yes.
4. Click OK, then click continue. Close any windows that might open, then click Finish to exit
from the Wizard.

Step 4: Activate Grunt Detection
The final step is to activate Grunt Detection. To do this:
1. Open the Parameters screen.
2. Click on the Disconnect tab.
3. Set Parameter 178 (Grunt Detection) to 1.
4. Set Parameter 179 (Grunt Threshold) to 500.

NOTE: It is strongly recommended by both Teleco and Intel Corporation that the digit 1 be avoided
as much as possible in the creation of mailboxes. The reason for this is that the pulse generated by
this digit is not very strong, and therefore there is a possibility that the digit will not be understood.

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

A
ppendix

I&M
?

I&M
?

I&M
?

Appendix
1

A
Appendix A: Perfect Voice Office Pro
Configuration
This section outlines the directory structure of Perfect Voice Office Pro and also shows the contents of these
files.

Perfect Voice Office Pro Program Group
Upon installation, a Windows program group is created:
File Reorganization Utility: This compacts the databases and deletes any messages marked for
deletion.
SessionQ: This option runs Session Q, the Session handler for Desktop clients on a TCP/IP network.
Telephone Integration Utility: This is a Wizard for integrating the voice mail system with a specific
telephone system.
Perfect Voice Office Pro: This starts the Perfect Voice Office Pro software.
Perfect Voice Office Pro Help: This option provides help when installing and configuring the
Perfect Voice Office Pro software.
PVO Configuration Wizard: This option runs the Wizard that allows you to configure the Voice
Mail. Choose Manual Configuration for any minor changes, and Wizard if this is a new install.
Update Sentinel: This option runs the Update Sentinel program, which calls a license file that is sent
to you if new options are purchased.

Starting Perfect Voice Office Pro
To start Perfect Voice Office Pro from the Windows Desktop, follow these steps:
· Click on the Start Button.
· Select Programs from the menu.
· Select the Perfect Voice Office Pro Folder.
I&M
· Click on Perfect Voice Office Pro.

?
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

2

Appendix

Directory Structure of Perfect Voice Office Pro
The installation procedure creates the directories shown here. Each directory contains specific types of files.

WINVM
All of Perfect Voice Office Pro system files and the system prompts
(MESS.VOX) are stored in this directory.

GRT
All mailbox greetings are stored here as the following: .GR1 (Personal), .GR2
(Busy), .GR3 (Gone Home), .NAM (Name Recording).

MSGS
All messages are stored as .MSG.

SALUTE
All of the Greetings that are recorded for Companies, Holidays, and Voice Menu
Prompts are stored in this directory. These voice files are stored as SAL.VOX.

VTR
All Voice Menus that are created are stored as files in this directory. These files are
stored as .VTR and .VTN (version 1.3 and above).

FAXOUT
When the FAX on Demand module is added to the Perfect Voice Office Pro system,
this directory is used to store all of the fax documents. These files are stored as
.FAX.

FAX
This directory contains all the system files for fax on demand.
I&M

FAX\
QUEUE\
All pending activities are stored in this directory

?
WINVM\FRENCH\ This directory is created according to the language modules installed. For example
the French language disks creates the FRENCH directory, Spanish language disks
create SPANISH.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
3

B
Appendix B: Configuration Wizard
The Configuration Wizard may be used to configure the Perfect Voice Office Pro parameters and
environmental controls. You may run the Configuration Wizard during installation or at any other time by
selecting Start-Programs-Pvopro-PVO Configuration Wizard.

You may run the Wizard, which guides you through all the
steps or you may select Manual Configuration to modify
one or more sections.

· Highlight an item to view its settings. To modify a section, you may highlight it and click the Modify
button or double-click your selection. To edit every section, click the Wizard button. (If this is a first time
install, a screen appears before this screen that allows you to choose to go through the entire wizard or
manual configuration. If you select Wizard, the program takes you through each section. Manual
Configuration allows you to select the particular section you wish to modify.)

I&M
To ed
it an individual
option, select it on
th

e left side of the
?

screen.
The cu
rrent settings
appear on the right
side of t he screen. To
ed
it, click the
M

odify button.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

4

Appendix

Configuration Utility Dealer Information
The Dealer Information screen displays the current
Dealer Information, including Dealer Name,
Contact Name, and the Dealer's Telephone Number
· Dealer Name: Enter the name of the dealer that
installed the Voice Mail System.
· Contact Name: Enter the specific person at the
Dealer that end users should call for support.
· Phone: Enter the telephone number that end
users should call when they have questions.

Configuration Utility PC Settings

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
5

Configuration Utility Site
Information
The Site Information screen displays the current
Site Information, including modem number, fax
number, and e-mail address.
· Name: Enter the Company Name where the
Voice Mail system is being installed.
· Remote Maintenance Phone Number: Enter
the telephone number of the modem that is
installed in the PC.
· Fax Number: Enter the Fax Number of the
site.
· E-Mail address: Enter the e-mail address of
the site.

I&M
?
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

6

Appendix

Configuration Utility Network Settings
The Network Settings screen displays the current Network type
that the system is being installed upon. Select the correct
network type, then click OK.

NOTE: If you are uncertain as to the network type being used,
consult with the Network Administrator before continuing.

Configuration Utility Voice Board Settings
The Voice Board Settings screen displays the current Voice Board Settings, including:
Hardware Settings
Type of Voice Board
Reserved Codes
Tone Settings
Confirmation Inband Codes (Mercator or Matra systems)
Message Light Options
Centrex Options
Voice Mail Extensions
I&M

NOTE: If Rhetorex is chosen as the Voice Board, another button appears that says Configuration Settings.
It displays the current System Configuration in the C:\WINVM\CONFIGUR.EXE program.
?

Voice Board Hardware Settings
· Interrupt Level: Indicates the interrupt level at which the voice board is installed.
· Number of Boards: Indicates the number of voice boards installed on the PC.
· Number of Ports: Indicates the number of ports in the voice mail system.
· Base Memory Address: Indicates the starting address at which the voice board is loaded in memory.

Voice Board Voice Board Options
· VoxFormat: Indicates the format in which the voice files are saved.
· Telephone System: Indicates standard telephone system.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
7

· Verify Inband Length: Specifies whether or not to verify the length of inband signal each time it is
received.
· Pulse Detection: Specifies whether or not to detect pulse (rotary-dial) digits.

Voice Board Reserved Codes
· Inband Reserved Codes: These codes indicate the action(s) assigned to the Reserved Codes in Inband
Parameters. These parameters tell the voice mail system how to perform based on the inband code that is
received. If required, select the desired action from the drop-down list box.
The available options are:
Login: Performs auto-station login.
NoAnswer: Sends caller to the mailbox personal greeting.
Busy: Sends the caller to the mailbox busy greeting.
CoCall: Looks for the incoming CO Line Number
Invalid: Tells system to ignore the inband and disconnect
Record: Goes to the specified mailbox and starts recording

Voice Board Global Tone Settings
· Global Tone Settings: This is an Intel feature that indicates the template to use for C.O. Fast Busy tones.
If any of these templates are matched, the Intel board drops the call.

Voice Board Confirmation
These fields are specific to the Mercator or Matra telephone systems.
Confirm Inband Signal: Indiactes whether or not to confirm the inband signals.
Code for Confirm Busy/No-Answer/Login/CoCall: These indicate the inband codes to echo back to the
telephone system.

Voice Board Message Lights
· Log Message Lights: Indicates whether or not to log the message light functions that the voice mail
system performs to the system status screen. This option applies only to systems using SMDI or MCI.
· Message Lights On Hook: Indicates whether or not to go off hook to send the message light codes to the
I&M
telephone system.
· Port Settings: Indicates the baud rate, parity, databits, and stopbits. This option applies only to systems
using SMDI or MCI.
?
· Refresh Ports Interval: Indicates the number of minutes that a port can remain offhook before being
forced back onhook. The port is refreshed by going off hook, then back onhook.

Voice Board Centrex Options
Centrex Recall Code: Indicates the code to dial to recall a Centrex transferred call.
Centrex Transfer Code: Code to dial from an analog port to perform a flashhook and access an outside
line; system knows to dial this code if extension field contains a telephone number and a capital "X" at the
end of the string.

Voice Board Voice Mail Extensions
· Enter the extensions connected to the voice mail ports.
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

8

Appendix

Configuration Utility PBX Integration
The PBX Integration section displays the current PBX Integration setup. It lists the Make, Model, and Version
of telephone system. To edit this information, click the Modify button. This starts the Integrate Telephone
System Wizard.

Integrate Telephone System Wizard
If you click the Modify button, the Integrate Telephone
System Wizard is launched. The Integrate Telephone
System Wizard is a program that configures Perfect
Voice Office Pro with integration parameters for some of
I&M
the more commonly installed telephone systems. When
it runs, you will be provided with a menu of telephone
systems to choose from. Select the Make (Manufacturer)
?
and Model of the telephone system and click OK.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
9

A screen appears indicating your selection. Click Next
to continue.

The Integrate Telephone System Wizard automatically
updates Perfect Voice Office Pro with the selected
telephone system parameters. Click OK.

I&M
?
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

10

Appendix

Configuration Utility SMDI/MCI Settings
The SMDI/MCI Settings section displays the current
SMDI/MCI Settings, including Type of Integration, Port
Settings and SMDI Packet Information. You may modify the
type of integration being used, the port settings (click
Configure), and/or click Other Settings to indicate the debug
mode to use, if any, packet information, and handshaking
setting.

Integration
Select the desired Integration.
No SMDI or MCI: Indicates inband or no integration.
Calista: Indicates that a Calista board is in the PC and data is
sent via the serial link.
Toshiba/other SMDI: Indicates Toshiba integration with SMDI,
or indicates another form of SMDI.
NEC/other MCI: Indicates NEC integration with MCI, or indicates another form of MCI.
Voice Bridge: Indicates that a Voice Bridge box is being used to link the PC and the PBX
Others: Indicates any special circumstances.

Editing Port Settings
To edit the port settings, click Configure. The
Communication Port Settings screen appears. You may
edit the Com Port, baud rate, data bits, parity, and stop bits.
Click OK when finished.

Other Settings
There are also some other SMDI/MCI settings that may need to be
modified, such as whether or not to turn Debug mode on and
I&M
indicating the packet settings. To modify these settings, click
Other Settings. A screen similar to this appears.
· Debug Mode: Indicates whether or not to activate the debug
?
option. Debug is used for troubleshooting purposes only. The
values are automatically written to a separate SMDI Window
that appears when this option is activated.
· Number of Digits: Indicates the digit length of the SMDI
strings.
· Pad Digits With: Indicates what to use to fill the extra digit
spots in the string.
· Handshaking: When COM Port settings are 9600,N,8,1, the
values for CD, CTS, DSR, RTS, and Handshaking are
0,500,500,1, and 0 respectively.
When COM Port settings are 1200,E,7,1, the values for CD,
CTS, DSR, RTS, and Handshaking are 1000,500,1000,1, and 0 respectively.
These values will be changed from the default only on MCI systems or Fujitsu systems with SMDI.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
11

Configuration Utility Caller ID Settings
The Caller ID Settings screen displays the current
Caller ID Settings, including the type of Caller ID
being used, the length of the Caller ID string, and
the line assignments. This screen only needs to be
modified if Caller ID is being used.
Type of Caller ID: Indicates the method to
receive Caller ID.
Ask for Phone Number when no Caller ID
Indicates whether or not to request the caller to
enter their phone number if Caller ID is not
enabled. The entered value will display in the
Caller ID pop to the desktop.
Pad Short Caller ID Numbers With: If the
Caller ID is not the maximum length, this field
specifies the area code to assume for local
calls.
Length of Caller ID: Indicates the number of
digits to accept for Caller ID.

Configuration Utility Fax
Settings
The Fax Settings screen displays the current fax
settings. To configure the system for fax, see "Fax
Services" in the Optional Applications section of
this manual.
Fax Enabled: Indicates whether or not to
enable the fax board. For Fax Mail or Fax On
Demand, the fax board must be enabled.
Path for Fax Drivers: Indicates the default
I&M
directory where the fax drivers are located.
File and Path for Fax Viewer: Indicates the
system path and filename where the default fax
viewer is located.
?
System CSID: Indicates the System ID. This
value will be used as the header in sent faxes,
so it should reflect the Company Information.
Number of Log Entries to Delete: Indicates
the number of old log entries to delete, starting
from the oldest date.
Number of Fax Ports: Indicates the number of fax ports.
Fax Mail Installed: Indicates whether or not fax mail is installed.
Allow Printing of Faxes: Indicates whether or not users can print received faxes.
Log Fax Activity: Indicates whether or not to log fax activity.

Enter the extensions connected to the fax port(s).

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

12

Appendix

Configuration Utility General Settings
The General Settings screen displays the current settings that are general environment controls, such as System
Path, Log Options, and whether or not to Refresh Message Lights. The settings for each option are displayed
on the right. The available options are Log, Mailbox, Daily Hours, Message, and System.

General Settings Log Options
· Log System Statistics: Indicates whether or not to log system activity. This value must be enabled to use
the Reports module effectively. NOTE: If the Reports module is not being used, this option MUST be
disabled.
·
I&M
Days to Keep Logs For: Indicates the number of days to save the report logs before deleting the files.
· Log Mailbox Activity: Indicates whether or not to log mailbox activity. This setting writes all activity
that occurs within each mailbox to a log file for debugging purposes. This value must be enabled to use the
?
Reports module effectively.
· Delete Log Files: Indicates whether or not to delete the log files.

General Settings Mailbox Options
· Refresh Message Lights: Indicates whether or not to refresh the message lights for the mailboxes
upon Startup.
· Show Password: "Yes" will display the password for each mailbox in the Password field of the
Mailbox screen. "No" will display asterisks.
· Play Owner's Name During Transfer: If you select "Yes", the system plays "Transferring to
<name>" during the transfer of the call. If you select "No", the system plays "Please hold while I
transfer your call".
· Use Mailbox Language as Default: If you select "Yes", when the caller exits the mailbox, he or she
will hear other voice mail prompts in the language specified in the mailbox.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
13

General Settings Daily Hours
· Afternoon Hours Start At: This specifies the time, in military format, that the afternoon greeting
begins to play.
· Evening Hours Start At: This specifies the time, in military format, that the evening begins to play.

General Settings Message Options
· Maximum Call Length: This specifies the maximum length of a call (in minutes) if the User wishes
to define a limit.
· Reindex Message Files: Indicates whether or not to reindex the message file when the
Reorganization utility is performed. This will delete unattached messages.
· Message Lights On Hook: Indicates whether or not to go off hook to send the message light codes to
the telephone system.
· When Transferring, Play "Transferring to" Prompt: If you select "Yes", the system plays
"Transferring To" during a transfer.
· When Sending a Message Ask for Mailbox Number: If you select "First", when sending a message,
the system prompts the User to enter the destination mailbox number before he or she records the
message. "Last" prompts for the destination mailbox after the User records the message.
· When Auto Forwarding, Cancel Forwarding Only When Message is Saved or Deleted: Indicates
whether or not to cancel the auto forwarding if the message has been saved or deleted and the auto
forwarding has not yet occurred.
· Add Number of Messages to Beeper Number: If "Yes", the number of new messages in the
mailbox will be included when outcalling to a beeper. Format is an asterisk, followed by the number
of messages (*5).
· Message Forwarding Allowed: Indicates whether or not message forwarding is permitted (applies
globally to all mailboxes).
· AutoPlay of Messages Enabled: Indicates whether or not to enable a hotkey to automatically play all
new messages continuously with no breaks or prompts. (The hotkey to use is 7.)
· Message Send Interdigit Delay: Indicates how many seconds to wait between entering digits while
leaving a message before the system decides that the caller has finished entering digits.

General Settings System Options
· System Path: Indicates the application path. The directory MUST be WINVM, but the drive letter
I&M
can vary.
· Exclusive Company Directory: Indicates whether or not the sequential directory will be exclusive to
each company in a multiple company configuration.
?
· Default Language: Indicates the language that the system will always default to if no language is
specified.
· Use Port Monitor: Indicates whether or not to act as a watchdog and monitor the ports for abnormal
activity. It is a safety mode to drop the port if abnormal activity continues for more than 30 minutes.
· Loop Current On In Record: Indicates whether or not to look for loop current during recording.
· Record With AGC: Indicates whether or not to activate Automatic Gain Control (AGC) during
recording. This is used for low-volume messages.
· Attach Comment on Reply: Indicates whether or not to attach comments when replying to or
forwarding a message.
· Disable Fax Detection: Indicates whether or not to listen for fax tones and send the fax to the fax
machine when receiving faxes.
· Relate Company To: Synchronizes companies in a multiple company configuration by telling the
voice mail to relate the companies to lines or ports.
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

14

Appendix

Configuration Utility MAPI Information
The MAPI Information screen displays the current MAPI setup. It only needs to be modified if Unified
Messaging is being used.
· Name: Indicates the User Name given
to the voice mail system on the MAPI
server.
· Password: Indicates the password
given to the voice mail system on the
MAPI server.
· Profile: Indicates the User profile given
to the voice mail system on the MAPI
server (usually the same as User Name).
· Mode: Indicates MAPI mode. For the
standard E-Mail player, select
Standard. Select OLE if the Outlook
player is being used with Microsoft
Mail or Microsoft Exchange.
· MAPI Integration: Indicates whether
or not MAPI is installed.

Configuration Utility Reorganization Settings
The Reorganization Settings screen displays the current Reorg settings. It indicates such things as procedures
to perform before or after running the Reorganization Utility, and indicates what, exactly, to reorganize, to
some degree.
· Shutdown Application for Reorg: Indicates
whether or not to shutdown Perfect Voice Office
Pro when running the reorganization utility. This
is not usually necessary, as the voice mail
disables all of the ports before running it anyway.
I&M
· Backup Files Before Reorg: Indicates whether
or not to backup files to the C:\~OLDB~
directory before running the reorganization
?
utility. It is strongly recommended that this value
be set to Yes for backup purposes.
· Reindex Files on Mondays...Saturdays:
Indicates which action to perform on the given
day. Choices are All, None, or All But Reports.
All includes the Reports databases, which takes a
long time. Therefore, it is recommended that this
only be done once a week. If the reporting utility
is not being used, it is strongly recommended to
NEVER reindex the Reports database.
· Batch File to Run at Reorg Time: Indicates whether or not to run a user-defined file before running the
reogranization utlity.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
15

Configuration Utility AMIS Settings
The AMIS Settings screen displays the current
settings for AMIS Configuration. When you
modify values on this screen, the PERFECT.INI file
is updated.
· AMIS Installed: Indicates whether or not the
AMIS Networking option is installed.
· AMIS Initial Delay: Indicates the number of
seconds to ignore the C tone that AMIS sends.

Configuration Utility Local Area Paging
The Local Area Paging (LAP) Settings screen
displays the current settings for Local Area
Paging. Click Configure to modify the Com Port
settings).
I&M
· Integration with LAP: Indicates whether or
not LAP is installed.
· Port Settings: Indicates the COM port, baud
?
rate, parity, databits, and stopbits.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

16

Appendix

Configuration Utility Property Management System
The Property Management System (PMS) screen
lists the settings for the property management
system. It only needs to be modified if PMS
software is being used. If it is, refer to "Property
Management System" in the Optional Applications
section of this manual.
· PMS Installed: Indicates whether or not
Property Management System is installed.
· PMS Type: Specifies the serial port protocol.
· Port Settings: Indicates the Com port, baud
rate, parity, databits, and stopbits settings for
PMS.
· PMS Mode: Indicates the mode to use for
PMS.
· PMS Shared Directory: Works with file mode
to indicate which shared directory to use.
· PMS Checkout Messages Destination: Works
in hotel situations. Upon checkout, messages
that are still present in the mailbox are moved to a phantom mailbox that starts with the value entered in
this field and ends with the mailbox number. For example, if the mailbox number is 250, the phantom
mailbox is 7250.

Configuration Utility Dialup Properties
The Dialup Properties screen defines the dialing
strings to expect, as well as the default area codes
so that the voice mail system knows which calls
are local, which are long distance, and which may
be either local or long distance. Suffixes that may
be required at the end of the dialing string are also
defined here.
If all calls in a particular area code are local, enter
the appropriate area code(s) in the Local Area
I&M
Code section. If you have 10-digit local dialing,
enter the area code in the Toll Area Code
section.
?
· N umber of Digits in Telephone Number:
Indicates the number of digits in a local
telephone number.
· Number of Digits in Area Code: Indicates
the number of digits in local area codes.
· Dialing Suffix: Indicates a suffix to dial after
the telephone number, if applicable, such as a
long distance access code.
· Local Area Code 1: Indicates local area codes, if applicable. Note that Local Area Code 1 only applies to
7-digit telephone numbers. The number of cods to enter (up to 4) depends upon the value specified in the
Number of Local Area Codes Field.
· Toll Area Code 1: Indicates alternate area codes that are both local and long distance. Note that Toll
Area Code 1 only applies to 7-digit telephone numbers. The number of cods to enter (up to 4) depends
upon the value specified in the Number of Toll Area Codes Field.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
17

Configuration Utility CTI Settings
· CTI Installed: Indicates whether or not
CTI is installed.
· CTI Mode: Indicates the mode to use for
CTI.
· CTI Debug Mode: Indicates whether or
not to enable the debug utility for CTI;
this is a troubleshooting tool if it is not
required, it must be set to NO.
· CTI Debug File: If contents of debug are
to be written to a file, enter the full path
and filename here.
· Com Port Used with CTI: Indicates the
COM Port to use for CTI.
· Paging Zone From: Indicates the starting
zone where the CTI features will take
effect.
· Paging Zone To: Indicates the ending
zone where the CTI features will take
effect.

I&M
?
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

18

Appendix

C
Appendix C: The PERFECT.INI file
Listed below is the PERFECT.INI file. This file is included FOR REFERENCE PURPOSES ONLY. Below each
line or group of lines is a definition of the purpose of the statement and the possible choices for the value. The value
already specified is the default value.

[General Settings]
Refresh Mailbox Message Lights=No
Indicates whether to refresh the message lights for the mailboxes upon Startup or not.
Choices are Yes, No
Maximum Call Length=60
Indicates the maximum length of a call (in minutes) if the user wishes to define a limit.
Show Mailbox Password=No
Indicates whether to show the passwords for each mailbox in the Password field of the mailbox screen (Yes), or
show asterisks (*) instead (No).
Choices are Yes, No
Default System Language=English
Indicates the language that the system will always default to if language is not selected.
Choices are English, French, German, Spanish, Italian, Cantonese, Mandarin, Japanese, Arabic, Farsi,
Russian, Polish, Hungarian, Greek, Thai, Portuguese
NOTE: If the choice is a language other than English, the appropriate language module must be installed.
Debug Mode=No
Indicates whether to activate the Debug option or not.
Choices are Debug, Event,All, No
NOTE: If Event is chosen, PVO Pro writes ALL system activity to a file called EVENT.LOG. This file gets
VERY large, VERY fast, so this option should only be activated for a short time, and for troubleshooting
purposes only. The best troubleshooting mode is all. All log files will be activated and stored in the logs folder.
Play Mailbox Owner's Name During Transfer=Yes
Indicates whether to play "Transferring you to <name>" during a transfer (Yes), or "Please hold while I transfer
your call" (No).
Choices are Yes, No
When Transferring, Play 'Transferring to Prompt'=Yes
Indicates whether or not to play a transfer message during a transfer.
Choices are Yes, No
Path for System=C:\Winvm
I&M
Indicates the application path.
Log System Statistics=No
Indicates whether or not to log system activity. This value must be enabled to use the Reporter application
?
effectively.
Choices are Yes, No
Log Mailbox Activity=No
Indicates whether or not to log mailbox activity. This value must be enabled to use the Reporter utility
effectively.
Choices are Yes, No
Log Record Termination=No
Indicates whether or not to activate a log for determining the termination reasons for a recorded message.
Days to Keep Report Logs=30
Indicates the number of days to save the report logs before deleting the files.
When Sending A Message Ask for Mailbox Number=First
Indicates whether to ask for the mailbox number to send the message to before (First) recording the message, or
after (Last) recording the message.
Choices are First, Last
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
19

When Auto Forwarding, Cancel Forwarding Only when Message Saved Or Deleted=No
Indicates whether or not to cancel the auto forwarding if the message has been saved or deleted and the auto
forward has not yet occurred.
Choices are Yes, No
Exclusive Company Directory=No
Indicates whether or not the Company Sequential directory will play all names or just names from the current
company.
Choices are Yes, No
Morning Hours Start At=0900

Indicates the time that the morning greeting will start to play (military format).
Afternoon Hours Start At=1200
Indicates the time that the afternoon greeting will start to play (military format).
Evening Hours Start At=1800
Indicates the time that the evening greeting will start to play (military format).
Use Mailbox Language as Default=No
Indicates whether or not to use the mailbox language settings as the default when a caller exits the mailbox and
is still in the PVO Pro system.
Choices are Yes, No
Use Port Monitor=No
Indicates whether or not to act as a watchdog and monitor the ports for abnormal activity. It is a safety mode to
drop the port if the abnormal activity continues for more than 30 minutes.
Choices are Yes, No
Add Number of Messages to Beeper Number=Yes
Indicates whether or not to indicate the number of new messages in the mailbox when outcalling to a beeper.
This is shown with an asterisk (*), followed by the number (i.e. 201 *3 indicates 3 new messages in mailbox
201).
Choices are Yes, No
Message Forwarding Allowed=Yes
Indicates whether or not message forwarding is permitted globally.
Choices are Yes, No
Loop Current On In Record=Yes
Indicates whether or not to disable loop current detection during recording.
Choices are Yes, No
Record with AGC=Yes
Indicates whether or not to activate Automatic Gain Control during recording.
Choices are Yes, No
Record Compression=0
Sets the Compression rate to use for all system messages other than the system prompts.
DO NOT MODIFY this section unless you fully understand it, as altering these settings can have serious
repercussions on your Voice Mail system.
I&M
Choices: 0=ADPCM, 256=PCM, 512=ADPCM and 8Khz, 768=PCM and 8KHz,
1536=ADPCM and 8Khz and No AGC, 1792=PCM and 8KHz and No AGC, 2304=PCM and 6Khz,
3328=PCM and 6Khz and No AGC, 2048=ADPCM and 6Khz, 3072=ADPCM and 6Khz and No AGC
?
Use Record Compression For All Files=Yes

Indicates whether or not to compress all files, or just message files.
Attach Comment on Reply=No
Indicates whether or not to keep the attached comments when replying to or forwarding messages.
Choices are Yes, No
AutoPlay of Messages Enabled=Yes
Indicates whether or not to enable a hotkey to automatically play all new messages continuously with no breaks
or prompts. The hotkey to use on the telephone keypad is 7.
Choices are Yes, No
Disable Fax Detection=Yes
Indicates whether or not to detect fax tones on Intel Boards.
Choices are Yes, No
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

20

Appendix

Disable Fax Detection 1=No

Troubleshooting tool; value is a frequency.
Disable Fax Detection 2=No

Troubleshooting tool; value is a frequency.
Relate Company To=Line

Synchronizes companies in multiple company situations.
Play Mailbox Greeting For Express Voice Mail=Yes
Indicates whether or not to play the mailbox greeting when callers are sent to Express voice mail, or just the
name prompt.
Choices are Yes, No
Transfer Timeout=

Indicates the number of seconds before timeout occurs after performing a transfer.
Message Send Inter-Digit Delay=

Indicates the number of seconds for inter-digit delay, if different from the inter-digit delay parameter.
Allow Sequential Directory=Yes

Indicates whether or not to allow the user to hear a list of users.
Refresh Mailbox Messages Lights=No

If set to yes the system will refresh all messages after a restart.
Minimum Password Length=0

The minimum number of characters in a password.
Allow Duplicate Messages=Yes

The system will allow duplicate messages in a mailbox. This is useful for certified message replies.
Reply Message Order=Last

This is the order that you will hear the messages and comments in a reply.
Play Extension Number in Directory=Yes

After hearing the persons name in the directory, the mailbox number is also played.
Disable Teleco Dial Pad=Yes

Disables the default Teleco key strokes within a mailbox.
Disable Compass Dial Pad=Yes

Disables the Compass key strokes within a mailbox.
Use Silence Detection in Record Conversation=Yes

The system will disconnect call after it hears silence for the set period of time.
Drop Messages Less Than Max Silence=No

The system will drop messages that are shorter than the maximum silence length.
Trim From End of File=0

The length of time in milliseconds to trim from the end of messages.
Record All Conversations=No

If set to yes, every call that is transferred will be recorded.
Log Queue Activity=No

Enables the logging of queue activity.
I&M
Log Lan Activity=No

Enables the logging of Lan-LinX and Groupware activity.
Trace Log Level=1
?

The levels can go from 0 (Nothing) to 5 (Most Detailed).
Status Log Level=1

The levels can go from 0 (Nothing) to 5 (Most Detailed).
Allow Dialing Extension Starting with 0=No

Allows the user to enter an extension in the mailboxes that start with zero.
Disable Forwarding of Urgent Messages=No

If set to yes Urgent messages will not follow the forwarding plan.
Desktop Start Port=First

This is the starting port for Desktops to use when dialing out.
Desktop End Port=Last

This is the ending port for Desktops to use when dialing out.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
21

Confirm ASR Names=No

If set to yes the system will always ask for confirmation on ASR names.
Barge In for ASR Names Confirmation=Yes

This allows for full duplex functionality on ASR Confirmation.
Wakeup Call Allowed=Yes

Determines if the system will allow Wakeup calls.
Log Wakeup Calls=No

Logs all wakeup call events.
Wakeup Call Start Port=Last

Specifies the start port for wakeup calls
Wakeup Call End Port=Last

Specifies the end port for wakeup calls.
Send All Comments=Yes

Sends all comments on a reply.
Date Format=MMDD

Sets the date format
Trim Digit=No

Automatically trims 300 ms from the end of a recording
Barge in Record Conversation=No

PVO dials the barge in code when the user selects Record Conversation from Lan-LinX
Barge in code=

Code for barge in.
Queue Mode=2

Sets the type of Queue
Queue Debug Mode=No

Shows the Queue debug window
Shutdown Sleep Timer=2000

Number of milliseconds to wait on shutdown
Play Available at always when active=No
Plays Available At time if set when call is forwarded through INBAND/SMDI etc. If set to No, the caller will
only get the available at time when calling through the Auto-Attendant
Distribution List Batch Threashhold=100

Number of distribution lists items to process at a time.
Distribution List Pause Time=5

Number of seconds to wait before processing the next batch
Print Wakeup Log=No

If Set to Yes, each wakeup call is sent to the defined printer
If set to a COM port, the wakeup call info is sent to the COM port.
Verify Sending Destination=No
I&M

Verified the destination when a user is sending a message.

[Caller ID Settings]
?
Caller ID Installed=Yes
Indicates whether or not a Caller ID box is installed.
Choices are Yes, No
Number of lines used for Caller ID=6
Indicates the number of lines that go into the Caller ID box. FOR ROCHELLE SYSTEMS ONLY.
Choices are a number value up to 6.
Type of Caller ID=Inband
Indicates the type of Caller ID being used.
Choices are Rochelle, Inband, or SMDI
Com Port used for Caller ID=2
Indicates the COM Port that the Caller ID box is connected to. FOR ROCHELLE SYSTEMS ONLY.
Choices are 1,2
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

22

Appendix

Pad Short Caller ID Numbers with=905
If the Caller ID is not the maximum length (below), this field indicates the area code to assume for local calls.
Length of Caller ID=10
Indicates the number of digits to accept for the Caller ID string.
Fake Caller ID=No
Indicates to simulate Caller ID for demo purposes.
Choices are Yes, No
Fake Caller ID Name=ESNA TECH
Indicates the name to display on the Caller ID screen for Caller ID simulation.
Fake Caller ID Number=9057079700
Indicates the phone number to display on the Caller ID screen for Caller ID simulation.
Caller ID Mode=Line
Indicates the mode to use to receive the Caller ID.
Choices are Line, Port
Ask for Phone Number when no Caller ID=No
Indicates whether or not to request the caller to enter their phone number if Caller ID is not enabled.
Choices are Yes, No
Use PIN Number As Caller ID=
If PIN Numbers are being used, indicates to send the PIN Number with the Caller ID pop up instead of the
telephone number.
Choices are Yes, No
Keep Caller ID in Forwarded Messages=
Indicates whether or not to forward the Caller ID with forwarded messages.
Choices are Yes, No
Com Port Settings for Caller ID=9600,n,8,1
Indicates the COM Port settings to use with Caller ID.
Settings are Baud Rate, Parity, Databits,Stopbits
Play Caller ID is PlayDate Active=Yes

If saydate is set to no in the mailbox, then the caller ID will not be played.
Maximum items in Caller ID List=500

Number of items in the display window that shows the calls and their Caller IDs on PVO PRO 4.5
Get Destination from Database=No
ActiveX
option
(Yes/No)
Database Object Name=OBJDB.GetDestination

ActiveX Class name to initialize
On Max Errors=Operator

ActiveX action to perform on Max Errors (Hangup/Operator)
Pop CTI Events Only=No

Do not POP with AA Calls only CTI
I&M
Forced Popup from Database Object=Yes
POP regardless of all settings if from ActiveX

?
[Reorganization Settings]
Shutdown Application For Reorg=No
Indicates whether or not to shut down PVO Pro to run the reorganization utility.
Choices are Yes, No
Backup Files Before Reorg=No
Indicates whether or not to back up files to the ~OLDDB directory before running the reorganization utility.
Choices are Yes, No
Message Database Safety Threshold=30
Indicates the minimum percentage of all files that exist as unattached messages before PVO Pro will delete
them when it runs the reorganization utility.
(number of files * 30%) > number of records in database
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
23

Batch File to run at Reorg Time=
If a specific file is to be run each time the reorganization utility is run, enter the path and filename here.
Reindex Files on Mondays=All But Reports
Reindex Files on Tuesdays=All But Reports
Reindex Files on Wednesdays=All But Reports
Reindex Files on Thursdays=All But Reports
Reindex Files on Fridays=All But Reports
Reindex Files on Saturdays=All But Reports
Reindex Files on Sundays=All
Indicates which database files to reindex on a given day when the reorganization utility is run.
Choices are All But Reports, All, None

[Fax Settings]
Path for Fax Drivers=C:\FAXDLL
Indicates the default directory where the fax drivers are located.
System CSID=PVO Pro
Indicates the System ID.
Number of Log Entries to Delete=25
Indicates the number of old log entries to delete, starting from the oldest date.
Fax Mail Installed=Yes
Indicates whether or not fax mail is installed.
Choices are Yes, No
File and Path for Fax Viewer=C:\WINDOWS\FAXVIEW.EXE
Indicates the system path and filename where the Fax Viewer is located.
Fax Resolution=Coarse

Indicates the fax resolution to display faxes at.

Choices are Coarse, Fine
Allow Printing of Faxes=Yes
Indicates whether or not users can print received faxes
Choices are Yes, No
Log Fax Activity=Yes
Indicates whether or not to log fax activity to a file
Choices are Yes, No
Fax Busy Timer=
Indicates how long to wait for transfers to fax port before changing the status to idle.
Choice is a numeric value in seconds.

[Voice Board Settings]
Refresh Ports Interval=30
Indicates the number of minutes between refreshes of the ports. The ports are refreshed by going offhook, then
I&M
back onhook.
Voice Board=Rhetorex
Indicates the voice board type.
?
Choices are Rhetorex, Dialogic, NewVoice
Number of Channels=4
Indicates the total number of ports on the PVO Pro system.
Voice Board Interrupt=5
Indicates the interrupt at which the voice board is located.
Choices are 3, 4, 5, or 7 for Rhetorex systems, or 2,,3,4,5,7,10,11,or 12 for Intel systems.
Telephone System=Standard
Indicates a standard telephone system.
VoxFormat=Rhet32
Indicates the format in which the voice files are saved.
Choices are OKI24, OKI32,, RHET24, OR RHET32 for Rhetorex systems, or OKI24 OR OKI32 for Intel
systems.
Global Tone Template 1=375,50,420,50,220,60,300,60,2
Global Tone Template 2=330,50,460,50,2000,200,0,0,1
Global Tone Template 3=
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

24

Appendix

Global Tone Template 4=
Intel feature to indicate the template to use for C.O. Fast Busy tones. If any of these templates are matched, the
Intel board drops the call.
Settings are Frequency1, ±x Hz, Frequency2, ±x Hz, Cadence On, ±x ms, Cadence Off, ±x ms, number of cycles
to repeat for.
Code for Reserved Code 1=CoCall
Code for Reserved Code 2=NoAnswer
The following describe the actions of the Inband Reserved Codes.
Choices are:
Login Performs Auto-Station Login
NoAnswer Sends the caller to the mailbox personal greeting
Busy Sends the caller to the mailbox busy greeting
CoCall Looks for the incoming CO Line Number
Invalid Causes the system to ignore the inband and disconnect
Record Goes to the specified mailbox and starts recording
Confirm Inband Signals=No
Indicates whether or not to perform a confirmation on the inband signals.
Choices are Yes, No
Code for Confirm Busy=C51E
Code for Confirm NoAnswer= C51E
Code for Confirm Login= C51E
Code for Confirm CoCall= C51E
Code for Confirm Invalid=
Indicates the inband codes to echo back to the telephone system. Specific to the Matra PBX (France).
Pulse Detection Enabled=Yes
Indicates whether or not to detect a pulse or rotary dial digits.
Choices are Yes, No
Log Message Lights=No
Indicates whether or not to log the message light functions that PVO Pro performs to the system status screen.
This options applies only to systems using SMDI or MCI.
Choices are Yes, No
Message Lights On Hook=No
Indicates whether or not to go off hook to send the message light codes to the telephone system.
Choices are Yes, No
Port used for Message Lights=No
Indicates the COM port to use for Message Light Notification.
Choices are Com1, Com2, No
Message Lights Port Settings=2400,N,8,1
Indicates the Com Port settings to use for message light notification.
Settings are Baud Rate, Parity, Databits, Stopbits
I&M
Verify Inband Length=No
Indicates that the incoming number of digits must match the length of digits specified in the parameters.
Norstar 7310 Dialing=No
?
Applies only to D42NS systems; indicates to allow special dialing for the Norstar phone system.
Centrex Recall Code=
Indicates the code to dial to recall a Centrex transferred call.
Accucall Filename=

Enter the full path for the accucall tone file. If the file is in the winvm folder, enter only the filename.
Accucall Internal Filename=

This is the tone file for all internal call. If this is not defined the default will be used.
Accucall External Filename=

This is the tone file for all external calls. If this is not defined the default will be used.
Accucall Other Filename=
This is the tone file for all calls other than internal and external. If this is not defined the default will be used.
Phrase Format=

This is the format for the phrases file. Enter the format type.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
25

Centrex Transfer Code=

Enter the code that is needed to perform a Centrex transfer.
Log 82 Inband=No

Enables logging of 82 information.
Voice Recognition=No
Activates
voice
recognition.
Voice Recognition Mode=No

Defines the Voice Recognition Mode.

Choices are Nuance, None
TTS Mode=No

Defines the type of TTS engine that you are using.

Choices are LH, Sapi, No
Silence Truncation=No
Activate Driver level Silence Truncation (Rhetorex only)
Number of digits in message count for display=3
When setting the number of digits in MWI value N
Inband Use Invalid Sender as CO=No
For Nitsuko when getting invalid Sender, assume it is the CO Line Number
Variable Length Inband Caller ID=No
For Nitsuko to support variable length Caller ID in Inband
Norstar Busy Timeout=
For Busy ONLY Transfers with Norstar, the time to wait before reading the display to see if the destination is
"On Another Call"

[SMDI Settings]
Com Port=2
Indicates the COM Port to use with SMDI.
Com Port Settings=1200,E,7,1
Indicates the COM Port settings to use with SMDI.
Settings are Baud Rate, Parity, Data bits, Stop bits
Number of Digits in SMDI=7
Indicates the digit length of the SMDI strings.
Choices are 7,8,9,10
Number of Digits for MWI in SMDI=7

Indicates the digit length of the SMDI MWI string.
SMDI Debug Mode=No
Indicates whether or not to activate the debug mode for SMDI. Useful for troubleshooting purposes.
Pad SMDI Digits with=Zero
I&M
Indicates what to use to fill the extra digit spots in the string.
Choices are Zero, Space or Null
SMDI Carrier Detect=No
?
Determines whether or not to enable the Carrier Detect (CD) line. arrier Detect is a signal sent from a modem to
the attached computer to indicate that the modem is online.
SMDI Clear to Send=No
Determines whether or not to enable the Clear To Send (CTS) line. Typically, the Clear To Send signal is sent
from a modem to the attached computer to indicate that transmission can proceed.
SMDI Data Set Ready=No
Determines the whether or not to enable the Data Set Ready (DSR) line. Typically, the Data Set Ready signal is
sent by a modem to its attached computer to indicate that it is ready to operate.
SMDI Request to Send=No
Determines whether or not to enable the Request To Send (RTS) line. Typically, the Request To Send signal
that requests permission to transmit data is sent from a computer to its attached modem.
SMDI HANDSHAKING=Yes
When COM Port settings are 9600, N, 8, 1, the values are 0, 500, 500, 1, 0 respectively.
When COM Port Settings are 1200, E, 7, 1, the values are 1000, 500, 1000, 1, 0 respectively.
These values will be changed from the default only on MCI systems or Fujitsu systems with SMDI.
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

26

Appendix

Use Office Codes=
Indicates whether or not to use Office Codes (SMDI with Centrex only).
Choices are Yes, No
Office Code 1=
Office Code 2=
Office Code 3=
Office Code 4=
Office Code 5=
Office Code 6=
Office Code 7=
Office Code 8=
Office Code 9=
Office Code 10=
Indicates the Office Codes for multiple locations for SMDI systems that have Centrex lines.

[Form Positions]
Main Form Top=150
Main Form Left=75
Port Form Top=2000
Port Form Left=9600
Mailbox Status Form Top=90
Mailbox Status Form Left=7020
Mailbox Status Form Height=6225
Main Form Width=6675
Port Form Height=5000
Port Form Width=2400
Port Form Loaded=False
Mailbox Status Form Loaded=True
Caller ID Form Top=2115
Caller ID Form Left=840
Caller ID Form Loaded=True
** This section is not to be modified. Indicates the default size of the different screens.

[Voice Mail Extensions]
Extension Connected to Port 1=17
Extension Connected to Port 2=18
Extension Connected to Port 3=19
Extension Connected to Port 4=20
I&M
`(etc... for each port in the system)
Indicates the extension numbers assigned to the ports.

?

[Dealer Information]
Dealer Name=Your Dealer
Indicates Dealer Name to display in help file.
Contact Name=Your Name
Indicates Contact Name to display in help file.
Technical Support Number=Your Number
Indicates telephone number to display in help file where users can call for technical support.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
27

[Caller ID Ports]
Line Connected to Caller ID Port 1=1
Line Connected to Caller ID Port 2=2
Line Connected to Caller ID Port 3=3
Line Connected to Caller ID Port 4=5
Line Connected to Caller ID Port 5=7
Line Connected to Caller ID Port 6=8
Indicates the line number assigned to each Caller ID port.

[MAPI Information]
Username=
Indicates the Username of the User.
Password=
Indicates the Password of the User.
Profile=
Indicates the user profile of the User. Usually same as Username.
Integration with Mapi=Yes
Indicates whether or not MAPI is being used.
Choices are Yes, No
Mapi Mode=Ole
Standard mode applies if PVO Pro is used for standard MAPI. Ole mode applies only if Outlook Player is being
used with Microsoft Mail or Microsoft Exchange.
Choices are Ole, Standard, and SMTP.
Message Voice Mail Subject=
Not yet implemented.
Message Fax Mail Subject=
Not yet implemented.
Groupwise Client=
If yes is selected, voice mail messages that are sent with MAPI to a Groupwise Client will automatically play
when they are opened.
Choices are Yes, No
Keep Copy in Sent Folder=No

A copy of the message will be kept in the sent folder of the email account
Mapi Service=No
Uses the mapi service. Do not use with SMTP mapi mode.
Server IP Address=
Enter the TCP/IP address of email server. Only used with SMTP mapi mode.
I&M
Simple Text=No
If set to yes, SMTP messages are sent without encoding.

?

[Local Area Paging]
Integration with LAP=Yes
Indicates whether or not the voice mail system is integrated to perform Local Area Paging.
Choices are Yes, No
Com Port to use for LAP=1
Indicates the COM Port to use for Local Area Paging.
Choices are 1,2
LAP Port Settings=1200,E,7,1
Indicates the LAP settings for the port.
Settings are Baud Rate, Parity, Databits, Stopbits

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

28

Appendix

[AMIS Settings]
AMIS Installed=Yes
Indicates whether or not AMIS is installed on the voice mail system.
Choices are Yes, No
AMIS Initial Delay=3
Indicates the number of seconds to ignore the C tone that AMIS sends.

[Fax Board Extensions]
Extension Connected to Fax Port 1=21
Extension Connected to Fax Port 2=
Extension Connected to Fax Port 3=
Extension Connected to Fax Port 4=
`(etc... up to 12 ports)
Indicates the extension numbers of each fax port.

[PMS Settings]
PMS Installed=Yes
Indicates whether or not a Property Management System is installed.
Choices are Yes, No
Com Port Used with PMS=Com2
Indicates the Com Port to use for PMS.
Choices are Com1, Com2
Pms Com Port Settings=1200,E,7,1
Indicates the Com Port Settings to configure PMS for.
Settings are Baud Rate, Parity, Databits, Stopbits
PMS Mode=
Indicates the mode to use for PMS.
Choices are File (use shared directory), Serial (use Com Settings)
PMS Type=Centigram
Indicates the type of serial port PMS integration to use.
Choices are Centigram, Mitel, Iwatsu
PMS Shared Directory=C:\PMSINFO
Works with File mode (under PMS mode above) to indicate the Shared Directory to use.
PMS Checkout Messages Destination=
Works in hotel situations. Upon checkout, messages that are still present in the mailbox are moved to a
phantom mailbox that starts with the above value and ends with the mailbox number.
(i.e. If value is 7 and mailbox is 202, messages that are current upon checkout are moved to 7202)
Auto Action on Message=
I&M
Indicates what action to take automatically in a guest mailbox environment.
Choices are Save, Delete
PMS Polling Interval=
Indicates the number of seconds to wait before polling the PMS.
?
Log PMS Activity=No

Logs all PMS events
Welcome Message Active=Yes

When set to yes the system will turn on the message light and play a welcome greeting on check in.
Use Password from PMS=Yes

You can disable password protection for guest mailboxes.
Lamp On with Check-In=Yes

The system will turn the message light on during check in.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
29

[CTI Settings]
CTI Installed=Yes
Activates
CTI
Choices are Yes, No
Com Port Used with CTI=1

Com port that connect to phone system
CTI Debug Mode=No

Debug mode for CTI
CTI Debug File=

Specifies the file to write to.
CTI Mode=Iwatsu

Type of CTI connection
CTI Message Lights=
CTI Message Light Button=
Pad Extension With=
Paging Zone From=80

Zone to ignore CTI events.
Paging Zone To=

Zone to ignore CTI events.

This section is settings that allow advanced CTI with such features as internal Caller ID, display for paging,
etc. (specific to telephone switch).
CTI Server name=
FOR SDX
CTI Version=
FOR SDX
CTI VM Group=
For SDX
CTI Object Debug=
FOR SDX
CTI First Trunk=
Activate CTILOG.LOG
Pop Caller ID when event=Ring
For Toshiba
CTI MWI Port=1
For Iwatsu the port number to use when setting CTI MWI
I&M
CTI SMDI=
Activate SMDI events for Iwatsu DB
CTI Monitor Hangup=
?
Activate Monitoring of CTI Hangup Events
CTI Multiple Message Lights=No
For Iwatsu to choose which method of MWI to use (single or Multiple) Used for wireless phones

[Dialing Properties]
Country Code=
Indicates the country code for dialing.
Number of Digits in Telephone Number=7
Indicates the number of digits in a local telephone number.
Number of Digits in Area Code=3
Indicates the number of digits in local area codes.
Dialing Suffix=
Indicates a suffix to dial after the telephone number, if applicable.
Local Area Code 1=
Local Area Code 2=
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

30

Appendix

Local Area Code 3=
Local Area Code 4=
Indicates alternate local area codes, if applicable. Note that Local Area Code 1 is always 7 digits.
Local and Toll Area Code 1=
Local and Toll Area Code 2=
Local and Toll Area Code 3=
Local and Toll Area Code 4=
Indicates alternate area codes that are both local and long distance. Note that Local and Toll Area Code 1 is
always 7 digits.

[Mass Recall Settings]
Mass Recall Allowed=No

Enables Mass Recall functionality
Mass Recall Start Port=First
Starting port for mass recall outcalls.
Mass Recall End Port=Last
Ending port for mass recall outcalls.
Log Mass Recall=No
Enables logging of mass recall events
Mass Recall Log Level=0
Specifies the detail of the log files.

[MSA Settings]
MSS Server=
Specify the name of the MSS Server
MSS Mode=
MSS Client Name=
Specify the name of the MSS Client
MSS Log Filename=
Specify the name of the MSS log.
MSS DLL Log Level=1
Increase or decrease the detail of the MSS log.
Use MSA=No
Specify whether or not to use MSS
Log MSA=No
Enable logging of MSS events
Log MSA Ocx=No
I&M
Enable logging of oxc functions.
MSA Log Level=1
Increase or decrease the amount of detail in the MSS Log.

?

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
31

D

Appendix D: Troubleshooting
This section offers useful methods to diagnose and solve system and software problems. You should read over
this section to familiarize yourself with the type of problems encountered and what should be done to correct
them. This section is divided into subsections that contain similar or related problems for easy referencing.

How to Effectively Troubleshoot Problems
1. Investigate the problem and identify what systems are working and what systems are not.
· Is the computer hardware working?
· When did the problem happen?
· What was happening when the problem occurred?
· Was there a power surge?
· Did the system crash?
· What exactly is the nature of the problem (hardware, messages, notification)?

2. Now that you have an idea where the problem is, look under the related sub-section for corrective action
relevant to your particular problem.
Sub-sections:
· System Hardware (peripherals)
· Set Up

· System Software
· Perfect Voice Office Pro Access Problems
· System Administrator Problems
· User Problems
· Caller Problems
· Messages
· Perfect Voice Office Pro features
I&M
· Mailboxes
· Class of Services
· Notification
?
· Reports

NOTE: It is possible that the solution to your problem may be found under several sub-sections. This allows
for easier problem solution.
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

32

Appendix

System Hardware (Peripherals)
Message waiting lights do not work:
· Check on the Mailbox Class of Service screen to be sure that the Msg Light option has been selected in
the Notification field.
· Check that Parameters 167 and 168 have the appropriate dial string entered for your telephone system.
Refer to your telephone system documentation or contact your dealer for more information about the
message waiting light dial string.
· If using SMDI integration, verify that parameters 167 and 168 are blank.

What do I do in the event of a power failure?
· The system is designed to run the REORGanization program in the event of a power failure.
· You should run the REORG option every time a power failure occurs because data file corruption can
occur during a power failure. WINREORG clears any problems experienced.

What do I do if the computer was zapped by static electricity?
This is usually minor, but in the event that a problem seems to occur as a result of static electricity:
· Determine the exact symptoms of the problems caused by the zap of static electricity.
· Run a diagnostic on the computer and the voice cards, using a diagnostic tool such as CHECKIT.PRO,
ROADTECH, or MS-SCANDISK.
· It may be a good idea to install a UPS to help protect the PC from power surges and static electricity.

Set Up
What do I do if the system reboots when trying to load Windows 95
software, or the Windows `95 logo page always remains on the
screen?
· Ensure that the sentinel is properly connected.
I&M
· Reboot the computer and press F8 when "Starting Windows 95" appears.
· Select Step by Step Procedure. Answer Y to all questions. Look to see that all drivers are being loaded
?
correctly. If you have a fax on demand system make sure I3LOAD.DRV has loaded. If you are using
Rhetorex or Intel voice boards make sure they are loading correctly.

What do I do if the modem will not load (Unsuccessful Wait Dial
Inset)?
· Ensure that there is not an IRQ collision by checking the COM ports and IRQ settings of the modem and
the other hardware.
· From the C:\HOST> prompt, run the PHONE.EXE program, then choose CHANGE (F3) and ensure that
settings are correct on this screen, especially COM port and modem type. Next, run the OPTIONS.EXE
program from the same directory and ensure the following settings are accurately set:
Hardware (F1) (B) Special Keyboard Handling = YES
Security (F2)
(A) Password Protection = NO
Connect (F4)
(A) Auto Answer on Loading = YES
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
33

Perfect Voice Office Pro Access Problems
What do I do if fields and buttons will not respond?
· Ensure that you are logged on. Press F11 and enter the System Administrator password (Default password
- 9999) and press <ENTER>.
· Use the <TAB> and <SHIFT-TAB> keys to move through the fields.
· Use the mouse to point to a field and click the mouse button to select choice.

How do I exit the application?
· From the Main Menu, select File-Shutdown.
· Select Wait for End of Activity or <ALT-W> and press <ENTER> to exit Perfect Voice Office Pro.
This selection waits until all ports are free before shutting down. This ensures that callers will not be cut-
off.

What do I do if DTMFs (Touch tones) are not being detected by the
system?
· If the system is not detecting DTMFs (touch tones) during internal functions, it is possible that the
parameters controlling the length or edge detection may be set incorrectly. The following Channel-
Internal Parameters - 24 (DTMF Detect Filter) and 26 (DTMF Delay) control the internal DTMF
signals. The defaults for Rhetorex systems are #24=3, #26=2, while the defaults for Intel systems are
#24=5, and #26=6. Refer to the Installation section for more details on the parameters or contact your
dealer.
· If the system is not detecting DTMFs (touch tones) during external functions, it is possible that the
parameters controlling the length or edge detection may be set incorrectly. The following Channel-
External Parameters - 64(DTMF Detect Filter) and 66 (DTMF Delay) control the external DTMF
signals. The defaults for Rhetorex systems are #64=3, #66=2, while the defaults for Intel systems are
#64=5, and #66=6.Refer to the Installation section for more details on the parameters or contact your
dealer.
· If your system is not recognizing the * or the # tones from a touch tone telephone, the telephone system
that you are using may reserve these for other services, such a call waiting. If this is the case, refer to Auto
Attendant Parameters 151 (Alternate Star) and 152 (Alternate Pound), which control the alternate star
I&M
and alternate pound parameters respectively. Refer to the Installation section for more details on the
parameters or contact your dealer.

?
What do I do if the User cannot gain access to his/her own mailbox?
· Dial into the user's mailbox and enter the user's password (Default - 1111).
· If the user is told that the password is invalid, try one more time in case there was an entry error.
· If the password is invalid or the user simply forgot the password, the Administrator can check the password
for that mailbox by going to the Mailbox screen and viewing the individual's mailbox. The System
Administrator can re-enter the password or re-set the password to 1111 and allow the individual to set
his/her own password.
· Using a Voice Mail button programmed on the telephone system (if the telephone system permits it), if the
user can log in sometimes but not other times, then it is possible that inconsistent inband is coming through
the telephone system to Perfect Voice Office Pro. To determine this, perform tests and view the activity on
the Trace screen when the action can be duplicated, then adjust the inband parameters accordingly.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

34

Appendix

What do I do if the notification button will not respond on a mailbox?
· Click on the Mailbox button, and scroll to the appropriate mailbox.
· Click the Mailbox Status button on this screen.
· Change the Notify from None to either All or Urgent Only.
· Exit from this screen and click on the Notification button.

System Administrator Problems
What do I do if Fields and buttons will not respond on main menu?
· Ensure that you are Logged on by pressing F11 and the System Administrator password (Default password
- 9999) and press <ENTER>.
· Another System Administrator may have changed the password or the password may have been forgotten.
Please contact your dealer for support.

What do I do if the System Administrator cannot change password?
· Enter old password when you Log On.
· Click the Parameters button
· Select the Auto Attendant tab.
· Update Parameter 146 with the NEW password.
· Press <ENTER>.

User Problems
What do I do if the User cannot gain access to own mailbox?
· Dial into User's mailbox and enter User's password (Default - 1111).
· If the user is told that the password is invalid, try one more time in case there was an entry error.
I&M
· If password is invalid or the user simply forgot the password, the System Administrator can re-enter the
password or re-set the password to 1111 and allow the individual to set his/her own password.

?
What do I do if there are no greetings when Users access their
mailboxes?
· The individual must enter his/her own greetings. If this is the first time that a user has used the system, the
System Administrator should set the Tutorial On field to on in the Parameters section of the Mailbox
screen. This allows the user to hear sample greetings to record and to familiarize his/her self with the
recording procedure.

What do I do if many short, blank messages are being received in
mailboxes?
· Edit Disconnect Parameters #174 (Silence Detection) and #175 (Noise Detection). These parameters
should be increased. Set them to 10 and 12 respectively.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
35

· Adjust Voice Mail Parameter #160 (Minimum Message Length) to 4. Do not set this parameter any
higher or you may lose short messages.

How do I reset the mailbox, but not lose the greeting?
· Delete the mailbox. This will preserve the greeting; resetting the mailbox would lose the greeting.
· Create the mailbox again.
· Edit the password, as that will be lost.
· Set the tutorial to OFF.
What do I do if I cannot save messages?
· The Storage field on the Mailbox screen may not be set properly. The Days To Save field may be set to 0.
If so, increase this value.
· It is also possible that this mailbox has a great number of saved messages that are consuming this mailbox's
memory space. Check to see that these old messages are deleted. This can be done over the telephone.
What do I do if Users get disconnected when trying to retrieve
messages?
· Increase Disconnect Parameters #174 (Silence Detection) and #175 (Noise Detection). Set them to 10 and
12 respectively.
· Adjust Voice Mail Parameter #160 (Minimum Message Length) to 4. Do not set this parameter any
higher or you may lose short messages.

How do I change the password on a mailbox?
· Log in at the System Administrator or Installer level, go to the mailbox screen and change the password on
that field on the preferred mailbox.
· If you are the User, then access the system through the telephone handset, select [4] for Mailbox Options,
then [9] for Change Password.

How do I change the main Perfect Voice Office Pro password (Installer
only)?
I&M
· Select File, Log On and log on with the old password.
· Update Auto Attendant Parameter #147 (Installer Password) with the new password.
?
· Test the new password by logging out, then logging in again.

What do I do if the user calls into the system internally but is not
getting asked for the password?
· Check the inband parameters to ensure that the correct inband is coming in. If not, then edit the inband
parameters accordingly (Inband Parameter #185, Code for Login).
· Ensure that password protection is set.
· If, instead, users hear "Please enter your mailbox number", then the problem is that the Shared Mailbox
option has been activated in the Class of Service.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

36

Appendix

What do I do if the user wishes to bypass entering a password when
accessing a mailbox?
· Disable password protection by pressing star (*) when asked to enter the new password.

What do I do if message confirmation does not work?
· Check to see that this option is activated in the Mailbox Options section on the Class of Service screen.

What do I do if call forwarding does not work?
· Check to see that this option is activated in the Transfer Options section on the Class of Service screen.

What do I do if distribution lists do not work:
· Check to see that this option is activated in the Mailbox Options section on the Class of Service screen.

What do I do if Paging does not work?
NOTE: This option refers to internal voice paging through the telephone speaker, not to be confused with
paging a beeper.
· Check to see that one of these options (Pre-Trans. Page or Post-Trans. Page) is activated in the Transfer
Options section on the Class of Service screen.
· Check the paging parameters under the Auto Attendant Section and ensure that they match what the
telephone system is supposed to send.
· Ensure the telephone system is programmed for paging.

What do I do if call queuing does not work?
· Check to see that this option is activated in the Transfer Options section on the Class of Service screen.
· Ensure that calls are being supervised (Transfer Supervision = Busy or Busy/NA).
· Ensure that the telephone system sends a Busy signal. It may be necessary to run Accucall for Rhetorex or
PBXpert for Intel to detect the busy signals (see Appendix).

I&M
What do I do if call screening does not work?
· Check to see that this option is activated in the Transfer Options section on the Class of Service screen.
?
· Ensure that calls are being supervised (Transfer Supervision = Busy or Busy/NA).
· Ensure that the telephone system sends a Busy signal. It may be necessary to run Accucall for Rhetorex or
PBXpert for Intel to detect the busy signals (see Appendix).

What do I do if Alternate Spellings are disappearing?
· Ensure that the Directory feature is checked in the appropriate mailbox Class of Service.
· If this option is checked in the appropriate group, then ensure that the Alternate Spelling that was entered is
not identical to the first three letters of the person's LAST name, as this is not allowed.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
37

How do I transfer somebody directly into a mailbox (bypass ringing
the phone)?
When the Voice Mail button on the telephone is pressed, what is the message that plays?

· If the Company Greeting plays, then:
· To do the transfer, press the Transfer button, followed by the Voice Mail button, followed by a pound
sign (#).
· The message "Please enter your mailbox number" plays. Enter the extension number at this time.
· Then the message "Please enter your password" plays. Press the pound (#) again. You will then be
connected to the personal greeting of the mailbox.
· Hang up to connect the caller.
· So, to summarize, press Transfer, VM, #, Extension, #.

· If, when the Voice Mail button is pressed, the message "Please enter your password" plays:
· Press Transfer, hit the Voice Mail button., then press 0 to get to the Main Greeting, then perform the #,
Extension, # function as described above.

· The last scenario is if the mailbox is in Shared Mailbox mode. If this is the case:
· The person doing the transfer needs only to press the Transfer button, followed by the Voice Mail
button, followed by the extension number when they hear "Please enter your mailbox number", and the
# sign.

NOTE: If, in Single Digit Options, this code (#E#) is put in one of the fields (9, for example), then the person
doing the transfer needs only to press 9 plus the extension number.
How do I do connect multiple mailboxes to one extension?
· Put all the mailboxes that want this in one group and select the Shared Mailbox option.
How do I categorize users so that they can control whose names
appear first in the directory listing?
· Option one: Order the mailboxes so that the names to appear first are the lowest mailbox numbers.
I&M
· Option two: Set up a Voice Menu so that the caller must press one, two, or three to access the people
whose names are to appear first, second, and third, respectively, in the directory listing.

?
How do I add another language?
· Ensure that the additional software module has been purchased and installed, then refer to the
Database Configuration section to set up an additional language.

What do I do if, in a multiple company configuration, the wrong
Company Greeting plays?
· Check the Trace screen as the call goes through to determine the signal being sent.
· Ensure that this matches the inband code specified in the parameters.
· Check the number of digits indicated for C.O. Line (Parameter #196, Inband Parameters).
· Ensure that, on the Company screen, the companies are listed sequentially according to C.O. LINES.
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

38

Appendix

Caller Problems
What do I do if callers are unable to leave messages after the mailbox
greeting; the line cuts off?
· Change Channel Parameter # 025 (DTMF Edge) to 2 for leading edge.
· Check the Storage section of the associated Class of Service to ensure that the Max Messages field is
not set to zero (0).
· If a Voice Menu is being used, then check that the Default value is not Disconnect.
· Get the mailbox owner to rerecord his/her greetings.

What do I do if callers are being disconnected?
· The system may interpret the caller's voice as a dial tone if there is a lot of background noise or
interference. The Parameter - 175 on the Disconnect Parameters tab controls the amount of noise to
be interpreted as a disconnect signal. Try increasing this value. The default value for Rhetorex
systems is 4. The default for Intel systems is 12. If this parameter is lower than it is supposed to be,
set it at the default value. If the parameter is already at the default, for Rhetorex systems increase the
setting to 12; for Intel system, increase the value to 20.
NOTE: You can also set this value to zero, which records everything. However, this is dangerous because if a
caller hangs up you will record a dial tone or a fast busy signal for the maximum length (defined in the Class
of Service) of the message.
· You may also try to adjust the Disconnect Parameter #174 (Silence Detection). The default value is 3.
It may be necessary to increase this parameter to 10.

What do I do if callers are informed that the mailbox is full?
· On the Class of Service screen, increase the Max Messages field to allow a larger number of
messages to be stored.
· It is also possible that this mailbox has a great number of saved messages that are consuming this
mailbox's memory space. Check to see that these old messages are erased. This can be done over the
I&M
telephone.
· Ensure that these messages are not a lot of hang-ups. If so, it may be necessary to increase the
?
Disconnect Parameter #174 (Silence Detection) to 10, Noise Detection to 12 or 20 and the Minimum
Message Length Parameter no higher than 4.
· If you have recently (today) erased a large number of messages, these messages are still stored in
system memory until the system reorganizes the mailboxes, which it does every night. To purge all
erased messages, go to System-Utilities-Reorg and press Start. When you are asked if you want
unattached messages deleted, select Yes. When prompted about Reports, select No. This will purge
all erased messages and restart the system.
What do I do if, when calling a busy extension, message says "Line is
busy" and does not go to Voice Mail?
· The personal greeting must be recorded for the mailbox before users can be put into Voice Mail.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
39

Messages
What do I do if the User cannot save messages?
· The Storage section on the Class of Service screen for the mailbox may not be set properly. The
Days To Save Old field may be set to zero (0). If so, increase this value.
· It is also possible that this mailbox has a great number of saved messages that are consuming this
mailbox's memory space. Check to see that these old messages are erased. This can be done over the
telephone.

What do I do if the Mailbox is full?
· The Storage section on the Class of Service screen may not be set properly. You may wish to
increase the Max Message field.
· It is also possible that this mailbox has a great number of saved messages that are consuming this
mailbox's memory space. Check to see that these old messages are erased. This can be done over the
telephone.
· If you have recently (today) erased a large number of messages, these messages are still stored in the
systems memory until the system reorganizes the mailboxes, which it does every night. To purge all
erased messages, go to System-Utilities-Reorg and press Start. When you are asked if you want
unattached messages deleted, select Yes. When prompted about Reports, select No. This will purge
all erased messages and restart the system.

What do I do if the User is receiving short-blank messages in mailbox?
· Adjust the Silence Detection parameter [#173].
· Adjust the Minimum Message Length parameter [#159] to be greater than or equal to the Silence
Detection parameter.
NOTE: Do not set #160 too high or you may lose short messages.

What do I do if Message confirmation does not work?
· Check to see that this option is activated in the Mailbox Options section on the Mailbox Class of
Service screen.

I&M
What do I do if Message waiting lights do not work?
· Check to see that this option is activated in the Notification section on the Mailbox Class of Service
?
screen.
· Check the codes on the Message Lights tab in Parameters.
· If using SMDI integration, the codes should be blank.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

40

Appendix

What do I do if Message playback has loud static?
· Check to see if the voxformat line is set to RHET32. There is a voxformat statement in the
following files: perfect.ini on the Perfect Voice Office Pro system, pvodesk.ini and pvxxxx.ini (where
xxxx=the mailbox number) on the workstations.Perfect Voice Office Pro Features
What do I do if Fields and buttons will not respond on main menu?
· Ensure that you are logged on press F11 and enter the System Administrator password (Default
password - 9999) and press <enter>.
· Another System Administrator may have changed the password or the password may have been
forgotten. Contact your dealer for support.

How do I exit Perfect Voice Office Pro ?
· Choose the File from the MAIN screen Select Shut Down, and click on it.
· Select Wait for End of Activity or <ALT-W> and press <ENTER> to exit Perfect Voice Office
Pro . This selection waits until all ports are free before shutting down. This ensures that callers will
not be cut-off.

What do I do if Message waiting lights do not work?
· Check to see that this option is activated in the Notification section on the Mailbox Class of Service
screen.
· Check the Message Light On/Off codes on the Message Lights tab in Parameters. If you are using
SMDI integration, the codes should be left blank.

Mailboxes
What do I do if the User cannot gain access to own mailbox?
· Dial into user's mailbox and enter user's password (Default - 1111).
· If the user is told that the password is invalid, try one more time in case there was an entry error.
· If password is invalid or the user simply forgot the password, the System Administrator can re-enter
the password or reset the password to 1111 and allow the individual to set his/her own password.
· The System Administrator should ensure that the new password is working for that particular
mailbox.
I&M

What do I do if there are no greetings?
?
· The individual must enter his/her own greetings. If this is the first time that a user has used the
system, the System Administrator should set the Tutorial On field to on in the Parameters section of
the Mailbox screen. This allows the user to hear sample greetings to record and to familiarize
themself with the recording procedure.

What do I do if Call forwarding does not work?
· Check to see that this option is activated in the Transfer Options section on the Class of Service
screen.

What do I do if Distribution lists are not working?
· Check to see that this option is activated in the Mailbox Options section on the Class of Service
screen.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
41

What do I do if Paging is not working?
· Check to see that one of these options (Pre-Trans. Page or Post-Trans. Page) is activated in the
Transfer Options section on the Class of Service screen or the Transfer Options tab on the Mailbox
screen. This option refers to internal voice paging through the telephone speaker, not to be confused
with paging a beeper.

What do I do if the User is receiving short-blank messages in mailbox?
· Adjust the Silence Detection parameter [#174] on the Disconnect Parameters tab.
· Adjust the Minimum Message Length parameter [#160] to be greater than or equal to the Silence
Detection parameter.

NOTE: Do not set #160 too high or you may lose short messages.

Class of Services
What do I do if Call queuing does not work?
· Check to see that this option is activated in the Transfer Options section on the Mailbox Class of
Service screen.

What do I do if Call screening does not work?
· Check to see that this option is activated in the Transfer Options section on the Mailbox Class of
Service screen.

What do I do if Distribution lists do not work?
· Check to see that this option is activated in the Mailbox Options section on the Mailbox Class of
Service screen.

I&M
?
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

42

Appendix

Notification
What do I do if message waiting lights do not work?
· Check to see that this option is activated in the Notification section on the Mailbox Class of Service
screen.
· Check the Message Light On/Off codes on the Message Lights tab in Parameters. If you are using
SMDI integration, the codes should be left blank.
· Does the notification port make the attempt to turn on/off the light? If so, then verify the Message
Light ON/OFF Parameters (#351, #354 Message Light Parameters).
· At the COMMAND screen, if you type LAMPON XXX, then LAMPOFF XXX, where XXX is the
extension number, does the light come on and go out appropriately? If so, then verify the message
light parameters again. It may also be necessary to reset the message lights on the telephone system,
if this specific telephone system allows it.
· Check the rest of the message light parameters. Ensure that #357 is set to one (1).
· Check to see that the Message Lights option is activated in the Notification section on the Class of
Service screen.
· Check the ports for dial tone.
· Check to see if the port is even making the attempt to light the message light by leaving a message in
an empty mailbox (no new messages) and watching the notification port on the Main Screen.
· Try resetting the Notification Database (call technical support for these steps).

What do I do if the beeper does not go off during a notification
attempt?
· In the Notification section of the individual's mailbox, ensure that the notification number for the
beeper is set to zero (0). The beeper notification will only work on this notification schedule.
· When entering the telephone number of the beeper in the notification section, add a few pauses (,)
after the number. This will allow time for the paging company's greeting to play before sending the
message.
· Do a test and watch if the port sends the page. If so, then the problem is probably the number of
pauses that have been entered is incorrect to reach the pager. Otherwise, there is a problem with the
paging company.
I&M
· If the port doesn't send the page, then double check the settings on the notification screen against the
Notification section in the Database Configuration section. It may also be necessary to reset the
notification database (contact Technical Support for assistance with this).
?
What do I do if the User wants the notification to keep notifying until
the call is answered?
· Set the number of retries to a high number in the notification option on the Mailbox screen
(Recommendation = 99).

What do I do if notification does not notify for every new message?
· Set the number of retries to a high number in the notification option on the Mailbox screen
(Recommendation = 99).
· This problem is caused by a low number in the Number of Retries field. For example, if the number
of retries is 3 for notification schedule one, and if the user has already been notified three times, then
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
43

the notification advances to the next schedule. If there is nothing in this schedule, then there will be
no retries. The number of retries is based per schedule.

What do I do if, when outdialing (to a cellular telephone only), the
connection drops after dialing (before connection is confirmed)?
· Check and verify the number being dialed, as well as all of the notification settings on the screen
according to the Supervisor Guide, etc.
· Check Channel Parameter #70 (Time Out Delay). Default = 4 seconds.
· With a cellular phone, it takes more than 4 seconds before the system connects, so increase the Time
Out Delay to about 12,000 (12 secs).

Voice Menus
What do I do if, while in a Voice Menu, the User wants the option of
dialing an extension while the mailbox greeting is being played?
· Inquire as to what the numbers start with (i.e. 1 for 100,101,102...128).
· Create a voice menu, allowing option 1 to be: Send to Mailbox, while leaving the Mailbox field
empty.

NOTE: Option 1 is being used because the range of mailboxes starts with a one (1). If the range was
between 300 and 500, then the Send to Mailbox option described above would have to be activated
under options 3, 4 and 5.

· Enter MBX in the Prompt field if it is desired to have the personal greeting or gone home greeting of
the associated mailbox to play.

What do I do if, when in a Voice Menu, the User wants the greeting to
play, followed by a beep for the caller to leave a message?
· Enter MBX in the Prompt field of the Voice Menu, and set the Default option (D) as Send to Voice
Mail Record Tone.
I&M

?
Reports
What do I do if Reports will not print?
· From the main menu, choose REPORTS and ensure that the reports are initialized to be sent to the
printer (LPT1) and the FILE option is off.
· Check to make sure that the printer is turned on, is on line, and has enough paper to print.
· Check the sentinel key and printer cable connection.

What do I do if Reports will not save on disk?
· From the main menu, choose REPORTS and ensure that the reports are initialized to be written to a
file (FILE option is on) and the LPT1 option is off.
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

44

Appendix

· Ensure that you have used a valid drive name and valid file name.
· Be sure that the disk you are using is formatted and not write protected, in the appropriate drive, and
that the drive door is closed and the disk has `clicked' into place.
I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
45

E
Appendix E: Adding Rhetorex Audio
Boards
The models discussed in this section include the Quartet and Duet, 432 and 232, and the 21xx and 41xx
models. All models function identically. There is, however, a limitation on the number of Quartets and Duets
that can be installed. Also included is a discussion on Rhetorex's Accucall call analysis software.

WARNING: When handling audio boards, wear a grounding wrist strap to control static electricity.
Failure to control static electricity may cause damage to the electronic device.

1. Unplug the PC and any peripherals connected to the system.
2. Position the PC to have easy access to the rear or the side.
3. Remove the screws on the rear or front of the PC with a screwdriver or other appropriate tools.
4. Slide the cover directly away from the rear of the PC until it has cleared the face of the unit. Tilt the cover
and remove it.
5. Insert the board into the expansion slots by holding the board at the top of each corner. Apply equal
pressure to both sides of the board, and push down firmly to seat the board. The board should easily slide
down. If you experience any difficulties, check the alignment of the board.
6. Fasten the board's metal bracket with the screw previously removed. Make sure the RJ-14 jacks are
accessible from the rear of the PC Unit before securing the board.
I&M
?
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

46

Appendix

Configuring the Rhetorex Audio Board(s)
Your audio board(s) contain jumpers that must be configured properly to operate with Perfect Voice Office
Pro. Check your PC manual to determine an available I/O address. All Rhetorex boards are shipped pre-
configured with a default address of 300 hex. This address should be satisfactory for a first board in a Perfect
Voice Office Pro system.

Duet and Quartet Series
This half-length card comes in a 2-Port (Duet) and a 4-Port (Quartet) model. These cards do not have any
jumpers. The I/O Address coded to the board is 300H. There is a limit of one (1) Duet or Quartet board per
Perfect Voice Office Pro system. However, if you wish to add more ports to your system that has a Quartet or
Duet board, you must use either 232/432 boards or 21xx/41xx boards.

RHETOREX
Duet and
Quartet

Duet and Quartet Series Rhetorex board

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
47

232 and 432 Series
This half-length card comes in a 2-Port (232) and a 4-Port (432) model. The board has one bank of jumpers
that configure the I/O Address of each particular board. The Default setting is 300H. To configure alternate
addresses, please refer to the I/O Address Jumper Setting chart on the following page. The only limitation to
the number of 232/432 audio boards that you can install is the number of available expansion slots in your PC.
Typically, there is room for six (6) audio cards in a standard 386 or 486 PC. Please refer to your PC
documentation for more information on available expansion slots.
RHETOREX
232 and
432
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

232 and 432 Series Rhetorex board
21xx and 41xx Series
This full-length card comes in a 2-Port (21xx) and a 4-Port (41xx) model. The board has one bank of jumpers
that configure the I/O Address of each particular board. The Default setting is 300H. All features and
configuration for these audio boards are the same as the 232/432 Series. Please refer to the discussion on 232
and 432 audio boards for configuration instructions.
RHETOREX
2132 and
4132
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
I&M

21xx and 41xx Series Rhetorex board
?

BASE I/O
JUMPERS OPEN
First
board
(Default)
300
Hex
8,9
Second
board 301
Hex
0,8,9
Third
board
302
Hex
1,8,9
Fourth
board
303
Hex
0,1,8,9
Fifth
board

304
Hex
2,8,9
Sixth
board
305
Hex
0,2,8,9

To determine other base I/O addresses once the software is installed, type SHOWJUMP from the
C:\WINVM> prompt. If you need to remove the Rhetorex driver from memory, type RDSPEXIT from the
C:\WINVM> prompt.
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

48

Appendix

Define the Settings Selected in the System Configuration Utility
When the board settings are complete, you need to define the settings you selected in the System Configuration
Utility. Refer to Voice Board Settings in Appendix B.

If Telephone System is Not Defined in Software: Perform Call Analysis
Skip this section if the telephone system was defined in the Perfect Voice Office Pro software.
If the auto attendant feature of Perfect Voice Office Pro is used or it will be outdialing, the Perfect Voice Office
Pro system must recognize the different tones produced by the telephone system. This is the only way that the
system knows whether a line has been answered or is busy. If the telephone system is not included in the
Perfect Voice Office Pro software, you must run the call analysis program.
Accucall Plus, by Rhetorex, uses at least one extension on the telephone system for testing. Be sure that this
extension is a straight connection to the telephone system with absolutely no features. These features include:
Hunt (or Rollover) Groups, which means if the extension is busy the switch will hunt (or rollover) for the
next available extension; Call Forwarding, which is a feature offered by telephone companies, where a call
can be transferred to another telephone number; Call Waiting, another feature offered by the telephone
company, which does not produce a busy signal for the caller and produces a new tone for the called party; or
any Auto Answer features including answering machines or other answering services. The telephone line
should not be in use by any other calls for the duration of the call analysis.

1. To run the Rhetorex's Accucall Plus for Windows program, it is first necessary to load the Rhetorex voice
driver by typing RHETDRV at the C:\WINVM> prompt and pressing <Enter>.

2. Next, select Accucall Plus for
Windows from the menu to load the
application.

I&M

?

NOTE: It is not recommended to use the Accucall Plus Wizard for learning the tones. A more accurate result
can be obtained by learning the tones manually. The following directions refer to the manual learning of the
tones.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
49

3. Accucall Plus begins with the following Main Menu screen. From the main screen, click the Learn button
to listen for the first tone.

Learn Button

4. A Learn screen appears, similar to the following screen.

5. Enter the extension number of your
telephone in the Phone Number field.

6. Leave the receiver on-hook at the extension
being used and start the Learn procedure to
detect the ring signal by pressing the Start
button. You will see the cadence of the
signal is displayed in the CADENCE
DETECTED window of the Auto Run
screen.

You will see the collection of ON and OFF times in the Cadence
Detected window, and the high and low frequencies detected in the
Frequency Detected window. So, in the above example, a pattern
I&M
similar to the one below would be generated, with the following
values:
?

481 Hz

1040 ms

Frequency

434Hz

2960
ms

Time

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

50

Appendix

7. When the Auto Run sequence is complete
you should edit this tone. Click the Add Tone
button to bring up the following screen:

8. There are several parameters to change on the
"Edit Tones" screen.

Tone Name: Give this signal a name that
represents the signal. The name of the
telephone system should be included when
naming this signal. For example, if your
telephone system is a Lucent Partner II and
the signal that you just captured was a Ring
signal, you should name this signal Lucent
Partner II Ring.
Type: Use the drop down menu to determine
the type of signal received. The three options are Ring, Busy and Other.

Terminating: Normally this setting is left alone (NO). A terminating tone is a tone from the telephone
system that is used to terminate a call. It may be necessary to designate the fast busy signal (or reorder or
disconnect) as a terminating signal on some telephone systems. If a signal is designated as terminating,
the frequencies must appear as one of the first four values in the Filters table (discussed later).

Cadence: Use the <space bar> to select either yes or no for the cadence (signal pattern) field. If the word
NONE appears in both the FREQUENCY1 and the FREQUENCY2 fields then choose YES. This
allows the signal to be identified by its cadence when the frequencies are unknown. If the frequencies are
known then select NO for the cadence.

Frequency1 and Frequency2: There must be a minimum of 40Hz between these frequencies. If there is
not, adjust both frequencies equally to achieve this span. If the tones are less than or equal to 10Hz apart,
increase the lower value to equal the higher value.

PCPM Code: This is a numeric identifier for the tone. Enter a value of 7 for all busy tones and 8 for all
ring tones. NOTE: If the tone is undefined, the device driver will send back a code of 9, and if an answer
is detected, the device driver returns with code 10. A value of 31 indicates terminating.

I&M
On Max Variance and On Min Variance: These values are tolerance levels that accommodate slight
variations in the on-time of the signals. These values can be increased to the next highest value.

Off Max Variance and Off Min Variance: These values, like the previous values, are tolerance levels
?
that accommodate slight variances in the off-time of the signals. These values can be increase to the next
highest value.

9. Press OK when finished to add the tone.

10. After clicking OK, a Warning message will probably appear. This just indicates that the frequencies have
not yet been defined in the Filters table. Click OK to bypass this, as that will be done next.

11. Take the receiver off-hook and repeat steps 5 through 9 for the busy tone of this telephone. The extension
number remains the same for this telephone.

12. Repeat steps 5 through 9 for all other telephone devices and signals (use ** as the OUTDIAL NUMBER
for the reorder or disconnect signal) until all tones have been identified. When all the tones have been
captured, proceed to the Filters screen by pressing <F10> to return to the Auto Run screen, then <F10>
again to return to the Main Menu. Press <F3> to enter the Filters screen, which is illustrated below.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
51

Filters Screen

13. All the frequencies that were detected during the call analysis now appear in the UNDEFINED
FREQUENCIES box on this screen. All of these frequencies must be added to the FILTERS box on this
screen. Before beginning and while adding, keep these rules in mind:
· If any two frequencies are less than 10 Hz apart, increase the lower value to equal the higher value.
· There must be at least a 40 Hz difference between all frequencies. If there are two frequencies that
are less than 40 Hz apart (but greater than 10 Hz apart otherwise refer to step a) increase the higher
and decrease the lower values equally until there is 40 Hz between the two values.
· When adding, ensure that the frequencies of the terminating tones are placed in one of the first four
fields (Terminating Window) then add the rest of the values to fields 5 through 12.

In the above example, if the tones in the Undefined Frequencies window are 350, 434, 443 483, 637, where
350 and 443 are the terminating frequencies, you would increase 434 to 443 because the values are less than 10
Hz apart. Then, you would enter 350 and 443 in terminating fields 1 and 2, then put the other two values, 483
and 617, in fields 5 and 6.

Click Update when finished.

I&M
Termination Tones
These tones are important because the system must know when to terminate a call. There are several forms and
functions of termination tones. These types are explained below followed by programming instructions for the
?
Accucall Plus settings.

A. A regular busy tone can be used as a termination tone if you want the system to hang-up when it hears this
tone. Edit this tone in the EDIT TONES screen and set the TERMINATING field to YES by using the
up or down arrow keys, then pressing the <space bar> to select YES.

B. If
the
termination tone is a tone other than the busy signal (i.e. - fast busy), use the AUTO RUN screen to
learn the tone and in the EDIT TONES screen, set the TERMINATING field to YES, set the
PCPMCODE field to 31, and set the TYPE field to OTHER. Use ** as the OUTDIAL number.

C. If
the
termination code is a fast busy or a re-order (dial) tone, you can set the Auto Run Quick
Frequency Scan field in the SETUP screen to YES and run the AUTO RUN section of Accucall Plus to
capture these two frequencies.
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

52

Appendix

D. If
the
termination tone is a solid or a "D" tone (which is a tone sent by some telephone systems that is
similar to the DTMF tones on the touch tone telephone), it does not need to be analyzed by Accucall.
Enter a value of "D" in Parameter 180 - HANG-UP STRING in Perfect Voice Office Pro's Parameter
Section. Refer to your telephone system documentation for more information on the disconnect codes.

NOTE: Any frequency used for a TERMINATING tone MUST appear first in the FILTERS box on the
FILTERS screen.

Once you are satisfied that all tones have been analyzed and tested, you should save this file. Click File, Save
and give this file a name relevant to the type of telephone system (i.e. PARTNER2.TON).

Edit PERFECT.INI
The last step is to tell the Voice Mail which tone table to use. We do this in the C:\WINDOWS\PERFECT.INI
program. Ensure this line is added in the C:\WINDOWS\PERFECT.INI.

[Voice Board Settings]
ToneTable Name=filename.ton

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
53

F
Appendix F: Adding Intel Audio Boards
The D/42 JCT-U (4 channels) and D/82 JCT-U (8 channels) Intel boards connect directly to a number of
different PBXs. The PBX Integration board combines the voice and fax features available in the D/4x product
line with the ability to access enhanced PBX features on several different PBXs. The voice features include:
· play and record voice messages
· dial and recognize DTMF digits
· detect and answer incoming call
· call progress analysis
· send and receive faxes
The PBX specific features include:
· retrieve Called/Calling number ID
· retrieve LCD/LED prompts and indicators
· read displays
· accessing PBX features using dial strings
· disconnect supervision

WARNING: When handling audio boards, wear a grounding wrist strap to control static electricity.
Failure to control static electricity may cause damage to the electronic device.

1. Unplug the PC and any peripherals connected to the system.
2. Position the PC to have easy access to the rear or the side.
3. Remove the screws on the rear or front of the PC with a screwdriver or other appropriate tools.
4. Slide the cover directly away from the rear of the PC until it has cleared the face of the unit. Tilt the cover
and remove it.
5. Insert the board into the expansion slots by holding the board at the top of each corner. Apply equal
pressure to both sides of the board, and push down firmly to seat the board. The board should easily slide
I&M
down. If you experience any difficulties, check the alignment of the board.
6. Fasten the board's metal bracket with the screw previously removed. Make sure the RJ-14 jacks are
accessible from the rear of the PC Unit before securing the board.
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

54

Appendix

Configuring Intel Boards
The jumpers JP1, JP5, JP6, JP7 and SW1 dip switch must be configured before the Intel board(s) is installed.
See relative positions of the switches and jumpers below.

Setting the Interrupt Level (JP1)
Find the JP1 jumper block from the Board Diagrams above. To configure the jumper block, choose from
interrupt levels 2 through 7. Recommended levels are 3, 5, and 7. JP1 should be set to IRQ5. Typically, the
interrupt levels for a PC are set as follows:

IRQ - 3 = COM1

IRQ - 4 = COM2

IRQ - 5 = LPT2
IRQ
-
6
=
FLOPPY
DISK
DRIVE

IRQ - 7 = LPT1

NOTE: Make note of the IRQ settings selected because this information is needed during the installation of
Perfect Voice Office Pro software.

The IRQ settings are positioned from left to right, 2 being the left-most position. Here is an example of an
interrupt level 7 setting:

2
3
4
5
6
7

Interrupt Setting on Jumper JP1

I&M

?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
55

Setting the Base Memory Address (JP5 and JP6)
Select the base memory address segment by installing (Closed) or removing (Open) jumpers JP5 and JP6. All
Intel audio boards have a factory default setting of D000H. The other choices of address segments include the
A000H segment, which is typically used for VGA, and the C000H segment. Refer to the table below for
appropriate base memory jumper settings.

NOTE: Do not change the Default factory setting of D000H unless one of the following conditions apply:
· More than eight (8) D/4xD boards are installed in the PC.
· Other device drivers are already using the D000H segment.

Jumper
JP5
Jumper
JP6
Base
Memory
Address

Open

Open

D000H (Default)

Closed

Open

A000H

Open

Closed

C000H
Base Memory Address Jumper Settings

Multiple Audio Board Installation (JP7)
Use the following guidelines to determine whether the Interrupt Termination jumper, JP7, should be installed
(closed) or removed (open):

· If ONLY one (1) Intel audio board will be installed in the PC, jumper JP7 MUST be closed.
· If more than one (1) Intel audio board will be installed in the PC, jumper JP7 MUST be open on all
boards except the first board. This means that only one (1) board will have jumper JP7 installed.

I&M
?
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

56

Appendix

Setting the Offset Address (SW1)
The Intel board and the PC communicate with each other through a shared memory block that sits in the
memory address of the PC. Altering the first three dip switches of SW1 may modify the physical address
offset where the memory block is located. The SW1 switch on the Intel board has four dip switches. Refer to
the specific board diagram earlier in this section to locate the SW1 dip switch.
Switch Position
Board# Offset Address-SW1 BASE(Hex)

1 0000 (Factory
Setting)

2 2000

3 4000

4 6000

5 8000

6 A000

7 C000

8 E000

First three positions of SW1 dip switch

The fourth position of the SW1 dip switch must always be configured "off-hook" as shown below.
tion
Line
State

"on-hook" (no
answer)

I&M
"off-hook"
(busy)

Fourth position of SW1 dip switch
?

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
57

If Telephone System is Not Defined in Software: Perform Call Analysis
Skip this section and the PBXpert section if the telephone system was defined in the Perfect Voice Office Pro
software.
The following procedure is a `Quick-Start' procedure that loads the diagnostic software and runs all tests on
the Intel audio boards installed in the PC. For a more in-depth explanation of the D40CHK diagnostic software,
please refer to the Intel Manuals.

D40CHK
Be sure that the following has been completed before running D40CHK:
· All audio boards have been configured properly and installed in the PC.
· Perfect Voice Office Pro software has been installed.

1. From the C:\WINVM> prompt, load the Intel driver by typing D40DRV and press <Enter>.

2. Load the diagnostic software by typing D40CHK and press <Enter>.

3. Chose the boards, test selections, and the test options. Use the arrow keys on the numeric keypad to move
the cursor and use the spacebar to enable or disable menu items (Enabled items have a "" next to them).

4. Move the cursor to START DIAGNOSTICS and press <Enter>.

NOTE: Do NOT select Loopback Test from the test selection menu unless you have a solid understanding of
the hardware required for this test. For more information on the Loopback Test, refer to the Intel Manual.

I&M
?
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

58

Appendix

PBXpert Call Analysis for Intel Voice Boards
PBXpert is a learning tool that enables a Intel voice board to "listen" to call progress tones, measure their
frequency and cadence (called tone definitions), and store these measured values in a tone set. A tone set is a
group of five tone definitions for dial, ringback, busy, reorder, and disconnect with a specified name. After a
tone set is learned, it can be saved by itself in a tone set file (TSF), or included with other existing tone sets
from another TSF.

PBXpert, by Intel, uses two extensions on the telephone system for testing. Be sure that the extensions are
straight connections to the telephone system with absolutely no features. These features include:
· Hunt (or Rollover) Groups, which means if the extension is busy the switch will hunt (or rollover)
for the next available extension,
· Call Forwarding, which is a feature offered by telephone companies, where a call can be transferred
to another telephone number,
· Call Waiting, another feature offered by the telephone company, which does not produce a busy
signal for the caller and produces a new tone for the called party, or any
· Auto Answer features including answering machines or other answering services. The telephone lines
should not be in use by any other caller for the duration of the call analysis.

Load the Voice Board
The first step is to ensure that the Voice Board is loaded. If the Voice Mail is currently running, shut down the
application (File, Shutdown). The voice board will remain loaded. If the application is not running and you
are not sure if the voice board is loaded, restart the computer and choose Quit when the application tries to
start.

Access PBXpert
To access PBXpert, choose Start, Programs, Intel Dialogic System software, then select PBXpert.

Step 1
A screen similar to this appears. This is the first screen of the
PBXpert Wizard that guides you through the Call Analysis.
If you click Cancel, you are sent to the main screen to open an
I&M
existing file or add the tone values manually. Click Next to
continue with the Wizard.

?

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
59

Step 2
Enter the telephone manufacturer and model name of the
telephone system that is about to be tested. Click Browse to
edit an existing file. Click Next when finished.

Step 3
At the next screen, select a TAPI database, if applicable, to
assign to this telephone system. Click Next when finished.
If you do not wish to select a TAPI database, you may leave
it blank and click Next.

Step 4
Next, select the appropriateVoice Board from the drop down
I&M
list box. Click Next when finished.

?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

60

Appendix

Step 5
Select the port to use as the calling extension and enter the
extension number of the port in the Phone Number field.

Step 6
Select the port to use as the called extension, and enter the
extension number of the port in the Phone Number field. Click
Next to continue.
I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
61

Step 7
A screen appears prompting you to confirm the settings.
If you wish to change something, click the Back button.
Otherwise, click Next to accept the settings and continue.

Next, the application performs a line test, where it automatically calls channel 2 from channel 1, then vice
versa, to ensure that the configuration is correct (See screen on left below). If it is not correct, an error
message will appear and you will have to click OK, then go back and change the settings.

I&M
The boxes will check automatically as the particular test is completed. Once the test has finished successfully,
the screen will look similar to the one to the right above. Click OK to continue.

?
Step 8
The next screen tells you that you are about to learn the tones.
Click Next to continue.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

62

Appendix

Step 9
While the tones are being learned, the pattern
generated appears in the Cadence Window, and the
tones are listed in the box below as they are learned.
When learning is complete, the screen will look
similar to the one on the left.

If you are satisfied with the results, click the Keep
Data button. If you wish to re-learn the tones, click
Discard Data to redo the test. If you click Keep
Data, the next screen will list the values that were
obtained and display a summary.

Step 10
If this is acceptable, click Finish to end the Wizard. The
main screen will now appear similar to the one below, with
the accepted tone values listed. This is also the screen that
will first appear if you chose to bypass the Wizard.

I&M

?

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
63

Bypassing the Wizard
If you chose to bypass the Wizard, this is the
screen that you would start with, except that the
values would be zero (0). You may enter the
values manually at this point, if desired, by
choosing Tones, New Tone from the main
screen.

You are then prompted to enter the Manufacturer and Model of the
switch being learned.

Once you have returned to the main screen, select Options-- Settings and ensure that the values are correct on
this screen. This is where you define the channels and extension numbers of the channels (ports) for testing.
If you wish to change any of the settings before learning the tone, click Options--Settings, and change the
desired values. Some of these are explained below.

· Board Number: If the Voice Mail system has more
than one Intel board, enter the board number that will
I&M
be used as the calling (Line A) and called (Line B)
extension.Channel Number: Indicate the channel
(port) or the Voice Board that will be used as the
?
calling (Line A) and called (Line B) extension.
· Phone Number: Indicates the telephone number or
extension that the port is connected to.
· Manual Mode: Indicates whether or not the system
will use a telephone for testing.
· Learning Channel: Indicates which line defined above
will be the calling extension.
· Dialing Prefix: This field contains any characters that
must precede a telephone number, such as a long
distance dialing prefix (e.g., "1"). You may also use
this field to enter an extension to dial when learning
PBX tones. The dialed extension is connected to the
Inbound Channel. If a PBX extension is entered in this field, do not enter a Phone Number.
· Reorder Dial String: This field contains characters that cause the PBX or network to generate a
reorder tone. If a reorder dial string is not included, do not select Learn Reorder Tone.
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

64

Appendix

Finally, to learn the tones, select Tones -- Learn from the menu. Select which tones you wish to learn, and
click Start Learn. The test screen appears as the tones are being learned.

When finished, click Keep Data. At the main screen, select Tones -- Consolidate. It is necessary to
consolidate all newly learned tones to ensure that the values are valid.

NOTE: If your telephone system produces multiple fast busy tones, you can create multiple Tone Sets that
can be consolidated into one TSF.

Edit PERFECT.INI
The last step is to tell the Voice Mail which tone table to use. We do this in the
C:\WINDOWS\PERFECT.INI program. Ensure this line is added in the C:\WINDOWS\PERFECT.INI.

[Voice Board Settings]
ToneTable Name=filename.tsf

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
65

G
Appendix G: Programming Lucent
Telephone Systems using Intel D/42 JCT-
U and D/82 JCT Boards
Lucent Definity with D82

Software: Release 6 or 7
Integration: Inband

Telephone System Features
Auto-Attendant Features
Voice Mail Features
Attendant end to end signaling
Blind Transfer

Auto Login

Extension end to end signaling
Call Paging

Call Fwd to Greeting

Overflow to Voice Mail
Call Queuing

Notification to Extension

Overflow to Attendant
Call Screening

Notification to Pager

PBX Positive Disconnect
Call Waiting

Message Lights

Supervised
Transfer

Stutter Tone

Requirement(s)
One Definity port per Voice Mail port. Program ports in Hunt Group (10).
4-conductor modular line cords.
I&M
?
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

66

Appendix

Lucent 2-wire Station Programming (8434D Telephone emulated)

NOTE: All subscriber sets need their extension shown within the first 16 characters of their name field.
I&M

?

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
67

Lucent Hunt Group Programming
I&M
?
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

68

Appendix

Voice Mail Programming
The next step is to define the parameters for Inband, Transfer, Disconnect, Channel, and Message Lights. If
you run the Integration Wizard, these parameters should be configured for you.
Inband Signaling
When the system is programmed for BLIND TRANSFER and the phone is forwarded to Voice Mail, ensure
that the number of rings in each Class of Service is less than the phone switch.

Parm #
Integration Item
Value
Comments
182
Inband Signaling
1

183
Inband Delay
1

185
Code for Login
_E

186
Internal No-Answer
E_S

187
External No-Answer
E_0-C

188
Internal Busy
Blank

189
External Busy
Blank

190
Inband Outside C.O. Call
_0-C

191
Inband Invalid Code 1

Disconnect Code
Parm #
Integration Item
Value
Comments
174
Silence Detection
3

175
Noise Detection
4

180
Hangup String
Blank
Internal dial tone, external silence.

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
69

Lucent Switch Programming Requirements
NOTE: The following information is taken from Intel Corporation's "PBX Integration board User's Guide",
copyright 2003.

"There are specific switch programming requirements for using a PBX Integration board with a Lucent
Definity PBX. You must ensure that the PBX is configured properly so that the PBX Integration board
functions correctly.

Port Number Settings
Each board in a Lucent PBX is assigned a port number. The number of ports vary according to the board type
(2-wire or 4-wire). A 2-wire board has 16 ports, while the 4-wire boards has eight.
Table 1lists the structure used when configuring Lucent Definity PBX. For details about programming a
Lucent PBX, refer to the appropriate Lucent manual. The following are examples of the switch settings:

Table 1. Lucent Definity Configuration Example
Slot#
Board Type
Telephone Type
Extension Numbers
Port Settings
3
TN2181 2-wire
8434D
1000-1015
01A0301-01A0316
4
TN2181 2-wire
8434D
1016-1031
01A0401-01A0416
5
TN754B 4-wire
7434D
1032-1039
01A0501-01A0508
6
TN754B 4-wire
7434D
1040-1047
01A0601- 01A0608
7
TN754B 4-wire
7434D
1048-1055
01A0701-01A0708
8
TN754B 4-wire
7434D
1056-1063
01A0801-01A0808
The settings above should be tailored according to the your specific needs.

Message Waiting Light Settings
I&M
You must make certain settings from a Lucent management terminal to ensure that Message Waiting Indicator
(MWI) features work correctly.
1. Login to switch from a management terminal.
?
2. Type
command
`CH STAT <ext>` where ext is the extension of a PBX Integration board port.
On the Lucent phone sets, go to the Button Assignments page and set button 33 to `lwc-store' and button
34 to `lwc-cancel'.
NOTE:
If these features are programmed into any other button, they must be removed, as there may be only
one occurrence of these features per extension.
3. Repeat as necessary for other extensions.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

70

Appendix

Using the PBX Integration Board
The PBX Integration board performs functions available to Lucent 7434 (4-wire) and 8434 (2-wire) telephone
sets (see Figure 2 and Figure 3). These telephone sets use two LED displays per Feature Button to show status
(next to the Feature Buttons) and an LCD display to show user prompts and messages (above the display
buttons). The PBX Integration board can:
· transfer calls
· set the message waiting indicator
· read the LED display
· read LED indicators
· read the called/calling number ID
· press keys.

Figure 2. Lucent 7434 Telephone
I&M
?

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
71

Figure 3. Lucent 8434 Telephone

Programmable Feature Keys
As illustrated in Figure 2 and Figure 3, there are 34 Programmable Feature Keys found on the Lucent 7434 and
8434 telephones. These keys are configured either during installation or by the user (using the telephone set or
the PBX Integration board). There are two LED Indicators associated with each Feature Button. The PBX
Integration board can also emulate four Lucent Functions Keys: Transfer Conference, Drop, and Hold.
I&M
As mentioned above, each line or Feature Key actually has two indicator lights. The red indicator tells the user
that the line is being used or that the line will be the one used when the handset is lifted. The green indicator
(bottom on the 8434 and right on the 7434) tells the user that the line or feature is in use. In other words, when
you pick up the handset or press a Feature Key, the green indicator goes on. When a call is on hold, the green
?
indicator for that line flashes and the red indicator goes off. The red light is either off or on (a value of eight
[0x08] indicates ON), while the green light has six possible values. The status of the indicators is obtained by
bitwise-ANDing the returned value from the green light with the value from the red light (green light value +
red light value). In other words, the value for a line indicator in use with a call would be nine--0x08 (for red
light on) + 0x01 (for green light on). The status conditions for each byte of the green light are defined as
follows:

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

72

Appendix

Table 2. Lucent 7434 and 8434 LED Indicator States
State
Value (Hex)
off 0x00
on 0x01
ringing 0x02
hold 0x03
error 0x04
unknown
0x05

Reading LED Indicators
The PBX Integration board can determine the state of its LED Indicators by using the d42_indicators( )
function to retrieve the LED Indicators data. This function places the Line Indicator data (34 bytes) in an
application buffer. Bytes 1-34 contain the indicator status for Memory Keys 00-33, respectively (see Table 3).

Table 3. Lucent 7434 and 8434
Direct Key Dialing Strings for Feature Keys
Byte
Key Description
Dial String
1
Feature Button 00
<ESC>KA
2
Feature Button 01
<ESC>KB
3
Feature Button 02
<ESC>KC
4
Feature Button 03
<ESC>KD
5
Feature Button 04
<ESC>KE
6
Feature Button 05
<ESC>KF
I&M
7
Feature Button 06
<ESC>KG
?
8
Feature Button 07
<ESC>KH
9
Feature Button 08
<ESC>KI
10
Feature Button 09
<ESC>KJ
11
Feature Button 10
<ESC>KK
12
Feature Button 11
<ESC>KL
13
Feature Button 12
<ESC>KM
14
Feature Button 13
<ESC>KN
15
Feature Button 14
<ESC>KO
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
73

Byte
Key Description
Dial String
16
Feature Button 15
<ESC>KP
17
Feature Button 16
<ESC>KQ
18
Feature Button 17
<ESC>KR
19
Feature Button 18
<ESC>KS
20
Feature Button 19
<ESC>KT
21
Feature Button 20
<ESC>KU
22
Feature Button 21
<ESC>KV
23
Feature Button 22
<ESC>KW
24
Feature Button 23
<ESC>KX
25
Feature Button 24
<ESC>KY
26
Feature Button 25
<ESC>KZ
27
Feature Button 26
<ESC>Ka
28
Feature Button 27
<ESC>Kb
29
Feature Button 28
<ESC>Kc
30
Feature Button 29
<ESC>Kd
31
Feature Button 30
<ESC>Ke
32
Feature Button 31
<ESC>Kf
33
Feature Button 32
<ESC>Kg
34
Feature Button 33
<ESC>Kh
I&M

?
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

74

Appendix

Example
An application uses the d42_indicators( ) function to retrieve the current data for the LED Indicators on a
given channel on a PBX Integration board. The data placed in the application buffer is shown below. If the data
for byte 19 is 0x09 and byte 28 is 0x03, the red and green indicators are on for Feature Button 19 indicating
that the line is in use for a call, and the green indicator for Memory Button 28 is flashing, indicating that the
call is on hold.
Refer to the PBX Integration Software Reference for more information about using the d42_indicators( )
function.

Pressing Feature Keys
The PBX Integration board can "press" any of the Lucent 7434 or 8434's Feature Keys using the dx_dial( )
function. Refer to the PBX Integration Software Reference for more information about dialing programmable
keys. Each Feature Button on the 7434 and 8434 telephones is assigned a dial string sequence (refer to Table
3). By using the dx_dial( ) function and the appropriate dial string, the PBX Integration board can press any
Feature Button.

Lucent Function Keys
Lucent telephones also include Function Keys that the PBX Integration board can emulate to perform various
functions. PBX Integration board can emulate four Lucent Functions Keys: Transfer, Conference, Drop, and
Hold.

I&M
Pressing Function Keys
The PBX Integration board can "press" Lucent telephone Function Keys using the dx_dial( ) function. The
?
Function Keys on the Lucent 7434 and 8434 telephones assigned a dial string sequence are listed in Table 4.
By using the dx_dial( ) function and the appropriate dial string, the PBX Integration board can dial these four
Lucent Function Keys. Refer to the PBX Integration board Software Reference for more information about
dialing programmable keys.

Table 4. Lucent 7434 and 8434 Direct Key Dialing Strings for Function Keys
Dial String
Key Description
<ESC>Ki
Hold
<ESC>Kj
Drop
<ESC>Kk
Transfer
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
75

<ESC>Kl
Conference

Display Keys
As shown in Figure 3, there are five Display Keys located below the LCD display. These keys are associated
with specific prompts shown on the LCD display depending on the current state of the phone (shown on the
bottom row of the LCD display). The PBX Integration board cannot use the two bottom, right-most Keys, Prev
and Next.

Pressing Display Keys
The PBX Integration board can respond to a prompt and "press" the appropriate Display Key using the
dx_dial( ) function. Refer to the PBX Integration board Software Reference for more information about dialing
programmable keys. Each Display Key on the Lucent 8434 telephone is assigned a dial string sequence (refer
to Table 5). By using the dx_dial( ) function and the appropriate dial string, the PBX Integration board can
press any of its first seven Display Keys.

Table 5. 8434 Direct Key Dialing Strings for Display Keys
Dial String
Key Description
<ESC>Km
Display Key 00
<ESC>Kn
Display Key 01
<ESC>Ko
Display Key 02
<ESC>Kp
Display Key 03
<ESC>Kq
Display Key 04
<ESC>Kr
Display Key 05
<ESC>Ks
Display Key 06

I&M
Alphanumeric Display
The alphanumeric display is a two row, 50-digit LED that is used to show the activity of the phone. Some
?
examples are:
· date and time
· feature names
· error messages
· called/calling identification
· phone status
· line selection
· Display Key prompts
The data used to display information in the LED alphanumeric display is in ASCII format. When the telephone
is not in use, the display normally shows the date and time. The content of the display is changed automatically
(e.g., receiving an incoming call, making an outgoing call, or activating a feature).
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

76

Appendix

The PBX Integration board can retrieve the information on its alphanumeric display using the
d42_displayex( ) function. The function places the display data (50 bytes) in an application buffer. Refer to the
PBX Integration board Software Reference for more information about using the d42_displayex( ) function.
I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
77

Example
An application uses the dx_dial( ) function and the appropriate dial string to press keys to dial extension
number 1045. The d42_display( ) function is used to retrieve the display data and place it in an application
buffer (shown below). The information for the top row (last 25 characters) of the display is checked. Data in
bytes 00 through 05 indicate that extension 1045 is being dialed.
data
61 3D 01 00 04 05 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
byte
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

data
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
byte
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

Called/Calling Number ID (within the PBX)
When receiving a call on a PBX Integration board from another extension, the PBX sends calling number ID
data (by default, the extension number of the telephone placing the call) to the station set between the first and
second rings. The station set processes the data and sends an ID message to the display. The calling number ID
data sent from the PBX to the station set differs from the calling number ID data presented on the display.
When placing a call to another extension, the called number ID (by default, the extension of the telephone
being called) is shown in the display.
Both the calling and called number IDs can be retrieved using the d42_gtcallid( ) function. The
d42_gtcallid( ) function retrieves the called/calling number ID message sent from the PBX to the station set,
not the data sent to the display. Refer to the PBX Integration board Software Reference for more information
about using d42_gtcallid( ) function.
The contents of the called/calling number ID are shown in Table 6 as seen by the receiver of the call).

Table 6. Called/Calling Number ID Data for the Lucent Definity
Call Route
Called/Calling Number ID Data
Call received from trunk line 1
_0-1
Call received from station set 221
_221
I&M
Call originally received on trunk line 1, then
223_0-1
transferred to station set 223
?
Call originally received by extension 221, then
224_221
forwarded to extension 224
NOTE:
The called/calling number ID can also be obtained using the d42_displayex( ) function; however, you
should use the d42_gtcallid( ) function so that your application will maintain functionality across
different manufacturers' switches.
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

78

Appendix

Example
An application uses the d42_gtcallid( ) function to retrieve the calling number ID for a call received on a
specified channel on a PBX Integration board. The calling number ID data and corresponding ASCII values are
shown below.
text
bb 2 2 4 _ 2 2 1

data
20 32 32 34 5F 32 32 31 xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
byte
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
text

data
xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
byte
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47

Setting the Message Waiting Indicator
The PBX Integration board can set the Message Waiting Indicator (on or off) on another extension using the
dx_dial( ) function and the appropriate dial string. Refer to the PBX Integration board Software Reference for
more information about dialing programmable keys.
NOTE:
Message Waiting can also be set using the dx_dial( ) function and appropriate dial string to press the
Feature Key assigned to send messages; however, you should use the dx_dial( ) function as described
so that your application will maintain functionality across different manufacturers' switches.
MWI On
The recommended technique to turn on the MWI in this switch, using dx_dial( ) with the dial string is:
1. Go Off Hook using dx_sethook( )
2. Call
the
dx_dial( ) function. The dial string is <ESCO><extention><ESCO> (Optional pause
character may be used)
3. Go On hook using the dx_sethook( ) again
<ESCO> means Escape character followed by O.

MWI Off
I&M
The recommended technique to turn off the MWI in this switch, using dx_dial( ) with the dial string is:
1. Go Off Hook using dx_sethook( )
?
2. Call
the
dx_dial( ) function. The dial string is <ESCF><extention><ESCF> (Optional pause character
may be used)
3. Go On hook using the dx_sethook( ) again
<ESCF> means Escape character followed by F.
The PBX Integration board can determine the state of its Message Waiting Indicator using the
d42_indicators( ) function to retrieve the LED Indicators data. Byte 34 contains the Message Waiting
indicator status (0x00 is off; 0x01 is on). Refer to the PBX Integration board Software Reference for more
information about using the d42_indicators( ) function.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
79

Example
An application uses the d42_indicators( ) function to retrieve the LED Indicators data for a specified channel
on the PBX Integration board to determine if a message is waiting. The LED indicators data is shown below.
The data 0x00 shows that the MWI indicator is off (there are no messages waiting).

Transferring a Call
The PBX Integration board can transfer calls using the dx_dial( ) function. By using the dx_dial( ) function
and the appropriate dial string (&,<extension>), the PBX Integration board can transfer a call to any extension
connected to the switch. Refer to the PBX Integration board Software Reference for more information about
dialing programmable keys.
NOTE:
The transfer function can be performed using the dx_dial( ) function and the appropriate dial string;
however, you should use the &,<extension> dial string so your application will maintain functionality
across different manufacturers' switches.
The PBX Integration board can perform both supervised and blind transfers When a blind transfer is
performed, the PBX controls where the call is routed if the called extension is busy or does not answer. When a
supervised transfer is performed, your application can implement call progress analysis and called/calling
number ID to intelligently control where the call is routed and what type of message is played if the called
extension is busy or does not answer. Because of this capability, supervised transfer is the preferred method.
I&M

Example
?
An application answers a call and plays a greeting message prompting the caller to enter the extension they
wish to reach (the caller enters 221). Using the dx_dial( ) function with the dial string (&,221), the application
attempts to transfer (supervised) the call to extension 221. Call progress analysis is used to determine if
extension 221 is answered, busy, or there is no answer. If extension 221 answers, the application hangs up and
the transfer is complete. If the extension is busy or not answered, the application reconnects to the incoming
call and plays a message asking the caller to choose between accessing voice mail or transferring to the
operator."

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

80

Appendix

H
Appendix H: MCI and SMDI Integration

MCI Configuration
Message Center Interface (MCI) provides an interface with a message system, which can store call information
and control message waiting lamps associated with NEAX2400 IMS.

NEAX 2400 IMS

STATION
IMS

Time Division
TRUNK

Switching Matrix

MESSAGE
INFORMATION

ATTENDANT
SYSTEM

CONSOLE
(HOST/CPU

CPU
OR

VOICE MAIL

SYSTEM)

MCI PORT (I/O)

RS232C CABLE

Block diagram of general NEAX2400 IMS system using MCI

I&M
The MCI is a full duplex EIA RS-232C asynchronous data link operating under a specific message protocol
and format. For further information, please refer to MCI data Specification and CCIS enhancement page ETI-
121 of Volume 5, issue 1 in the Engineering Technical Information.
?

Computer Hardware Considerations Using MCI
· Please note that if you are using existing hardware, serial port two (COM2) is required by Perfect
Voice Office Pro. Make sure that the COM2 port is not utilized by any other device as it will be in
use by the Voice Mail System to communicate with the MCI.
· Make sure the port exists. To verify, check to see if the serial port is active by checking the hardware
configuration at boot up. 2F8 should be listed.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
81

Software Considerations Using MCI

NOTE: The following is for reference. All changes to these files can be made through the Perfect Voice
Office Pro Configuration Program.

Using the installation software, specify the type of integration being used by selecting the MCI integration. All
necessary changes will be done automatically. To verify that the settings are correct, follow the outline below.
The following steps should be taken to ensure proper MCI integration with Perfect Voice Office Pro:
· Verify the loading of the executable file (PERFECT.EXE) to ensure the correct argument is set. i.e.:

C:\WINVM\PERFECT.EXE -MCI
This argument is found in three different locations in a standard Windows 95 environment:

1. Right-click on the Start button in the bottom left hand corner of the Windows 95 screen. Choose
Open, then double-click on the Programs icon. Next, double-click on the StartUp icon to pull up the
StartUp Window. From here, right-click once on the Perfect Voice Office Pro icon and select
Properties. Select the Shortcut tab and, beside the target field, you should see
C:\WINVM\PERFECT.EXE MCI. If not, then add -MCI after the path statement.
2. Right-click on the Start button in the bottom left hand corner of the Windows 95 screen. Choose
Open, then double-click on the Programs icon. Next, double-click on the Perfect Voice Office Pro
icon. From here, right-click once on the Perfect Voice Office Pro icon and select Properties. Select
the Shortcut tab and, beside the target field, you should see C:\WINVM\PERFECT.EXE MCI. If
not, then add -MCI after the path statement.
3. From the main Windows 95 screen, right click on the Perfect Voice Office Pro icon and select
Properties. Select the Shortcut tab and, beside the target field, you should see
C:\WINVM\PERFECT.EXE MCI. If not, then add -MCI after the path statement.

· Verify to make sure that the extensions connected to your Voice Mail are defined in the file
C:\WINVM\PERFECT.INI. For example if the extensions are 400, 401, 402, and 403 make sure
these numbers appear in the PERFECT.INI as follows:

[Voice Mail Extensions]
Extension Connected to Port 1=400
Extension Connected to Port 2=401
I&M
Extension Connected to Port 3=402
Extension Connected to Port 4=403

· Verify that the PERFECT.INI file contains the correct settings. Refer to the PERFECT.INI Appendix for
?
description:

[SMDI Settings]
Com Port=2
Com Port Settings=9600,N,8,1
Number of Digits in SMDI=7
Pad SMDI Digits with=Zero
SMDI Carrier Detect=0
SMDI Clear To Send=500
SMDI Data Set Ready=500
SMDI Request to Send=1
SMDI HANDSHAKING=0

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

82

Appendix

SMDI Configuration
SMDI, or Station Message Detailed Interface, can have Two Types of Integration. The first is referred to in
this manual as "Type I" and the Second is refereed to as "TYPE II".

SMDI with Voice Bridge or the Calista Board (Type 1)
Requires a digital extension from the switch to provide input to either the Voice Bridge or a Calista Board.

With VoiceBridge Series II supporting:
· Meridian Option 11, 21, 61
· Rolm 8000,9000 CBX
· AT&T System 75, 85, Definity

With Calista supporting:
· Lucent ProLogix
8434
· Lucent Definity (2 wire)
8434
· Lucent Definity (4 wire) 7434
· Lucent System 75
7405
· Northern Telecom

M2616

SMDI With Direct Serial Connection (Type 2)
With SMDI Serial Connection:
· Nec 2000/Nec2400
· Toshiba DK
· Or any switch providing SMDI through a Serial Connection

All other switches that support SMDI (Toshiba DK280, Fujitsu 9600 etc.) can be integrated with Perfect Voice
Office Pro without the VoiceBridge Series II or the Calista Board. This type of integration will be referred to
I&M
as SMDI, Type 2.
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
83

SMDI with Calista Board

SMDI with Voice Bridge (Type 1)

SMDI with Voice Bridge

I&M
?
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

84

Appendix

Computer Hardware Considerations Using SMDI (Type 1)
Please note that if existing hardware is being used, you have the option to set the serial port for SMDI
communication to COM1 or COM2. Make sure that the COM port is not utilized by any other device as it will
be in use by the Perfect Voice Office Pro system to communicate through SMDI.

Make sure the port exists. To confirm, check to see if the serial port is active by checking the hardware
configuration at boot up. Some CMOS configurations permit a serial port to be disabled. Make sure that this
port is Enabled.

Software Considerations Using SMDI (Type 1)

NOTE: The following information is for reference purposes only. All changes to these files can be made
through the Perfect Voice Office Pro Configuration Program.

The following steps should be taken to ensure proper SMDI integration with Perfect Voice Office Pro:

Verify the loading of the executable file (PERFECT.EXE) to ensure the correct argument is set.

C:\WINVM\PERFECT.EXE -SMDI

This argument is found in three different locations in a standard Windows 95 environment:

1. Right-click
on
the
Start button in the bottom left hand corner of the Windows 95 screen. Choose Open,
then double-click on the Programs icon. Next, double-click on the StartUp icon to pull up the StartUp
Window. From here, right-click once on the Perfect Voice Office Pro icon and select Properties. Select
the Shortcut tab and, beside the target field, you should see C:\WINVM\PERFECT.EXE SMDI. If not,
then add -SMDI after the path statement.

2. Right-click
on
the
Start button in the bottom left hand corner of the Windows 95 screen. Choose Open,
then double-click on the Programs icon. Next, double-click on the Perfect Voice Office Pro icon. From
here, right-click once on the Perfect Voice Office Pro icon and select Properties. Select the Shortcut tab
and, beside the target field, you should see C:\WINVM\PERFECT.EXE SMDI. If not, then add -
SMDI after the path statement.
I&M

3. From the main Windows 95 screen, right click on the Perfect Voice Office Pro icon and select Properties.
Select the Shortcut tab and, beside the target field, you should see C:\WINVM\PERFECT.EXE SMDI.
If not, then add -SMDI after the path statement.
?

· Verify to make sure that the extensions connected to your Voice Mail are defined in the file
C:\WINVM\PERFECT.INI. For example if the extensions are 400, 401, 402, and 403 make sure
these numbers appear in the PERFECT.INI as follows:

[Voice Mail Extensions]
Extension Connected to Port 1=400
Extension Connected to Port 2=401
Extension Connected to Port 3=402
Extension Connected to Port 4=403
`(etc... for each port in the system)

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
85

· Verify that PERFECT.INI file contains the correct settings. Refer to the PERFECT.INI Appendix for
description:

[SMDI Settings]
Com Port=2
Com Port Settings=1200,E,7,1
Number of Digits in SMDI=7
SMDI Debug Mode=No
Pad SMDI Digits with=Zero

· Verify that the C:\CONFIG.SYS is loading the correct device driver.

SMDI requires device drivers. As with all MS-DOS device drivers, a line beginning with "device=" must be
placed in the CONFIG.SYS file in the root directory of the boot disk. Also, as with other drivers, the item after
the "=" describes the path name of the device driver file (.SYS), which includes a complete drive and directory
specification. Verify that the following two lines are present in the CONFIG.SYS:

STACKS=0,0
DEVICE=SMDI.SYS /1=STD/L=8/N=12

The Device line command breaks down as follows:
DEVICE= DOS Command Line token
SMDI.SYS SMDI/Toolkit device driver file name.
/1=STD Serial I/O port configuration information - must be included. This value can be "/1" for COM1 or "/2"
for COM2. Be aware that this value is checked against the BIOS data for the base address communication port
(3F8 for COM1 or 2F8 for COM2). Some CMOS configurations permit a serial port to be disabled. Make
sure that this port is enabled.
/L=8
Number of lines or Voice Mail ports. This field is not optional. Modify it to inform the driver
of the total number of analog Voice Mail ports to be supported by the integration.

/N=12
Number of entries in the NAK queue. SMDI supports negative response to MWI commands
(INV and BLK). This Command is used to configure memory.

Computer Hardware Considerations Using SMDI (Type2)
Please note that if existing hardware is being used, you have the option to set the serial port for SMDI
I&M
communication to COM2 only. Make sure that the COM port is not utilized by any other device as it will be in
use by Perfect Voice Office Pro to communicate through SMDI.

?
Make sure the port exists. To verify, check to see if the serial port is active by checking the hardware
configuration as tlhe PC boots up. Some CMOS configurations permit a serial port to be Disabled. Make sure
that the SMDI Port you will be using is Enabled.

Software Consideration using SMDI (Type 2)
The following steps should be taken to ensure proper SMDI integration with Perfect Voice Office Pro.
· Verify the loading of the executable file (PERFECT.EXE) to ensure the correct argument is set. i.e.:
C:\WINVM\PERFECT.EXE -DKS

This argument is found in three different locations in a standard Windows 95 environment:

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

86

Appendix

1. Right-click
on
the
Start button in the bottom left hand corner of the Windows 95 screen. Choose Open,
then double-click on the Programs icon. Next, double-click on the StartUp icon to pull up the StartUp
Window. From here, right-click once on the Perfect Voice Office Pro icon and select Properties. Select
the Shortcut tab and, beside the target field, you should see C:\WINVM\PERFECT.EXE DKS. If not,
then add -DKS after the path statement.

2. Right-click
on
the
Start button in the bottom left hand corner of the Windows 95 screen. Choose Open,
then double-click on the Programs icon. Next, double-click on the Perfect Voice Office Pro icon. From
here, right-click once on the Perfect Voice Office Pro icon and select Properties. Select the Shortcut tab
and, beside the target field, you should see C:\WINVM\PERFECT.EXE DKS. If not, then add -DKS
after the path statement.

3. From the main Windows 95 screen, right click on the Perfect Voice Office Pro icon and select Properties.
Select the Shortcut tab and, beside the target field, you should see C:\WINVM\PERFECT.EXE DKS.
If not, then add -DKS after the path statement.

· Verify to make sure that the extensions connected to your Voice Mail are defined in the file
C:\WINVM\PERFECT.INI. for example if the extensions are 400, 401, 402, and 403, make sure these
numbers appear in the PERFECT.INI as follows:

[Voice Mail Extensions]
Extension Connected to Port 1=400
Extension Connected to Port 2=401
Extension Connected to Port 3=402
Extension Connected to Port 4=403
`(etc... for each port in the system)

· Verify that the PERFECT.INI file contains the correct settings. Refer to the PERFECT.INI Appendix
for description:

[SMDI Settings]
Com Port=2
Com Port Settings=1200,E,7,1
Number of Digits in SMDI=7
Pad SMDI Digits with=Zero
SMDI HANDSHAKING=Yes

I&M
SMDI with the Calista Board
The Calista PBXLink provides integration services to allow certain digital PBXs to interface seamlessly with a
?
Perfect Voice Office Pro system. The PBXLink connects to the PBX using a digital telephone line and to the
Perfect Voice Office Pro system using an RS-232 link. The PBXs supported and the corresponding digital
telephone that the PBXLink emulates is:
· Lucent ProLogix
8434
· Lucent Definity (2 wire) 8434
· Lucent Definity (4 wire) 7434
· Lucent System 75

7405
· Northern Telecom
M2616

The PBXLink uses information appearing on the emulated digital set to determine the original source and destination
of the calls being forwarded to Perfect Voice Office Pro. This information is then communicated to Perfect Voice
Office Pro on an RS-232 serial link using the industry standard "Centrex SMDI" protocol.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
87

Hardware Installation
To install the PBXLink ISA, the following steps should be followed:

· Ensure that there is space for a COM port in the computer receiving the PBXLink ISA. This process is
very similar to that of installing an internal modem (see the following section: Choosing a COM Port).
· Set the switches on the PBXLink ISA, and write down the values selected. The PBXLink ISA board is
clearly marked with the various switch settings. The parameters that need to be selected are:

1. COM port for SMDI (COM Slider)
2. Interrupt for SMDI COM port. (IRQ slider)
3. Speed for SMDI serial port. The default is 1200. (9600 when switch 1 is ON)
4. Parity for SMDI serial port. The default is E-7-1. (N-8-1 when switch 2 is ON)
5. All other switches need to be in the OFF position.
· Shut down the computer and unplug it from its power source.
· Select an empty ISA slot in the computer, remove the blanking plate and insert the PBXLink ISA card
fully into the slot. Always re-attach the screw holding PC cards into the computer.
· Replace all covers before powering up the computer.
· When the computer is running again run a terminal application to test the COM port settings and to
configure the card. You should configure the card BEFORE you plug in a PBX phone cable. At this
stage the LED on the back of the card should be on or flashing; if it is not, the card is not functioning
and is either not plugged into its ISA slot or is faulty. If this occurs ensure that switches 3-6 are off.

To test and configure the PBXLink ISA, the following steps should be followed:
· Run a suitable terminal emulation program. In windows, TERMINAL.EXE or HYPERTERMINAL is
good for this (if you do not have a suitable terminal emulation program, you can get a DOS program
called TERM.EXE from the Calista web site at www.calista.com). Select the COM port, speed and
parity setting matching what was selected when installing the card. If there is no such software
available, for example on a proprietary system, then exactly the same procedure as described here can
be carried out using the external management port. This requires a NUL modem cable to connect to a
PC or terminal. The default parameters are 9600 baud, n-8-1.
· In the terminal window type M followed by <Enter>. This will stop the SMDI port from sending
SMDI and will put the SMDI port into management mode. At this point you should see some text
similar to:

PBXLink ISA v 2.70
I&M

1. Configuration...
2. Monitor PBXLink...
?
3. Reboot/Download...

· At this point you can be sure the COM port is correctly configured and you can follow configuration
instructions. The Configuration menus are the same whether being accessed through the internal
SMDI port or through the external management port.
· NOTE: The SMDI port will not send any SMDI while it is in management mode. To return to SMDI
mode continue to press <Esc> until all the menus have been exited.
· At this point the port will continue to send SMDI.
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

88

Appendix

Selecting a COM Port
· Computers can support up to 4 standard COM ports (COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4).
· Most computers come with 2 COM ports built in, COM1 and COM2. If you don't need them both
(some computers need one for a mouse and one for a modem), disable one and set the PBXLink ISA
to the same settings. The COM port on the PBXLink ISA is set up using the slider marked Y. On
most computers COM ports are disabled in the BIOS setup program.
· Each active COM port requires its own interrupt. By default, COM1 and COM3 use Interrupt 4;
COM2 and COM4 use Interrupt 3. Select an interrupt for the COM port on the PBXLink ISA using
the slider Y.
· If your computer is to have more than 2 COM ports (e.g. by adding the PBXLink ISA) then one or
more COM ports need to be set to a different interrupt. This can be done on the PBXLink ISA using
slider Y. On most computers the interrupt for the built in COM ports can be selected using the BIOS
setup procedure. Do not attempt to share an interrupt between two COM ports or other devices.
· If any COM port is set to a different interrupt then the operating system, the software needs to be
informed of this. In Windows, this is done in the Control Panel, in the Advanced section of the Ports
application. This varies with different operating systems.

Please Refer to the Calista Manual for detailed Hardware and Software setup.

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
89

I
Appendix I: Installing a FAX Board
This section describes the installation procedure for installing a FAX board into the PC. The fax coprocessor
board must be a GammaLink board to work with the Perfect Voice Office Pro system drivers (included with
Perfect Voice Office Pro software package.)
Installing the GammaLink FAX Board
A minimum of an 80386 machine, at least 4 MB total system RAM and MS DOS 6.22 or greater is required for
implementation of any fax capability.

Before installation, check the package contents for the following items. If any items are missing, contact your
Teleco Sales Representative or Teleco Customer Support.
· Fax coprocessor board, software package, and manuals
· Sentinel key, programmed for Perfect Voice Office Pro, and Fax (other options may also be enabled).
NOTE: If Fax Services was requested on the original order from Teleco, then the fax coprocessor board and
software has been loaded prior to shipment.
If this is a field upgrade to add Fax to an existing system, complete the following steps for installation:
· The fax coprocessor board should be jumpered for I/O address 350H. This is the factory setting and
should not be changed.
NOTE: Check the fax board documentation to verify that the addresses on the coprocessor board are
correct.
· Install the fax coprocessor board. The board may be installed in any vacant slot in the PC chassis.
· Connect phone cord from the modular (RJ11) jack on the fax board (labeled "wall") to the telephone
extension number for the fax board.
Software Setup
Refer to "Setting Up Fax Services" in the Optional Applications section of this manual.
I&M
?
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

90

Appendix

J
Appendix J: System Prompts
The following pages list all of the prompts Perfect Voice Office Pro uses to answer and transfer calls. These
prompts are stored as MESS***.VOX files in the C:\WINVM directory where *** is the System Prompt
number listed preceding each prompt. The sole exception is the default company greeting, SAL000.VOX,
which resides in the C:\SALUTE directory. Use this list if you are re-recording any of these prompts.
NOTE: This list also contains alternate prompts used for special circumstances or for the Perfect Stay
hospitality application. These prompts are indicated by an 'A' or 'H' in the file name prefix following the
numbers, e.g. {MESS001A.VOX}.

Words that appear in italics are not actually part of the recorded prompt.

AUTO-ATTENDANT

{SAL000.VOX}
HELLO. THANK YOU FOR CALLING. ENTER THE EXTENSION OF THE PERSON YOU WISH TO SPEAK
WITH. IF YOU DO NOT KNOW THE EXTENSION, PRESS THE STAR KEY FOR A COMPANY DIRECTORY,
OR STAY ON THE LINE FOR FURTHER ASSISTANCE.

{MESS003.VOX}
HELLO. THANK YOU FOR CALLING.

{MESS004.VOX}
ENTER THE EXTENSION OF THE PERSON YOU WISH TO SPEAK WITH.

{MESS006.VOX}
IF YOU DO NOT KNOW THE EXTENSION, PRESS THE STAR KEY FOR A
COMPANY DIRECTORY, OR STAY ON THE LINE FOR FURTHER ASSISTANCE.

{MESS007.VOX}
I&M
PLEASE HOLD FOR ASSISTANCE.

{MESS008.VOX}
?
PLEASE HOLD WHILE I PAGE YOUR PARTY.

{MESS009.VOX}
GOOD-BYE. THANK YOU FOR CALLING.

{MESS010.VOX}
PLEASE HOLD.

{MESS011.VOX}
TRANSFERRING TO JANE DOE.

{MESS012.VOX}
PLEASE HOLD WHILE I PAGE TOM JONES.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
91

{MESS013.VOX}
ONE MOMENT, YOU HAVE A CALL.

{MESS014.VOX}
I DID NOT UNDERSTAND YOUR REQUEST, PLEASE TRY AGAIN.

{MESS015.VOX}
THAT EXTENSION IS BUSY;
TO TRY ANOTHER EXTENSION, PRESS 1;
RE-TRY THAT EXTENSION, PRESS 2;
TO LEAVE A MESSAGE, WAIT FOR THE TONE;
FOR ASSISTANCE, PRESS 0.

{MESS015A.VOX}
THAT EXTENSION IS BUSY;
TO TRY ANOTHER EXTENSION, ENTER IT NOW;
TO LEAVE A MESSAGE, WAIT FOR THE TONE;
FOR ASSISTANCE, PRESS 0.

{MESS015H.VOX}
THE GUEST YOU ARE CALLING IS CURRENTLY ON THE TELEPHONE. PLEASE LEAVE A MESSAGE
AFTER THE TONE OR PRESS ZERO TO TRANSFER TO THE OPERATOR.

{MESS016.VOX}
THERE IS NO ANSWER AT THAT EXTENSION
TO TRY ANOTHER EXTENSION, PRESS 1
TO LEAVE A MESSAGE, WAIT FOR THE TONE
FOR ASSISTANCE, PRESS 0.

{MESS016A.VOX}
THERE IS NO ANSWER AT THAT EXTENSION
TO TRY ANOTHER EXTENSION, ENTER IT NOW
TO LEAVE A MESSAGE, WAIT FOR THE TONE
FOR ASSISTANCE, PRESS ZERO

{MESS016H.VOX}
I&M
THE GUEST YOU ARE CALLING IS UNAVAILABLE. PLEASE LEAVE A MESSAGE AFTER THE TONE OR
PRESS ZERO TO TRANSFER TO THE OPERATOR.

?
{MESS017.VOX}
YOUR PARTY IS NOT IN THE OFFICE RIGHT NOW.
TO TRY ANOTHER EXTENSION, PRESS 1
TO LEAVE A MESSAGE, WAIT FOR THE TONE
FOR ASSISTANCE, PRESS ZERO.

{MESS017H.VOX}
THE GUEST YOU ARE TRYING TO REACH IS NO LONGER REGISTERED TO THIS ROOM. PLEASE PRESS
ZERO TO RETURN TO THE OPERATOR.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

92

Appendix

{MESS017A.VOX}
YOUR PARTY IS NOT CURRENTLY IN THE OFFICE
TO TRY ANOTHER EXTENSION, ENTER IT NOW
TO LEAVE A MESSAGE, WAIT FOR THE TONE
FOR ASSISTANCE, PRESS ZERO

{MESS018.VOX}
JOHN DOE IS OUT OF THE OFFICE AND WILL RETURN AT 3:30PM

{MESS019.VOX}
PLEASE ENTER YOUR AREA CODE AND TELEPHONE NUMBER.

{MESS020.VOX}
CALL FOR JOHN DOE

{MESS022.VOX}
LET ME REPEAT YOUR CHOICES SO THAT YOU MAY START OVER.

{MESS027.VOX}
YOUR CALLER HAS BEEN FOUND, A TRANSFER WILL BE MADE SHORTLY

{MESS028.VOX}
NO-ONE IS CURRENTLY LEAVING YOU A MESSAGE.

{MESS029.VOX}
THE PARTY YOU ARE CALLING IS NOW AVAILABLE

{MESS033.VOX}
ENTER THE EXTENSION OF THE PERSON YOU WISH TO REDIRECT YOUR CALL TO.

SCREENING
{MESS035.VOX}
WHO'S CALLING?
I&M

{MESS035A.VOX}
PLEASE STATE YOUR NAME AT THE TONE SO I MAY SAY WHO IS CALLING.
?

{MESS038.VOX}
YOUR CALLER IS JOHN DOE

{MESS040.VOX}
TO ACCEPT THIS CALL, PRESS 1,
TO SEND THE CALL TO ANOTHER EXTENSION, PRESS 2,
TO SEND THE CALLER TO YOUR MAILBOX, PRESS POUND.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
93

{MESS041.VOX}
TO ACCEPT THIS CALL, PRESS 1;
SEND THE CALL TO ANOTHER EXTENSION, PRESS 2;
RECORD THIS CALL, PRESS 3;
SEND THE CALLER TO YOUR MAILBOX, PRESS POUND.

{MESS043.VOX} "THERE ARE"
{MESS045.VOX} "CALLS AHEAD OF YOU"
THERE ARE "3" CALLS AHEAD OF YOU.

{MESS044.VOX} "THERE IS"
{MESS046.VOX} "CALL AHEAD OF YOU"
THERE IS 1 CALL AHEAD OF YOU

{MESS047.VOX}
TO TRY ANOTHER EXTENSION, PRESS 1;
TO REMAIN ON HOLD, PRESS 2;
TO LEAVE A MESSAGE, PRESS 5;
TO EXIT, PRESS STAR.

{MESS048.VOX}
THAT EXTENSION IS STILL BUSY.
TO TRY ANOTHER EXTENSION, PRESS 1
TO HOLD AND RETRY, PRESS 2
TO LEAVE A MESSAGE, PRESS 5
TO EXIT, PRESS STAR.

{MESS049.VOX}
THAT EXTENSION IS BUSY
TO TRY ANOTHER EXTENSION, PRESS 1
TO HOLD AND RETRY, PRESS 2
TO LEAVE A MESSAGE, PRESS 5
TO EXIT, PRESS STAR.

{MESS050.VOX}
I&M
THAT EXTENSION IS BUSY.
AND NO ONE ELSE IS HOLDING
TO TRY ANOTHER EXTENSION, PRESS 1
?
TO HOLD AND TRY AGAIN, PRESS 2
TO LEAVE A MESSAGE, PRESS 5
TO EXIT, PRESS STAR.

{MESS052.VOX}
THAT EXTENSION IS STILL BUSY, AND NO ONE ELSE IS HOLDING.
TO TRY ANOTHER EXTENSION, PRESS 1;
TO HOLD AND TRY AGAIN, PRESS 2
TO LEAVE A MESSAGE, PRESS 5
TO EXIT, PRESS STAR.
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

94

Appendix

{MESS053.VOX}
TO ADD A NOTIFICATION SCHEDULE, PRESS 1
REVIEW ALL SCHEDULES, PRESS 2;
CHANGE A SCHEDULE, PRESS 3;
DELETE A SCHEDULE, PRESS 4;
TURN NOTIFICATION ON OR OFF, PRESS 5;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.
RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS ZERO.

DIRECTORY ASSISTANCE

{MESS054.VOX}
WHEN YOU HEAR THE NAME OF THE PERSON YOU WISH TO BE TRANSFERRED TO, PRESS 1

{MESS055.VOX}
USING YOUR TELEPHONE KEYPAD,
SPELL OUT THE FIRST FEW LETTERS OF THE PERSON'S NAME
FOR THE LETTERS Q OR Z, PRESS 1
FOR A COMPLETE DIRECTORY, PRESS POUND.
TO RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS STAR
FOR ASSISTANCE PRESS ZERO

{MESS055A.VOX}
USING YOUR TELEPHONE KEYPAD,
SPELL OUT THE FIRST FEW LETTERS OF THE PERSON'S FIRST OR LAST NAME.
FOR THE LETTERS Q OR Z, PRESS 1;
FOR A COMPLETE DIRECTORY, PRESS POUND.
TO RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS STAR;
FOR ASSISTANCE, PRESS ZERO

{MESS057.VOX}
NO MATCHES WERE FOUND.
PLEASE RE-ENTER THE PERSON'S FIRST OR LAST NAME;
FOR THE LETTERS Q OR Z, PRESS 1
I&M

{MESS058.VOX}
NO MATCHES WERE FOUND
?
PLEASE, RE-ENTER THE PERSON'S LAST NAME.
FOR THE LETTERS Q OR Z, PRESS 1

{MESS059.VOX}
FOR A COMPLETE DIRECTORY, PRESS STAR.

{MESS060.VOX}
BLANK.

0 LENGTH FILE

{MESS061.VOX}
PRESS 1 FOR...

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
95

{MESS062.VOX}
PRESS 2 FOR...

{MESS063.VOX}
PRESS 3 FOR...

{MESS064.VOX}
PRESS 4 FOR...

{MESS065.VOX}
PRESS 5 FOR...

{MESS066.VOX}
PRESS 6 FOR...

{MESS067.VOX}
PRESS 7 FOR...

{MESS068.VOX}
PRESS 8 FOR...

{MESS069.VOX}
PRESS 9 FOR...

{MESS073.VOX}
ENTER THE TELEPHONE NUMBER OR NUMERIC MESSAGE TO BE SENT.
{MESS074.VOX}
YOU ENTERED

{MESS075.VOX}
THANK YOU. YOUR MESSAGE WILL BE SENT.

{MESS077.VOX}
THAT MAILBOX IS FULL, PLEASE TRY AGAIN LATER.
I&M

{MESS080.VOX}
?
RECORD YOUR MESSAGE AFTER THE TONE.

{MESS081.VOX}
TO TRY ANOTHER EXTENSION, PRESS 1,
TO LEAVE A MESSAGE, PRESS 5,
FOR ASSISTANCE, PRESS ZERO

{MESS082.VOX}
TO ACCEPT THIS MESSAGE, PRESS 1;
REVIEW, PRESS 2;
RE-RECORD, PRESS 3;
CONTINUE RECORDING, PRESS 4;
CANCEL YOUR MESSAGE, PRESS STAR.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

96

Appendix

{MESS083.VOX}
TO SEND YOUR MESSAGE WITH NORMAL DELIVERY, PRESS 1;
TO SEND YOUR MESSAGE WITH URGENT DELIVERY, PRESS 2.

{MESS084.VOX}
THERE ARE 10 SECONDS OF RECORDING TIME LEFT.

{MESS085.VOX}
TO SPEAK TO THE OPERATOR, PLEASE SAY YES AFTER THE TONE.

{MESS086.VOX}
IF YOU WOULD LIKE TO RECEIVE A RESPONSE FOR THIS MESSAGE, PRESS 1.

{MESS087.VOX}
YOUR CALLBACK CODE IS...

{MESS089.VOX}
TO SEND YOUR MESSAGE, PRESS1,
REVIEW PRESS 3,
RE-RECORD PRESS 2,
TO CONTINUE RECORDING PRESS 4,
TO ATTACH A FAX PRESS 5,
TO CANCEL YOUR MESSAGE PRESS STAR.

{MESS090.VOX}
MESSAGE SENT.

MESSAGE MANAGEMENT

{MESS100.VOX}
TO LISTEN TO NEW MESSAGES, PRESS 1.

I&M
{MESS101.VOX}
LISTEN TO SAVED MESSAGES, PRESS 2.

?
{MESS102.VOX}
SEND A NEW MESSAGE, PRESS 3,
MAILBOX OPTIONS, PRESS 4,
CHANGE YOUR LOGIN STATUS, PRESS 5,
UN-ERASE MESSAGES, PRESS 6,
PLAY ACTIVE FEATURES, PRESS 9,

RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS ZERO,
TO DISCONNECT, SIMPLY HANG UP.

{MESS103.VOX}
TO CONFIRM DELETION OF THIS MESSAGE PRESS 9,
OR PRESS STAR TO RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
97

{MESS104.VOX}
TO SEND A MESSAGE, PRESS 3;
RECORD YOUR PERSONAL GREETING, PRESS 4;
RECORD YOUR NAME PROMPT, PRESS 5;
CHANGE MAILBOX PASSWORD, PRESS 6;
RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS ZERO;
TO DISCONNECT, SIMPLY HANG UP.

{MESS105.VOX}
TO RECORD YOUR PERSONAL GREETING, PRESS 4;
TO RECORD YOUR NAME, PRESS 5;
TO CHANGE YOUR PASSWORD, PRESS 6;
TO DISCONNECT, SIMPLY HANG UP.

{MESS106.VOX}
TO RECOVER YOUR LAST DELETED MESSAGE, PRESS 1;
RECOVER ALL MESSAGES DELETED TODAY, PRESS 2.

{MESS108.VOX}
YOU DO NOT CURRENTLY HAVE ACCESS TO THAT FEATURE.

{MESS109.VOX}
THAT IS NOT A VALID ENTRY.

{MESS110.VOX} "YOU HAVE"
{MESS113.VOX} "NEW MESSAGE"
{MESS114.VOX} "SAVED MESSAGES"
YOU HAVE "1" NEW MESSAGE AND "2" SAVED MESSAGES

{MESS111.VOX}
YOU HAVE NO MESSAGES.

{MESS112.VOX} "NEW MESSAGES"
{MESS116.VOX} "SAVED MESSAGE"
YOU HAVE "4" NEW MESSAGES AND "1" SAVED MESSAGE
I&M

{MESS117.VOX}
TWO NEW MESSAGES.
?

{MESS118.VOX}
TWO SAVED MESSAGES.

{MESS119.VOX}
THIS MESSAGE IS A FAX..

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

98

Appendix

{MESS120.VOX}
TO SAVE THIS FAX, PRESS 1
PRINT AT A FAX MACHINE, PRESS 2
HEAR TIME AND DATE STAMP, PRESS 3

ERASE FAX, PRESS 4
FORWARD FAX, PRESS 5
REPLY TO FAX, PRESS 6
SKIP TO NEXT MESSAGE, PRESS POUND
RETURN TO PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.

{MESS121.VOX}
END OF NEW MESSAGES.

{MESS122.VOX}
END OF SAVED MESSAGES.

{MESS123.VOX}
TO SAVE THIS MESSAGE, PRESS 1
RE-PLAY MESSAGE, PRESS 2
HEAR TIME AND DATE STAMP, PRESS 3
ERASE MESSAGE, PRESS 4
FORWARD MESSAGE, PRESS 5
REPLY TO MESSAGE, PRESS 6
SKIP TO NEXT MESSAGE, PRESS POUND
RETURN TO PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR

{MESS124.VOX}
YOU MAY NOT REPLY TO A MESSAGE SENT BY AN OUTSIDE CALLER.

{MESS125.VOX} "RECEIVED YOUR MESSAGE ON"
RECEIVED YOUR MESSAGE ON TUESDAY, APRIL 11TH AT 1PM

{MESS131.VOX}
YOUR REPLY HAS BEEN SENT. WHAT WOULD YOU LIKE TO DO WITH THE ORIGINAL MESSAGE?

I&M
{MESS132.VOX}
TO SEND MESSAGE STANDARD, PRESS 1,
SEND MESSAGE CERTIFIED, PRESS 2.
?

{MESS133.VOX}
YOUR MESSAGE HAS BEEN SENT CERTIFIED.

{MESS134.VOX}
MESSAGE SAVED.

{MESS135.VOX}
MESSAGE MARKED FOR ERASE.

{MESS139.VOX}
ENTER THE NEXT RECIPIENT'S MAILBOX NUMBER; PRESS POUND WHEN FINISHED.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
99

{MESS140.VOX}
ENTER THE MAILBOX NUMBER OF THE PERSON YOU WISH
TO SEND THIS MESSAGE TO.

{MESS141.VOX}
ENTER THE MAILBOX NUMBER OF THE PERSON YOU WISH
TO SEND THIS MESSAGE TO; FOR A DIRECTORY, PRESS STAR.

{MESS142.VOX}
THAT IS AN INVALID MAILBOX, PLEASE TRY AGAIN.

{MESS143.VOX}
BEGIN SPEAKING AFTER THE TONE,
PRESS POUND WHEN FINISHED.

{MESS145.VOX}
TO ACCEPT THIS MESSAGE, PRESS 1;
REVIEW, PRESS 2;
RE-RECORD, PRESS 3;
CONTINUE RECORDING, PRESS 4;
CANCEL YOUR MESSAGE, PRESS STAR.

{MESS147.VOX}
NOTHING RECORDED.

{MESS148.VOX}
SCHEDULE DELETED.

{MESS152.VOX}
NOTIFICATION SCHEDULES.

{MESS153.VOX}
NOTIFICATION SCHEDULE.

I&M
{MESS155.VOX}
BLANK.

0 LENGTH FILE

?
{MESS156.VOX}
ENTER THE NOTIFICATION SCHEDULE NUMBER TO REVIEW.

{MESS160.VOX}
TO ADD A NOTIFICATION SCHEDULE, PRESS 1
REVIEW ALL SCHEDULES, PRESS 2;
CHANGE A SCHEDULE, PRESS 3;
DELETE A SCHEDULE, PRESS 4;
TURN NOTIFICATION ON OR OFF, PRESS 5;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.
RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS ZERO.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

100

Appendix

{MESS161.VOX}
TO BE NOTIFIED OF ALL MESSAGES, PRESS 1,
TO BE NOTIFIED OF URGENT MESSAGES, PRESS 2.

{MESS162.VOX}
YOUR OUTCALL NOTIFICATION TABLE IS FULL.

{MESS163.VOX}
ENTER THE OUTSIDE TELEPHONE NUMBER FOR NOTIFICATION;
PRESS POUND WHEN FINISHED.

{MESS166.VOX}
IF THIS NUMBER IS CORRECT, PRESS 1;
OTHERWISE, PRESS 2.

{MESS167.VOX}
IF THIS IS CORRECT, PRESS 1;
OTHERWISE, PRESS 2..

{MESS168.VOX}
ARE YOU SURE? PRESS 1 TO CONTINUE, OR PRESS POUND TO RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU.

{MESS170.VOX}
RECORD YOUR NOTIFICATION PROMPT AT THE TONE,
PRESS POUND WHEN FINISHED.

{MESS172.VOX}
ENTER THE 4 DIGIT NOTIFICATION START TIME,
HOUR THEN MINUTE.

{MESS173.VOX}
ENTER THE 4 DIGIT NOTIFICATION START DATE, MONTH THEN DAY - OR PRESS THE STARTING DAY
NUMBER; MONDAY IS *100, SUNDAY IS *700.
I&M

{MESS174.VOX}
ENTER THE 4 DIGIT NOTIFICATION STOP TIME, HOUR THEN MINUTE.
?

{MESS175.VOX}
ENTER THE 4 DIGIT NOTIFICATION STOP DATE, MONTH THEN DAY - OR PRESS THE ENDING DAY
NUMBER; MONDAY IS *100, SUNDAY IS *700.

{MESS176.VOX}
ENTER THE NOTIFICATION SCHEDULE NUMBER TO CHANGE

{MESS177.VOX}
THAT IS AN INVALID OUTCALL ENTRY.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
101

{MESS178.VOX}
ENTER THE NOTIFICATION SCHEDULE NUMBER TO DELETE;
TO DELETE ALL ENTRIES, PRESS STAR.

{MESS179.VOX}
NOTIFICATION IS NOW ACTIVE.

{MESS180.VOX}
NOTIFICATION IS NOW OFF.

{MESS181.VOX}
YOU WILL BE NOTIFIED FOR ALL NEW MESSAGES.

{MESS182.VOX}
YOU WILL BE NOTIFIED FOR ALL URGENT MESSAGES.

{MESS186.VOX}
THIS IS YOUR AUTOMATED RECEPTIONIST,
THERE ARE MESSAGES FOR JOHN DOE

{MESS189.VOX}
URGENT MESSAGE.

{MESS190.VOX}
NEW VOICE MESSAGE.

{MESS191.VOX}
NEW VOICE MESSAGES.

{MESS192.VOX}
NEW FAX MESSAGE.

{MESS193.VOX}
NEW FAX MESSAGES.
I&M

{MESS194.VOX}
NEW DATA MESSAGE.
?

{MESS195.VOX}
NEW DATA MESSAGES.

{MESS196.VOX}
NEW EMAIL MESSAGE.

{MESS197.VOX}
NEW EMAIL MESSAGES.

{MESS198.VOX}
ACCOUNT NUMBER.
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

102

Appendix

{MESS199.VOX}
HAS....

{MESS200.VOX}
ENTER THE MAILBOX NUMBER OF THE PERSON
YOU WISH TO SEND THIS MESSAGE TO.

{MESS202.VOX}
THAT IS AN INVALID MAILBOX NUMBER.

{MESS203.VOX}
TO RECORD MESSAGE PREFIX, PRESS 1
SEND MESSAGE WITHOUT PREFIX, PRESS 2

{MESS205.VOX}
MESSAGE FORWARDED.

WHAT WOULD YOU LIKE TO DO WITH THE ORIGINAL MESSAGE

{MESS230.VOX}
TO ADD A LIST, PRESS 1;
TO LISTEN TO AN EXISTING LIST, PRESS 2;
CHANGE A LIST, PRESS 3;

DELETE A LIST, PRESS 4;

RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.

{MESS233.VOX}
THERE ARE NO DISTRIBUTION LISTS AT THIS TIME.

{MESS235.VOX}
END OF LIST.

{MESS240.VOX}
ENTER THE LIST NUMBER TO CHANGE.

I&M
{MESS242.VOX}
THAT LIST NUMBER DOES NOT EXIST.

?
{MESS245.VOX}
TO ADD MEMBERS TO YOUR LIST, PRESS 1;
LISTEN TO LIST MEMBERS, PRESS 2;
CHANGE LIST NAME, PRESS 3;
DELETE MEMBERS FROM YOUR LIST, PRESS 4;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU PRESS STAR.

{MESS248.VOX}
END OF LIST.

{MESS255.VOX}
ENTER MAILBOX NUMBERS TO BE ADDED; PRESS POUND WHEN FINISHED.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
103

{MESS260.VOX}
ENTER MAILBOX NUMBERS TO BE DELETED; PRESS POUND WHEN FINISHED.

{MESS267.VOX}
RECORD LIST NAME AFTER THE TONE;
PRESS POUND WHEN FINISHED.

{MESS270.VOX}
TO ACCEPT, PRESS 1
RE-RECORD, PRESS 2
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.

{MESS272.VOX}
TO ADD MEMBERS TO THIS LIST, PRESS 1;
TO CONTINUE, PRESS 2;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.

{MESS275.VOX}
ENTER THE LIST NUMBER TO BE DELETED.

{MESS280.VOX}
ENTER THE LIST NUMBER TO SEND THIS MESSAGE TO.

{MESS281.VOX}
YOUR DISTRIBUTION LIST IS BEING PROCESSED. PLEASE WAIT FOR THE MAIN MENU PROMPT, OR
HANG UP AND CALL BACK LATER.

{MESS300.VOX}
ENTER THE ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD.

{MESS305.VOX}
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAIN MENU-
TO CONFIGURE MAILBOXES, PRESS 1;
CLASSES OF SERVICE, PRESS 2;
SYSTEM PARAMETERS PRESS 3;
I&M
SYSTEM PROMPTS, PRESS 4;
COMPANY MAINTENANCE, PRESS 5;
CHECK FAXES, PRESS 9;
?
RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS ZERO;
TO DISCONNECT, PRESS POUND.

{MESS306.VOX}
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAIN MENU-
TO CONFIGURE MAILBOXES, PRESS 1;
CLASSES OF SERVICE, PRESS 2,
SYSTEM PARAMETERS, PRESS 3;

SYSTEM PROMPTS, PRESS 4;
COMPANY MAINTENANCE, PRESS 5;
RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS ZERO;
DISCONNECT, PRESS POUND.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

104

Appendix

{MESS310.VOX}
THERE IS NO SUCH VOICE PROMPT.

{MESS311.VOX}
TO CHANGE SYSTEM TIME, PRESS 1;
SYSTEM DATE, PRESS 2;
OPERATION MODE, PRESS 3;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.

{MESS312.VOX}
THE OFFICE IS NOW OPEN.

{MESS313.VOX}
THE OFFICE IS NOW CLOSED.

{MESS317.VOX}
ENTER THE TWO DIGIT CLASS OF SERVICE;
TO RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.

{MESS320.VOX}
ENTER THE 3 DIGIT PARAMETER NUMBER.

{MESS321.VOX}
TO ACCEPT THIS PARAMETER, PRESS 1;
CHANGE THIS PARAMETER, PRESS 2;
SET THIS PARAMETER TO DEFAULT, PRESS 3;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.

{MESS322.VOX}
PARAMETER MODIFIED.

{MESS323.VOX}
ENTER THE PARAMETER NUMBER FOLLOWED BY THE NEW VALUE FOR THAT PARAMETER.
PRESS POUND WHEN COMPLETE.

I&M
{MESS324.VOX}
ENTER A NEW VALUE FOR THAT PARAMETER,
PRESS POUND WHEN COMPLETE.
?

{MESS326.VOX}
ENTER THE TWO DIGIT CLASS OF SERVICE NUMBER TO CHANGE.
TO RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.

{MESS329.VOX}
PRESS 1 TO REVIEW THIS CLASS OF SERVICE, PRESS 2 TO CHANGE.

{MESS341.VOX}
ENTER A SIX DIGIT DATE, YEAR THEN MONTH THEN DAY,
PRESS POUND WHEN COMPLETE.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
105

{MESS342.VOX}
ENTER A FOUR DIGIT TIME, HOUR THEN MINUTE,
PRESS POUND WHEN COMPLETE

{MESS343.VOX}
YOU HAVE ENTERED AN INCORRECT VALUE, PLEASE TRY AGAIN.

{MESS350.VOX}
FOR SYSTEM PROMPTS, PRESS 1
COMPANY GREETINGS, PRESS 2
SYSTEM SEGMENTS, PRESS 3

{MESS351.VOX}
ENTER THE MESSAGE SEGMENT NUMBER TO BE RECORDED.

{MESS354.VOX}
TO OPEN THE OFFICE, PRESS 1;
CLOSE THE OFFICE, PRESS 2;
SET SYSTEM HOLIDAYS, PRESS 3;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR;
RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS ZERO.

{MESS355.VOX}
FOR SYSTEM PROMPTS, PRESS 1
FOR COMPANY GREETINGS, PRESS 2

{MESS358.VOX}
ENTER THE THREE DIGIT SYSTEM PROMPT TO REVIEW

{MESS361.VOX}
TO ACCEPT, PRESS 1;
REVIEW, PRESS 2;
RE-RECORD PROMPT, PRESS 3;
EXIT, PRESS STAR.

I&M
{MESS370.VOX}
ENTER THE 3 DIGIT COMPANY GREETING TO CREATE OR REVIEW

?
{MESS380.VOX}
ENTER THE FIRST MAILBOX.

{MESS382.VOX}
ENTER THE LAST MAILBOX.

{MESS385.VOX}
TO CREATE THE RANGE OF MAILBOXES, PRESS 1;
DELETE RANGE, PRESS 3.

{MESS387.VOX}
ENTER THE TWO DIGIT CLASS OF SERVICE FOR THESE MAILBOXES.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

106

Appendix

{MESS395.VOX}
TO CONFIRM DELETION OF THESE MAILBOXES, PRESS 1;
TO RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.

{MESS400.VOX}
ENTER YOUR MAILBOX NUMBER.

{MESS404.VOX}
THAT MAILBOX IS INVALID, PLEASE TRY AGAIN.

{MESS405.VOX}
ENTER YOUR PASSWORD.

{MESS408.VOX}
TO CHANGE CALL BLOCKING, PRESS 1;
CHANGE CALL SCREENING, PRESS 2;
CHANGE PRE-PAGING, PRESS 3;
CHANGE POST-PAGING, PRESS 4;
CHANGE CALL QUEUING, PRESS 5;
CHANGE CALL FORWARDING, PRESS 6;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR;
RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS ZERO.

{MESS410.VOX}
TO CHANGE CALL BLOCKING, PRESS 1;
CHANGE CALL SCREENING, PRESS 2;
CHANGE PRE-PAGING, PRESS 3;
CHANGE POST-PAGING, PRESS 4;
CHANGE CALL QUEUING, PRESS 5;
CHANGE CALL FORWARDING, PRESS 6;
CHANGE LOCAL AREA PAGING, PRESS 7,
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR;
RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS ZERO.

{MESS412.VOX}
ENTER THE MAILBOX NUMBER YOU WOULD LIKE YOUR CALLS FORWARDED TO.
I&M

{MESS413.VOX}
CALL FORWARDING IS NOW OFF.
?

{MESS414.VOX}
YOUR CALLS WILL BE FORWARDED TO...

{MESS415.VOX}
ENTER THE MAILBOX YOU WOULD LIKE YOUR MESSAGES FORWARDED TO.

{MESS416.VOX}
ENTER THE 4 DIGIT DELAY TIME, HOUR THEN MINUTE.

{MESS417.VOX}
CALL SCREENING IS NOW OFF.

{MESS418.VOX}
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
107

CALL SCREENING IS NOW ACTIVE.

{MESS419.VOX} "MESSAGES WILL BE FORWARDED TO"
MESSAGES WILL BE FORWARDED TO JOHN DOE

{MESS420.VOX}
TO ERASE MESSAGES UPON FORWARDING, PRESS 1;
TO LEAVE MESSAGES IN YOUR MAILBOX AFTER FORWARDING, PRESS 2.

{MESS421.VOX}
MESSAGE FORWARDING IS NOW OFF.

{MESS422.VOX}
QUEUING IS NOW OFF.

{MESS423.VOX}
QUEUING IS NOW ACTIVE.

{MESS426.VOX}
YOU ARE NOW LOGGED IN.

{MESS427.VOX}
YOU ARE NOW LOGGED OUT.

{MESS450.VOX}
MAILBOX OPTIONS MENU-
TO RECORD GREETINGS, PRESS 1;
CHANGE NOTIFICATION, PRESS 2;
SET CALL TRANSFER OPTIONS, PRESS 3;
CHANGE AUTO-FORWARDING, PRESS 4;
DISTRIBUTION LIST MAINTENANCE, PRESS 5;
CHANGE PASSWORD, PRESS 9;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR;
RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS ZERO.

I&M
{MESS454.VOX}
TO ACCEPT THIS GREETING, PRESS 1;
REVIEW, PRESS 2;
?
RE-RECORD, PRESS 3;
ERASE, PRESS 4.

{MESS458.VOX}
MESSAGES WILL BE PLAYED LAST IN FIRST OUT.

{MESS459.VOX}
MESSAGES WILL BE PLAYED FIRST IN FIRST OUT.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

108

Appendix

{MESS470.VOX}
TO ENTER A NEW PASSWORD, PRESS 1;
LISTEN TO PASSWORD, PRESS 2;
REMOVE PASSWORD PROTECTION, PRESS 3;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR;

{MESS472.VOX}
YOUR MAILBOX IS NO LONGER PASSWORD PROTECTED.

{MESS473.VOX}
ENTER NEW PASSWORD, PRESS POUND WHEN COMPLETE

{MESS475.VOX}
RE-ENTER PASSWORD FOR CONFIRMATION, PRESS POUND WHEN COMPLETE

{MESS476.VOX}
YOUR ENTRIES DO NOT MATCH, PLEASE TRY AGAIN.

{MESS477.VOX}
YOUR NEW PASSWORD WILL BE ACTIVE THE NEXT TIME YOU CALL.

{MESS478.VOX}
AUTOMATIC MESSAGE DATE AND TIME STAMP IS ACTIVE.

{MESS479.VOX}
AUTOMATIC MESSAGE DATE AND TIME STAMP IS TURNED OFF.

{MESS480.VOX}
CALL BLOCKING IS ACTIVE.

{MESS481.VOX}
CALL BLOCKING IS TURNED OFF.

{MESS482.VOX}
I&M
PRE-PAGING IS OFF.

{MESS483.VOX}
?
PRE-PAGING IS ACTIVE.

{MESS484.VOX}
POST-PAGING IS OFF.

{MESS485.VOX}
POST-PAGING IS ACTIVE.

{MESS490.VOX}
TO REPEAT THIS GREETING, PRESS ZERO;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
109

{MESS491.VOX}
RECORD MENU-
TO CREATE OR REVIEW NO-ANSWER GREETING, PRESS 1;
BUSY GREETING, PRESS 2;
GONE HOME GREETING, PRESS 3;
NAME, PRESS 4;
OPTIONAL GREETINGS, PRESS 5;
SET YOUR ACTIVE GREETING, PRESS 6;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR;
RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS ZERO.

{MESS492.VOX}
ENTER THE 2 DIGIT GREETING TO RECORD

{MESS493.VOX}
ENTER THE 2 DIGIT GREETING TO ACTIVATE. TO RETURN TO DEFAULT GREETINGS PRESS 0

{MESS494.VOX}
SELECT THE LANGUAGE NUMBER TO RECORD YOUR PROMPTS FOR.

{MESS495.VOX}
YOU HAVE REACHED YOUR MESSAGE LIMIT
TO RECEIVE ADDITIONAL MESSAGES, YOU MUST REDUCE YOUR MESSAGE COUNT.

{MESS496.VOX}
DEFAULT GREETINGS ARE NOW ACTIVE

{MESS497.VOX}
YOUR ACTIVE GREETING IS NUMBER `FIVE'

{MESS498.VOX}
OPTIONAL GREETINGS ARE NOW OFF.

{MESS500.VOX}
<ONE MINUTE OF MUSIC USED IN THE
HOLDING
QUEUE.>
SOURCE
I&M

{MESS515.VOX}
ENTER THE TWO DIGIT COMPANY NUMBER.
?

{MESS516.VOX}
THAT IS NOT A VALID COMPANY NUMBER.

{MESS517.VOX}
TO LISTEN TO EXISTING HOLIDAYS, PRESS 1;
ADD A HOLIDAY, PRESS 2;
DELETE A HOLIDAY, PRESS 3;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR;
REPLAY OPTIONS, PRESS ZERO.
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

110

Appendix

{MESS520.VOX}
NO MORE HOLIDAYS.

{MESS522.VOX}
ENTER THE 4 DIGIT HOLIDAY DATE, MONTH THEN DAY.

{MESS524.VOX}
ENTER THE 3 DIGIT HOLIDAY GREETING

{MESS526.VOX}
HOLIDAY ADDED.

{MESS527.VOX}
ENTER THE 4 DIGIT HOLIDAY DATE TO DELETE, MONTH THEN DAY.

{MESS529.VOX}
HOLIDAY DELETED.

{MESS562.VOX}
THIS IS AN AUTOMATED CALL;
TO DISCONNECT, PRESS 1.

{MESS563.VOX}
THE FOLLOWING AMIS MESSAGE WAS NOT DELIVERED.

{MESS620.VOX}
THERE ARE NEW UNRECEIVED FAXES.

{MESS621.VOX}
THERE ARE NO UNRECEIVED FAXES.

FAX UPLOAD

I&M
{MESS622.VOX}
TO SAVE THIS FAX AS A DOCUMENT, PRESS 1;

ERASE THIS FAX, PRESS 2;
?
SKIP TO THE NEXT FAX, PRESS POUND;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.

{MESS624.VOX}
ENTER THE DOCUMENT NUMBER TO SAVE THE FAX AS.

{MESS625.VOX}
DOCUMENT SAVED.

{MESS626.VOX}
ERROR SAVING DOCUMENT; YOU MAY HAVE TO RE-FAX THIS DOCUMENT TO SAVE IT PROPERLY.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
111

{MESS627.VOX}
THERE ARE MORE UNRECEIVED FAXES.

{MESS628.VOX}
NO MORE UNRECEIVED FAXES.

{MESS629.VOX}
TO CONFIRM THE DELETION OF THIS FAX, PRESS 9;
CANCEL AND RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR;

{MESS630.VOX}
FAX MARKED FOR ERASE.

{MESS631.VOX}
ERROR ERASING FAX.

{MESS638.VOX}
ENTER THE MAILBOX NUMBER OF THE PERSON YOU WISH TO SEND THIS FAX TO.

{MESS640.VOX}
AT THE SOUND OF THE FAX TONE, PRESS START ON YOUR FAX MACHINE

{MESS641.VOX}
I'M SORRY, ALL FAX PORTS ARE IN USE
PLEASE TRY AGAIN LATER

{MESS650.VOX}
TO CHANGE THE MAILBOX LANGUAGE, PRESS 3.

{MESS680.VOX}
PLEASE ENTER YOUR AREA CODE AND FAX NUMBER.

{MESS730.VOX}
I&M
ENTER YOUR ACCESS CODE.

{MESS740.VOX}
?
ENTER THE DOCUMENT NUMBER TO BE FAXED.

{MESS742.VOX}
YOU HAVE ENTERED AN INVALID DOCUMENT NUMBER, PLEASE TRY AGAIN.

{MESS743.VOX}
DOCUMENT HAS BEEN SENT.

{MESS744.VOX}
ENTER THE AREA CODE AND FAX NUMBER OF THE RECEIVING FAX MACHINE.
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

112

Appendix

{MESS745.VOX}
YOUR FAX WILL BE SENT TO...

{MESS746.VOX}
WE WOULD LIKE TO IDENTIFY YOU ON THE COVER PAGE OF YOUR FAX,
PLEASE ENTER YOUR EXTENSION NUMBER NOW
PRESS POUND WHEN COMPLETE

{MESS747.VOX}
`555-1212' ..... IS AN INVALID FAX NUMBER

{MESS755.VOX}
TO SEND TO YOUR DEFAULT FAX MACHINE, PRESS 1;
TO SELECT ANOTHER MACHINE, PRESS 2

{MESS756.VOX}
TO SEND TO YOUR DEFAULT FAX MACHINE, PRESS 1;
SELECT ANOTHER MACHINE, PRESS 2;
SAVE AS A FAX-ON-DEMAND DOCUMENT, PRESS 4.

{MESS757.VOX}
TO SEND TO YOUR DEFAULT FAX MACHINE, PRESS 1;
SELECT ANOTHER MACHINE, PRESS 2;
SEND THIS FAX TO A NETWORK PRINTER, PRESS 3.

{MESS758.VOX}
TO SEND TO YOUR DEFAULT FAX MACHINE, PRESS 1;
SELECT ANOTHER MACHINE, PRESS 2;
SEND THIS FAX TO A NETWORK PRINTER, PRESS 3;
SAVE AS A FAX-ON-DEMAND DOCUMENT, PRESS 4.

TUTORIAL

{MESS800.VOX}
I&M
WELCOME TO YOUR NEW VOICE MESSAGING SYSTEM. OVER THE NEXT FEW MINUTES WE WILL
INTRODUCE YOU TO SOME OF THE FEATURES OF THE SYSTEM AND HELP YOU INITIALIZE YOUR
MAILBOX.
IF YOU WISH TO EXIT THE TUTORIAL AT ANY POINT, PRESS THE STAR KEY LOCATED
?
ON THE BOTTOM LEFT HAND CORNER OF YOUR TELEPHONE KEYPAD.

{MESS801.VOX}
YOUR MAILBOX IS WHERE ALL YOUR MESSAGES WILL BE STORED AND ALSO WHERE YOU CAN
SEND MESSAGES TO OTHERS IN YOUR COMPANY. TO KEEP YOUR MAILBOX SECURE YOU SHOULD
ENTER A PASSWORD. YOUR PASSWORD CAN BE ONE TO 15 DIGITS IN LENGTH, AND CANNOT START
WITH A ZERO. PLEASE ENTER YOUR NEW PASSWORD NOW.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
113

{MESS802.VOX}
CALLERS WILL HEAR ONE OF THREE PERSONAL GREETINGS WHEN THEY ARE LEAVING A MESSAGE
FOR YOU. FIRST, THERE IS THE NO-ANSWER GREETING. THIS GREETING IS HEARD WHEN YOU ARE
NOT AT YOUR DESK BUT IN THE OFFICE. TRY TO CHANGE THIS GREETING AS OFTEN AS POSSIBLE,
AND INCLUDE YOUR NAME AND CURRENT DATE IN ALL MESSAGES. AN EXAMPLE OF THIS PROMPT
WOULD BE " HI, THIS IS JANE ON JANUARY 15TH. I'M IN TODAY BUT I CAN'T TAKE YOUR CALL RIGHT
NOW. PLEASE LEAVE A MESSAGE AT THE TONE AND I WILL RETURN YOUR CALL AS SOON AS
POSSIBLE. THANK YOU". YOU WILL NOW BE ASKED TO RECORD YOUR NO-ANSWER GREETING.

{MESS803.VOX}
THE BUSY GREETING WILL LET CALLERS KNOW THAT YOU ARE ON THE PHONE.
AN EXAMPLE WOULD BE, "HI, THIS IS JANE. I'M ON THE PHONE RIGHT NOW AND CAN'T TAKE YOUR
CALL. PLEASE LEAVE A MESSAGE AFTER THE TONE, AND I WILL RETURN YOUR CALL AS SOON AS
POSSIBLE. THANK YOU." YOU WILL NOW BE ASKED TO RECORD YOUR BUSY GREETING.

{MESS804.VOX}
THE GONE HOME GREETING MAY BE ACTIVATED WHEN YOUR WORKDAY IS OVER. THIS PROMPT
WILL PLAY AUTOMATICALLY WHEN YOU LOG OUT OF THE SYSTEM. AN EXAMPLE WOULD BE, "HI,
THIS IS JANE. I HAVE GONE HOME FOR THE DAY. PLEASE LEAVE A MESSAGE AFTER THE TONE, AND
I WILL RETURN YOUR CALL TOMORROW. THANK YOU." YOU WILL NOW BE ASKED TO RECORD
YOUR GONE HOME GREETING.

{MESS805.VOX}
THE NEXT PROMPT TO RECORD IS YOUR NAME. IT CONSISTS OF YOUR FIRST AND LAST NAME. THIS
PROMPT IS PLAYED IN A VARIETY OF PLACES, AND WILL IDENTIFY YOUR MAILBOX TO CALLERS
LEAVING YOU MESSAGES. AN EXAMPLE OF A NAME PROMPT IS " JANE JACKSON". YOU WILL NOW
BE ASKED TO RECORD YOUR NAME PROMPT.

{MESS806.VOX}
FINALLY, IN ORDER TO REGISTER YOU IN THE COMPANY DIRECTORY YOU WILL HAVE TO SPELL
THE FIRST THREE LETTERS OF YOUR LAST NAME. CALLERS WHO DO NOT KNOW YOUR EXTENSION
CAN ACCESS YOUR MAILBOX BY SPELLING YOUR LAST NAME IN THE COMPANY DIRECTORY. FOR
EXAMPLE IF YOUR LAST NAME IS "JACKSON" PRESS 522. PLEASE ENTER THE THREE LETTERS OF
YOUR LAST NAME NOW.

{MESS807.VOX}
I&M
THIS COMPLETES YOUR MAILBOX TUTORIAL. IF YOU WISH TO MAKE ADDITIONAL CHANGES TO
YOUR PROMPTS, YOU CAN FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS IN YOUR USER'S GUIDE. IF YOU HAVE ANY
QUESTIONS ABOUT USING YOUR NEW MAILBOX, YOU MAY ASK YOUR SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR.
?
THANK YOU.

{MESS808.VOX}
SINCE YOU HAVE DECIDED TO NOT TO CARRY OUT YOUR TUTORIAL, YOU WILL NEED TO FOLLOW
THE INSTRUCTIONS IN YOUR USER'S GUIDE TO CHANGE YOUR PROMPTS AND PASSWORD. IF YOU
HAVE ANY QUESTIONS ABOUT USING YOUR NEW MAILBOX, YOU MAY ASK YOUR SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATOR. THANK YOU.

{MESS820.VOX}
GOOD MORNING! THIS IS YOUR WAKE UP CALL.
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

114

Appendix

{MESS821.VOX}
WELCOME TO YOUR GUEST MESSAGING CENTER. THE SYSTEM WILL NOTIFY YOU WHEN YOU HAVE
ANY NEW MESSAGES BY LIGHTING YOUR MESSAGE WAITING LIGHT. YOU MAY RETRIEVE YOUR
MESSAGES BY DIALING THE MESSAGE CENTER ACCESS NUMBER. AFTER LISTENING TO YOUR
MESSAGES FOLLOW PROMPTED INSTRUCTIONS. IF YOU NEED ANY FURTHER ASSISTANCE PLEASE
CONTACT A GUEST SERVICE AGENT. THANK YOU FOR USING PERFECT GUEST MESSAGING BY
TELECO.

{MESS899.VOX}
PRESS 1 FOR YES, PRESS 2 FOR NO.

{MESS900.VOX}
ALLOW MESSAGE LIGHTS.

{MESS901.VOX}
ALLOW BEEPER MESSAGE DELIVERY.

{MESS902.VOX}
ALLOW PHONE MESSAGE DELIVERY.

{MESS903.VOX}
ALLOW LONG DISTANCE MESSAGE DELIVERY.

{MESS904.VOX}
ALLOW CALL SCREENING.

{MESS905.VOX}
ALLOW CALL FORWARDING.

{MESS906.VOX}
ALLOW CALL BLOCKING.

{MESS907.VOX}
ALLOW BUSY HOLD.
I&M

{MESS908.VOX}
ALLOW CALL QUEUING.
?

{MESS909.VOX}
ALLOW PRE-TRANSFER PAGING.

{MESS910.VOX}
ALLOW POST-TRANSFER PAGING.

{MESS911.VOX}
ALLOW DISTRIBUTION LISTS.

{MESS912.VOX}
ALLOW DIRECTORY REGISTRATION.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
115

{MESS913.VOX}
ALLOW MESSAGE CONFIRMATION.

{MESS914.VOX}
ALLOW MESSAGE RECOVERY.

{MESS915.VOX}
ALLOW LOGIN / LOGOUT.

{MESS916.VOX}
ALLOW ACCESS TO ADMINISTRATOR FUNCTIONS.

{MESS917.VOX}
ENTER MAXIMUM NUMBER OF MESSAGES ALLOWED.

{MESS918.VOX}
ENTER MAXIMUM MESSAGE LENGTH.

{MESS919.VOX}
ENTER MAXIMUM DAYS TO SAVE MESSAGES.

{MESS920.VOX}
ENTER MAXIMUM RINGS FOR CALL PROGRESS.

{MESS921.VOX}
FOR NO TRANSFER SUPERVISION, PRESS 1,
FOR BUSY ONLY SUPERVISION, PRESS 2,
FOR BUSY NO ANSWER SUPERVISION, PRESS 3,
FOR MULTILINGUAL SUPERVISION, PRESS 4.

{MESS922.VOX}
ENTER MAILBOX LANGUAGE NUMBER.

{MESS930.VOX}
I&M
THERE HAS BEEN A SYSTEM PROBLEM. PLEASE HANG-UP AND TRY YOUR CALL AGAIN LATER.

?
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

116

Appendix

ANSWER.VOX Answer.
CMDCONF.VOX
I think I heard...
DPOUND.VOX Pound.
DSTAR.VOX Star.
HANGUP.VOX
Sorry you are having trouble. Please call
again later. Goodbye.
MULTIPLE.VOX
The following names match your
selection...
NAMECONF.VOX
Did you say..?
RETRY.VOX
I'm sorry, can you please repeat that?
SAYNO.VOX Say
no.
SAYYES.VOX
When you hear the name of the person you
are trying to reach, say yes or press 1.
STOPXFER.VOX
To stop the transfer to...

SEGMENTED SPEECH

{1.SEG}
ZERO

{2.SEG}
ONE

{3.SEG}
TWO
I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
117

{4.SEG}
THREE

{5.SEG}
FOUR

{6.SEG}
FIVE

{7.SEG}
SIX

{8.SEG}
SEVEN

{9.SEG}
EIGHT

{10.SEG}
NINE

{11.SEG}
TEN

{12.SEG}
ELEVEN

{13.SEG}
TWELVE

{14.SEG}
THIRTEEN

{15.SEG}
FOURTEEN

I&M
{16.SEG}
FIFTEEN

?
{17.SEG}
SIXTEEN

{18.SEG}
SEVENTEEN

{19.SEG}
EIGHTEEN

{20.SEG}
NINETEEN

{21.SEG}
TWENTY
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

118

Appendix

{22.SEG}
THIRTY

{23.SEG}
FORTY

{24.SEG}
FIFTY

{25.SEG}
SIXTY

{26.SEG}
SEVENTY

{27.SEG}
EIGHTY

{28.SEG}
NINETY

{29.SEG}
HUNDRED

{30.SEG}
THOUSAND

{31.SEG}
MILLION

{32.SEG}
CENTS

{33.SEG}
RECORD SILENCE

I&M
{34.SEG}
AM

?
{35.SEG}
PM

{36.SEG}
SECONDS

{37.SEG}
MINUTES
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
119

{38.SEG}
HOURS

{39.SEG}
MONTH

{40.SEG}
DAY

{41.SEG}
YEAR

{42.SEG}
JANUARY

{43.SEG}
FEBRUARY

{44.SEG}
MARCH

{45.SEG}
APRIL

{46.SEG}
MAY

{47.SEG}
JUNE

{48.SEG}
JULY

{49.SEG}
AUGUST

I&M
{50.SEG}
SEPTEMBER

?
{51.SEG}
OCTOBER

{52.SEG}
NOVEMBER

{53.SEG}
DECEMBER

{54.SEG}
STAR
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

120

Appendix

{55.SEG}
POUND

{56.SEG}
FLASH HOOK

{57.SEG}
COMMA

{58.SEG}
NUMBER

{59.SEG}
OH

{60.SEG}
MESSAGE

{61.SEG}
LESS THAN

{62.SEG}
EQUALS

{63.SEG}
GREATER THAN

{64.SEG}
QUESTION

{65.SEG}
AT

{66.SEG}
A

I&M
{67.SEG}
TODAY

?
{68.SEG}
YESTERDAY

{69.SEG}
MONDAY

{70.SEG}
TUESDAY

{71.SEG}
WEDNESDAY

{72.SEG}
THURSDAY
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
121

{73.SEG}
FRIDAY

{74.SEG}
SATURDAY

{75.SEG}
SUNDAY

{76.SEG}
K

{77.SEG}
L

{78.SEG}
M

{79.SEG}
N

{80.SEG}
O

{81.SEG}
P

{82.SEG}
Q

{83.SEG}
R

{84.SEG}
S

I&M
{85.SEG}
T

?
{86.SEG}
U

{87.SEG}
V

{88.SEG}
W
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

122

Appendix

{89.SEG}
X

{90.SEG}
Y

{91.SEG}
Z

{92.SEG}
EXTENSION

{93.SEG}
ADDED

{94.SEG}
CHANGED

{95.SEG}
DELETED

{96.SEG}
GREETING

{97.SEG}
MESSAGES

{98.SEG}
THROUGH

{99.SEG}
FROM

{100.SEG}
RANGE

I&M
{101.SEG}
PARAMETER

?
{102.SEG}
TIME

{103.SEG}
DATE

{104.SEG}
YES

{105.SEG}
NO
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
123

{106.SEG}
ENTRY

{107.SEG}
TELEPHONE

{108.SEG}
BOX

{109.SEG}
LIST

I&M
?
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

124

Appendix

K
Appendix K: Backup Procedures
Telephony Office-LinX 2000 has a built-in backup procedure to back up databases every time the
REORGanization utility is run (usually every night). Those who wish to backup files to another drive or a tape
backup can also do this.

Built-in Backup Procedure
Every night at 3:00 AM (default can be defined), the voice mail system shuts down and runs the
REORGanization utility. This program copies all of the databases and their associated index files to a sub-
directory, reindexes all of the databases, runs any batch procedures that were defined, then starts up again. The
files are backed up to a directory called C:\~OLDDB~. There is a different directory in here for every day of
the month so that recovery from any time of the month is possible. The information that is backed up is as
follows:

Filename
File Type
Relevant files

COMP*.*
Company Database
All information on the company screen
DBNAME*.*
Dial By Name Database
Alternate Spellings for all mailboxes
DISTFILE*.*
Distribution Lists Database All mailbox distribution lists
HOL*.*
Holiday Database
All system holidays that exist
MAIL*.*
Mailbox Database
All mailbox information
MSG*.*
Messages Database
All messages for all mailboxes
NOT*.*
Notify Database
All records indicating message lights and outcall
notification that is pending
OFF*.*
Offsite Database
All of the mailbox notification schedules

To enable this option, follow these steps:
1. Shut down Telephony Office-LinX 2000 (File, Shutdown, Wait for End of Activity).
2. Choose Start, Programs, Telephony Office-LinX 2000, and TOL Configuration Wizard.
I&M
3. Select the Manual Configuration button.
4. Select Reorganization Settings from the menu and click the Modify button.
5. Verify that the option Backup Files Before Reorg is set to Yes.
?
6. Click the OK button, then the Finish button.
7. Start Telephony Office-LinX 2000 again. The files will be automatically backed up at 3:00 AM
(default).

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
125

Forced Backup Procedure - To Separate Drive
Those who wish to perform a more in-depth backup can do so by putting the desired commands inside a batch
file, and then telling the voice mail system to run this file just before REORG is run each night. The backup
can be to another directory, another disk drive, a tape drive or a zip drive. The files that you can choose to back
up are as follows:
C:\GRT

Filename File
Type

*.GR1
Personal greetings for each mailbox (* represents mailbox number)
*.GR2
Busy greetings for each mailbox (* represents mailbox number)
*.GR3
Gone home greetings for each mailbox (* represents mailbox number)
*.NAM
Name prompts for each mailbox (* represents mailbox number)

*.GXX
Represents mailbox optional greeting, where XX is the greeting number (01-99)
(* represents mailbox number)

*_YY.GR1
Represents personal greetings in a language other than default (YY represents
the language number); all of the above scenarios apply to the languages

C:\MSGS

Filename File
Type

*.MSG
All new and saved messages that are in the voice mail system (* represents the
sequential message number)
*.FAX
All new and saved fax messages that are in Users' mailboxes (* represents the
sequential fax number)

C:\SALUTE

Filename File
Type

I&M
SALXXX.VOX
All greetings and salutations for companies and voice menus (XXX represents
the salutation number)

?
C:\VTR

Filename File
Type

*.VMN
All existing voice menus

C:\WINVM

Filename File
Type

*.DBF
All database files (broken down in table under Built-In Backup Procedure)
*.NDX
The associated index files for the databases
*.DAT
Data files for parameters, Classes of Service, schedules, and AMIS sites, etc.
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

126

Appendix

*.EXE
Executable files (can be recovered from CD)
*.VOX
System Prompts (can be recovered from CD)
*.BAT
Batch file to load board drivers (can be recovered from CD)

Once you have chosen the files you wish to backup, enter the desired commands into a text file and save it with
a BAT extension. To activate this batch file, perform these steps:
1. Shut down Telephony Office-LinX 2000 (File, Shutdown, Wait for End of Activity).
2. Choose Start, Programs, Telephony Office-LinX 2000, and TOL Configuration Wizard.
3. Select the Manual Configuration button.
4. Select Reorganization Settings from the menu and click the Modify button.
5. Under the Batch File to Run at Reorg frame, select the Browse button and choose the batch file that
you created.
6. Click the OK button, then the Finish button.
7. Start Telephony Office-LinX 2000 again. The files will be automatically backed up at 3:00 AM
(default).

NOTE: It is recommended that you change the system date and time to test your batch file. Don't forget to set
the date and time back again.

Recovering Files from a Backup
If the files were simply copied to another location, copy them back from their copied directory or drive and put
them into their appropriate directories, as listed in the above tables. Say Yes to overwrite any files when
prompted. If it necessary to uncompress the files first, do so in a separate location, then copy them into their
appropriate directories, as listed in the above tables. Say Yes to overwrite any files when prompted.

I&M

?

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
127

L
Appendix L: PcAnywhere
PcAnywhere is a Remote Maintenance utility that Esnatech uses to troubleshoot voice mail systems and assist
dealers in performing routine maintenance. To connect to PcAnywhere, both a Remote version and a Host
version are required. The Host version is installed on the Telephony Office-LinX server and is installed on all
TOL turnkey systems that are shipped from Esnatech; both Esnatech and the dealer use the remote version to
perform maintenance.

To install PcAnywhere (Remote or Host), follow the instructions provided in the PcAnywhere box. To set
PcAnywhere to activate whenever Window starts up, follow these instructions.

1. If PcAnywhere is not already running, open it (Start, Programs, pcANYWHERE32, pcANYWHERE (It
may also reference Symantec pcANYWHERE).
2. Ensure that the button at the top that says Be a Host PC is activated.
3. Select the Modem icon, then choose File, Properties from the menu (or right mouse click and select
Properties).
4. Choose the Settings tab, and verify that, under the Host Startup frame, the Launch with Windows and
the Run Minimized boxes are checked. This is all that is required for somebody to call into the site.
I&M
?

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

128

Appendix

5. If you wish to add a password, you can do so by selecting the Protect Item tab at this point and
entering a password, then confirming the password in the next field (Figure R-2).

Any other desired functions or assistance with use can be obtained from the PcAnywhere manuals.

I&M

?

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
129

M
Appendix M: Glossary
ACCUCALL
A utility developed from Rhetorex that teaches the Rhetorex voice board the different tones that the telephone system
generates.

AMIS (AUDIO MESSAGING INTERCHANGE SPECIFICATION)
An industry standard for networking voice mail systems that controls how voice messaging products from various
manufacturers interface with each other.

ADPCM
(Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation) A method of digitizing an analog signal where the sample value is
relative to the last sample. This format requires less disk space than the linear format; however, it may not be able to
reproduce the original signal well if amplitude fluctuations are too large.

ALTERNATE LANGUAGE
The system is available, at extra charge, with voice prompts in alternate languages -- English, French, German, Spanish,
Italian, Cantonese, Mandarin, Japanese, Arabic, Farsi, Russian, Polish, Hungarian, Greek, Thai, and Portuguese. The
language for each mailbox can be specified individually. Ask your Sales Representative for the most current list of
languages.

ANALOG
A method of telephony transmission in which the information from the source (for example, speech in a human
conversation) is converted into an electrical signal that varies continuously over a range of amplitude values. Also used
to refer to applications that use loop start signaling instead of digital signaling.

ARCHIVE
An option in the Desktop Interface application that allows the User to save message indefinitely.

ARGUMENTS
Additional command line information an application may need to do its job. For example, in a Voice Menu, if the
option to prompt the user for an answer is selected (Ask Question), other arguments such as the Prompt Number of the
question and the Mailbox in which to store the answer, are necessary.

ASCII
(American Standard Code for Information Interchange) A computer industry standard for representing letters, numbers,
punctuation, etc.
I&M

AUDIOTEX
See Voice Menu.
?

AUTO ATTENDANT
A telephony feature where incoming calls are answered by a recorded greeting and instructions to the caller. Callers
can direct their calls by pressing keys on their telephone keypads to make selections from Voice Menus.

BIOS
Basic Input-Output System. The set of permanently stored system service programs needed to manage the PC and
consisting of drivers and other software to control peripheral units.

BITMAP (BMP)
A raster graphic file format.

BITS PER SAMPLE (BPS)
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

130

Appendix

Determines the quality of a digital sample of a voice signal. For example, a 4 bit sample allows 16 unique values while
a 3 bit sample allows only 8.

BOX
See Mailbox.

CADENCE
A repeating cycle or pattern of tones and silence intervals generated by an audio signal.

CALLER
Anyone whose call routes through the Voice Mail system.

CALLER OPTIONS
Options that allow you to select an alternate routing for your call if the extension you are calling is busy or does not
answer.

CALL PROGRESS
The act of listening for the tones the telephone switch generates, analyzing them (Ring, Busy, Fast Busy), and directing
the call according to the response received.

CALL PROGRESSION TONE
An audible tone sent from the telephone system that indicates the progress of a call. Call progression tones include dial
tones, busy tones, and ring tones.

CALL ROUTING OPTIONS
Options that allow callers to select an alternate route for their calls if the extension they are calling is busy or does not
answer.

CENTREX
See Telephone System.

CHANNEL
In DOS, a channel is a line plus a VP resource (a logical path used for voice processing).

CLASS OF SERVICE
A list of pre-defined settings. Each mailbox is assigned to a class of service, depending on the features requested.

CLIENT
Workstations (or software on the workstations) that request information from a network server. The Desktop Interface
is client software.
I&M

CLIENT/SERVER
A networking technique where one computer (the server) sends information or provides services to other computers (
?
the clients) in response to commands sent by the clients.

CLOSED NETWORK
A group of separate sites, requiring communication with each other, who have completed the programming required to
allow them to exchange voice mail messages. All sites in a closed network must use Perfect Voice Office Pro
equipment.

CLUSTERED SERVER
One of a group of Voice Mail servers that are connected using Voice Mail Server Clustering, or AMIS. Clustered
servers can exchange users' voice messages, enabling a user to send a voice message to another Voice Mail User in a
remote location.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
131

CO (CENTRAL OFFICE)
A telephone company location that provides switching for local telephone subscribers.

CONFIGURATION FILE
A file used by the voice board drivers to obtain initialization information about specific boards in your system.

CONTROL BUTTON
A set of buttons, similar to the controls on a tape recorder, which appear in the Message Control Panel and that allow
you to control recording and playback of messages.

CPE
Customer Premise Equipment

CYCLE
A complete signal sequence consisting of an on period (sound) and an off period (silence).

DATE COLUMN
The Message List column on a Desktop Interface Messages Window showing the date that each message was received.

DEFAULT
A preset value used by the software unless the user enters over-riding values.

DEFAULT VALUE
A preset value that is used by software in the absence of overwriting values entered by the user.

DIAL BY NAME DIRECTORY
A directory of last names and alternate name spellings that callers can access at the Auto Attendant or as an option in a
Voice Menu.

DIALING STRING
The actual number that Voice Mail dials. For example, a dialing string is entered when setting up a notification
schedule, or when defining the extension of a mailbox.

DID (DIRECT INWARD DIALING)
The ability for a caller outside a company to dial an internal extension directly without going through an attendant or
entering an extension.

DIGITIZATION RATE
How often a digital sampling is taken of an analog signal. A higher sampling rate produces better quality reproduction
of a signal but also requires more disk space to store. Digitization rate for messages and prompts must be set up when
I&M
the Voice Mail system is first installed.

DIAL-BY-NAME DIRECTORY
?
A list of mailbox owners on a Voice Mail system that are accessed by callers by entering the first three digits of the
desired User's name. The option is available through any Audiotex/Voice Menu, or as a default at the Company level if
the caller presses asterisk (*).

DISTRIBUTION LIST
A list containing the mailbox numbers of a group of Voice Mail users. Distribution lists allow you to easily send the
same message to a group of people by addressing the message to the group's distribution list.

DOUBLE CYCLE
A complete signal sequence consisting of two ON periods (sound) and two OFF periods (silence). Both ON times are
usually the same amplitude.

DRIVER
Special software that enables application software (like Perfect Voice Office Pro) to tell computer hardware what to do.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

132

Appendix

DRIVE PATH
The name you use to specify a file's location on a disk. For example, the file pbxview.exe might be described by the
path C:\APPLICATIONS\PBXVIEW.EXE.

DTMF (DUAL TONE MULTI-FREQUENCY)
A tone (a combination of a low and a high frequency tones) generated by a telephone system. Each tone has a special
meaning to telephony equipment. A familiar example is the different tones made by a touch-tone telephone when
certain keys are pressed.

DTMF-ON TIME
The length of the DTMF tone.

E1
The European equivalent of the North American T1 digital transmission line.

FAST FORWARD
A control button in the Message Control Panel that advances the current message by five seconds. Also the button on
the telephone keypad that advances playing a message five seconds.

FAST FORWARD TO END
A control button in the Message Control Panel that advances to the end of the current message.

FIELD
An area on a screen where you enter information required by the application. Some fields must be completed, some
have a default value, and others are optional. See also Default.

FIRMWARE
A set of program instructions that is resident (usually in EPROM) on an expansion board.

FORWARD
The act of sending a copy of a received message to another Voice Mail User, possibly with your comments attached.
Forward is an option on the Messages menu and is a button on the toolbar in the Desktop Interface.

FROM COLUMN
The column in the Message List that shows who sent your Voice Mail messages. Messages left by Voice Mail owners
are identified by first and last name when the message is sent from inside the Voice Mail system. Messages left by
callers from outside the system are identified by their Caller ID, if applicable. The User can also edit fields to assign the
call to a particular name.

I&M
GREETING
A recorded message you create that is played for a caller to your mailbox when you are unavailable to take the call.

GROUP
?
See Class of Service.

HEADING BUTTONS
Buttons at the top of the Message List that control the appearance of the Message List columns. You can change the
position of a column by dragging its heading button to the left or right of adjacent buttons. You can also change the
width of a column by stretching or shrinking its heading button.

HEADINGS POP-UP MENU
The Headings pop-up menu appears when you right-click over a heading button. This menu controls which columns
appear in the Message List.

HIGHLIGHTING
The act of selecting text with the mouse or keyboard.

HOOKFLASH
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
133

A station to PBX signaling method, normally activated by quickly depressing the handset cradle plunger on a telephone.

INBAND SIGNALING
A method of integration between Voice Mail and the telephone system. Control signals are sent as DTMF tones on the
same line as the voice signals between Voice Mail and the telephone switch.

INBAND SIGNALING PACKETS
A group of DTMF tones that have a pre-determined meaning the telephony equipment. In Voice Mail applications,
inband signaling packets are generated and interpreted by both the telephone system and the voice mail software.

Because the meaning of tone groups can vary according to the telephone system being used, information specific to the
type of telephone system must be entered at the time of installation. This enables Voice Mail to correctly interpret the
tones it receives from the telephone system, and to generate tones that the telephone system can interpret. This enables
calls to be passed between the telephone and the Voice Mail, and the be processed correctly according to the meaning of
the specific telephone system's inband signaling packet tones.

INSIDE CALLER
A caller who is calling from inside your Voice Mail system.

INTERCONNECT COMPANY
A company that specializes in selling, installing, and maintaining telephone systems for businesses. Your customer's
interconnect can be a valuable source of information about the company's telephone system.

INTERDIGIT DELAY TIME
The time a caller can pause between pressing digits on the keypad when entering menu choices or a box number. If the
caller pauses longer than the Interdigit Delay Time, Voice Mail assumes that the caller is finished entering digits.

INTERFACE
The means by which a user communicates with a computer program or device. For example, a keyboard or mouse. For
example, the telephone keypad is a type of interface.

INTERRUPT
Enable a piece of hardware or a software process to momentarily "interrupt" the operation of the Cetral Processing Unit
(CPU) to use the resources of the CPU for its own purpose. When the interrupting task is completed, the CPU resumes
its regular processing.

IRQ
(Interrupt Request) A signal sent to the central processing unit (CPU) to temporarily suspend normal processing and
transfer control to an interrupt handling routine. Interrupts are generated by conditions such as completion of an I/O
process, detection of hardware failure, power failure, etc.
I&M

ISA
(Industry Standard Architecture) A common but older type of PC bus.
?

JUSTIFICATION
The way text is aligned within the margins on a page or column.

KBPS
Kilobits per second. Kbps is not the same as KBps (kilobytes per second).

LENGTH COLUMN
The Message List column that shows the length of each message in seconds.

LOG IN
The act of identifying yourself to a network. In Voice Mail, you log in by pressing the Auto Login button on the
telephone, which communicates your mailbox number and password to the Voice Mail server. This term also refers to
logging into the Voice Mail system through the main screen. You would click Log On from the File menu and enter the
password.
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

134

Appendix

LOG OUT
The act of denying access to other Users until a password is entered. In Voice Mail, you log out by selecting Log Off
from the File menu.

LOOP CURRENT
The current that flows through the circuit from the telephone system when the line is off hook.

LOOP DROP
The transition from loop current on to loop current off.

LOOP START
A method of notifying the CO of an off-hook condition using current flow, wither within a business or between the
business and outside lines.

MAILBOX
A box that plays an owner's greeting and then records and stores messages from callers. Each box can be customized
with different features for the individual user.

MAILBOX GREETING
A recorded message created by a voice mailbox owner played for callers when the box owner is unavailable to take the
call.

MAILBOX NAME
The recorded name associated with a voice mailbox. This name plays in certain situations to identify a mailbox to a
caller.

MAILBOX NUMBER
The unique number assigned to a mailbox that identifies the box the Voice Mail. This identifier allows messages to be
`addressed' to specific boxes. Mailbox numbers and extension numbers are usually (though not always) the same and
are often used interchangeably by voice mail users.

MAILBOX OWNER
A person who owns a voice mailbox on the Voice Mail software.

MAILBOX PARAMETERS
Values that control certain components of the Voice Mail system. Voice Mail offers many possible parameters and
combinations of parameters, making it possible to configure boxes to meet the needs of different box owners.

I&M
MCI
Message Centre Interface. A type of integration between the Voice Mail and the telephone system where packets are
sent to the Voice Mail via a serial link.

?
MENU
A list of program commands. You select menu items by pressing Alt plus the highlighted letter, or by clicking the item
with the mouse.

MENU BAR
The area at the top of the Voice Mail Main Screen that lists the File, Mailbox, View, Help, etc. menu options.

MESSAGE
A recording made using the telephone and stored in a voice mailbox. Messages are stored as files on the Voice Mail
server.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
135

MESSAGE PLAYBACK ORDER
The order in which recorded messages play back to the mailbox owner. The Voice Mail default is LIFO (Last In, First
Out), which means that the last message recorded will be the first one played. The Message Playback order can be
changed to FIFO (First In, First Out).

MESSAGE TYPE COLUMN
The column in the Message List that contains envelope icons, which indicate whether a message is new or played.

MINIMIZE
The act of reducing a Windows application window to an icon by clicking the minimize button located in the upper
right corner of the window.

MINIMUM RECORDING LENGTH
The shortest message that Voice Mail can recognize and record. Messages shorter than the Minimum Recording Length
are not recorded.

NETWORK
A group of computers connected together to allow communication and sharing of resources. Voice Mail runs on a
network. See more Network Glossary terms in the Network Section of the Installation Manual.

NEW MESSAGE
A message saved in an owner's mailbox, that has either not yet been played, or has been played but not saved or
deleted.

NOTIFICATION
A method whereby Voice Mail notifies an owner that a message is waiting. Notification can be by standard or cellular
telephone, by pager, or by e-mail.

OCR
Optical Character Recognition. OCR can "read" a fax, converting its graphic image into usable text.

OEM
(Original Equipment Manufacturer) The marker of equipment marketed by another vendor.

OFF HOOK
When a telephone handset is lifted from its cradle (or equivalent condition), the telephone line state is said to be "off
hook".

OFF PERIOD
Silence.
I&M

ON HOOK
When a telephone handset is returned to its cradle (or equivalent condition), the telephone line state is said to be "on
?
hook". A line is on hook when the line circuit is open and no current is flowing.

OPEN NETWORK
An Open Network (or Open Access Network) is a group of two or more sites that use AMIS-compatible voice
messaging equipment, and who exchange voice mail messages with each other. Voice Mail can be used at an Open
Access Site, but other options exist. Compare Closed Network. See also AMIS.

OPEN NETWORK SITE
Identifies a network site as not having a Voice Mail voice processing system.

OUT-OF-BAND SIGNALING
When integration between a Voice Mail server and a telephone system is accomplished using out-of-band signaling, call
progress information is passed between the telephone system and the server using a line separate from the lines used for
voice transmission. This is typically an RS-232 connection, and all signaling information is digital, rather than using
DTMF tones.
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

136

Appendix

OWNER
An individual to whom a mailbox is assigned. Mailbox owners can access their voice mailboxes from inside or outside
the Voice Mail system to use voice messaging features. See also User.

PASSWORD
Allows mailbox owners private access to their mailboxes. The default for every mailbox is 1111. The password
provides security for the mailbox owner's messages. Also allows access to the system administration or the installation
and integration portions of Voice Mail. Passwords can contain any keypad digits, including 0-9, * and #.

PAUSE
The pause character is a comma, and can be entered as part of the dialing number in certain Voice Mail screens. The
system administrator sets the value of the pause character.

PBX
See Telephone System.

PC
In this manual, the term refers to IBM personal computer or compatible machine.

PERFECT VOICE OFFICE PRO
A voice processing system that runs on a Microsoft Windows platform. Voice Mail can also be accessed through your
telephone keypad, without using Voice Mail.

PERIPHERAL
Any equipment, apart from the central processing unit, that provides a system with outside communication or additional
facilities.

PLAY
The command that opens the Message Control Panel where you play your messages. The Play command is executed
from the Messages menu, or by clicking the Play button in the toolbar.

PHANTOM MAILBOX
A mailbox with no physical extension. Phantom mailboxes must be in a separate Class of Service with no Message
Light Capability with Do Not Disturb always active. Phantom Mailboxes are used to as a link to a Voice Menu, as an
information mailbox, etc.

PORT
The interface point between voice mail and the telephone system. Within Voice Mail, a port is generally equal to a
single telephone line.
I&M

POTS
Plain Old Telephone Service.
?

POUND SIGN
One term for the "#" symbol on the telephone keypad. Also known as the hashmark or the octothorp.

PRIVATE
A message marked Private cannot be forwarded, rerouted, or archived by the message recipient.

PROMPT
Recorded instructions delivered by Voice Mail over the telephone to mailbox owners and callers. Prompts may include
information played each time you enter the system or instructions to box owners or callers on how to use the system.

PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network.

Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
137

QUESTION AND ANSWER (Q&A) BOX
A mailbox that is used to record answers to prerecorded questions.

RAM
Random Access Memory is temporary memory in a computer. This memory can be overwritten with new information.
The contents of RAM memory are lost when the electrical power to the PC is switched off.

RDSPTEST
A Rhetorex DOS utility that tests Rhetorex (RDSP) voice board configuration.

RECORD
A command that opens the Message Control Panel where you record your messages. The Record command is executed
from the Messages menu, or by clicking the Record button in the toolbar. Record is also a control button in the
Message Control Panel.

REFRESH
A menu command used to refresh the Message List with the latest information from the Voice Mail server. This
command is usually unnecessary because most events are updated in the Message List immediately.

REMOTE PHONE
A telephone located off-site from the Voice Mail installation. For example, if you call to check for messages from your
home or a cellular phone, you are using a remote phone.

REPLY
A message sent in answer to a received message. Voice Mail provides a Reply command , executed from the Messages
Menu through the handset or the Reply button on the toolbar, that automates the addressing of your reply if it was
internal.

REWIND
A control button in the Message Control Panel that resets the message to the beginning.

REWIND TO START
A control button in the Message Control Panel that resets the message to the beginning.

RINGBACK
The ring a caller hears when the telephone at the other end of the line is ringing.

ROTARY TELEPHONE
A style of telephone set that predates the touch-tone design. A rotary telephone has a round, rotating dial mechanism
I&M
rather than a keypad number entry system. Rotary telephones send different signals than touch-tone telephones.

SAMPLING RATE
How often a continuous analog voice signal is sampled or digitized into a binary value. The higher the sampling rate,
?
the higher the quality of the recording and the greater the disk space required for each second of signal.

SAVE
In Voice Mail, marking a message as played, but not deleted. The Save command is executed from the Messages menu
through the handset, or by clicking the Save button in the toolbar.

SAVED MESSAGE
A message that a mailbox owner saves after playing.

SELECTING
The act of using a mouse to designate something on a computer screen as being ready to receive some function or
action. Selected text is usually outlined in some block of color.

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

138

Appendix

SEQUENTIAL DIRECTORY
A list of mailbox users on a voice mail system that callers can access to locate a particular mailbox number. The list
includes individuals and is accessible from the Auto Attendant or can be offered within a Voice Menu.

SERVER
The computer in charge of running a network. The server on which voice mail runs is called the Voice Mail server. It
is recommended that the Voice Mail server be dedicated exclusively to running voice mail.

SHOWJUMP
A Rhetorex DOS utility that displays the jumper settings for a Rhetorex board at a given I/O port. This utility is
shipped with Voice Mail.

SINGLE-LINE
An analog telephone line. This is the common residential-type phone line. A "regular" touch-tone phone, also known
as a 2500 set, uses a single-line extension. Voice Mail must be connected to the telephone system through single lines.

SLIDE BAR
A slide control in the Message Control Panel that you can drag to control the message position. Dragging the slide
handle to the right advances the message position; dragging the slide handle to the left reverses the message position.

SMDI
Simplified Message Desk Interface. A type of integration between the Voice Mail and the telephone system where
packets are sent to the Voice Mail via a serial link.

SPIKE
A temporary signal or noise. If a signal duration is less that the PCPM table's filter spike parameter, then the signal is
not recognized as valid; in other words, the signal is considered a spike.

STOP
A control button in the Message Control Panel that stops message playback.

SUPERVISOR MENU
See System Administrator's Menu.

SWITCH
See Telephone System.

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR
The person who is responsible for configuring and maintaining the Voice Mail system.

I&M
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S MENU
Also referred to as Supervisor Menu. A password-menu that allows the system administrator access to all Voice Mail
screens except parameters.
?

T1
A digital transmission link with 1.544MBps capacity, carrying 24 voice channels. The Voice Mail T1 interface
supports Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) to identify the called number and Automatic Number
Identification (ANI) to identify the calling number also known as Caller ID.

TALK OFF
The false tripping of DTMF receivers caused by human speech mimicking DTMF tones.

TASKBAR
Windows 95/98/NT's primary button bar, which contains the Start button.

TELEPHONE SYSTEM
The collection of hardware and software that allows voice communication within a business and between the business
and the outside world. Sometimes known as switch, Centrex, or PBX.
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

Appendix
139

TEMPLATE MAILBOX
A mailbox that serves as a master from which other (usually multiple) mailboxes are copied. A template mailbox is
useful when several mailbox owners need identical or similar parameters. Setting these parameters in one mailbox and
copying them for the individual owners' boxes eliminates repetitive programming.

TERMINATION TONE
A call progression tone that indicates that a connection has been terminated.

TITLE BAR
The title bar appears at the top of a Window and contains the name of the window or application running in that
window.

TOOLBAR
The row of icon buttons along the top of the Voice Mail Main Screen.

TOUCH-TONE PHONE
A type of telephone that uses a push-button keypad to generate different sounds for each number pushed. The sounds
are DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) codes.

TRUNK
A connection between the Central Office and a business' telephone system.

USER
An individual to whom a mailbox is assigned. Mailbox users can access their voice mailboxes from inside or outside
the Voice Mail system to use voice messaging features. See also Owner.

VOICE BOARD
A hardware card that process voice signals. The system requires Rhetorex or Intel voice boards to operate.

VOICE MAIL
A system of computer hardware and special-purpose software that interfaces with a company's phone system to provide
phone message record, store, and forward capability. Voice mail is also referred to as voice messaging.

VOICE MAILBOX
See Mailbox.

VOICE MESSAGING
See Voice Mail.

I&M
WAV
A type of sound file format common in Windows sound applications.

?
WINDOW
A boxed area on a computer screen that displays text or graphical images.

WINK
A timed momentary off-hook pulse communications protocol.
Perfect Voice Office Pro

Release 4.5

140

Appendix

. . . This page left intentionally blank . . .

I&M
?
Release 4.5

Perfect Voice Office Pro

I&M
?

I&M
?
430 Woodruff Road, Suite 300
Release 4.5
Greenville, SC USA 29607
Revision 1.5
1.864.297.4400
July, 2003
teleco.com

Document Outline